You are on page 1of 1581

2013-05-2020

UOP Technical Requisition Fabrication

Page 1 of 3 970086 R060-2

1.

General/Administrative/Safety Requirements
Modules and related goods and services shall be provided in accordance with the following documents: 1. 970086 S011P-0, SpecificationExecution Plan and Reporting 2. 970086 S060-0, SpecificationModule Fabrication 3. 970086 S072-0, SpecificationReporting Shipping Damage, Shortage, and Loss 4. 970086 S140A-0, SpecificationLanguage and Units 5. 970086 S140C-0, SpecificationDocuments for Custom-Designed Goods and Services 6. 970086 S140V-0, SpecificationDocumentation Submittal 7. 970086 S140-SDI, SpecificationSupplier Document Index a. General b. Piping c. Civil/Structural

d. Instrumentation e. Electrical f. Equipment

8. Pemex Minatitlan Refinery Site Information a. Entrance and Routing within the Refinery 9. Pemex Requirements a. Applicable Standards and Codes b. Minimal Indivisible Units Requirement c. Provisions for Safety, Health and Environmental Protection

d. Country of Origin Requirements

2.

Fabrication/Installation
Fabrication/Installation shall be provided in accordance with the following documents: 1. 970086 R601F-1, RequisitionInstrument Installation 2. 970086 R701F-1, RequisitionElectrical Installation 3. 970086 R801F-1, RequisitionPiping Fabrication, Assembly, Erection, and Examination 4. 970086 R901F-0, RequisitionStructural-Steel and Concrete Construction 5. 970086 R905F-0, RequisitionPainting

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-05-2020

UOP Technical Requisition Fabrication

Page 2 of 3 970086 R060-2

6. 970086 R907F-0, RequisitionInsulation Supply and Installation 7. 970086 S999C-0, SpecificationCross-Discipline Clearance and Accessibility 8. 970086 Inspection Requirements a. 970086 S150-A, SpecificationExamination, Testing, and Inspection Planning b. 970086 U060F-AFabrication Inspection Data Sheet c. 970086 U601F-AInstrumentation Inspection Data Sheet

d. 970086 U701F-AElectrical Inspection Data Sheet e. 970086 U801F-APiping Inspection Data Sheet f. 970086 U901F-AStructural Steel Inspection Data Sheet

g. 970086 U901FC-A Foundation Inspection Data Sheet h. 970086 U907F-AInsulation Inspection Data Sheet 9. 970086 V060-0, Documentation Data Sheet Fabrication 10. 970086 Material Take-Offs a. Mechanical Equipment List b. Equipment Outline Drawings Later c. Piping Line List

d. Piping Tie-In List e. Piping Bill of Materials f. Piping Specifications

g. Piping Specialty Items Later h. Valve Specifications i. j. k. l. Pipe Support Bill of Material Steam Tracing Bill of Material Later Civil and Structural Steel Bills of Material Equipment Insulation Summary Later

m. Instrument Bill of Material n. Electrical Bill of Material Updated 05/20/13 11. 970086 Drawings a. Mechanical Flow Diagrams b. General Arrangement Drawings c. Instrument Engineering Design Drawings

d. Electrical Engineering Design Drawings


Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-05-2020

UOP Technical Requisition Fabrication e. Heat Tracing Engineering Design Drawings Later f. Piping Engineering Design Drawings 1. Piping Plans 2. Piping Isometrics 3. Pipe Supports 4. Spring Supports 5. Expansion Joints Later g. Civil Engineering Design Drawings h. Structural Engineering Design Drawings

Page 3 of 3 970086 R060-2

3.

Demolition and Modification


Demolition and Modification shall be provided in accordance with the following documents: 1. 970086 Demolition Drawings a. Demolition Index b. Demolition Mechanical Flow Diagrams c. Demolition Drawings

2. 970086 Equipment Demolition and Modification Scopes Later

4.

Customer Specifications (Attached Separately)


All goods and services shall comply with the following documents: 1. List of Project Pemex Specifications 2. Pemex Specifications

5.

Conflicts
In case of conflicts among the documents in this Requisition, the document order of precedence shall be as follows (from highest to lowest): 1. Bills of Material 2. UOP Specifications and Data Sheets 3. Engineering Design Drawings 4. Pemex Specifications

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

PEMEX REFINACION INVITATION TO BID GRAL. LAZARO CARDENAS REFINERY

SECTION 1 GENERAL/ADMINISTRATIVE/SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

2013-01-18

UOPSpecification Execution Plan and Reporting

Page 1 of 2 970086 S011P-0

1.

Scope
This document defines technical requirements for project execution plan and reporting.

2.

Execution plan
1. Project execution plan shall include the following: a. b. c. d. 2. Objectives Schedule Organization for project Names of lead project personnel

Approval of execution plan shall be obtained from UOP prior to start of work.

3.

Schedule
1. Schedule shall include the following: a. b. c. d. e. 2. Work breakdown structure Start date and duration of each task Total duration of work Agreed upon dates for UOP-supplied data, approvals, and equipment Critical path method (CPM) dependencies

Fabrication/Installation schedule shall include subdivisions for the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. Foundation Demolition Structural steel Piping Instrumentation Electrical Insulation Procurement Equipment installation Pressure testing Site Pre-Shutdown Activities Shutdown Activities

3.

Approved baseline schedule shall be frozen prior to the start of work.

4.

Progress report
1. 2. Progress reports shall be provided monthly. Progress report shall include the following: a. Schedule with the following for each subdivision and total project:

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-01-18

UOPSpecification Execution Plan and Reporting 1. 2. 3. 4. b. c. d. e. f. g. Comparison against baseline Actual start Actual finish Percentage of work completed

Page 2 of 2 970086 S011P-0

Status of major milestones for period Procurement status reports Problem and issue areas with brief analysis Recovery plan, with cost impact, if project falls behind schedule Information needed from UOP Change order status

5.

Progress photos
1. 2. Photos of progress on fabrication and installation shall be provided weekly. Progress photos shall include the following: a. b. 3. 4. 5. 6. Overall shots from each corner of the unit Close-up shots of tagged equipment and instruments as they are installed and piped up

File format shall be JPG. Image density shall be less than or equal to 200 DPI. There shall be one image per file. Photos shall be transmitted to via e-mail.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-01-29

UOP Specification Fabrication and Installation

Page 1 of 4 970086 S060-0

1.

Scope
This document defines technical requirements for fabrication and installation of the revamp components.

2.

Definitions
1. 2. 3. 4. Contractor Fabricator and installation contractor executing scope of work Customer PEMEX Refinacion Site Gral. Lazaro Cardenas Refinery Minatitlan, Veracruz, Mexico Project PEMEX Minatitlan CCR Revamp

3.

Customer Requirements
1. Contractor shall follow all applicable specifications within this requisition including all applicable Customer standards and codes referenced in section 1.9.a of 970086 R060 Contractor shall provide Minimal Indivisible Units information per section 1.9.b of 970086 R060 for the entire scope of work. Contactor shall provide Country of Origin information for procured material and equipment per section 1.9.d of 970086 R060

2. 3.

4.

Labor/Qualifications
1. 2. Contractor shall provide all labor to manage and execute the project scope of work Contractor shall have an ASME R Stamp for performing alterations and repairs to existing pressure vessels within the scope of work. ASME R Stamp shall be valid for both shop and field work and Contractor shall be able to supply ASME R-1, R-2 or R-3 forms as applicable.

5.

Safety
1. 2. UOP will have a dedicated on-site Safety Supervisor to coordinate and direct the Contractors safety personnel. Contractor shall have an established safety program that meets or exceeds requirements defined within the PEMEX Provisions for Safety, Health and Environmental Protection. Contractor shall supply their labor force with the required safety gear and equipment to complete the scope of work. The following site safety personnel are required: a. b. c. Safety Supervisor Confined Space Entry Monitor Hot Work Monitor

3. 4.

6.

Schedule
1. Contractors activities shall comply with the overall Project Schedule in section 1.7 of 970086 R060

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-01-29

UOP Specification Fabrication and Installation

Page 2 of 4 970086 S060-0

7.

Site Execution
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. UOP will have a staff of on-site personnel that will include a Construction Manager, Contracts Manager, Administrative Assistant and Safety Supervisor. Contractor will interface with UOP to define scopes of work and execution. UOP is responsible for interfacing with Customer regarding any discrepancies. Contractor will be required to obtain all refinery personnel and vehicle entry permits for their labor force. Contractor will be required to apply and obtain all daily working permits from the Customer. Supply all temporary off-site and on-site offices and work facilities, including all equipment and materials, to execute the project scope of work. New structure and components within will be installed while the existing unit is operating. Modifications to the existing unit will be performed during a planned Turnaround outage in November of 2013. Refer to Section 1.7 of 970086 R060 Space within the refinery will be provided for lay down, work facilities and storage as indicated in 1.8. Contractor shall include any additional off-site space that will be required to execute the work. a. The Project has requested 12,000 m2 (80m x 150m) on-site to be used as work space and storage facilities. Refer to section 1.8.a

8.

Procurement
Goods and services shall be provided by Contractor except as follows: 1. The following items shall be obtained from UOP: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. Tagged Equipment - as indicated on the Mechanical Flow Diagrams Tagged Piping Specialty Items as indicated on the Mechanical Flow Diagrams Tagged Instruments as indicated on the Mechanical Flow Diagrams Regeneration Tower (FA-510) inner screen, baffles, nozzles, outlet pipe and multi-point thermocouples Surge Hopper (FA-515) inlet flow dampener and panel coils Dur-o-lok Couplings Power Control Panels Engineered pipe supports

9.

Component receiving and storage


1. 2. 3. 4. Contractor shall have local facilities to receive and store equipment and materials. Components shall be received, inspected for damage and quantity, logged in, and stored. Inconel, Hastalloy, and stainless steel material shall be segregated from each other and carbon steel and galvanized material. Storage of component shall comply with component suppliers instructions.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-01-29

UOP Specification Fabrication and Installation

Page 3 of 4 970086 S060-0

10.

Fabrication, Modification and Installation 10.1. Fabrication/Installation plan


1. Fabrication/Installation plan shall include the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. 2. Sequence of assembly Component receiving, storage, and protection plan Protective coating plan Fabrication access plan Equipment-insertion plan Lifting plans Transportation plan Demolition plan Modification plan

Approval of plan shall be obtained from UOP prior to fabrication/installation.

10.2. Isolation of Inconel, Hastalloy, and Stainless Steel


Inconel, Hastalloy, and stainless steel shall be isolated from cutting, grinding, and welding of galvanized material that is above or within 10 ft (3 m) of these materials.

10.3. Protective coating


1. 2. 3. Protective coatings that are damaged during fabrication shall be repaired. Painting shall be completed prior to bolted connections being assembled. Approval for welding after painting shall be obtained from UOP.

10.4. Equipment installation


1. 2. 3. 4. Carbon-steel slings shall not touch stainless-steel equipment. Equipment shall be installed per equipment-suppliers instructions. Equipment and related spare parts shall be protected from entry of dirt and moisture and maintained per equipment suppliers instructions. Equipment supported from steel at grade shall have the lower nuts tack welded to the supporting beam flange.

11.

As-built documents
1. 2. 3. Changes made to engineering design shall be marked in red pen on a copy of engineering design documents. Changes shall show as-built condition. As-built documents shall be: a. b. Maintained by Contractor and available to visiting UOP personnel Provided to UOP at end of construction.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-01-29

UOP Specification Fabrication and Installation

Page 4 of 4 970086 S060-0

12.

Spare parts
1. The following spare parts shall be provided: a. b. One set of permanent gaskets plus 10% for every size and class purchased for the project. 10% of piping and miscellaneous bolts, nuts, and washers to be utilized for field installation.

13.

References
The most recent edition, except as otherwise specified, of the following documents are cited in this document. None

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-01-18

UOP Specification Reporting Shipping Damage, Shortage, and Loss

Page 1 of 1 970086 S072-0

1.

Scope
This document defines requirements for reporting shipping damage, shortage, and loss.

2.

Receiving
1. 2. Shipments shall be inspected for visible damage and shortage upon arrival. Shipping damage and shortage shall be: a. b. c. d. 3. Noted on carriers document before signing. Photographed Set aside for further inspection Reported

If shipping damage is on packaging, only, cargo may be moved to inventory.

3.

Reporting
1. 2. Shipping damage and shortage to cargo shall be reported to UOPs assigned Modular buyer and resident engineer by telephone and fax within one business day of receipt. Report shall contain the following as a minimum: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. Material receipt number Date received Shipping company name Packing List Bill of lading Supplier name Item tag number(s) Description of damage or incorrect quantity Estimated value of the loss Location of damaged goods Container and seal number where applicable. Any other applicable information

4.

Other
1. 2. 3. Breaking of seal(s) on damaged container(s) shall be witnessed by UOP representative. Damaged goods shall be stored until released by UOP representative. A recommendation for disposition (repair, destruction, or return) of damaged goods shall be made after UOP inspection.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2012-10-08

UOP Specification Language, Units, and Documents

Page 1 of 3 970086 S140A-0

1.

Scope
This document defines technical requirements for language, units, and documents.

2.

Language
1. 2. Writing shall be in English language for technical documents. Writing shall be in Spanish language for nameplates.

3.

Units
1. 2. Values of physical quantities shall be expressed in MKS units. MKS units shall be defined as follows: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. Temperature Pressure (gauge) Pressure (absolute) Mass Volume Length Alternate Length Liquid Relative Density C kg/cm(g) kg/cm(a) kg m m mm sp gr TC/15C

Liquid Absolute Density kg/m at 15C Vapor Flowing Density Flowing Quantities 1. 2. 3. Mass Vapor Liquid kg/h m/h m/h kg/m

l.

Standard Quantities 1. 2. Vapor Liquid normal m/h at 0C and 1.033 kg/cm(a) std m/h at 15C kcal/kg mm kcal/h kW cP

m. Enthalpy n. o. p. Heat Rate Electrical Power Viscosity

4.

Document identification
Document shall contain the following identification: 1. 2. 3. Supplier or original-equipment-manufacturer name Supplier or original-equipment-manufacturer document designator Revision designator and date

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2012-10-08

UOP Specification Language, Units, and Documents 4. 5. Title Item tag number

Page 2 of 3 970086 S140A-0

5.

Transmittal letter
1. 2. Transmittal letter shall be provided with document or documents. Transmittal letter shall contain the following information: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. 3. 4. Supplier name UOP purchase order number UOP Technical Requisition designator Supplier reference number Date of submittal Street address of location to which comments and approval should be returned Name and phone number of contact who can confirm receipt of comments and approval

Submitted document shall be listed in transmittal letter. For each document listed in the transmittal letter, the following shall be shown: a. b. c. d. e. Supplier or original-equipment-manufacturer document designator Revision designator and date Title Number of copies submitted Reason for submittal, which shall be one or the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. For bid For approval Final As-built

6.

Reduced copies
1. 2. If C or D-size document is provided, a copy reduced to A or B size shall be provided. If A1 or A2-size document is provided, a copy reduced to A3 or A4 size shall be provided.

7.

Certification of final documentation


1. Final document shall be both of the following: a. b. 2. Marked Certified for Construction Signed by a person authorized to bind supplier

Document shall not be certified for construction unless either of the following is true: a. It has been approved without comment.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2012-10-08

UOP Specification Language, Units, and Documents b.

Page 3 of 3 970086 S140A-0

If approved with comment, comments have been incorporated without modification.

8.

References
The most recent edition, except as otherwise specified, of the following documents are cited in this document. None

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2012-10-08

UOP Specification Documents for Custom-Designed Goods and Services

Page 1 of 1 970086 S140C-0

1.

Scope
This document defines technical requirements for documents.

2.

Revisions
1. If information on drawing changes, the following shall apply: a. b. 2. 3. Change shall be clouded. A triangle, with the revision number or letter inside, shall abut cloud.

If information on data sheet changes, an indication of which lines changed shall be provided. If information not on data sheet or drawing changes, a markup showing changes shall be provided. a. b. Addition shall be underlined. Deletion shall be struck through.

3.

Native File Submittal


1. Final submittal shall include the native file, if available.

4.

Order-specific document
Document created specifically for the order shall comply with this section.

4.1. 4.2.

Inapplicable information
Inapplicable information shall be excluded or crossed out.

Document size
Document size shall be ANSI Y14.1 flat size A, B, C, or D.

5.

References
The most recent edition, except as otherwise specified, of the following documents are cited in this document. American National Standard ANSI Y14.1, Decimal Inch Drawing Sheet Size and Format

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2012-10-08

UOP Specification Electronic Documentation Submittal

Page 1 of 1 970086 S140V-0

1.

Scope
This document defines technical requirements for submittal of documents in electronic form for proposals and review.

2.

Requirements
1. 2. Final documentation shall be submitted in both hard copy and electronic format. Electronic documentation shall be in both of the following formats: a. b. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Adobe PDF file or TIFF file Native format documents, when available.

Electronic files shall be converted directly into PDF or TIFF from the native file rather than scanned. For multi-page documents, a single file containing all pages shall be provided. Background color shall be white. Text color, line work and diagram shall be black unless color differentiation clarifies the document. File size should be kept to a minimum and shall not exceed 9 megabytes. The file name shall be the same as the paper document designator. File name shall include revision designator.

3.

Transmittal letter
1. Transmittal letter shall be provided with each document submittal.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

PEMEX REFINACION INVITATION TO BID GRAL. LAZARO CARDENAS REFINERY

SECTION 1.7 Supplier Document Index

General Piping Civil/Structural Instrumentaiton Electrical Equipment

SUPPLIER DOCUMENT INDEX


( MFD, Plot Plan and GA )
PROJECT : PEMEX Minatitlan 750pph Atmospheric CCR Revamp UOP PROJECT NO. : 970086 CLIENT NO. UOP DRAWING NO. REV SHTS SIZE DRAWING NO.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 12264-01-F20-220116-001 1 LOT A4 HYDRAULIC CALCULATION TO BE ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 970086-D101 970086-D102 970086-D103 970086-D104 970086-D105 970086-D106 970086-D107 970086-D108 970086-D109 970086-D110 970086-D111 970086-D112 970086-D113 970086-D-114 970086-D-115 970086-D-116 30611-1-DEMO 30611-2-DEMO 30613-1-DEMO 30613-2-DEMO 30613-3-DEMO 30613-4-DEMO 30614-X-DEMO 30615-1-DEMO 30615-2-DEMO 970086-D131 970086-D132 970086-D-133 970086-D134 970086-D135 970086-D136 970086-D137 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1

DESCRIPTION
MFD LEGEND AND GENERAL NOTES (1 OF 3) MFD LEGEND AND GENERAL NOTES (2 OF 3) MFD LEGEND AND GENERAL NOTES (3 OF 3) MFD RECYCLE GAS COALESCER MFD LIFT ENGAGER NO.1, LOCK HOPPER NO.1 AND CATALYST COLLECTOR MFD ORGANIC CHLORIDE INJECTION PUMPS, CHLORINATION BLOWER AND CHLORINATIONHEATER MFD REGENERATION TOWER, AIR HEATER AND REGENERATION HEATER MFD DISENGAGING HOPPER, REGENERATION BLOWER AND REGENERATION COOLER MFD VENT GAS COOLER AND PREHEAT GAS HEATER MFD SURGE HOPPER, LIFT ENGAGER NO. 2 AND LOCK HOPPER NO. 2 MFD DUST COLLECTOR, LIFT GAS BLOWER AND LIFT GAS BLOWER SPILLBACK COOLER MFD BOOSTER GAS COALESCER MFD UTILITY HEADERS AND CCR NITROGEN HEADER MFD AIR DRYER AND DUST COLLECTOR DETAIL MFD OIL MIST AND LIFT GAS BLOWER DETAIL MFD INSTRUMENT AIR DETAILS DEMO MFD'S DEMO MFD'S DEMO MFD'S DEMO MFD'S DEMO MFD'S DEMO MFD'S DEMO MFD'S DEMO MFD'S DEMO MFD'S GENERAL ARRANGEMENT GENERAL ARRANGEMENT GENERAL ARRANGEMENT GENERAL ARRANGEMENT GENERAL ARRANGEMENT GENERAL ARRANGEMENT GENERAL ARRANGEMENT

Rev. 0 15-May-13 REMARK

TO BE ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION

Page 1 of 1

SUPPLIER DOCUMENT INDEX


( Piping )
PROJECT : PEMEX Minatitlan 750pph Atmospheric CCR Revamp UOP PROJECT NO. : 970086 CLIENT NO. UOP DRAWING NO. REV SHTS DRAWING NO.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52
12264-01 PIPE SUPPORT 12264-01-F70-20051-001 DEMO-PKG#01 DEMO-PKG#02 DEMO-PKG#03 DEMO-PKG#04 DEMO-PKG#05 DEMO-PKG#06 DEMO-PKG#07 DEMO-PKG#08 DEMO-PKG#09 DEMO-PKG#11 DEMO-PKG#12 DEMO-PKG#13 DEMO-PKG#14 DEMO-PKG#15 DEMO-PKG#16 DEMO-PKG#17 DEMO-PKG#18 DEMO-PKG#19 DEMO-PKG#20 DEMO-PKG#21 DEMO-PKG#23 DEMO-PKG#24 DEMO-PKG#25 DEMO-PKG#26 DEMO-PKG#27 DEMO-PKG#28 DEMO-PKG#30 DEMO-PKG#31 DEMO-PKG#33 DEMO-PKG#35 DEMO-PKG#36 DEMO-PKG#38 DEMO-PKG#39 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT 1LOT A4 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 STANDARD PIPE SUPPORTS PIPING DEMOLITION INDEX DEMO PACKAGE #01 DEMO PACKAGE #02 DEMO PACKAGE #03 DEMO PACKAGE #04 DEMO PACKAGE #05 DEMO PACKAGE #06 DEMO PACKAGE #07 DEMO PACKAGE #08 DEMO PACKAGE #09 DEMO PACKAGE #11 DEMO PACKAGE #12 DEMO PACKAGE #13 DEMO PACKAGE #14 DEMO PACKAGE #15 DEMO PACKAGE #16 DEMO PACKAGE #17 DEMO PACKAGE #18 DEMO PACKAGE #19 DEMO PACKAGE #20 DEMO PACKAGE #21 DEMO PACKAGE #23 DEMO PACKAGE #24 DEMO PACKAGE #25 DEMO PACKAGE #26 DEMO PACKAGE #27 DEMO PACKAGE #28 DEMO PACKAGE #30 DEMO PACKAGE #31 DEMO PACKAGE #33 DEMO PACKAGE #35 DEMO PACKAGE #36 DEMO PACKAGE #38 DEMO PACKAGE #39 12264-01-F70-270414-001 970086-D802 970086-D139 970086-D140 970086-D141 970086-D142 970086-D143 970086-D144 970086-D145 970086-D146 970086-D147 970086-D148 970086-D149 970086-D150 970086-D151 970086-D152 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Rev. 0 15-May-13 SIZE


A1 A3 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 Piping Tie-In List PIPING LINE INDEX PIPING PLAN PIPING PLAN PIPING PLAN PIPING PLAN PIPING PLAN PIPING PLAN PIPING PLAN PIPING PLAN PIPING PLAN PIPING PLAN PIPING PLAN PIPING PLAN PIPING PLAN PIPING PLAN

DESCRIPTION

REMARK

Page 1 of 8

SUPPLIER DOCUMENT INDEX


( Piping )
PROJECT : PEMEX Minatitlan 750pph Atmospheric CCR Revamp UOP PROJECT NO. : 970086 CLIENT UOP DRAWING NO. REV SHTS NO. DRAWING NO.
53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
AE-L105R(A)-MS-1_SHT_1 AE-L105R(B)-MS-1_SHT_1 AE-L105R(C)-MS-1_SHT_1 AE-L105R-MS-1_SHT_1 AE-L107R-MS-1_SHT_1 AI-L101N-MS-2_SHT_1 AI-L101N-MS-2_SHT_2 AI-L101N-MS-2_SHT_3 AI-L101N-MS-2_SHT_4 AI-L101N-MS-2_SHT_5 AI-L101N-MS-2_SHT_6 AI-L101N-MS-2_SHT_7 AI-L101N-MS-2_SHT_8 AI-L103-PR-8_SHT_1 AP-L264N-MS-2_SHT_1 AP-L601R-PR-8_SHT_1 AP-L601R-PR-8_SHT_2 AP-L601R-PR-8_SHT_3 AP-L602R-PR-24_SHT_1 AR-L105R-MS-1_SHT_1 CL-L502R-M1A1_SHT_1 CL-L504R-M1A1_SHT_1 CL-L513R-M1A1_SHT_1 CL-L513R-M1A1_SHT_2 CL-L515R-M1A1_SHT_1 CL-L515R-M1A1_SHT_2 CL-L516R-M1A1_SHT_1 CL-L517R-M1A1_SHT_1 CM-L278N-MS-11_SHT_1 DAA-L270N-MS-1_SHT_1 DAA-L270N-MS-1_SHT_2 DAA-L273N-MS-11_SHT_1 DAA-L273N-MS-11_SHT_2 DAA-L273N-MS-11_SHT_3 DAA-L273N-MS-11_SHT_4 DAA-L273N-MS-11_SHT_5 DAA-L273N-MS-11_SHT_6 DA-L401R-PR-8_SHT_1 DA-L402R-PR-8_SHT_1 DA-L701R-PR-8_SHT_1 DA-L703R-PR-8_SHT_1 DA-L801R-PR-8_SHT_1 GI-L115R-PR-8_SHT_1 GI-L115R-PR-8_SHT_2 GI-L115R-PR-8_SHT_3 GI-L116R-PR-8_SHT_1 GI-L118N-PR-8_SHT_1 GI-L118N-PR-8_SHT_2 GI-L118N-PR-8_SHT_3 GI-L128R-PR-8_SHT_1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC

Rev. 0 15-May-13 SIZE DESCRIPTION REMARK

Page 2 of 8

SUPPLIER DOCUMENT INDEX


( Piping )
PROJECT : PEMEX Minatitlan 750pph Atmospheric CCR Revamp UOP PROJECT NO. : 970086 CLIENT UOP DRAWING NO. REV SHTS NO. DRAWING NO.
104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154
GI-L254N-PR-8_SHT_1 GI-L257N-PR-5_SHT_1 GI-L258N-PR-5_SHT_1 GI-L274N-PR-8_SHT_1 GI-L275N-PR-8_SHT_1 GI-L275N-PR-8_SHT_2 GI-L275N-PR-8_SHT_3 GI-L275N-PR-8_SHT_4 GI-L279N-PR-8_SHT_1 GI-L280N-PR-8_SHT_1 RE-L251N-B2A2_SHT_1 RE-L252N-B2A2_SHT_1 RE-L252N-B2A2_SHT_2 RE-L253N-PR-8_SHT_1 RE-L253N-PR-8_SHT_2 RE-L253N-PR-8_SHT_3 RE-L267N-PR-8_SHT_1 RE-L267N-PR-8_SHT_2 RE-L267N-PR-8_SHT_3 RE-L267N-PR-8_SHT_4 RE-L268N-PR-8_SHT_1 RE-L268N-PR-8_SHT_2 RE-L268N-PR-8_SHT_3 RE-L271N-B2A1_SHT_1 RE-L403-PR-1_SHT_1 RE-L403-PR-15_SHT_1 RE-L406-PR-2_SHT_1 RE-L409-PR-23_SHT_1 RE-L409R-PR-21_SHT_1 RE-L410-PR-23_SHT_1 RE-L411-PR-23_SHT_1 RE-L412-PR-23_SHT_1 RE-L425-PR-23_SHT_1 RE-L425R-PR-10_SHT_1 RE-L425R-PR-23_SHT_1 RE-L460-PR-23_SHT_1 RE-L502-PR-5_SHT_1 RE-L506R-PR-8_SHT_1 RE-L509R-PR-8_SHT_1 RE-L510R-PR-8_SHT_1 RE-L512R-PR-36_SHT_1 RE-L513R-PR-36_SHT_1 RE-L513R-PR-36_SHT_2 RE-L514R-PR-36_SHT_1 RE-L515R-PR-36_SHT_1 RE-L516R-PR-36_SHT_1 RE-L517R-PR-36_SHT_1 RE-L601R-PR-5_SHT_1 RE-L603R-PR-5_SHT_1 RE-L603R-PR-5_SHT_2 RE-L603R-PR-5_SHT_3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Rev. 0 15-May-13 SIZE


A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC

DESCRIPTION

REMARK

Page 3 of 8

SUPPLIER DOCUMENT INDEX


( Piping )
PROJECT : PEMEX Minatitlan 750pph Atmospheric CCR Revamp UOP PROJECT NO. : 970086 CLIENT UOP DRAWING NO. REV SHTS NO. DRAWING NO.
155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205
RE-L603R-PR-5_SHT_4 RE-L603R-PR-5_SHT_5 RE-L606R-B1A1_SHT_1 RE-L607R-B1A1_SHT_1 RE-L607R-B1A1_SHT_2 RE-L701(A)-PR-3_SHT_1 RE-L701(B)-PR-3_SHT_1 RE-L702-PR-2_SHT_1 RE-L703-PR-2_SHT_1 RE-L710R(A)-PR-6_SHT_1 RE-L710R(A)-PR-6_SHT_2 RE-L710R(B)-PR-6_SHT_1 RE-L710R(B)-PR-6_SHT_2 RE-L710R(B)-PR-6_SHT_3 RE-L710R(B)-PR-6_SHT_4 RE-L715R-PR-8_SHT_1 RE-L716R-PR-8_SHT_1 RE-L731R-B2A2_SHT_1 RE-L741-PR-23_SHT_1 RE-L801R-PR-8_SHT_1 RE-L801R-PR-8_SHT_2 RE-L801R-PR-8_SHT_3 RE-L801R-PR-8_SHT_4 RE-L801R-PR-8_SHT_5 RE-L801R-PR-8_SHT_6 RE-L802R-PR-8_SHT_1 RE-L802R-PR-8_SHT_10 RE-L802R-PR-8_SHT_11 RE-L802R-PR-8_SHT_12 RE-L802R-PR-8_SHT_13 RE-L802R-PR-8_SHT_2 RE-L802R-PR-8_SHT_3 RE-L802R-PR-8_SHT_4 RE-L802R-PR-8_SHT_5 RE-L802R-PR-8_SHT_6 RE-L802R-PR-8_SHT_7 RE-L802R-PR-8_SHT_8 RE-L802R-PR-8_SHT_9 RE-L803R-PR-8_SHT_1 RE-L803R-PR-8_SHT_2 RE-L803R-PR-8_SHT_3 RE-L803R-PR-8_SHT_4 RE-L803R-PR-8_SHT_5 RE-L806R-PR-8_SHT_1 RE-L806R-PR-8_SHT_2 RE-L806R-PR-8_SHT_3 RE-L807R-PR-8_SHT_1 RE-L810R-B2A2_SHT_1 RE-L810R-B2A2_SHT_2 RE-L811-PR-23_SHT_1 RE-L811-PR-23_SHT_2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Rev. 0 15-May-13 SIZE


A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC WILL RE-ISSUE TO REDUCE NUMBER OF DUR-O-LOK COUPLINGS WILL RE-ISSUE TO REDUCE NUMBER OF DUR-O-LOK COUPLINGS WILL RE-ISSUE TO REDUCE NUMBER OF DUR-O-LOK COUPLINGS WILL RE-ISSUE TO REDUCE NUMBER OF DUR-O-LOK COUPLINGS

DESCRIPTION

REMARK

Page 4 of 8

SUPPLIER DOCUMENT INDEX


( Piping )
PROJECT : PEMEX Minatitlan 750pph Atmospheric CCR Revamp UOP PROJECT NO. : 970086 CLIENT UOP DRAWING NO. REV SHTS NO. DRAWING NO.
206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245
RE-L811-PR-23_SHT_3 RE-L811R(A)-B2A2_SHT_1 RE-L811R-B2A2_SHT_1 RE-L815R-B2A2_SHT_1 TRIM1-EA-520-B1A1_SHT_1 TRIM1-L302N-PR-8_SHT_1 TRIM1-L306-PR-5_SHT_1 TRIM2-EA-520-B1A1_SHT_1 TRIM2-L302N-PR-8_SHT_1 TRIM2-L306-PR-5_SHT_1 TRIM3-L306-PR-5_SHT_1 TRIM-L300N-PR-3_SHT_1 TRIM-L301N-PR-5_SHT_1 TRIM-L302N-PR-8_SHT_1 V-748-B1A1-NI_SHT_1 VA-L102R-MS-12_SHT_1 VA-L104R-MS-12_SHT_1 VA-L104R-MS-12_SHT_2 VA-L276N-MS-12_SHT_1 VA-L276N-MS-12_SHT_2 VA-L276N-MS-12_SHT_3 VA-L276N-MS-12_SHT_4 VA-L277N-MS-12_SHT_1 VA-L277N-MS-12_SHT_2 VA-L277N-MS-12_SHT_3 VB-L272N-MS-11_SHT_1 VB-L272N-MS-11_SHT_2 VB-L272N-MS-11_SHT_3 VB-L272N-MS-11_SHT_4 VB-L272N-MS-11_SHT_5 VC-L266N-PR-8_SHT_1 VC-L266N-PR-8_SHT_2 VC-L266N-PR-8_SHT_3 VC-L266N-PR-8_SHT_4 VC-L266N-PR-8_SHT_5 VC-L266N-PR-8_SHT_6 VC-L266N-PR-8_SHT_7 VC-L266N-PR-8_SHT_8 VC-L281N-B1A1_SHT_1 VC-L282N-B1A1_SHT_1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Rev. 0 15-May-13 SIZE


A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC PIPING ISOMETRIC

DESCRIPTION

REMARK

Page 5 of 8

UOP DRAWING NO.


AE-L103R-MS-1_SHT_1 AE-L103R-MS-1_SHT_2 AI-L261N-MS-1_SHT_1 AI-L262N-MS-2_SHT_1 AI-L263N-MS-2_SHT_1 AR-L103R-MS-1_SHT_1 AR-L103R-MS-1_SHT_2 GI-L128N-PR-8_SHT_1 RE-L259N-B1A1_SHT_1 RE-L259N-B1A1_SHT_2 RE-L259N-B1A1_SHT_3 RE-L260N-PR-36_SHT_1 RE-L260N-PR-36_SHT_2 RE-L260N-PR-36_SHT_3 RE-L260N-PR-36_SHT_4 RE-L260N-PR-36_SHT_5 RE-L265N-PR-36_SHT_1 RE-L265N-PR-36_SHT_2 RE-L265N-PR-36_SHT_3 RE-L284N-PR-5_SHT_1 RE-L408R(A)-PR-4_SHT_1 RE-L408R(A)-PR-4_SHT_2 RE-L408R(A)-PR-4_SHT_3 RE-L408R(B)-PR-4_SHT_1 RE-L602R-PR-5_SHT_1 RE-L808R-PR-8_SHT_1 TRIM1-ME-504-B2A2_SHT_1 TRIM2-ME-504-B2A2_SHT_1 TRIM3-ME-504-B2A2_SHT_1 TRIM1-L304N-PR-8_SHT_1 TRIM2-L304N-PR-8_SHT_1 TRIM1-DC-501-PR-10_SHT_1 TRIM2-DC-501-PR-10_SHT_1 VC-L269N-B2A1_SHT_1 RE-L710R(B)-PR-6_SHT_1 RE-L710R(B)-PR-6_SHT_2 RE-L710R(B)-PR-6_SHT_3 RE-L710R(B)-PR-6_SHT_4 DA-L402-PR-8_SHT_1 RE-L409-PR-23_SHT_1 RE-L421-PR-23_SHT_1 DA-L401-PR-8_SHT_1 RE-L414-PR-23_SHT_1 RE-L422-PR-23_SHT_1 RE-L509-PR-8_SHT_1 RE-L510-PR-8_SHT_1 RE-L715R-PR-8_SHT_1 RE-L716R-PR-8_SHT_1 DA-L703-PR-8_SHT_1 RE-L708-PR-23_SHT_1 RE-L733-PR-23_SHT_1 DA-L701-PR-8_SHT_1 RE-L731-PR-23_SHT_1 RE-L811R-B2A2_SHT_1 DA-L801-PR-8_SHT_1 RE-L813-PR-23_SHT_1 RE-L811R-B2A2_SHT_1

Drawing Description
PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD) PIPING ISO (ON HOLD)

Notes
Need final header sizing for Cooling Water Supply for Spillback Cooler EA-516 Need final header sizing for Cooling Water Supply for Spillback Cooler EA-516 No Comperessor Package GB-507A/B drawings received No Comperessor Package GB-507A/B drawings received No Comperessor Package GB-507A/B drawings received Need final header sizing for Cooling Water Return for Spillback Cooler EA-516 Need final header sizing for Cooling Water Return for Spillback Cooler EA-516 On HOLD Vent Gas Cooler EA-520 Inlet From Regen Cooler Fan GB-506 Vent Gas Cooler EA-520 Inlet From Regen Cooler Fan GB-506 Vent Gas Cooler EA-520 Inlet From Regen Cooler Fan GB-506 Vent Gas Cooler EA-520 Inlet From Regen Cooler EA-515 Vent Gas Cooler EA-520 Inlet From Regen Cooler EA-515 Vent Gas Cooler EA-520 Inlet From Regen Cooler EA-515 Vent Gas Cooler EA-520 Inlet From Regen Cooler EA-515 Vent Gas Cooler EA-520 Inlet From Regen Cooler EA-515 Vent Gas Cooler EA-520 Outlet to Disengaging Hopper FA-513 Vent Gas Cooler EA-520 Outlet to Disengaging Hopper FA-513 Vent Gas Cooler EA-520 Outlet to Disengaging Hopper FA-513 On HOLD From Lift Engager #1 FA-512 to Impactless Elbow, Need Lift Engager drawings From Lift Engager #1 FA-512 to Impactless Elbow, Need Lift Engager drawings From Lift Engager #1 FA-512 to Impactless Elbow, Need Lift Engager drawings From Impactless Elbow to Disengaging Hopper FA-513 Expansion Joint on bottom of Regen Heater BH-500 Dust Collector ME-503 dump, Need Dust Collector drawings Block Valve between Booster Gas Coalescer ME-504 and Level Glass LG-3201 Block Valve between Booster Gas Coalescer ME-504 and Level Glass LG-3201 Blind Flange on Level Glass LG-3201 top PDT-1386 for ME-504 PDT-1386 for ME-504 TE-311A remounting TE-312 mounting Vent Stack for Vent Gas Cooler EA-520 Re-Issue to reduce number of DUR-O-LOK Couplings Re-Issue to reduce number of DUR-O-LOK Couplings Re-Issue to reduce number of DUR-O-LOK Couplings Re-Issue to reduce number of DUR-O-LOK Couplings Waiting for line size verification for PSV-2251 (ON HOLD) Waiting for line size verification for PSV-2251 (ON HOLD) Waiting for line size verification for PSV-2251 (ON HOLD) Waiting for line size verification for PSV-2252 (ON HOLD) Waiting for line size verification for PSV-2252 (ON HOLD) Waiting for line size verification for PSV-2252 (ON HOLD) Waiting for line size verification for PSV-2254 (ON HOLD) Waiting for line size verification for PSV-2254 (ON HOLD) Waiting for line size verification for PSV-2255 (ON HOLD) Waiting for line size verification for PSV-2255 (ON HOLD) Waiting for line size verification for PSV-2257 (ON HOLD) Waiting for line size verification for PSV-2257 (ON HOLD) Waiting for line size verification for PSV-2257 (ON HOLD) Waiting for line size verification for PSV-2258 (ON HOLD) Waiting for line size verification for PSV-2258 (ON HOLD) Waiting for line size verification for PSV-2258 (ON HOLD) Waiting for line size verification for PSV-2259 (ON HOLD) Waiting for line size verification for PSV-2259 (ON HOLD) Waiting for line size verification for PSV-2259 (ON HOLD)

SUPPLIER DOCUMENT INDEX


( Piping Stress Files )
PROJECT : PEMEX Minatitlan 750pph Atmospheric CCR Revamp UOP PROJECT NO. : 970086 CLIENT DRAWING NO. UOP DRAWING NO. REV SHTS SIZE NO.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 SPRING SUPPORT INDEX SH-BH500-01B SH-BH502-01-A SH-BH502-01-B SH-BH502-02-A SH-BH502-02-B SH-EA515-01A SH-EA515-01B SH-EA515-02A SH-EA515-02B SH-FA511-01-A SH-FA511-01-B SH-FA511-01-C SH-FA511-01-D SH-FA512-01-A SH-FA512-01-B SH-FA512-01-C SH-FA512-01-D SH-FA516-01-A SH-FA516-01-B SH-FA516-01-C SH-FA516-01-D SH-FA517-01-A SH-FA517-01-B SH-FA517-01-C SH-FA517-01-D SH-RE-L260N-01 SH-RE-L260N-02 SH-RE-L260N-03 SH-RE-L265N-01 SH-RE-L267R-01 SH-RE-L267R-02 SH-RE-L268N-01 SH-RE-L408R-01 SH-RE-L408R-02 SH-RE-L512R-01 SH-RE-L513R-01 SH-RE-L514R-01 SH-RE-L515R-01 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4
SPRING SUPPORT INDEX SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT

Rev. 0 15-May-13 DESCRIPTION REMARK

Page 7 of 8

SUPPLIER DOCUMENT INDEX


( Piping Stress Files )
PROJECT : PEMEX Minatitlan 750pph Atmospheric CCR Revamp UOP PROJECT NO. : 970086 CLIENT DRAWING NO. UOP DRAWING NO. REV SHTS SIZE NO.
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
52 53 54 55

Rev. 0 15-May-13 DESCRIPTION


SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT SPRING SUPPORT

REMARK

SH-RE-L516R-01 SH-RE-L517R-01 SH-RE-L607R-01 SH-RE-L607R-02 SH-RE-L710R-01 SH-RE-L710R-02 SH-RE-L802R-01 SH-RE-L802R-02 SH-RE-L802R-03 SH-RE-L803R-01 SH-RE-L803R-02 SH-RE-L806R-01
SH-VB-L272N-01 SH-VC-L269N-01 STR-RE-L606R-01 STR-RE-L606R-02 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 A A A 0 0 0

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1

A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4
A4 A4 A4 A4

Page 8 of 8

SUPPLIER DOCUMENT INDEX


( Civil / Structural )
PROJECT : PEMEX Minatitlan 750pph Atmospheric CCR Revamp UOP PROJECT NO. : 970086 CLIENT DRAWING UOP DRAWING NO. REV SHTS SIZE NO. NO.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 970086-D899 970086-D900 970086-D901 970086-D902 970086-D903 970086-D903-DEMO 970086-D904 970086-D905 970086-D906 970086-D907 970086-D908 970086-D909 970086-D910 970086-D911 970086-D912 970086-D913 970086-D914 970086-D915 970086-D916 970086-D917 970086-D918 970086-D919 970086-D920 970086-D921 970086-D922 970086-D922-DEMO 970086-D923 970086-D924 970086-D925 970086-D926 970086-D927 970086-D928 970086-D928-DEMO 970086-D929 970086-D930 970086-D930-DEMO 970086-D931 970086-D932 970086-D933 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 COVER SHEET CCR STRUCTURE STRUCTURAL STEEL GENERAL NOTES, LEGEND AND ABBREVIATIONS CCR STRUCTURE CONCRETE GENERAL NOTES, LEGEND AND ABBREVIATIONS CCR STRUCTURE FOUNDATION LOADING DIAGRAM CCR STRUCTURE FOUNDATION LOCATION PLAN CCR STRUCTURE FOUNDATION DEMOLITION PLAN CCR STRUCTURE FOUNDATION SECTIONS AND DETAILS CCR STRUCTURE FOUNDATION SECTIONS AND DETAILS BLOWER GB-505 FOUNDATION MODIFICATION PLAN AND SECTIONS CCR STRUCTURE FOUNDATION PAVING AND DRAINAGE PLAN CCR STRUCTURE FOUNDATION PAVING AND DRAINAGE SECTIONS AND DETAILS CCR STRUCTURE STEEL STRUCTURE INSTALLATION SEQUENCE CCR STRUCTURE PLANS TOS EL. 100,475 & EL. 104,000 CCR STRUCTURE PLANS TOS EL. 106,600 & EL. 110,200 CCR STRUCTURE PLANS TOS EL. 113,200 & EL. 116,600 CCR STRUCTURE PLANS TOS EL. 120,000 & EL. 122,800 CCR STRUCTURE PLANS TOS EL. 125,200 & EL. 128,800 CCR STRUCTURE PLANS TOS EL. 132,400 & EL. 135,600 CCR STRUCTURE PLANS TOS EL. 139,000 & EL. 141,800 CCR STRUCTURE ELEVATIONS COLUMN LINES "C" & "D" CCR STRUCTURE ELEVATIONS COLUMN LINES "1.1" & " 2.1" CCR STRUCTURE SECTIONS AND DETAILS CCR STRUCTURE STAIR ELEVATIONS SECTIONS "A" & "B" EXISTING CCR STRUCTURE PLANS TOS EL. 104,000, 106,400 & 110,125 EXISTING CCR STRUCTURE PLANS TOS EL. 120,045 & EL. 122,845 EXISTING CCR STRUCTURE DEMOLITION PLANS TOS EL. 116,510, 120,045 & 122,845 EXISTING CCR STRUCTURE PLANS TOS EL. 122,845 & EL. 128,775 EXISTING CCR STRUCTURE PLANS TOS EL. 132,325 & EL. 136,975 EXISTING CCR STRUCTURE PLANS TOS EL. 141,800 & EL. 146,875 EXISTING CCR STRUCTURE ELEVATIONS COLUMN LINES "A", "B", "1" & "2" EXISTING CCR STRUCTURE SECTIONS AND DETAILS EXISTING REACTOR STRUCTURE FRAMING PLANS EXISTING REACTOR STRUCTURE DEMOLITION PLAN AND SECTION EXISTING REACTOR STRUCTURE SECTIONS AND ELEVATIONS PIPE SUPPORT STRUCTURE PLANS SECTIONS AND DETAILS PIPE SUPPORT STRUCTURE DEMOLITION PLAN AND SECTION CCR STRUCTURE GRATING PENETRATION PLANS EL. 100,500 TO 106,625 CCR STRUCTURE GRATING PENETRATION PLANS EL. 110,225 TO 116,625 CCR STRUCTURE GRATING PENETRATION PLANS EL. 120,025 TO 125,225 Page 1 of 2

Rev. 0 15-May-13 DESCRIPTION REMARK

SUPPLIER DOCUMENT INDEX


( Civil / Structural )
PROJECT : PEMEX Minatitlan 750pph Atmospheric CCR Revamp UOP PROJECT NO. : 970086 CLIENT DRAWING UOP DRAWING NO. REV SHTS SIZE NO. NO.
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 970086-D951 PEMEX CSA PLATF 12264-01-F40-20031 0 A 0 1 LOT 1 LOT 1 LOT A4 A4 A4 Structural Engineering Calcs for Pemex 450 pph CCR Structure and Foundation PEMEX CSA Platform & Pipe Support Structure by Blower BOM CSA BOM for PEMEX CCR project 970086-D934 970086-D935 970086-D941 970086-D942 970086-D943 970086-D944 970086-D937 970086-D938 970086-D939 0 0 0 0 0 0 A A A 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1

Rev. 0 15-May-13 DESCRIPTION


CCR STRUCTURE GRATING PENETRATION PLANS EL. 128,825 TO 135,625 CCR STRUCTURE GRATING PENETRATION PLANS EL. 139,025 TO 141,825 CCR STRUCTURE STEEL DETAILS CCR STRUCTURE STEEL DETAILS CCR STRUCTURE STEEL DETAILS CCR STRUCTURE STEEL DETAILS CCR STRUCTURE GRATING PENETRATION PLANS CCR STRUCTURE GRATING PENETRATION PLANS CCR STRUCTURE GRATING PENETRATION PLANS

REMARK

Page 2 of 2

SUPPLIER DOCUMENT INDEX


( Instrument )
PROJECT : PEMEX Minatitlan 750pph Atmospheric CCR Revamp UOP PROJECT NO. : 970086 CLIENT UOP DRAWING NO. REV SHTS SIZE NO. DRAWING NO.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
970086-D600 970086-D601 970086-D603 970086-D605 970086-D606 970086-D607 970086-D608 970086-D609 970086-D610 970086-D611 970086-D612 970086-D613 970086-D614 970086-D615 970086-D616 970086-D617 970086-D618 970086-D619 970086-D625 970086-D626 970086-D628 970086-D629 970086-D630 970086-D631 970086-D632 970086-D633 970086-D636 970086-D637 970086-D638 970086-D639 970086-D640 970086-D641 970086-D644 970086-D645 970086-D648 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 LOT 2 1 1 1 1 LOT 1 LOT 1 LOT 1 LOT 1 LOT 1 LOT 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LOT 1 1 1 1 1 1 A3 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 INSTRUMENTATION DRAWING LIST INSTRUMENT DESIGN SUMMARY INSTRUMENT SYMBOL LIST & GENERAL NOTES INSTRUMENT LOCATION PLAN - GRADE INSTRUMENT LOCATION PLAN - DECK 1 INSTRUMENT LOCATION PLAN - DECK 2 INSTRUMENT LOCATION PLAN - DECK 3 INSTRUMENT LOCATION PLAN - DECK 4 INSTRUMENT LOCATION PLAN - DECK 5 INSTRUMENT LOCATION PLAN - DECK 6 INSTRUMENT LOCATION PLAN - DECK 7 INSTRUMENT LOCATION PLAN - DECK 8 INSTRUMENT LOCATION PLAN - DECK 9 INSTRUMENT LOCATION PLAN - DECK 10 INSTRUMENT LOCATION PLAN - DECK 11 INSTRUMENT LOCATION PLAN - DECK 12 INSTRUMENT LOCATION PLAN - DECK 13 INSTRUMENT LOCATION PLAN - DECK 14 INSTRUMENT HOMERUN CABLE SCHEDULE INSTRUMENTATION HOMERUN CONDUIT ROUTING PLAN INSTRUMENTATION JUNCTION BOX WIRING DIAGRAM 300-JB-L-D-011 INSTRUMENTATION JUNCTION BOX WIRING DIAGRAM 300-JB-L-D-012 INSTRUMENTATION JUNCTION BOX WIRING DIAGRAM 300-JB-D-T-021 INSTRUMENTATION JUNCTION BOX WIRING DIAGRAM 300-JB-D-A-011 INSTRUMENTATION JUNCTION BOX WIRING DIAGRAM 300-JB-D-A-021 INSTRUMENTATION JUNCTION BOX WIRING DIAGRAM 300-JB-L-D-051 INSTRUMENTATION JUNCTION BOX WIRING DIAGRAM 300-JB-D-D-071 INSTRUMENTATION JUNCTION BOX WIRING DIAGRAM 300-JB-D-A-071 INSTRUMENTATION JUNCTION BOX WIRING DIAGRAM 300-JB-D-T-081 INSTRUMENTATION JUNCTION BOX WIRING DIAGRAM 300-JB-D-T-082 INSTRUMENTATION JUNCTION BOX WIRING DIAGRAM 300-JB-D-A-091 INSTRUMENTATION JUNCTION BOX WIRING DIAGRAM 300-JB-L-A-091 INSTRUMENTATION JUNCTION BOX WIRING DIAGRAM 300-JB-H-T-001 INSTRUMENTATION JUNCTION BOX WIRING DIAGRAM 300-JB-H1-T-001 INSTRUMENT WIRING DIAGRAM TEMPERATURE ELEMENT/TRANMISTTER LOCATION

Rev. 0 15-May-13 DESCRIPTION REMARK

Page 1 of 4

SUPPLIER DOCUMENT INDEX


( Instrument )
PROJECT : PEMEX Minatitlan 750pph Atmospheric CCR Revamp UOP PROJECT NO. : 970086 CLIENT UOP DRAWING NO. REV SHTS SIZE NO. DRAWING NO.
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70
970086-D650 970086-D653 970086-D654 970086-D660 970086-D667-1 970086-D667-10 970086-D667-12 970086-D667-13 970086-D667-14 970086-D667-15 970086-D667-16 970086-D667-17 970086-D667-18 970086-D667-19 970086-D667-2 970086-D667-22 970086-D667-3 970086-D667-4 970086-D667-5 970086-D667-6 970086-D667-7 970086-D667-8 970086-D667-9 970086-D668-1 970086-D668-2 970086-D669-1 970086-D669-2 970086-D669-3 970086-D669-4 970086-D669-5 970086-D669-6 970086-D669-7 970086-D669-8 970086-D669-9 970086-D669-10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1LOT 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A1 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3

Rev. 0 15-May-13 DESCRIPTION


INSTRUMENTATION CABLE BLOCK DIAGRAM INSTRUMENT JUNCTION BOX ASSEMBLY DRAWING DISCRETE / ANALOG INSTRUMENT JUNCTION BOX ASSEMBLY DRAWING THERMOCOUPLE INSTRUMENT BILL OF MATERIAL INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - MECHANICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - MECHANICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - MECHANICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - MECHANICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - MECHANICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - MECHANICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - MECHANICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - MECHANICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - MECHANICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - MECHANICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - MECHANICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - MECHANICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - MECHANICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - MECHANICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - MECHANICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - MECHANICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - MECHANICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - MECHANICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - MECHANICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - PNEUMATIC HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - PNEUMATIC HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - ELECTRICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - ELECTRICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - ELECTRICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - ELECTRICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - ELECTRICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - ELECTRICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - ELECTRICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - ELECTRICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - ELECTRICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - ELECTRICAL HOOK-UP

REMARK

Page 2 of 4

SUPPLIER DOCUMENT INDEX


( Instrument )
PROJECT : PEMEX Minatitlan 750pph Atmospheric CCR Revamp UOP PROJECT NO. : 970086 CLIENT UOP DRAWING NO. REV SHTS SIZE NO. DRAWING NO.
71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105
970086-D669-11 970086-D669-12 970086-D669-14 970086-D669-16 970086-D669-17 970086-D669-18 970086-D670-1 970086-D670-2 970086-D670-3 970086-D670-4 970086-D670-5 970086-D670-6 970086-D670-7 970086-D670-8 970086-D670-9 970086-D670-10 970086-D670-11 970086-D670-12 970086-D670-13 970086-D670-14 970086-D670-15 970086-D670-16 970086-D670-17 970086-D670-18 970086-D670-19 970086-D670-20 970086-D670-21 970086-D671 970086-D672 970086-D673 970086-D674 970086-D675 970086-D676 970086-D677 970086-D678 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A1 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3

Rev. 0 15-May-13 DESCRIPTION


INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - ELECTRICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - ELECTRICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - ELECTRICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - ELECTRICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - ELECTRICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - ELECTRICAL HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - SUPPORT HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - SUPPORT HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - SUPPORT HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - SUPPORT HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - SUPPORT HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - SUPPORT HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - SUPPORT HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - SUPPORT HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - SUPPORT HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - SUPPORT HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - SUPPORT HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - SUPPORT HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - SUPPORT HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - SUPPORT HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - SUPPORT HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - SUPPORT HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - SUPPORT HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - SUPPORT HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - SUPPORT HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - SUPPORT HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - SUPPORT HOOK-UP INSTRUMENT SUPPLEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM AT-383 INSTRUMENT SUPPLEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM LE/LSHH-307 INSTRUMENT SUPPLEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM LE/LSHH-347 INSTRUMENT SUPPLEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM LE/LSHH-349 INSTRUMENT SUPPLEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM LE/LSHH-309 INSTRUMENT SUPPLEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM FT-362 INSTRUMENT SUPPLEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM ME-502 INSTRUMENT SUPPLEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM FT-1016

REMARK

Page 3 of 4

SUPPLIER DOCUMENT INDEX


( Instrument )
PROJECT : PEMEX Minatitlan 750pph Atmospheric CCR Revamp UOP PROJECT NO. : 970086 CLIENT UOP DRAWING NO. REV SHTS SIZE NO. DRAWING NO.
106 107 108 109 110
970086-D679 970086-D680 970086-D681 970086-D682 FB8372-D 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1LOT A3 A3 A3 A3 A4

Rev. 0 15-May-13 DESCRIPTION


INSTRUMENT SUPPLEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM ME-503 INSTRUMENT SUPPLEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM ME-11 INSTRUMENT SUPPLEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM AT-388 INSTRUMENT SUPPLEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM BENTLY NEVADA (GB-505) INSTRUMENT DEMOLITION EXISTING INSTRUMENT INDEX

REMARK

Page 4 of 4

SUPPLIER DOCUMENT INDEX


( Electrical )
PROJECT : PEMEX Minatitlan 750pph Atmospheric CCR Revamp UOP PROJECT NO. : 970086 CLIENT UOP DRAWING NO. REV SHTS SIZE NO. DRAWING NO.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
970086-D700 970086-D701 970086-D702 970086-D703 970086-D703-D 970086-D706 970086-D706-D 970086-D707 970086-D708 970086-D709 970086-D710 970086-D711 970086-D712 970086-D713 970086-D714 970086-D715 970086-D716 970086-D717 970086-D718 970086-D719 970086-D720 970086-D721 970086-D722 970086-D723 970086-D727 970086-D728 970086-D728-D 970086-D732 970086-D733 970086-D735 970086-D735-D 970086-D739 970086-D740 970086-D741 970086-D742 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1LOT 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A1 A1 A3 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A3 A1 A1 A1 A4 A4 A4 A4 ELECTRICAL DRAWING LIST ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS AND GENERAL NOTES ELECTRICAL LOAD LIST ELECTRICAL SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM ELECTRICAL SUBSTATION NO. 3 LAYOUT ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION SUBSTATION NO. 3 LAYOUT POWER, GROUNDING AND LIGHTING PLAN - GRADE POWER, GROUNDING AND LIGHTING PLAN - DECK 1 POWER, GROUNDING AND LIGHTING PLAN - DECK 2 POWER, GROUNDING AND LIGHTING PLAN - DECK 3 POWER, GROUNDING AND LIGHTING PLAN - DECK 4 POWER, GROUNDING AND LIGHTING PLAN - DECK 5 POWER, GROUNDING AND LIGHTING PLAN - DECK 6 POWER, GROUNDING AND LIGHTING PLAN - DECK 7 POWER, GROUNDING AND LIGHTING PLAN - DECK 8 POWER, GROUNDING AND LIGHTING PLAN - DECK 9 POWER, GROUNDING AND LIGHTING PLAN - DECK 10 POWER, GROUNDING AND LIGHTING PLAN - DECK 11 POWER, GROUNDING AND LIGHTING PLAN - DECK 12 POWER, GROUNDING AND LIGHTING PLAN - DECK 13 POWER, GROUNDING AND LIGHTING PLAN - DECK 14 NEW CCR STRUCTURE ISOMETRIC ELEVATION VIEW POWER CONDUIT ENVELOPE ISOMETRIC ELECTRICAL HOMERUN CONDUIT ROUTING PLAN ELECTRICAL UNDERGROUND CONDUIT ROUTING PLAN ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION UNDERGROUND CONDUIT ROUTING PLAN ELECTRICAL BILL OF MATERIAL MATERIAL SCHEDULE FOR POWER SYSTEM NAME PLATE ELECTRICAL HOMERUN CABLE SCHEDULE ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION HOMERUN CABLE SCHEDULE ELECTRICAL PANELBOARD SCHEDULE RP-1 RECEPTACLE PANEL ELECTRICAL PANELBOARD SCHEDULE LP-1 LIGHTING PANEL ELECTRICAL PANELBOARD SCHEDULE EM-LP EMERGENCY LIGHTING PANEL ELECTRICAL PANELBOARD SCHEDULE IPP-1 INSTRUMENT POWER PANEL

Rev. 0 15-May-13 DESCRIPTION REMARK

Page 1 of 2

SUPPLIER DOCUMENT INDEX


( Electrical )
PROJECT : PEMEX Minatitlan 750pph Atmospheric CCR Revamp UOP PROJECT NO. : 970086 CLIENT UOP DRAWING NO. REV SHTS SIZE NO. DRAWING NO.
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67
970086-D743 970086-D744 970086-D745 970086-D746 970086-D747 970086-D748 970086-D749 970086-D751 970086-D752 970086-D753 970086-D754 970086-D755 970086-D756 970086-D759 970086-D760 970086-D762 970086-D762-D 970086-D763 970086-D764 970086-D770-D 970086-D771-D 970086-D772-D 970086-D773-D 970086-D774-D 970086-D775-D 970086-D776-D 970086-D777-D 970086-D778-D SK-12264-E-001 SK-12264-E-002 970086-D704 970086-D705 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A1 A4 A4 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4

Rev. 0 15-May-13 DESCRIPTION REMARK

ELECTRICAL TYPICAL INSTALLATION DETAILS PANELBOARDS IPP-1, EM-LP, LP-1, RP-1 ELECTRICAL TYPICAL INSTALLATION DETAILS SOCKET OUTLET MOUNTING ON GRADE ELECTRICAL TYPICAL INSTALLATION DETAILS SOCKET OUTLET MOUNTING ON DECK ELECTRICAL TYPICAL INSTALLATION DETAILS WELDING RECEPTACLES MOUNTING ON GRADE ELECTRICAL TYPICAL INSTALLATION DETAILS WELDING RECEPTACLES MOUNTING ON DECK ELECTRICAL TYPICAL INSTALLATION DETAILS LIGHTING SYSTEM PENDANT MOUNTING ELECTRICAL TYPICAL INSTALLATION DETAILS LIGHTING SYSTEM STANCHION MOUNTING ELECTRICAL TYPICAL INSTALLATION DETAILS POWER SYSTEM CONDUIT FEED ON GRADE ELECTRICAL TYPICAL INSTALLATION DETAILS POWER SYSTEM CONDUIT FEED ON GRADE ELECTRICAL TYPICAL INSTALLATION DETAILS POWER SYSTEM CONDUIT FEED ON GRADE ELECTRICAL EXISTING PANEL SCHEDULE ELECTRICAL TYPICAL INSTALLATION DETAILS ELECTRICAL CONNECTION AT HEATER ELECTRICAL TYPICAL INSTALLATION DETAILS POWER SYSTEM MOTOR TERMINATION ELECTRICAL TYPICAL INSTALLATION DETAILS GROUNDING SYSTEM ELECTRICAL TYPICAL INSTALLATION DETAILS GROUNDING SYSTEM ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS MOTOR CONTROLS - EXISTING ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS MOTOR CONTROL ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS MOTOR CONTROLS - NEW ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS HEATERS CONTROLS AND AIR COMPRESSORS - NEW DEMO PHOTO KEY PLAN DEMO PHOTO - GA-513B- ORGANIC CHLORIDE INJECTION PUMP DEMO PHOTO - GA-514A - ORGANIC CHLORIDE INJECTION PUMP DEMO PHOTO - GB-505 - REGENERATION BLOWER DEMO PHOTO - GB-506 - REGENERATION COOLER FAN DEMO PHOTO - GB-503A - LIFT GAS BLOWER DEMO PHOTO - GB-503B - LIFT GAS BLOWER DEMO PHOTO - GB-507A/B - INSTRUMENT AIR COMPRESSOR DEMO PHOTO - BH-500 & BH-502 - REGEN HEATER & AIR HEATER ELECTRICAL CALCULATION FOR LIGHTING SYSTEM GRADE LEVEL ELECTRICAL CALCULATION FOR LIGHTING SYSTEM DECK LEVEL ELECTRICAL AREA CLASSIFICATION ELECTRICAL AREA CLASSIFICATION -

ISSUED FOR REFERENCE ISSUED FOR REFERENCE

Page 2 of 2

SUPPLIER DOCUMENT INDEX


( Equipment )
PROJECT : PEMEX Minatitlan 750pph Atmospheric CCR Revamp UOP PROJECT NO. : 970086 CLIENT NO. UOP DRAWING NO. REV SHTS SIZE DRAWING NO.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
12264-01-F50-250111-100-IFC 12264-01-F50-250111-101-IFC 12264-01-F50-250111-102-IFC 12264-01-F50-250111-103-IFC 12264-01-F50-250111-106-IFC 1226401M010 1226401M040 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A4 A4 A4 A4 A4 A1 A1

Rev. 0 15-May-13 DESCRIPTION


NOZZLEPRO FEA FOR 24" WITH OCC LC 6 NOZZLEPRO FEA FOR 24" NOZZLE WITH OCC LC 7 NOZZLEPRO FEA FOR 24" NOZZLE WITH OCC LC 8 NOZZLEPRO FEA FOR 24" NOZZLE WITH OCC LC 9 COMPRESS CALCULATIONS FOR REGENERATION TOWER(NOZZLES D & P) VESSEL MODIFICATIONS FA-510 REGENERATION TOWER VESSEL MODIFICATIONS REACTOR ASSEMBLY SURGE POT

REMARK

PEMEX REFINACION INVITATION TO BID GRAL. LAZARO CARDENAS REFINERY

SECTION 1.8 PEMEX MINATITLAN REFINERY SITE INFORMATION

Refinery Entrance and Transportation Routing


Gral. Lazaro Cardenas Refinery Minatitlan, Veracruz, Mexico
De la autopista MinatitlnVillahermosa (nuevo acceso)

Puerta Administrativa

rea CCR

Portada

Oficina Pemex Residencia rea propuesta para almacn y talleres

Route From Contractor Entrance to CCR Unit Route to Pemex Residents Office

PEMEX REFINACION INVITATION TO BID GRAL. LAZARO CARDENAS REFINERY

SECTION 1.9 PEMEX REQUIREMENTS

APPLICABLE STANDARDS AND CODES MINIMAL INDIVISIBLE UNITS REQUIREMENTS PROVISIONS FOR SAFETY, HEALTH AND ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION COUNTRY OF ORIGIN REQUIREMENTS

REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CRDENAS MINATITLN, VER. MXICO


PROYECTO:

MODERNIZACIN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIN CONTINUA CCR DE U -500, DE LA REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CARDENAS DE MINATITLN, VER., QUE INCLUYE INGENIERA DE DETALLE, PROCURA DE MATERIALES, FABRICACIN, MONTAJE, PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO.

ANEXO B NORMAS Y CDIGOS APLICABLES

REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CRDENAS MINATITLN, VER. MXICO


PROYECTO:

MODERNIZACIN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIN CONTINUA CCR DE U -500, DE LA REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CARDENAS DE MINATITLN, VER., QUE INCLUYE INGENIERA DE DETALLE, PROCURA DE MATERIALES, FABRICACIN, MONTAJE, PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO. CDIGOS Y NORMAS APLICABLES. Para el correcto desarrollo de los alcances del contrato, el contratista es responsable de cumplir de acuerdo a sus alcances de manera estricta con todos los cdigos, normas, prcticas recomendadas, especificaciones y los reglamentos aplicables, en caso de existir alguna discrepancia entre estos cdigos y la ingeniera del proyecto. El contratista deber informar oficialmente a la supervisin de Pemex Refinacin dichas discrepancias y solicitarle los cdigos a aplicar. La supervisin de Pemex-Refinacin determinar los cdigos que procedan. Deber usarse la edicin/revisin y adendas ms recientes de los citados documentos. La lista incluida se deber considerar como el requerimiento normativo mnimo exigido, a menos que se especifique lo contrario en los anexos de la seccin II. NORMAS OFICIALES MEXICANAS (NOM): Regulacin tcnica de observancia obligatoria expedida por las dependencias competentes, conforme a las finalidades establecidas en el artculo 40 de la Ley Federal Sobre Metrologa y Normalizacin, que establece reglas, especificaciones, atributos, directrices, caractersticas, o prescripciones aplicables a un producto, proceso, instalacin, sistema, actividad, servicio o mtodo de produccin u operacin, as como aquellas relativas a la terminologa, simbologa, embalaje, marcado o etiquetado y las que se refieran a su cumplimiento o aplicacin. El contratista del servicio podr consultar todas las Normas Oficiales Mexicanas (NOM'S), para su seleccin y aplicacin, a travs del portal de la Secretara de Economa, la cual mantiene un catalogo actualizado de ellas http://www.economia-noms.gob.mx NORMAS MEXICANAS (NMX): Documento de aplicacin voluntaria que elabora un Organismo Nacional de Normalizacin o alguna Secretara, que prev para un uso comn y repetido, reglas, especificaciones, atributos, mtodos de prueba, directrices, caractersticas, o prescripciones aplicables a un producto, proceso, instalacin, sistema, actividad, servicio o mtodo de produccin u operacin, as como aquellas relativas a la terminologa, simbologa, embalaje, marcado o etiquetado. El contratista del servicio podr consultar todas las Normas Mexicanas (NMX'S), para su seleccin y aplicacin, a travs del portal de la secretara de economa, la cual mantiene un catlogo actualizado de ellas. http://www.economia-noms.gob.mx NORMAS DE REFERENCIA: Son creadas por las entidades de la administracin pblica federal a travs de sus comits de normalizacin y conforme a las cuales se adquieran, arrienden o contraten bienes o servicios, cuando las normas mexicanas o internacionales no cubran los requerimientos de las mismas o bien, las consideren inaplicables u obsoletas. El contratista del servicio podr consultar todas las normas de referencia, a travs del portal de la secretara de economa, la cual mantiene un catlogo actualizado de ellas. El contratista del servicio deber aplicar las normas de referencia de PEMEX, stas se encuentran en el portal de PEMEX, el cual mantiene un catlogo actualizado de ellas. http://www.pemex.com.mx.

REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CRDENAS MINATITLN, VER. MXICO


PROYECTO:

MODERNIZACIN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIN CONTINUA CCR DE U -500, DE LA REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CARDENAS DE MINATITLN, VER., QUE INCLUYE INGENIERA DE DETALLE, PROCURA DE MATERIALES, FABRICACIN, MONTAJE, PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO. NORMAS O REGULACIONES TCNICAS EXTRANJERAS: Es aquel documento normativo emitido por un organismo de Normalizacin Extranjero y que es de aplicacin exclusiva en su pas de origen y que Pemex Refinacin puede utilizarlo como referencia de conformidad con lo dispuesto en el artculo 28, fraccin IV del reglamento de la Ley Federal sobre Metrologa y Normalizacin.

NORMAS Y ESPECIFICACIONES GENERALES.


Como mnimo, pero sin ser limitante, las normatividades a emplear durante el proyecto son las siguientes:

A. NORMAS OFICIALES MEXICANAS (NOM)


IDENTIFICACIN NOM-005-STPS-1998 NOM-011-STPS-2001 NOM-015-STPS-2001 NOM-017-STPS-2008 NOM-020-STPS-2002 NOM-021-STPS-1994 NOM-022-STPS-2008 NOM-024-STPS-2001 NOM-025-STPS-2008 NOM-026-STPS-2008 NOM-027-STPS-2008 NOM-031-STPS-2011 NOM-100-STPS-1994 NOM-113-STPS-2009 NOM-115-STPS-2009 NOM-001-SEDE-2005 PEC-NOM-001-SEDE-2005 NOM-007-ENER-2004 NOM-014-ENER-2004. NOM-016-ENER-2010 NOM-017-ENER/SCFI-2005 NOM-003-SCFI-2000 NOM-063-SCFI-2001 NOM-064-SCFI-2000 NOM-041-SEMARNAT-2006 DESCRIPCIN Condiciones de seguridad e higiene en los centros de trabajo para el manejo, transporte y almacenamiento de sustancias qumicas peligrosas. Relativa a las condiciones de seguridad e higiene en los centros de trabajo donde se genere ruido. Relativa a la exposicin laboral de las condiciones trmicas elevadas o abatidas en los centros de trabajo. Relativa a la seleccin y manejo de equipo de proteccin personal para los trabajadores en los centros de trabajo. Recipientes sujetos a presin y calderas-funcionamiento-condiciones de seguridad. Relativa a los requerimientos y caractersticas de los informes de los riesgos de trabajo que ocurran, para integrar las estadsticas. Electricidad esttica en los centros de trabajo condiciones de seguridad e higiene. Relativa a las condiciones de seguridad e higiene en los centros de trabajo en donde se generen vibraciones. Condiciones de iluminacin en los centros de trabajo. Colores y seales de seguridad e higiene e identificacin de riesgos de productos conducidos por tuberas. Condiciones de seguridad industrial en los trabajos de soldadura y corte. Construccin-condiciones de seguridad y salud en el trabajo. Establece las especificaciones de los extintores contra incendio a base de polvo qumico seco. Calzado de proteccin. Especificaciones, mtodos de prueba y clasificacin de los Cascos de proteccin. Instalaciones Elctricas (Utilizacin) Procedimiento para evaluacin de la conformidad de la norma oficial mexicana NOM-001SEDE-2005. Eficiencia energtica para sistemas de alumbrado en edificios no residenciales. (Nota: aplicar slo para sistemas de control de alumbrado) Eficiencia energtica de motores de corriente alterna monofsicos, de induccin, tipo jaula de ardilla, en potencia nominal de 0,180 a 1,500 kW. Lmites, mtodos de prueba y marcado. Eficiencia energtica de motores de corriente alterna trifsicos de induccin, tipo jaula de ardilla, de uso general, en potencia nominal de 0,746 a 343 kW. Lmites, mtodos de prueba y marcado. Eficiencia energtica de lmparas fluorescentes compactaslmites y mtodos de prueba. Productos elctricosespecificaciones de seguridad. Conductoresrequisitos de seguridad. Luminarias para uso en interiores y exteriores especificaciones de seguridad y mtodos de prueba. Que establece los lmites mximos permisibles de emisin de gases contaminantes provenientes del escape de los vehculos automotores en circulacin que usan gasolina como combustible.

REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CRDENAS MINATITLN, VER. MXICO


PROYECTO:

MODERNIZACIN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIN CONTINUA CCR DE U -500, DE LA REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CARDENAS DE MINATITLN, VER., QUE INCLUYE INGENIERA DE DETALLE, PROCURA DE MATERIALES, FABRICACIN, MONTAJE, PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO.
IDENTIFICACIN NOM-045-SEMARNAT-2006 NOM-050-SEMARNAT-1993 NOM-080-SEMARNAT-1994 NOM-081-SEMARNAT-1994 NOM-008-NUCL-2003 NOM-025/1-NUCL-2000 NOM-025/2-NUCL-1996 NOM-127-SSA1-1994 NOM-230-SSA1-2002 NOM-201-SSA1-2002 DESCRIPCIN Que establece los niveles mximos permisibles de opacidad del humo proveniente del escape de vehculos automotores en circulacin que usan diesel o mezclas que incluyan diesel como combustible Vehculos en circulacin que usan gas licuado o natural u otros combustibles alternos. Que establece los lmites mximos permisibles de emisin de ruido provenientes del escape de los vehculos automotores, motocicletas y triciclos motorizados en circulacin y su mtodo de medicin. Que establece los lmites mximos permisibles de emisin de ruido de las fuentes fijas y su mtodo de medicin. Control de la contaminacin radioactiva. Requisitos para equipos de radiografa industrial Parte 1: Requisitos generales. Requisitos para equipos de radiografa industrial Parte 2: Operacin. Salud Ambiental. Agua para uso y consumo humano. Lmites permisibles de calidad y tratamientos a que debe someterse el agua para su potabilizacin. Salud ambiental. Agua para uso y consumo humano. Requisitos sanitarios que se deben cumplir en los sistemas de abastecimiento pblicos y privados durante el manejo del agua. Procedimientos sanitarios para el muestreo Productos y servicios. Agua y hielo para consumo humano, envasados y a granel, especificaciones sanitarias.

B. NORMAS MEXICANAS (NMX)


IDENTIFICACIN NMX-B-254-CANACERO-2008 NMX-B-290-CANACERO-2006 NMX-B-482-1991 NMX-C-030-ONNCCE-2004 NMX-C-049-ONNCCE-2006 NMX-C-056-ONNCCE-2010 NMX-C-057-ONNCCE-2010 NMX-C-059-ONNCCE-2010 NMX-C-061-ONNCCE-2010 NMX-C-062-ONNCCE-2010 NMX-C-072-1997-ONNCCE NMX-C-077-1997-ONNCCE NMX-C-088-1997-ONNCCE NMX-C-090-1978 NMX-C-111-ONNCCE-2004 NMX-C-117-1978 NMX-C-122-ONNCCE-2004 NMX-C-155 ONNCCE 2004 NMX-C-156-ONNCCE-2010 DESCRIPCIN Industria siderrgica-acero estructural-especificaciones y mtodos de prueba. Industria siderrgica-malla electrosoldada de acero liso o corrugado para refuerzo de concreto-especificaciones y mtodos de prueba Capacitacin, calificacin y certificacin de personal de ensayos no destructivos. Industria de la construccin-agregados-muestreo Industria de la construccin-cemento hidrulico -mtodo de prueba para la determinacin de la finura de cementantes hidrulicos mediante la malla 0,045 mm (No. 325) Industria de la construccin-cementantes hidrulicos- determinacin de la finura de los cementantes hidrulicos (mtodo de permeabilidad al aire) Industria de la construccin-cementantes hidrulicos -determinacin de la consistencia normal. Industria de la construccin-cementos hidrulicos-determinacin del tiempo de fraguado de cementantes hidrulicos (mtodo VICAT) Industria de la construccin-cementos hidrulicos-determinacin de la resistencia a la compresin de cementantes hidrulicos Industria de la construccin-cementos hidrulicos-determinacin de la sanidad de cementantes hidrulicos. Industria de la construccin -Agregados- Determinacin de partculas ligeras. TII: BUILDING INDUSTRY - AGGREGATES - DETERMINATION OF LIGHTWEIGHT PIECES Industria de la construccin -Agregados para concreto -Anlisis granulomtrico-mtodo de prueba. TII: BUILDING INDUSTRY - AGGREGATES FOR CONCRETE-GRANULOMETRIC ANALYSIS-METHOD OF TEST Industria de la construccin -Agregados-Determinacin de impurezas orgnicas en el agregado fino. BUILDING INDUSTRY - AGGREGATES-DETERMINATION OF ORGANIC IMPURITIES IN FINE AGGREGATE. Mtodo de prueba para aditivos expansores y estabilizadores de volumen del concreto. Industria de la construccin-agregados para concreto hidrulico-especificaciones y mtodos de prueba. Aditivos estabilizadores de volumen. Industria de la construccin-agua para concreto-especificaciones. Industria de la construccin-concreto-concreto hidrulico industrializado-especificaciones. Industria de la construccin-concreto hidrulico-determinacin del revenimiento en el concreto fresco.

REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CRDENAS MINATITLN, VER. MXICO


PROYECTO:

MODERNIZACIN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIN CONTINUA CCR DE U -500, DE LA REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CARDENAS DE MINATITLN, VER., QUE INCLUYE INGENIERA DE DETALLE, PROCURA DE MATERIALES, FABRICACIN, MONTAJE, PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO.
IDENTIFICACIN NMX-C-164-ONNCCE-2002 NMX-C-165-ONNCCE-2004 NMX-C-170-1997-ONNCCE NMX-C-180-ONNCCE-2010 NMX-C-255-ONNCCE-2006 NMX-C-265- ONNCCE-2010 NMX-C-277- ONNCCE-2010 NMX-C-283-1982 NMX-C-305-1980 NMX-C-403-ONNCCE-1999 NMX-C-407-ONNCCE-2001 NMX-C-414-ONNCCE-2010 NMX-CC-9001-IMNC-2008 NMX-EC-17025-IMNC-2006 NMX-J-010/1-ANCE-2010 NMX-J-010-ANCE-2005 NMX-J-019-ANCE-2006 NMX-J-035-ANCE-2001 NMX-J-075/1-ANCE-1994 NMX-J-075/3-ANCE-1994 NMX-J-098-ANCE-1999 NMX-J-109-ANCE-2010 NMX-J-118/1-ANCE-2000 NMX-J-118/2-ANCE-2007 NMX-J-170-ANCE-2002 NMX-J-199-ANCE-2002 NMX-J-294-ANCE-2008 NMX-J-295/1-ANCE-2010 NMX-J-295/2-ANCE-2010 NMX-J-429-ANCE-2002 NMX-J-438-ANCE-2003 NMX-J-451-ANCE-2011 NMX-J-503-ANCE-2005 DESCRIPCIN Industria de la construccin-agregados-determinacin de la masa especfica y absorcin de agua del agregado grueso. Industria de la construccin-agregados-determinacin de la masa especifica y absorcin de agua del agregado fino-mtodo de prueba Industria de la construccin - agregados - reduccin de las muestras de agregados obtenidas en el campo, al tamao requerido para las pruebas. TII:BUILDING INDUSTRY AGGREGATES - REDUCING FIELD SAMPLES OF AGGREGATES FOR TESTING SIZE Industria de la construccin-cemento hidrulico-determinacin de la reactividad potencial de los agregados con lcalis de cementantes hidrulicos por medio de barras de mortero. Industria de la construccin -Aditivos qumicos para concretoespecificaciones, muestreo y mtodos de ensayo. Industria de la construccin-agregados para concreto hidrulico-examen petrogrficomtodo de ensayo. Industria de la construccin-agua para concreto-muestreo. Industria de la construccin - agua para concreto anlisis Industria de la construccin- agregados para concreto- descripcin de sus componentes minerales naturales. Industria de la construccin-concreto hidrulico para uso estructural. Industria de la construccin-varilla corrugada de acero proveniente de lingote y palanquilla para refuerzo de concreto-especificaciones y mtodos de prueba. Industria de la construccin-cementantes hidrulicos-especificaciones y mtodos de ensayo. Sistemas de gestin de la calidad-requisitos. Requisitos generales para la competencia de los laboratorios de ensayo y de calibracin. Productos elctricosconductoresconductores con aislamiento termoplstico a base de policlorur de vinilo con medidas internacionales-especificaciones. Conductores-conductores con aislamiento termoplstico para instalaciones hasta 600 V. Especificaciones. Iluminacin-lmparas-lmparas incandescentes de filamento metlico para alumbrado general-especificaciones y mtodos de prueba. Conductoresalambres de cobre semiduro para usos elctricosespecificaciones. Aparatos elctricos-Maquinas rotatorias-Parte 1: Motores de induccin de corriente alterna del tipo rotor en cortocircuito en potencias de 0.062 a 373 Kw. Especificaciones. Aparatos elctricos-Maquinas rotatorias-Parte 3: Mtodos de prueba para motores de induccin de corriente alterna, del tipo de rotor en cortocircuito, en potencias desde 0.062 Kw. Sistemas elctricos de potenciasuministrotensiones elctricas normalizadas. Transformadores de corriente-especificaciones y mtodos de prueba Productos elctricos-Tableros de alumbrado y distribucin en baja tensinespecificaciones y mtodos de prueba. Tableros-Tableros de distribucin de fuerza en baja tensinespecificaciones y mtodos de prueba. Conectadores-Conectadores de tipo compresin para lneas areas-especificaciones y mtodos de prueba. Terminales para cable aislado con pantalla para uso interior y exterior, 2.5 Kv a 230 Kv en corriente alternaespecificaciones y mtodos de prueba. Conductores-resistencia de aislamientomtodo de prueba. Iluminacinlmparas fluorescentes para alumbrado generalespecificaciones y mtodos de prueba. Iluminacin-lmparas fluorescentes de doble base para alumbrado generalespecificaciones y mtodos de prueba. Conductores-alambres, cables y cordones con aislamiento de PVC 80C, 90C y 105C, para equipos elctricos-especificaciones. Conductores-cables con aislamiento de policloruro de vinilo, 75 C y 90 C para alambrado de tableros-especificaciones. Conductores-conductores con aislamiento termfijo-especificaciones. Iluminacin-balastros para lmparas de descarga de alta intensidad y lmparas de vapor de

REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CRDENAS MINATITLN, VER. MXICO


PROYECTO:

MODERNIZACIN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIN CONTINUA CCR DE U -500, DE LA REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CARDENAS DE MINATITLN, VER., QUE INCLUYE INGENIERA DE DETALLE, PROCURA DE MATERIALES, FABRICACIN, MONTAJE, PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO.
IDENTIFICACIN NMX-J-519-ANCE-2006 NMX-J-549-ANCE-2005 NMX-W-144-1996 NMX-W-147-1996 DESCRIPCIN sodio de baja presin-especificaciones. Conectadores-conectadores sellados-especificaciones y mtodos de prueba. sistema de proteccin contra tormentas elctricas especificaciones, materiales y mtodos de medicin Escaleras metlicas porttiles-recomendaciones para seleccin, uso y cuidado. Escaleras metlicas porttiles-informacin de seguridad.

C. NORMAS DE REFERENCIA (NRF).


IDENTIFICACIN NRF-004-PEMEX-2003 NRF-006-PEMEX-2011 NRF-009-PEMEX-2004 NRF-010-PEMEX-2004 NRF-028-PEMEX-2004 NRF-027-PEMEX-2001 NRF-032-PEMEX-2005 NRF-034-PEMEX-2004 NRF-035-PEMEX-2005 NRF-036-PEMEX-2003 NRF-046-PEMEX-2003 NRF-048-PEMEX-2007 NRF-051-PEMEX-2006 NRF-053-PEMEX-2006 NRF-065-PEMEX-2006 NRF-070-PEMEX-2004 NRF-091-PEMEX-2007 NRF-095-PEMEX-2004 NRF-115-PEMEX-2006 NRF-125-PEMEX-2005 NRF-137-PEMEX-2006 NRF-138-PEMEX-2006 NRF-139-PEMEX-2006 NRF-140-PEMEX-2005 NRF-146-PEMEX-2011 NRF-147-PEMEX-2006 NRF-148-PEMEX-2005 NRF-149-PEMEX-2005 NRF-150-PEMEX-2005 NRF-152-PEMEX-2006 NRF-159-PEMEX-2006 NRF-160-PEMEX-2007 NRF-162-PEMEX-2006 NRF-163-PEMEX-2006 NRF-164-PEMEX-2006 NRF-168-PEMEX-2006 DESCRIPCIN Proteccin con recubrimientos anticorrosivos a instalaciones superficiales de ductos. Ropa de trabajo para trabajadores de Petrleos Mexicanos y Organismos Subsidiarios Identificacin de productos transportados por tuberas o contenidos en tanques de almacenamiento. Espaciamientos mnimos y criterios para la distribucin de instalaciones industriales en centros de trabajos de Petrleos Mexicanos y Organismos Subsidiarios. Diseo y construccin de recipientes a presin. Esprragos y tornillos de acero de aleacin y acero inoxidable para servicios de alta y baja temperatura. Sistemas de tuberas en plantas industriales-diseo y especificaciones de materiales. Aislamiento trmico para altas temperaturas, en equipos, recipientes y tubera superficial. Sistemas de tuberas en plantas industriales. Instalacin y pruebas. Clasificacin de reas peligrosas y seleccin de equipo elctrico. Protocolos de comunicacin en sistemas digitales de monitoreo y control. Diseo de instalaciones elctricas en plantas industriales. Sistemas de aire acondicionado. Sistemas de proteccin anticorrosiva a base de recubrimientos para instalaciones superficiales. Recubrimientos A Base de Concreto A Prueba de Fuego en Estructuras y Soportes de Equipos Sistema de proteccin a tierra para instalaciones petroleras. Grupo generador (planta de emergencia). Motores elctricos. Mangueras para servicio de contraincendio. Sistemas fijos contra incendio cmaras de espuma. Diseo de estructuras de acero. Diseo de Estructuras de concreto Soportes de concreto para tubera. Sistemas de drenajes. Tablero de distribucin en media tensin. Apartarrayos tipo estacin. Instrumentos de medicin para temperatura. Secadores de aire para instrumentos. Pruebas hidrostticas de tuberas y equipos. Actuadores para vlvulas. Cimentacin de estructuras y equipo. Demoliciones y desmantelamientos. Placas de orificio concntricas. Vlvulas de control con actuador tipo neumtico. Manmetros. Bancos de resistencia.

REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CRDENAS MINATITLN, VER. MXICO


PROYECTO:

MODERNIZACIN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIN CONTINUA CCR DE U -500, DE LA REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CARDENAS DE MINATITLN, VER., QUE INCLUYE INGENIERA DE DETALLE, PROCURA DE MATERIALES, FABRICACIN, MONTAJE, PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO.

D. ESPECIFICACIONES DE PEMEX
IDENTIFICACIN 3.243.01 (1976) 3.301.01 (1988) 800-18540-DE-SISOPA-001 800-18540-DE-SISOPA-002 800-80000-DCSIPA-L-001 800-80000-DCSIPA-L-002 CME-004 REV. 1 CME-010 REV. 3 CME-035 REV. 2 CME-036 REV.1 CME-048 REV. 2 CME-049 REV. 1 DESCRIPCIN ESCALERAS MARINAS Y RECTAS. EMBALAJE Y MARCADO PARA EMBARQUE DE EQUIPOS Y MATERIALES. DISPOSICIONES ESPECFICAS DE SISOPA PARA EL USO DE EQUIPOS DE IZAJE (GRAS Y TORRES). DISPOSICIONES ESPECFICAS DE SISOPA PARA TRABAJOS EN ALTURA. LINEAMIENTOS PARA LA REALIZACIN DE OPERACIONES PELIGROSAS. LINEAMIENTOS PARA EL CONTROL DE ACCESO Y CIRCULACIN DE VEHCULOS AUTOMOTORES Y VEHCULOS PESADOS EN LOS CENTROS DE TRABAJO. PROCEDIMIENTO PARA RECEPCIN DE MOTORES ELCTRICOS. PROCEDIMIENTO PARA PRUEBAS DE CAMPO PARA LA RECEPCIN DE CABLES AISLADOS DE ALTA TENSIN PROCEDIMIENTO PARA PRUEBAS ELCTRICAS A ARRANCADORES MAYORES DE 600 VOLTS. PROCEDIMIENTO PARA PRUEBAS DE INTERRUPTORES TERMO MAGNTICOS. PROCEDIMIENTO PARA INSTALACIN DE PORTACANDADO, CANDADOS, ETIQUETAS Y DOBLE SEGURO DE DESCONEXIN EN ARRANCADORES PROCEDIMIENTO PARA PUESTA EN SERVICIO DE UNA SUBESTACIN ELCTRICA O DE UN CENTRO DE CONTROL DE MOTORES (INSTALACIONES NUEVAS) GUA PARA ORIENTAR LAS ACTIVIDADES DE DIFUSIN, EXPLICACIN Y APLICACIN DE LA POLTICA DE SEGURIDAD INDUSTRIAL Y DE PROTECCIN AMBIENTAL DE PETRLEOS MEXICANOS. PROCEDIMIENTO PARA LA INSPECCIN DE TUBERA RECIN CONSTRUIDA ANTES DE OPERAR. PROCEDIMIENTO PARA EL REGISTRO, ANLISIS Y PROGRAMACIN DE LA MEDICIN PREVENTIVA DE ESPESORES. PROCEDIMIENTO PARA EFECTUAR LAS PRUEBAS HIDROSTTICAS A TUBERAS Y EQUIPOS DE LAS INSTALACIONES DEPENDIENTES DE PEMEX REFINACIN. PROCEDIMIENTO PARA EL ESTABLECIMIENTO DEL INDICE DE CONFIABILIDAD DEL ESTADO FISICO DE LAS INSTALACIONES DE LOS CENTROS DE TRABAJO DE PEMEX REFINACION REGLAS DE SEGURIDAD PARA EFECTUAR TRABAJOS EN ESPACIOS CONFINADOS. GUA PARA EL VAPORIZADO DE LNEAS Y EQUIPOS DE PROCESO. DRENAJES EN LAS REAS INDUSTRIALES DE PEMEX REFINACIN. SISTEMAS AUTOMTICOS PARA LA DETECCIN Y ALARMA POR FUEGO O POR ATMSFERAS RIESGOSAS. PROCEDIMIENTO PARA EL ANLISIS DE INCIDENTES. (RBOL DE CAUSAS DE RAZ). REGLAMENTO DE SEGURIDAD PARA CONTRATISTAS. REGLAMENTO DE SEGURIDAD FSICA INDUSTRIALES DE PEMEX REFINACION. ADMINISTRACIN INDUSTRIALES DE CAMBIOS EN PARA LAS E DE INSTALACIONES INSTALACIONES INCIDENTES Y

DG-ASIPA-SI-08600 REV. 1 DG-GPASI-IT-00202 REV. 2 DG-GPASI-IT-00204 DG-GPASI-IT-00400 REV. 1 (1996) DG-GPASI-IT-04006 REV. 1 (1995) DG-GPASI-SI-02510 REV. 3 (2008) DG-GPASI-SI-02520 REV. 1 DG-GPASI-SI-02703 (1999) DG-GPASI-SI-02720 REV. 1 DG-GPASI-SI-06101 REV. 2 (2007) DG-GPASI-SI-08200 REV. 4 (2008) DG-GPASI-SI-08400 REV. 1 DG-SASIPA-SI-04901 REV. 6 (2007) DG-SASIPA-SI-06100 REV. 6 (2007)

PROCESOS REPORTE

PROCEDIMIENTO PARA ACCIDENTES

EL ANLISIS Y

REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CRDENAS MINATITLN, VER. MXICO


PROYECTO:

MODERNIZACIN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIN CONTINUA CCR DE U -500, DE LA REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CARDENAS DE MINATITLN, VER., QUE INCLUYE INGENIERA DE DETALLE, PROCURA DE MATERIALES, FABRICACIN, MONTAJE, PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO.
IDENTIFICACIN DG-SASIPA-SI-06102 REV. 3 (2007) DG-SASIPA-SI-06920 REV. 3 DG-SASIPA-SI-08402 REV. 2 (2004) GNT-SNP-E008 GNT-SNP-T001 GNT-SNP-T003 GNT-SSIME-G002-2008 REV. 0 GPASI-IT-0209 NO.2.425.01 (1991) NO.2.431.01(1986) P.1.0000.06 (2000) P.1.0000.09 (2005) P.2.0220.01 (2000) P.2.0401.01 (1999) P.2.201.01 (1990) P.2.201.03 (1990) P.2.211.03 (1998) P.2.211.04 (1999) P.2.220.02 (1999) P.2.225.01(1990) P.2.231.01 (1999) P.3.0226.01(2000) P.3.0403.01(2007) P.3.223.01 (2000) P.3.231.01 (1999) P.3.346.01 (1983) P.4.0217.03 (2000) SP-SASIPA-SI-02310 DESCRIPCIN GUA PARA LA COMUNICACIN DE ACCIDENTES. PROCEDIMIENTO PARA VERIFICAR LAS CONDICIONES DE SEGURIDAD Y LOS REQUERIMIENTOS AMBIENTALES ANTES DE INICIAR LA OPERACIN DE INSTALACIONES INDUSTRIALES NUEVAS. DISPOSICIN ADMINISTRATIVA PARA EL USO DE ROPA Y EQUIPO DE PROTECCIN POR PERSONAL AJENO A PETRLEOS MEXICANOS. RTULOS PARA EQUIPO ELCTRICO EN PLANTAS Y SUBESTACIONES ELCTRICAS. FLEXIBILIDAD DE TUBERAS. DISEO DE TUBERAS. LINEAMIENTOS PARA ELABORAR PLANOS Y DOCUMENTOS. PROCEDIMIENTO PARA EFECTUAR LA INSPECCIN DE TUBERAS DE PROCESO Y SERVICIOS AUXILIARES EN OPERACIN DE LAS INSTALACIONES DE PEMEX REFINACIN. SISTEMAS DE TUBERAS DE REFINERAS DE PETRLEO. SISTEMAS PARA AGUA DE SERVICIO CONTRAINCENDIO ESTRUCTURACIN DE PLANOS Y DOCUMENTOS TCNICOS DE INGENIERA EMBALAJE Y MARCADO DE EQUIPOS Y MATERIALES. DISEO DE SISTEMAS DE TIERRAS. SIMBOLOGA DE EQUIPO DE PROCESO. SMBOLOS ELCTRICOS SMBOLOS DE COMUNICACIONES ELCTRICAS CABLES DE ENERGA MULTICONDUCTORES. CABLES DE ENERGA MONOCONDUCTORES. CANALIZACIONES ELCTRICAS Y TELEFNICAS. CANALIZACIONES ELCTRICAS Y TELEFNICAS ALUMBRADO PARA INSTALACIONES INDUSTRIALES. CONSTRUCCIN DE CANALIZACIONES ELCTRICAS SUBTERRNEAS (EMPALMES). COLORES Y LETREROS PARA IDENTIFICACIN DE INSTALACIONES Y VEHICULOS DE TRANSPORTE. INSTALACIN DE SISTEMAS DE CONEXIN A TIERRA INSTALACIN DE SISTEMAS DE ALUMBRADO PARA PLANTAS INDUSTRIALES. CONSTRUCCIN DE CANALIZACIONES ELCTRICAS SUBTERRNEAS PRUEBAS DE AISLAMIENTO EN CAMPO DE EQUIPO ELCTRICO. PROCEDIMIENTO PARA LA AUTORIZACIN DE TRABAJOS EN INSTALACIONES INDUSTRIALES DE LA SUBDIRECCIN DE PRODUCCIN.

E. CODIGOS, ESTANDARES Y PRCTICAS RECOMENDADAS


Deber usarse la edicin/revisin y adendas ms recientes de los citados documentos.

AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS (ASME)


IDENTIFICACIN ASME B1.1 ASME B16.1 ASME B16.10 ASME B16.11 ASME B16.20 ASME B16.21 ASME B16.25 ASME B16.34 ASME B16.36 ASME B16.47 DESCRIPCIN UNIFIELD INCH SCREW THREADS (UN AND UNR THREAD FORM) GRAY IRON PIPE FLANGES AND FLANGED FITTINGS CLASSES 25, 125, AND 250 FACE TO FACE END TO END DIMENSIONS OF VALVES. FORGED FITTINGS, SOCKET-WELDING AND THREADED METALLIC GASKETS FOR PIPE FLANGES. RING-JOINT, SPIRAL-WOUND, AND JACKETED NONMETALLIC FLAT GASKETS FOR PIPE FLANGES BUTTWELDING ENDS VALVES-FLANGED, THREADED, AND WELDING END. ORIFICE FLANGES. LARGE DIAMETER STEEL FLANGES. NPS 26 THROUGH NPS 60 METRIC/INCH

REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CRDENAS MINATITLN, VER. MXICO


PROYECTO:

MODERNIZACIN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIN CONTINUA CCR DE U -500, DE LA REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CARDENAS DE MINATITLN, VER., QUE INCLUYE INGENIERA DE DETALLE, PROCURA DE MATERIALES, FABRICACIN, MONTAJE, PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO.
IDENTIFICACIN ASME B16.5 ASME B16.9 ASME B18.2.1 ASME B31.3 ASME B36.10M ASME B36.19M ASME B46.1 ASME MFC 3M ASME PTC 19.5 ASME SEC. VIII DIV. 1 ASME SEC. VIII DIV. 2 DESCRIPCIN STANDARD PIPE FLANGES AND FLANGED FITTINGS. NPS 1/2 THROUGH NPS 24 METRIC/INCH STANDARD FACTORY-MADE WROUGHT BUTTWELDING FITTINGS SQUARE, HEX, HEAVY HEX, AND ASKEW HEAD BOLTS AND HEX, HEAVY HEX, HEX FLANGE, LOBED HEAD, AND LAG SCREWS (INCH SERIES) PROCESS PIPING WELDED AND SEAMLESS WROUGHT STEEL PIPE. STAINLESS STEEL PIPE SURFACE TEXTURE (SURFACE ROUGHNESS WAVINESS, AND LAY). MEASUREMENT OF FLUID FLOW IN PIPES USING ORIFICE, NOZZLE, AND VENTURI. FLOW MEASUREMENT BOILER AND PRESSURE VESSEL CODE, RULES FOR CONSTRUCTION OF PRESSURE VESSELS. BOILER AND PRESSURE VESSEL CODE, ALTERNATIVE RULES.

AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)


IDENTIFICACIN ASTM A105/A105M ASTM A106/A106M ASTM A139/A139M ASTM A153/A153M STANDARD SPECIFICATION APPLICATIONS DESCRIPCIN FOR CARBON STEEL FORGINGS FOR PIPING

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR SEAMLESS CARBON STEEL PIPE FOR HIGHTEMPERATURE SERVICE STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ELECTRIC-FUSION (ARC)-WELDED STEEL PIPE (NPS 4 AND OVER) STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ZINC COATING (HOT-DIP) ON IRON AND STEEL HARDWARE. STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR FORGED OR ROLLED ALLOY AND STAINLESS STEEL PIPE FLANGES, FORGED FITTINGS, AND VALVES AND PARTS FOR HIGHTEMPERATURE SERVICE STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ALLOY-STEEL AND STAINLESS STEEL BOLTING FOR HIGH TEMPERATURE OR HIGH PRESSURE SERVICE AND OTHER SPECIAL PURPOSE APPLICATIONS. STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR CARBON AND ALLOY STEEL NUTS FOR BOLTS FOR HIGH PRESSURE OR HIGH TEMPERATURE SERVICE, OR BOTH. STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR STEEL CASTINGS, CARBON, SUITABLE FOR FUSION WELDING, FOR HIGH-TEMPERATURE SERVICE STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR STEEL CASTINGS, MARTENSITIC STAINLESS AND ALLOY, FOR PRESSURE-CONTAINING PARTS, SUITABLE FOR HIGH-TEMPERATURE SERVICE STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR PIPING FITTINGS OF WROUGHT CARBON STEEL AND ALLOY STEEL FOR MODERATE AND HIGH TEMPERATURE SERVICE STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR CHROMIUM AND CHROMIUM-NICKEL STAINLESS STEEL PLATE, SHEET, AND STRIP FOR PRESSURE VESSELS AND FOR GENERAL APPLICATIONS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR SEAMLESS AND WELDED AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEEL TUBING FOR GENERAL SERVICE STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR STEEL CASTINGS, CARBON, FOR GENERAL APPLICATION

ASTM A182/A182M

ASTM A193/A193M ASTM A194/A194M

ASTM A216/A216M

ASTM A217/217M ASTM A234/A234M ASTM A240/240M ASTM A269 ASTM A27/A27M

REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CRDENAS MINATITLN, VER. MXICO


PROYECTO:

MODERNIZACIN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIN CONTINUA CCR DE U -500, DE LA REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CARDENAS DE MINATITLN, VER., QUE INCLUYE INGENIERA DE DETALLE, PROCURA DE MATERIALES, FABRICACIN, MONTAJE, PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO.
IDENTIFICACIN ASTM A285/285M ASTM A307 ASTM A312/A312M ASTM A320/320M ASTM A335/A335M ASTM A351/A351M DESCRIPCIN STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR PRESSURE VESSEL PLATES, CARBON STEEL, LOW AND INTERMEDIATE-TENSILE STRENGTH STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR CARBON STEEL BOLTS AND STUDS, 60 000 PSI TENSILE STRENGTH STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR SEAMLESS, WELDED, AND HEAVILY COLD WORKED AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEEL PIPES STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ALLOY-STEEL AND STAINLESS STEEL BOLTING MATERIALS FOR LOW-TEMPERATURE SERVICE STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR SEAMLESS FERRITIC ALLOY-STEEL PIPE FOR HIGHTEMPERATURE SERVICE STANDARD SPECIFICATION CONTAINING PARTS FOR CASTINGS, AUSTENITIC, FOR PRESSURE-

ASTM A358/A358M ASTM A36/36M ASTM A370 ASTM A377 ASTM A403/A403M ASTM A409/A409M ASTM A47/A47M ASTM A500/A500M ASTM A516/516M ASTM A53/A53M ASTM A532/532M ASTM A536 ASTM A563 ASTM A74 ASTM B443 ASTM B62

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ELECTRIC-FUSION-WELDED AUSTENITIC CHROMIUM-NICKEL STAINLESS STEEL PIPE FOR HIGH-TEMPERATURE SERVICE AND GENERAL APPLICATIONS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR CARBON STRUCTURAL STEEL STANDARD TEST METHODS AND DEFINITIONS FOR MECHANICAL TESTING OF STEEL PRODUCTS STANDARD INDEX OF SPECIFICATIONS FOR DUCTILE-IRON PRESSURE PIPE STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR WROUGHT AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEEL PIPING FITTINGS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR WELDED LARGE DIAMETER AUSTENITIC STEEL PIPE FOR CORROSIVE OR HIGH-TEMPERATURE SERVICE STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR FERRITIC MALLEABLE IRON CASTINGS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR COLD-FORMED WELDED AND SEAMLESS CARBON STEEL STRUCTURAL TUBING IN ROUNDS AND SHAPES STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR PRESSURE VESSEL PLATES, CARBON STEEL, FOR MODERATE- AND LOWER-TEMPERATURE SERVICE STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR PIPE, STEEL, BLACK AND HOT-DIPPED, ZINCCOATED, WELDED AND SEAMLESS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ABRASION-RESISTANT CAST IRONS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR DUCTILE IRON CASTINGS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR CARBON AND ALLOY STEEL NUTS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR CAST IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR NICKEL-CHROMIUM-MOLYBDENUM-COLUMBIUM ALLOY (UNS N06625) AND NICKEL-CHROMIUM-MOLYBDENUM-SILICON ALLOY (UNS N06219) PLATE, SHEET, AND STRIP. STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR COMPOSITION BRONZE OR OUNCE METAL CASTINGS

AMERICAN PETROLEUM INSTITUTE (API)


IDENTIFICACIN API RP 500 DESCRIPCIN RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR CLASSIFICATION OF LOCATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL

REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CRDENAS MINATITLN, VER. MXICO


PROYECTO:

MODERNIZACIN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIN CONTINUA CCR DE U -500, DE LA REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CARDENAS DE MINATITLN, VER., QUE INCLUYE INGENIERA DE DETALLE, PROCURA DE MATERIALES, FABRICACIN, MONTAJE, PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO.
IDENTIFICACIN DESCRIPCIN INSTALLATIONS AT PETROLEUM FACILITIES CLASSIFIED AS CLASS I, DIVISION 1 AND DIVISION 2 RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR CLASSIFICATION OF LOCATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS AT PETROLEUM FACILITIES CLASSIFIED AS CLASS I, ZONE 0, AND ZONE 2 SIZING, SELECTION AND INSTALLATION OF PRESSURE-RELIEVING DEVICES IN REFINERIES. PART 2 - INSTALLATION SIZING, SELECTION AND INSTALLATION OF PRESSURE-RELIEVING DEVICES IN REFINERIES. PART 1- SIZING AND SELECTION PRESSURE-RELIEVING AND DEPRESSURING SYSTEMS FLANGED STEEL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES SEAT TIGHTNESS OF PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES VALVE INSPECTION AND TESTING SPECIAL PURPOSE COUPLINGS FOR PETROLEUM, CHEMICAL, AND GAS INDUSTRY SERVICES. MANUAL OF PETROLEUM MEASUREMENT STANDARDS CHAPTER 14 NATURAL GAS FLUIDS MEASUREMENT SECTION 3 CONCENTRIC, SQUARE-EDGED ORIFICE METERS PART 1 GENERAL EQUATIONS AND UNCERTAINTY GUIDELINES

API RP 505 API RP 520 API STD 520 API STD 521 API STD 526 API STD 527 API STD 598 API STD 671 API MPMS 14.3.1

AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)


IDENTIFICACIN ANSI/ISA 12.12.01 ANSI/ISA 60079-7 (12.16.01) ANSI/ISA 60079-1 (12.22.01) ANSI/ISA 60079-18 (12.23.01) ANSI/ISA 60079-0 (12.00.01) DESCRIPCIN NONINCENDIVE ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT FOR USE IN CLASS I AND II, DIVISION 2 AND CLASS III, DIVISIONS 1 AND 2 HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) LOCATIONS EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERES-PART 7: EQUIPMENT PROTECTION BY INCREASED SAFETY "E". EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERES-PART 1: EQUIPMENT PROTECTION BY FLAMEPROOF ENCLOSURES D. ELECTRICAL APPARATUS FOR USE IN CLASS I, ZONE 1 HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) LOCATIONS: TYPE OF PROTECTION - ENCAPSULATION M EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERESPART 0: EQUIPMENTGENERAL REQUIREMENTS

PIPE FABRICATION INSTITUTE (PFI).


IDENTIFICACIN PFI ES-7 PFI ES-24 PFI ES-27 PFI ES-35 DESCRIPCIN MINIMUM LENGTH AND SPACING FOR WELDED NOZZLES PIPE BENDING METHODS, TOLERANCES, PROCESS AND MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS VISUAL EXAMINATION" THE PURPOSE, MEANING AND LIMITATION OF THE TERM NONSYMMETRICAL BEVELS AND JOINT CONFIGURATIONS FOR BUTT WELDS

AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)


IDENTIFICACIN AWS D1.1/D1.1M AWS A3.0 AWS A5.1/A5.1M AWS A5.5/A5.5M DESCRIPCIN STRUCTURAL WELDING CODE STEEL. STANDARD WELDING TERMS AND DEFINITIONS INCLUDING TERMS FOR ADHESIVE BONDING, BRAZING, SOLDERING, THERMAL CUTTING, AND THERMAL SPRAYING. SPECIFICATION FOR CARBON STEEL ELECTRODES FOR SHIELDED METAL ARC WELDING. SPECIFICATION FOR LOW-ALLOY STEEL ELECTRODES FOR SHIELDED METAL ARC WELDING.

MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF VALVE AND FITTINGS INDUSTRY (Estndares MSS)


IDENTIFICACIN MSS SP 6 DESCRIPCIN STANDARD FINISHES FOR CONTACT FACES OF PIPE FLANGES AND CONNECTING-END FLANGES OF VALVES AND FITTINGS

REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CRDENAS MINATITLN, VER. MXICO


PROYECTO:

MODERNIZACIN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIN CONTINUA CCR DE U -500, DE LA REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CARDENAS DE MINATITLN, VER., QUE INCLUYE INGENIERA DE DETALLE, PROCURA DE MATERIALES, FABRICACIN, MONTAJE, PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO.
IDENTIFICACIN MSS SP 45 MSS SP 58 MSS SP 72 MSS SP 75 MSS SP 80 MSS SP 85 ANSI/MSS SP 69 MSS SP 97 DESCRIPCIN BYPASS AND DRAIN CONNECTIONS PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS MATERIALS, DESIGN, MANUFACTURE, SELECTION, APPLICATION, AND INSTALLATION. BALL VALVES WITH FLANGED OR BUTT-WELDING ENDS FOR GENERAL SERVICE SPECIFICATION FOR HIGH-TEST, WROUGHT, BUTT-WELDING FITTINGS BRONZE GATE, GLOBE, ANGLE, AND CHECK VALVES GRAY IRON GLOBE& ANGLE VALVES, FLANGED AND THREADED ENDS PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS - SELECTION AND APPLICATION. INTEGRALLY REINFORCED FORGED BRANCH OUTLET FITTINGS - SOCKET WELDING, THREADED AND BUTTWELDING ENDS

INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS AND ENGINEERS (IEEE)


IDENTIFICACIN IEEE PUBL. 98 IEEE STD 4 IEEE STD C37.010 IEEE STD C37.20.1 IEEE STD C37.20.2 IEEE STD C37.20.2 IEEE STD C37.20.2B IEEE STD C37.91 IEEE STD C37.96 IEEE STD C37.101 IEEE STD C37.102 IEEE STD 43 IEEE STD C50.12 IEEE-STD-56 IEEE STD C57.12.01 DESCRIPCIN GUIDE FOR THE PREPARATION OF TEST PROCEDURES FOR THE EVALUATION AND ESTABLISHMENT OF TEMPERATURE INDICES OF SOLID ELECTRICAL INSULATION MATERIALS IEEE STANDARD TECHNIQUES FOR HIGH-VOLTAGE TESTING. IEEE APPLICATION GUIDE FOR AC HIGH-VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS RATED ON A SYMMETRICAL CURRENT BASIS IEEE STANDARD FOR METAL-ENCLOSED LOW-VOLTAGE POWER CIRCUIT BREAKER SWITCHGEAR IEEE STANDARD FOR METAL-CLAD AND STATION-TYPE CUBICLE SWITCHGEAR IEEE STANDARD FOR METAL-CLAD SWITCHGEAR SUPPLEMENT TO IEEE STANDARD FOR METAL-CLAD AND STATION-TYPE CUBICLE SWITCHGEAR: CURRENT TRANSFORMERS ACCURACIES IEEE GUIDE FOR PROTECTIVE RELAY APPLICATIONS TO POWER TRANSFORMERS IEEE GUIDE FOR AC MOTOR PROTECTION IEEE GUIDE FOR GENERATOR GROUND PROTECTION IEEE GUIDE FOR GENERATOR GROUND PROTECTION. RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR TESTING INSULATION RESISTANCE OF ROTATING MACHINERY STANDARD FOR SALIENT-POLE 50 HZ AND 60 HZ SYNCHRONOUS GENERATORS AND GENERATOR/MOTORS FOR HYDRAULIC TURBINE APPLICATIONS RATED 5 MVA AND ABOVE GUIDE FOR INSULATION MAINTENANCE OF LARGE ALTERNATING-CURRENT ROTATING MACHINERY (10,000 KVA AND LARGER) IEEE STANDARD GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DRY-TYPE AND POWER TRANSFORMERS INCLUDING THOSE WITH SOLID CAST AND/OR RESIN-ENCAPSULATED WINDINGS IEEE STANDARD FOR TRANSFORMERSTYPE UNDERGROUND, SELF-COOLED, SINGLEPHASE. DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS WITH SEPARABLE, INSULATED, HIGH-VOLTAGE CONNECTORS; HIGH VOLTAGE (24 940 GRD Y / 14 400 V AND BELOW) LOW VOLTAGE (240/120 V, 167 KVA AND SMALLER) IEEE GUIDE FOR CONDUCTING A TRANSIENT VOLTAGE ANALYSIS OF A DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMER COIL IEEE STANDARD TEST CODE FOR DRY-TYPE DISTRIBUTION AND POWER TRANSFORMERS IEEE STANDARD REQUIREMENTS FOR INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS IEEE GUIDE FOR APPLICATION OF POWER APPARATUS BUSHINGS IEEE GUIDE FOR LIQUID-IMMERSED TRANSFORMER THROUGH-FAULT-CURRENT DURATION IEEE GUIDE FOR TRANSFORMERS DIRECTLY CONNECTED TO GENERATORS IEEE TRIAL-USE GUIDE FOR THE DETECTION OF ACOUSTIC EMISSIONS FROM PARTIAL DISCHARGES IN OIL-IMMERSED POWER TRANSFORMERS IEEE GUIDE FOR THE APPLICATION OF NEUTRAL GROUNDING IN ELECTRICAL UTILITY SYSTEMS PART I- INTRODUCTION IEEE GUIDE FOR THE APPLICATION OF NEUTRAL GROUNDING IN ELECTRICAL UTILITY

IEEE STD C57.12.23 IEEE STD C57.12.58 IEEE STD C57.12.91 IEEE STD C57.13 IEEE STD C57.19.100 IEEE STD C57.109 IEEE STD C57.116 IEEE STD C57.127 IEEE STD C62.92.1 IEEE STD C62.92.2

REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CRDENAS MINATITLN, VER. MXICO


PROYECTO:

MODERNIZACIN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIN CONTINUA CCR DE U -500, DE LA REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CARDENAS DE MINATITLN, VER., QUE INCLUYE INGENIERA DE DETALLE, PROCURA DE MATERIALES, FABRICACIN, MONTAJE, PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO.
IDENTIFICACIN IEEE STD C62.92.3 IEEE STD C62.92.4 ANSI-IEEE STD 80 IEEE STD 81 IEEE STD 100 IEEE STD 112 IEEE-STD-115 IEEE STD 141 IEEE STD 142 IEEE STD 241 IEEE STD 242 IEEE STD 399 IEEE STD 446 IEEE STD 484 IEEE STD 488 IEEE STD 493 IEEE STD 519 IEEE STD 522 IEEE STD 525 IEEE STD 602 IEEE STD 605 IEEE STD 665 IEEE STD 666 IEEE STD 738 IEEE STD 739 DESCRIPCIN SYSTEMS PART II- GROUNDING OF SYNCHRONOUS GENERATOR SYSTEMS IEEE GUIDE FOR THE APPLICATION OF NEUTRAL GROUNDING IN ELECTRICAL UTILITY SYSTEMS, PART III- GENERATOR AUXILIARY SYSTEMS. IEEE GUIDE FOR THE APPLICATION OF NEUTRAL GROUNDING IN ELECTRICAL UTILITY SYSTEMS PART IV- DISTRIBUTION IEEE GUIDE FOR SAFETY IN AC SUBSTATION GROUNDING IEEE GUIDE FOR MEASURING EARTH RESISTIVITY, GROUND IMPEDANCE, AND EARTH SURFACE POTENTIALS OF A GROUND SYSTEM. THE IIIE STANDARD DICTIONARY OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS TERMS AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARD / IEEE STANDARD TEST PROCEDURE FOR POLYPHASE INDUCTION MOTORS AND GENERATORS. TEST PROCEDURES FOR SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES PART I ACCEPTANCE AND PERFORMANCE TESTING PART II TEST PROCEDURES AND PARAMETER DETERMINATION FOR DYNAMIC ANALYSIS IEEE RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR ELECTRIC POWER DISTRIBUTION FOR INDUSTRIAL PLANTS RED BOOK IEEE RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR GROUNDING OF INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL POWER SYSTEMS GREEN BOOK IEEE RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR ELECTRIC POWER SYSTEMS IN COMMERCIAL BUILDINGS. GRAY BOOK. IEEE RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR PROTECTION AND COORDINATION OF INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL POWER SYSTEMS. BUFF BOOK. INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL POWER SYSTEMS ANALYSIS IEEE RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR EMERGENCY AND STANDBY POWER SYSTEMS FOR INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL APPLICATIONS. ORANGE BOOK. IEEE RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR INSTALLATION, DESIGN, AND IMPLEMENTATION OF VENTED LEAD-ACID BATTERIES FOR STATIONARY APPLICATIONS. STANDARD DIGITAL INTERFACE FOR PROGRAMABLE INSTRUMENTATION. IEEE RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR DESIGN OF RELIABLE INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL POWER SYSTEMS GOLD BOOK. IEEE RECOMMENDED PRACTICES AND REQUIREMENTS FOR HARMONIC CONTROL IN ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM GUIDE FOR TESTING TURN INSULATION OF FORM-WOUND STATOR COILS FOR ALTERNATING-CURRENT ELECTRIC MACHINES IEEE GUIDE FOR THE DESIGN AND INSTALLATION OF CABLE SYSTEMS IN SUBSTATIONS IEEE RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR ELECTRIC SYSTEMS HEALTH CARE FACILITIES. WHITE BOOK. IEEE GUIDE FOR DESIGN OF SUBSTATION RIGID-BUS STRUCTURES IEEE GUIDE FOR GENERATING STATION GROUNDING IEEE DESIGN GUIDE FOR ELECTRIC POWER SERVICE SYSTEMS FOR GENERATING STATIONS IEEE STANDARD FOR CALCULATING THE CURRENT-TEMPERATURE RELATIONSHIP OF BARE OVERHEAD CONDUCTORS IEEE RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR ENERGY MANAGEMENT IN INDUSTRIAL AND COMMERCIAL FACILITIES. BRONZE BOOK. STANDARD FOR INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY TELECOMMUNICATIONS AND INFORMATION EXCHANGE BETWEEN SYSTEMS LOCAL AND METROPOLITAN AREA NETWORKS SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS PART 3: CARRIER SENSE MULTIPLE ACCESS WITH COLLISION DETECTION (CSMA/CD) ACCESS METHOD AND PHYSICAL LAYER SPECIFICATIONS STANDARD FOR LOCAL AREA NETWORK. RECOMENDED PRACTICE BROADBAND LOCAL AREA NETWORK IEEE RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR POWERING AND GROUNDING ELECTRONICS EQUIPMENT. ESMERALD BOOK. GUIDE FOR SYNCHRONOUS GENERATOR MODELING PRACTICES IN STABILITY ANALYSES

IEEE 802.3 IEEE STD. 802-5-89 IEEE STD. 802-7-89 IEEE STD 1100 IEEE STD. 1110

REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CRDENAS MINATITLN, VER. MXICO


PROYECTO:

MODERNIZACIN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIN CONTINUA CCR DE U -500, DE LA REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CARDENAS DE MINATITLN, VER., QUE INCLUYE INGENIERA DE DETALLE, PROCURA DE MATERIALES, FABRICACIN, MONTAJE, PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO.
IDENTIFICACIN IEEE STD 1115 IEEE STD 1184 IEEE STD 1185 IEEE STD 1187 IEEE STD 1221 IEEE STD 1243 IEEE STD 1291 IEEE STD 1313.1 DESCRIPCIN IEEE RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR SIZING NIKEL-CADMIUM BATTERIES FOR STATIONARY APPLICATIONS IEEE GUIDE FOR THE SELECTION AND SIZING OF BATTERIES FOR UNINTERRUMPIBLE POWER SYSTEMS IEEE GUIDE FOR INSTALLATION METHODS FOR GENERATING STATION CABLES IEEE RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR INSTALLATION DESIGN AND INSTALLATION OF VALVE-REGULATED LEAD-ACID STORAGE BATTERIES FOR STATIONARY APPICATIONS IEEE GUIDE FOR FIRE HAZAR ASSESSMENT OF ELECTRICAL INSULATING MATERIALS IN ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS IEEE GUIDE FOR IMPROVING THE LIGHTNING PERFORMANCE OF TRANSMISSION LINES IEEE GUIDE FOR PARTIAL DISCHARGE MEASUREMENT IN POWER SWITCHGEAR IEEE STANDARD FOR INSULATION COORDINATION-DEFINITIONS, PRINCIPIES AND RULES

NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)


IDENTIFICACIN NEMA 250 NEMA IC56-78 NEMA ICS 6 NEMA MG 1 NEMA MG 2 NEMA PB 1 NEMA PB 2 NEMA PE 1 NEMA PE 5 NEMA SG 3 NEMA SG 4 NEMA SG 5 NEMA SG 6 NEMA SM23 NEMA VE 1 NEMA VE 2 NEMA WD6 DESCRIPCIN ENCLOSURES FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT (1000 VOLTS MAXIMUM) ENCLOSURE FOR INDUSTRIAL CONTROL AND SYSTEMS. INDUSTRIAL CONTROL AND SYSTEM ENCLOSURES. MOTORS AND GENERATORS SAFETY STANDARD AND GUIDE FOR SELECTION, INSTALLATION, AND USE OF ELECTRICAL MOTORS AND GENERATORS PANELBOARDS DEADFRONT DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEMS (UPS)-SPECIFICATION AND PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION UTILYTY BATTERY CHARGERS POWER SWITCHING EQUIPMENT ALTERNATING HIGH-VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS POWER SWITCHGEAR ASSEMBLIES POWER SWITCHING EQUIPMENT STEAM TURBINES FOR MECHANICAL DRIVE SERVICE. METAL CABLE TRAY SYSTEMS METAL CABLE TRALY INSTALLATION GUIDELINES WIRING DEVICESDIMENSIONAL SPECIFICATIONS

WELDING RESEARCH COUNCIL (WRC)


IDENTIFICACIN WRC No. 107 BULLETIN WRC No. 297 BULLETIN WRC NO. 368 BULLETIN DESCRIPCIN LOCAL STRESS IN SPHERICAL AND CYLINDRICAL SHELLS DUE TO EXTERNAL LOADINGS IN NOZZLES. CYLINDER TO CYLINDER INTERSECTIONS (NOZZLE FLEXIBILITY). STRESS IN INTERSECTING CYLINDERS SUBJECTED TO PRESSURE.

EXPANSIN JOINT MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATON (EJMA)


IDENTIFICACIN EJMA DESCRIPCIN STANDARDS OF EXPANSION JOINT MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION, INC.

UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES, INC. (UL)


IDENTIFICACIN UL 6 UL 6A UL 50 UL 83 UL 508 DESCRIPCIN ELECTRICAL RIGID METAL CONDUIT-STEEL ELECTRICAL RIGID METAL CONDUITALUMINUM, RED BRASS, AND STAINLESS STEEL ENCLOSURES FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT, NON-ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS THERMOPLASTIC-INSULATED WIRES AND CABLES INDUSTRIAL CONTROL EQUIPMENT

REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CRDENAS MINATITLN, VER. MXICO


PROYECTO:

MODERNIZACIN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIN CONTINUA CCR DE U -500, DE LA REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CARDENAS DE MINATITLN, VER., QUE INCLUYE INGENIERA DE DETALLE, PROCURA DE MATERIALES, FABRICACIN, MONTAJE, PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO.
UL 698A UL 698 UL 886 UL 913 UL 1203 UL 1604 UL 1778 INDUSTRIAL CONTROL PANELS RELATING TO HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) LOCATIONS INDUSTRIAL CONTROL EQUIPMENT FOR USE IN HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) LOCATIONS OUTLET BOXES AND FITTINGS FOR USE IN HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) LOCATIONS INTRINSICALLY SAFE APPARATUS AND ASSOCIATED APPARATUS FOR USE IN CLASS I, II, AND III, DIVISION 1, HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) LOCATIONS EXPLOSION-PROOF AND DUST-IGNITION-PROOF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT FOR USE IN HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) LOCATIONS ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT FOR USE IN CLASS I AND II, DIVISION 2, AND CLASS III HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) LOCATIONS UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEMS

AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS (ASCE)


IDENTIFICACIN ASCE/SEI 7-10 DESCRIPCIN MINIMUM DESIGN LOADS FOR BUILDINGS AND OTHER STRUCTURES.

COMISIN FEDERAL DE ELECTRICIDAD (CFE)


IDENTIFICACIN CFE SECCIN C.1.3 CFE SECCIN C.1.4 DESCRIPCIN MANUAL DE DISEO DE OBRAS CIVILES SECCIN C.1.3.- DISEO POR SISMO MANUAL DE DISEO DE OBRAS CIVILES SECCIN C.1.4.- DISEO POR VIENTO

La legislacin aplicable pero sin ser limitativa que regir el proyecto se menciona a continuacin:
DOCUMENTO Ley General del Equilibrio Ecolgico y la Proteccin al Ambiente. Reglamento de la Ley General del Equilibrio Ecolgico y la Proteccin al Ambiente en Materia de reas Naturales Protegidas. Reglamento de la Ley General del Equilibrio Ecolgico y la Proteccin al Ambiente en Materia de Autorregulacin y Auditoras Ambientales Reglamento de la Ley General del Equilibrio Ecolgico y la Proteccin al Ambiente en Materia de Evaluacin del Ambiental. Reglamento de la Ley General del Equilibrio Ecolgico y la Proteccin al Ambiente en Materia de Ordenamiento Ecolgico. Reglamento de la Ley General del Equilibrio Ecolgico y la Proteccin al Ambiente en Materia de Prevencin y Control de la Contaminacin de la Atmsfera. Reglamento de la Ley General del Equilibrio Ecolgico y la Proteccin al Ambiente en Materia de Registro de Emisiones y Transferencia de Contaminantes. Ley de Aguas Nacionales Reglamento de la ley de Aguas Nacionales Ley General para la Prevencin y Gestin Integral de los Residuos Ley Federal Sobre Metrologa y Normalizacin Reglamento de la Ley Federal Sobre Metrologa y Normalizacin Ley del Seguro Social Ley Federal de Derechos Ley de Desarrollo Regional y Urbano del Estado de Nuevo Len. Ley Ambiental del Estado de Nuevo Len Ley General de Salud Ley Federal del Trabajo ACTUALIZACIN ltima reforma publicada DOF 28-01-2011 ltima reforma publicada DOF 28-12-2004 ltima reforma publicada DOF 29-04-2010 ltima reforma publicada DOF 30-05-2000 ltima reforma publicada DOF 28-09-2010 ltima reforma publicada DOF 03-06-2004 ltima reforma publicada DOF 03-06-2004 ltima reforma publicada DOF 20-06-2011 ltima reforma publicada DOF 29-08-2002 ltima reforma publicada DOF 24-05-2011 ltima reforma publicada DOF 19-06-2007 ltima reforma publicada DOF 30-04-2009 ltima reforma publicada DOF 14-01-1999 ltima reforma publicada DOF 27-05-2011 ltima reforma publicada DOF 18-11-2010 ltima reforma publicada P.O. 19-01-2011 ltima reforma publicada P.O. 03-06-2011. ltima reforma publicada DOF 10-06-2011 ltima reforma publicada DOF 17-01-2006

F. LEGISLACIN APLICABLE.

REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CRDENAS MINATITLN, VER. MXICO


PROYECTO:

MODERNIZACIN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIN CONTINUA CCR DE U -500, DE LA REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CARDENAS DE MINATITLN, VER., QUE INCLUYE INGENIERA DE DETALLE, PROCURA DE MATERIALES, FABRICACIN, MONTAJE, PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO.
DOCUMENTO Reglamento Federal de Seguridad, Higiene y Medio Ambiente de Trabajo. Ley de Petrleos Mexicanos Reglamento de la Ley de Petrleos Mexicanos Disposiciones administrativas de contratacin en materia de adquisiciones, arrendamientos, obras y servicios de actividades sustantivas de carcter productivo de Petrleos Mexicanos y Organismos Subsidiarios. Reglamento de Seguridad e Higiene de Petrleos Mexicanos y Organismos Subsidiarios. ACTUALIZACIN ltima reforma publicada DOF 21-01-1997 ltima reforma publicada DOF 28-01-1997 DOF 28-11-2008 DOF 04-09-2009 DOF 06-01-2010 Ao 2007

REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CRDENAS MINATITLN, VER. MXICO


PROYECTO:

MODERNIZACIN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIN CONTINUA CCR DE U-500, DE LA REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CARDENAS DE MINATITLN, VER., QUE INCLUYE INGENIERA DE DETALLE, PROCURA DE MATERIALES, FABRICACIN, MONTAJE, PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO.

ANEXO U
UMIS (UNIDADES MNIMAS INDIVISIBLES)

1 de 6

2 de 6

3 de 6

4 de 6

5 de 6

6 de 6

REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CRDENAS MINATITLN, VER. MXICO


PROYECTO:

MODERNIZACIN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIN CONTINUA CCR DE U-500, DE LA REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CARDENAS DE MINATITLN, VER., QUE INCLUYE INGENIERA DE DETALLE, PROCURA DE MATERIALES, FABRICACIN, MONTAJE, PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO.

ANEXO G
DOCUMENTACIN REQUERIDA POR LAS FUENTES DE FINANCIAMIENTO

1 de 9

REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CRDENAS MINATITLN, VER. MXICO


PROYECTO:

MODERNIZACIN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIN CONTINUA CCR DE U-500, DE LA REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CARDENAS DE MINATITLN, VER., QUE INCLUYE INGENIERA DE DETALLE, PROCURA DE MATERIALES, FABRICACIN, MONTAJE, PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO.

Anexo G: Documentacin Requerida por las Fuentes de Financiamiento 1. Introduccin


Para llevar a cabo el desarrollo de los programas de operacin e inversin de Petrleos Mexicanos, Petrleos Mexicanos o cualquier entidad financiera y/o filial que Petrleos Mexicanos designe para tal efecto, recurre a los mercados financieros para obtener parcial o totalmente los fondos necesarios para financiar las obligaciones derivadas de la ejecucin de dichos proyectos y programas. En este sentido, y dado que para la utilizacin de ciertos instrumentos financieros se requiere de documentacin e informacin detallada y especfica sobre los bienes y/o servicios que se estn suministrando y financiando, los Contratistas y Proveedores deben entregar a Pemex Refinacin, o a quin ste le indique, la documentacin e informacin correspondiente. A esta documentacin e informacin se le denomina Documentacin Requerida por las Fuentes de Financiamiento (la Documentacin). La participacin de los Contratistas y Proveedores en la obtencin y presentacin de la Documentacin Requerida por las Fuentes de Financiamiento es fundamental para la utilizacin eficiente de estos crditos, lo cual le permite a Petrleos Mexicanos continuar con el desarrollo de sus proyectos, generando ms oportunidades de negocio para los Contratistas y Proveedores. El objetivo de este Anexo G es el de informar a los Contratistas y Proveedores, de manera general, sobre la Documentacin que debe presentar a Pemex Refinacin, o a quin ste le indique. Adicionalmente, el Instructivo de Petrleos Mexicanos y sus Organismos Subsidiarios para la Entrega de la Documentacin Requerida por las Fuentes de Financiamiento, (el Instructivo) mismo que les fue proporcionado oportunamente, detalla de manera especfica los formatos y documentos que se deben recabar y presentar. El Instructivo vigente tambin se encuentra disponible en la pgina Internet de Pemex: (www.pemex.com/proveedores/documentacion). Es importante sealar que el Contratista deber entregar al (a las) rea(s) responsable(s) (Mdulo(s) de Financiamiento) de Pemex Refinacin la

2 de 9

REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CRDENAS MINATITLN, VER. MXICO


PROYECTO:

MODERNIZACIN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIN CONTINUA CCR DE U-500, DE LA REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CARDENAS DE MINATITLN, VER., QUE INCLUYE INGENIERA DE DETALLE, PROCURA DE MATERIALES, FABRICACIN, MONTAJE, PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO.

Documentacin Requerida por las Fuentes de Financiamiento (documentos y/o documentos electrnicos), que en su caso corresponda. Si el Contratista ha cumplido con la entrega de la Documentacin Requerida por las Fuentes de Financiamiento, el rea responsable (Mdulo de Financiamiento): a) registrar en los sistemas sobre dicho cumplimiento, con lo que el Contratista podr continuar con los trmites de pago de su(s) factura(s), o b) emitir el Comprobante de Seguimiento de Documentacin, el cual formar parte de la documentacin que el Contratista presente para continuar con los trmites de pago de su(s) factura(s). Pemex Refinacin no estar obligado a dar trmite al pago de su(s) factura(s) cuando el Contratista injustificadamente no entregue la Documentacin Requerida por las Fuentes de Financiamiento que corresponda. El Contratista debe considerar las acciones necesarias para la obtencin y presentacin correcta y oportuna a Pemex Refinacin de la Documentacin. Asimismo, el Contratista debe informar, con la debida anticipacin, a sus proveedores, subcontratistas y a cualquier otra empresa que le suministre, directa o indirectamente, bienes y/o servicios para el cumplimiento del presente contrato, las obligaciones y sus necesidades de informacin, a que se refiere el presente Anexo G, as como a lo indicado en el Instructivo de Pet rleos Mexicanos y sus Organismos Subsidiarios para la Entrega de la Documentacin Requerida por las Fuentes de Financiamiento. La Documentacin que debe proporcionar el Contratista depende del pas de origen de los bienes y/o servicios que se suministren y/o utilicen para el cumplimiento del objeto del presente contrato.

2.

Fuentes de Financiamiento

Petrleos Mexicanos puede acceder a diversas fuentes de financiamiento, ya sea directamente, o a travs de cualquier entidad financiera y/o filial que Petrleos Mexicanos designe para tal efecto. Estas lneas de crdito constituyen
3 de 9

REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CRDENAS MINATITLN, VER. MXICO


PROYECTO:

MODERNIZACIN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIN CONTINUA CCR DE U-500, DE LA REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CARDENAS DE MINATITLN, VER., QUE INCLUYE INGENIERA DE DETALLE, PROCURA DE MATERIALES, FABRICACIN, MONTAJE, PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO.

fuentes de financiamiento alternativas a las utilizadas por el gobierno federal, las cuales por ley, deben utilizarse preferentemente. Sobresalen, entre otras en lo que se refiere a la Documentacin, las lneas de crdito garantizadas y/o aseguradas por Agencias de Crdito a la Exportacin (ECAs).

2.1

Lneas de Crdito Garantizadas o Aseguradas por Agencias de Crdito a la Exportacin (ECAs)

Dado que un porcentaje significativo de los suministros y servicios utilizados en la industria petrolera son de importacin, la utilizacin de este tipo de lneas es fundamental para el desarrollo y continuidad de los proyectos de Petrleos Mexicanos y Organismos Subsidiarios. Es importante sealar que el uso de este tipo de lneas no condiciona a los Contratistas o Proveedores a utilizar bienes y/o servicios de importacin; sin embargo, si el Contratista o Proveedor utiliza bienes y/o servicios importados directa o indirectamente, Petrleos Mexicanos est obligado a financiar el pago de los mismos preferentemente a travs de lneas de crdito garantizadas o aseguradas por Agencias de Crdito a la Exportacin (ECAs). Estas lneas son de uso exclusivo para Petrleos Mexicanos. A continuacin se incluye, para fines informativos, una relacin de las Agencias de Crdito a la Exportacin, con las cuales se tiene relacin, o con las que potencialmente Petrleos Mexicanos podr suscribir lneas de crdito.
Nombre Export-Import Bank of the United States Export Development Canada Export Credits Guarantee Department Japan Bank for International Cooperation Nippon Export and Investment Insurance Hermes Kreditversicherungs-AG Guarantee Institute for Export Credits Atradius Istituto per i Servizi Assicurativi e il Credito all'Esportazione Siglas Ex-Im Bank EDC ECGD JBIC NEXI HERMES GIEK ATRADIUS SACE Pas Estados Unidos de Amrica Canad Reino Unido Japn Japn Alemania Noruega Holanda Italia

4 de 9

REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CRDENAS MINATITLN, VER. MXICO


PROYECTO:

MODERNIZACIN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIN CONTINUA CCR DE U-500, DE LA REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CARDENAS DE MINATITLN, VER., QUE INCLUYE INGENIERA DE DETALLE, PROCURA DE MATERIALES, FABRICACIN, MONTAJE, PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO. Compagnie Franaise d Assurance pour le Commerce Extrieur Compaa Espaola de Seguros de Crdito a la Exportacin, S.A. Export-Import Bank of Korea Export Risk Guarantee Agency Finnvera plc Export Kredit Fonden Oesterreichische Kontrollbank Aktiengesellschaft Exportkreditnamnden Companhia de Seguro de Crditos S.A COFACE CESCE K-Exim ERG Finnvera EKF OeKB EKN COSEC Francia Espaa Repblica de Corea Suiza Finlandia Dinamarca Austria Suecia Portugal

3.

Cdula sobre el Pas de Origen de los Bienes y/o Servicios.


Mediante esta Cdula, el Contratista debe proporcionar a Pemex Refinacin, la informacin detallada sobre el pas de origen de los bienes y/o servicios que se utilicen para dar cumplimiento al objeto del contrato, as como informacin sobre las personas fsicas y/o morales y/o extranjeras que le suministren, directa o indirectamente, dichos bienes y/o servicios. La Cdula sobre el Pas de Origen de los Bienes y/o Servicios, presentada con anterioridad a la firma del presente contrato, se integra al presente contrato como Anexo F, en la inteligencia de que Pemex Refinacin podr solicitar al Contratista cualquier aclaracin o informacin adicional relativa a la Cdula a que se refiere esta clusula, durante la vigencia del contrato. Asimismo, en caso de que la informacin contemplada en dicha Cdula llegara a modificarse durante la vigencia de este contrato, el Contratista se obliga a hacerla del conocimiento de Pemex Refinacin , inmediatamente despus de que el Contratista tenga conocimiento de la modificacin, lo que no implicar realizar una modificacin al presente contrato. La Cdula sobre el Pas de Origen de los Bienes y/o Servicios deber ser requisitada atendiendo las indicaciones contenidas en el Instructivo de Petrleos Mexicanos y sus Organismos Subsidiarios para la Entrega de Documentacin Requerida por las Fuentes de Financiamiento.

5 de 9

REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CRDENAS MINATITLN, VER. MXICO


PROYECTO:

MODERNIZACIN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIN CONTINUA CCR DE U-500, DE LA REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CARDENAS DE MINATITLN, VER., QUE INCLUYE INGENIERA DE DETALLE, PROCURA DE MATERIALES, FABRICACIN, MONTAJE, PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO.

La informacin presentada por el Contratista en dicha Cdula, deber ser congruente con aquella informacin tcnica y econmica incluida en su oferta y en el presente contrato.

4.

Documentacin para la Utilizacin de Lneas de Crdito Garantizadas o Aseguradas por Agencias de Crdito a la Exportacin
La Documentacin depende del pas de origen de los bienes y/o servicios y generalmente consiste en copias, documentos originales y/o documentos electrnicos de: Facturas, Certificados de Origen, Documentos de Embarque, Evidencias de Pago, Cartas Aclaratorias, Contratos Comerciales, entre otros. En las secciones 4.1 a 4.3 del presente documento, se indica, de manera general, la Documentacin segn el pas de donde procedan los bienes y/o servicios. En el Instructivo de Petrleos Mexicanos y sus Organismos Subsidiarios para la Entrega de la Documentacin Requerida por las Fuentes de Financiamiento, (el Instructivo), mismo que les fue proporcionado oportunamente, se detallan, de manera especfica, los formatos y documentos que se deben recabar y presentar. El Instructivo tambin se encuentra disponible en la pgina Internet de Pemex: (www.pemex.com/proveedores/documentacion). Pemex Refinacin informar oportunamente al Contratista, mediante comunicacin oficial, cul ser el (las) rea(s) responsable(s) (Mdulo(s) de Financiamiento) en donde el Contratista deber entregar la Documentacin Requerida por las Fuentes de Financiamiento correspondiente a este contrato. El Contratista deber entregar al(a las) rea(s) responsable(s) (Mdulo(s) de Financiamiento) de Pemex Refinacin la Documentacin Requerida por las Fuentes de Financiamiento, que en su caso corresponda. Si el Contratista ha cumplido con la entrega de la Documentacin Requerida por las Fuentes de Financiamiento, el rea responsable (Mdulo de Financiamiento): a) registrar en los sistemas sobre dicho cumplimiento, con lo que el Contratista podr continuar con los trmites de pago de su(s) factura(s), o
6 de 9

REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CRDENAS MINATITLN, VER. MXICO


PROYECTO:

MODERNIZACIN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIN CONTINUA CCR DE U-500, DE LA REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CARDENAS DE MINATITLN, VER., QUE INCLUYE INGENIERA DE DETALLE, PROCURA DE MATERIALES, FABRICACIN, MONTAJE, PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO.

b) emitir el Comprobante de Seguimiento de Documentacin, el cual formar parte de la documentacin que el Contratista presente para continuar con los trmites de pago de su(s) factura(s). Pemex Refinacin no estar obligado a dar trmite al pago de su(s) factura(s) cuando el Contratista injustificadamente no entregue la Documentacin Requerida por las Fuentes de Financiamiento que corresponda. La Documentacin entregada por el Contratista estar sujeta a la revisin detallada del(de los) Mdulo(s) de Financiamiento, de la Direccin Corporativa de Finanzas de Petrleos Mexicanos, de las ECAs y/o del Banco Agente correspondiente, por lo que, Pemex Refinacin podr solicitar a el Contratista cualquier modificacin, aclaracin o informacin adicional relativa a la Documentacin Requerida por las Fuentes de Financiamiento. De la misma forma, el Contratista acepta que, para ciertos casos, la Documentacin Requerida por las Fuentes de Financiamiento deber ser entregada a la persona (Banco Agente, Agencia de Crdito a la Exportacin, Direccin Corporativa de Finanzas, etc.) que Pemex Refinacin le indique oportunamente.

4.1. Documentacin para bienes y/o servicios procedentes de los Estados Unidos de Amrica
El Ex-Im Bank de Estados Unidos de Amrica solicita actualmente la siguiente informacin: Factura Maestra Electrnica (e-Master Invoice) en archivo electrnico formato PDF. Certificado del Exportador (Exporters Certificate) en original. Anti-Lobbying Certificate en original. Datos de los tres documentos anteriores, en archivo electrnico formato Excel. Copia del conocimiento de embarque martimo. Cartas Aclaratorias, en algunos casos especficos.

7 de 9

REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CRDENAS MINATITLN, VER. MXICO


PROYECTO:

MODERNIZACIN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIN CONTINUA CCR DE U-500, DE LA REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CARDENAS DE MINATITLN, VER., QUE INCLUYE INGENIERA DE DETALLE, PROCURA DE MATERIALES, FABRICACIN, MONTAJE, PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO.

Otra informacin necesaria para identificar la procedencia, uso y forma de pago de los bienes y/o servicios. En el Instructivo de Petrleos Mexicanos y sus Organismos Subsidiario s para la Entrega de la Documentacin Requerida por las Fuentes de Financiamiento, se incluyen los formatos especficos, instrucciones y ejemplos de los documentos antes mencionados.

4.2. Documentacin para bienes y/o servicios procedentes de Canad, Europa y Asia
Export Development Canada (EDC) as como las ECAs de los pases europeos y asiticos solicitan la informacin y documentacin siguiente para que Petrleos Mexicanos y/o sus Organismos Subsidiarios pueda hacer uso de los recursos de las lneas de crdito garantizadas por dichas Instituciones: Nombre completo y direccin de los Exportadores y/o de los Subcontratistas y/o Comercializadores y/o Importadores Mexicanos que utilicen y/o suministren bienes y/o servicios con contenido canadiense, europeo o asitico. Copia de los Contratos firmados entre el Exportador y la contraparte. Breve descripcin de los bienes y/o servicios. Monto estimado de las importaciones. Nombre y datos de los contactos. Evidencia de pago al Exportador. Informacin sobre aspectos ambientales. Informacin adicional y/o evidencia documental razonable que pueda solicitar el EDC y las ECAs de otros pases.

Es importante sealar que el Contratista y/o Exportador deber entregar la documentacin a Pemex Refinacin o a quien ste le indique. La informacin general deber entregarse, mediante archivo electrnico en formato Excel, antes del embarque de los bienes o del inicio de la prestacin de los servicios, segn corresponda, de acuerdo con el Instructivo de Petrleos Mexicanos y sus Organismos Subsidiarios para la Entrega de la Documentacin Requerida por las Fuentes de Financiamiento.

8 de 9

REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CRDENAS MINATITLN, VER. MXICO


PROYECTO:

MODERNIZACIN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIN CONTINUA CCR DE U-500, DE LA REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CARDENAS DE MINATITLN, VER., QUE INCLUYE INGENIERA DE DETALLE, PROCURA DE MATERIALES, FABRICACIN, MONTAJE, PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO.

4.3. Documentacin para bienes y/o servicios procedentes de otros pases, incluyendo Mxico
Documentacin requerida por otros Agentes Financieros y/o Petrleos Mexicanos: En caso de bienes y/o servicios procedentes de Mxico o regiones diferentes a Estados Unidos, Canad, Europa y Asia, se requiere bsicamente la misma informacin que para ECAs de Canad, Europa y Asia. Sin embargo, slo se solicitar caso por caso, despus de analizar la informacin del Anexo denominado Cdula sobre el Pas de Origen de los Bienes y/o Servicios. En caso necesario, se podr solicitar lo siguiente: Mayor informacin para verificar el origen de los bienes. Copia de las Facturas Comerciales Individuales.

9 de 9

REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CRDENAS MINATITLN, VER. MXICO


PROYECTO:

MODERNIZACIN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIN CONTINUA CCR DE U-500, DE LA REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CARDENAS DE MINATITLN, VER., QUE INCLUYE INGENIERA DE DETALLE, PROCURA DE MATERIALES, FABRICACIN, MONTAJE, PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO.

ANEXO J
DISPOSICIONES EM MATERIA DE SSPA

1 de 26

SUBDIRECCIN DE PROYECTOS COORDINACIN DE PROYECTOS DE MODERNIZACIN Y AMPLIACIN DE CAPACIDAD SUBGERENCIA DE SEGUIMIENTO, PROTECCIN AMBIENTAL Y CALIDAD

INDICE CONCEPTO ADMINISTRATIVAS Organigrama de SSPA del Contratista Programa de SSPA del Contratista Poltica de SSPA Identificacin y Cartilla de Capacitacin Aula de Capacitacin Programa de Capacitacin Permisos de Trabajo Suministro de Equipo de Proteccin Personal Archivo especfico de SSPA de la Obra Funciones y Obligaciones del Responsable de SSPA del Contratista Funciones y Obligaciones del Supervisor de SSPA del Contratista Evaluaciones de SSPA SEGURIDAD Almacenamiento, Manejo y Uso de Cilindros de gases comprimidos Equipos de Seguridad y Herramientas para la Obra Personal, Equipo y Materiales para Proteccin Contraincendio Equipo de Proteccin Personal Respiratoria Trabajos en Espacios Confinados Equipo de Proteccin Personal para Trabajos Elctricos Equipos de Izaje y Materiales Delimitar reas de Riesgo Indicadores de Viento Transito Interior de Vehculos en Instalaciones de Pemex Andamios Escaleras Excavaciones Personal y Equipo para Rescate Actos y condiciones inseguras Trabajos de Corte y Soldadura Instalaciones Elctricas Provisionales Orden y Limpieza en las reas de Trabajo Materiales y Sustancias Peligrosas, Almacenamiento, Manejo y Uso Adecuado Delimitar Instalaciones Provisionales Restricciones en las Comunicaciones Alumbrado Provisional SALUD Exmenes Mdicos a Personal de Nuevo Ingreso Personal Mdico para la Obra PUNTO I 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 II 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 III 1 2
2 de 26

SUBDIRECCIN DE PROYECTOS COORDINACIN DE PROYECTOS DE MODERNIZACIN Y AMPLIACIN DE CAPACIDAD SUBGERENCIA DE SEGUIMIENTO, PROTECCIN AMBIENTAL Y CALIDAD

Bitcora de Servicios Mdicos Condiciones Trmicas Elevadas Exmenes Mdicos a Operadores de Equipo Baos Porttiles Fosas para drenaje Hielo y Agua Purificada Instalaciones Temporales de Servicios Operadores de Vehculos para Transporte de Materiales y Residuos Peligrosos Vibraciones PROTECCIN AMBIENTAL Ruido Emisin de Contaminantes de Vehculos Descarga de Aguas Residuales Gestin Integral de Residuos Atencin a las Condicionantes de la Autoridad Ambiental Identificacin Indicadores de Accidentabilidad

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 IV 1 2 3 4 5 Figura 1 Tabla 1

3 de 26

SUBDIRECCIN DE PROYECTOS COORDINACIN DE PROYECTOS DE MODERNIZACIN Y AMPLIACIN DE CAPACIDAD SUBGERENCIA DE SEGUIMIENTO, PROTECCIN AMBIENTAL Y CALIDAD

DISPOSICIONES EN MATERIA DE SEGURIDAD, SALUD Y PROTECCIN AMBIENTAL (SSPA), PARA LA MODERNIZACIN DEL MODULO DE REGENERACIN CONTINUA CCR DE U-500, DE LA REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CARDENAS DE MINATITLN, VER., QUE INCLUYE INGENIERA DE DETALLE, PROCURA DE MATERIALES, FABRICACIN, MONTAJE, PRUEBAS Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO

El Contratista realizar toda la Obra objeto de este Contrato en materia de Seguridad, Salud y Proteccin Ambiental, en apego a: la Ley Federal del Trabajo, al Reglamento Federal de Seguridad, Higiene y Medio Ambiente de Trabajo, a la Ley General de Salud y su Reglamento, a la Ley General del Equilibrio Ecolgico y la Proteccin al Ambiente y sus Reglamentos; a la Ley General para la Prevencin y Gestin Integral de los Residuos y su Reglamento, a la Ley de Aguas Nacionales y su Reglamento, a las Normas Oficiales Mexicanas (NOMs), (en especial la NOM-031-STPS-2011.- Construccin-Condiciones de seguridad y salud en el trabajo), Normas Mexicanas (NMXs) y Normas de Referencia de PETRLEOS MEXICANOS en materia de Seguridad, Salud y Proteccin Ambiental; al Reglamento de Seguridad e Higiene de Petrleos Mexicanos y Organismos Subsidiarios, a los Reglamentos y Procedimientos de Seguridad, Salud y Proteccin Ambiental de PEMEX REFINACIN y al Reglamento de Seguridad, Salud en el trabajo y Proteccin Ambiental para Contratistas y Proveedores de PEMEX REFINACIN DG-SASIPA-SI-08200, adems pondr en prctica sus procedimientos y polticas aplicables en la materia, empleando el personal especializado, con experiencia en su funcin y debe conocer los riesgos existentes en el Proyecto. El Contratista debe contar con una Poltica en materia de Seguridad, Salud y Proteccin Ambiental, para el contrato, acorde a la de PETRLEOS MEXICANOS y difundir ambas polticas a todo su personal, as como al de sus Subcontratistas. PEMEX REFINACIN se reserva el derecho de requerir al Contratista, la sustitucin o remocin, de cualquier persona del Organigrama o de sus subcontratistas para lo Obra, que incumpla los requerimientos de seguridad establecidos en este contrato, a cuyo efecto el Contratista se obliga dentro de un trmino no mayor de diez das naturales a partir de la solicitud de PEMEX REFINACIN, para sustituir o remover, as como para proponer para efectos de autorizacin al personal que lo sustituir. El Contratista debe tener pleno conocimiento que de incumplir los aspectos sealados en este Anexo, as como los requerimientos que se deriven de los anlisis de riesgo de trabajo, el Contratista se obliga a corregir estas desviaciones y PEMEX REFINACIN tendr el derecho de interrumpir los trabajos por razones de seguridad, hasta que se corrija la desviacin, sin que el atraso que se origine por cualquiera de estas circunstancias de lugar a prorrogas o diferimientos del programa de ejecucin de los trabajos, ni su interrupcin por estas causas, dar lugar al pago de gastos no recuperables o cualquier otro concepto. El horario de trabajo del personal del Contratista estar sujeto a la aprobacin de la Residencia de Obra. Debido a la ubicacin del sitio donde se desarrollar la Obra, el Contratista, adems de cumplir con las disposiciones establecidas en el presente documento, debe dar cumplimiento a los lineamientos, polticas e instrucciones que en materia de SSPA establezca el Centro de trabajo.

4 de 26

SUBDIRECCIN DE PROYECTOS COORDINACIN DE PROYECTOS DE MODERNIZACIN Y AMPLIACIN DE CAPACIDAD SUBGERENCIA DE SEGUIMIENTO, PROTECCIN AMBIENTAL Y CALIDAD

Para garantizar la Seguridad, Salud y Proteccin Ambiental durante el desarrollo de la Obra, el Contratista ser responsable de realizar las actividades contratadas cumpliendo y sin ser limitativo, con todas y cada una de las siguientes disposiciones: I. ADMINISTRATIVAS. 1. El Contratista debe contar con un Organigrama de todo el personal de Seguridad, Salud y Proteccin Ambiental (SSPA) que participe en la Obra, en el cual se presente su estructura, funciones y responsabilidades. En dicho Organigrama debe especificarse con claridad la relacin directa del Responsable de SSPA, con la mxima autoridad del Contratista en la Obra; dicho Organigrama, debe incluir a los Supervisores de SSPA, los cuales debern ser contratados por el Contratista directamente, al menos uno al inicio de la Obra y uno ms por cada 50 trabajadores propios y/o subcontratados, o bien cuando por el riesgo de los trabajos requiera supervisin de SSPA continua. En este sentido personal de SSPA contratado directamente por los subcontratistas no sern tomados en cuenta en la contabilidad del personal de SSPA que debe proporcionar el Contratista. En las clusulas del contrato entre el Contratista y sus Subcontratistas, se deber establecer que el subcontratista y su personal se sujetan a las disposiciones de SSPA sealadas en este Anexo. A efecto de que el Contratista cumpla con lo dispuesto en el primer prrafo del presente Anexo, debe implementar las acciones pertinentes para que tanto su personal como sus subcontratistas conozcan y den cumplimiento a las disposiciones de SSPA sealadas en este Anexo. Para el caso del Responsable de SSPA, debe ser profesionista con experiencia en Seguridad, Salud y Proteccin Ambiental dentro del rea de construccin, prearranque, pruebas y arranque de instalaciones industriales, mnima de dos proyectos para Petrleos Mexicanos, adems de aprobar la evaluacin que les aplicar el rea de SSPA de la Residencia de Obra y contar con acreditacin vigente de capacitacin en materia de SSPA, expedida por alguna institucin avalada por PEMEX REFINACIN, sus designaciones debern ser aceptada por la Residencia de Obra con anterioridad al inicio de sus funciones, quien determinar, a su juicio, si el Responsable y los Supervisores de SSPA en Obra designados se encuentran calificados para desempear las funciones inherentes a dichos cargos, lo anterior para asegurar que la Obra sea dirigida y supervisada en materia de SSPA por personal calificado y con experiencia. Tanto el Responsable como los Supervisores de SSPA deben ser del propio Contratista, independientemente de que parte de la Obra sea subcontratada. El personal de SSPA del Contratista debern identificarse usando ropa 100% de algodn color naranja, pantaln y camisa de manga larga u overol y casco blanco con franjas laterales color verde con la leyenda SEGURIDAD. El personal de contraincendio deber usar ropa color rojo y casco rojo. Por ningn motivo podr fungir como Responsable de SSPA el Superintendente de Construccin del Contratista. 2. El Contratista debe elaborar, presentar a PEMEX REFINACIN, difundir a su personal de primera lnea y mandos medios (Jefes de rea y Supervisores de especialidad) y los avances peridicos (mensuales) de un Programa de Seguridad, Salud y Proteccin Ambiental (SSPA), con la descripcin de sus objetivos generales y metas, para prevenir
5 de 26

SUBDIRECCIN DE PROYECTOS COORDINACIN DE PROYECTOS DE MODERNIZACIN Y AMPLIACIN DE CAPACIDAD SUBGERENCIA DE SEGUIMIENTO, PROTECCIN AMBIENTAL Y CALIDAD

incidentes a su personal y al de PEMEX REFINACIN, as como evitar daos a las Instalaciones de la Obra, del Centro de Trabajo y al Medio Ambiente, estableciendo medidas preventivas generales y especficas en SSPA para el desarrollo del trabajo, as como las acciones que se deben tomar en caso de una emergencia, las medidas de mitigacin, las rutas de evacuacin y puntos de reunin. Este programa debe incluir por lo menos los siguientes aspectos:
2.1. Actividades para dar cumplimiento a los objetivos y metas, entre otros: Plticas y

Prcticas Contraincendio; Revisin de Extintores; Plticas y Prcticas de Salud en el Trabajo (rescate y primeros auxilios), Campaas de Seguridad y Reuniones de Inicio de Jornada (plticas de 5 minutos donde se indique a los trabajadores las actividades a realizar y los riesgos de estas y del rea donde laboran).

2.2. Definicin de los criterios aplicables para el control de riesgos potenciales en materia

de Seguridad, Salud y Proteccin Ambiental, derivados de los trabajos que se desarrollarn durante la Obra, incluyendo los agentes presentes en el medio ambiente de trabajo y sus alrededores. deber elaborar el Contratista, acorde a los riesgos propios de las actividades a realizar y del rea de la Obra, mismo que debe presentar a PEMEX REFINACIN para su revisin.

2.3. El Programa SSPA ser complementado con un Atlas de Riesgo del proyecto, que

2.4. Manual de

Procedimientos Constructivos para ejecutar la Obra contratada; procedimientos que debern incluir los requerimientos de SSPA. As mismo, el Contratista debe elaborar sus propios procedimientos de seguridad de acuerdo a la Obra, mismos que debern estar apegados a los de PEMEX REFINACIN, los que de manera enunciativa ms no limitativa se relacionan a continuacin:

2.4.1. Para implantar la Seguridad, Salud y Proteccin Ambiental en la Obra. 2.4.2. Para identificar, evaluar, verificar y manejar los agentes ambientales, sus

riesgos y consecuencias por exposicin laboral y su difusin, incluyendo acciones para la reduccin de la exposicin laboral.

2.4.3. Para establecer requerimientos de SSPA para el uso de sustancias qumicas

(Corrosivas, Reactivas, Explosivas, Txicas, Infecciosas y Biolgicas) que se utilicen durante el desarrollo del proyecto, respaldada en las Hojas de Datos de Seguridad. y riegos ambientales de las sustancias qumicas utilizadas est disponible de acuerdo a la reglamentacin emitida por la STPS.

2.4.4. Para asegurar que la informacin sobre los riesgos a la salud, fuego, explosin

2.4.5. Para respuesta a emergencias (PRE), incluye evacuacin de personal. 2.4.6. Para reportar, analizar y difundir los incidentes con y sin consecuencias. 2.4.7. Para realizar maniobras con equipos y dispositivos de izaje.

6 de 26

SUBDIRECCIN DE PROYECTOS COORDINACIN DE PROYECTOS DE MODERNIZACIN Y AMPLIACIN DE CAPACIDAD SUBGERENCIA DE SEGUIMIENTO, PROTECCIN AMBIENTAL Y CALIDAD

2.4.8. Para control de acceso a las reas de trabajo, mismo que deber considerar

todas las disposiciones sealadas en el Reglamento DG-SASIPA-SI-08200 de PEMEX REFINACIN. Entrada segura a espacios confinados. Proteccin contraincendio. Equipo de proteccin personal. Prevencin de cadas. Seguridad elctrica. Bloqueo de energa y materiales peligrosos. Delimitacin de reas de riesgos. Apertura de lneas y equipos de procesos.

2.4.9. Para tareas crticas: 2.4.9.1. 2.4.9.2. 2.4.9.3. 2.4.9.4. 2.4.9.5. 2.4.9.6. 2.4.9.7. 2.4.9.8.

2.4.10. Para armado, desarmado y uso de andamios. 2.4.11. Para la inspeccin peridica de herramienta y equipo elctrico manual. 2.4.12. Para realizar excavaciones y trabajos en excavaciones. 2.4.13. Para almacenamiento y transporte de productos qumicos y fuentes radiactivas

utilizados (reactivos, combustibles, pinturas, solventes).

2.4.14. Para uso, transporte y almacenaje de cilindros con gases comprimidos. 2.4.15. Para soldadura y corte con equipo de oxigeno-acetileno. 2.4.16. Para acceso y transporte de personal en el interior de la Obra. 2.4.17. Para trnsito interior de vehculos en instalaciones industriales. 2.4.18. Para trmite y uso de permisos de trabajo de PEMEX REFINACIN. 2.4.19. Para trmite y uso de permisos de trabajo del propio Contratista. 2.4.20. Para aplicacin de primeros auxilios. 2.4.21. Para efectuar maniobras de rescate de personal lesionado. 2.4.22. Para suministro de agua purificada. 2.4.23. Para suministro, instalacin y servicio de sanitarios porttiles a los trabajadores. 2.4.24. Para realizar trabajos en zonas donde existan equipos y tuberas. 2.4.25. Para realizar trabajos en zonas donde existan instalaciones subterrneas [entre

otras; ductos elctricos, telefnicos, de fibra ptica, de drenajes (qumico, aceitoso, pluvial y sanitario), tuberas de conduccin, de servicios auxiliares (agua, aire y vapor) y de agua contraincendio, red de tierras].

2.4.26. Para pruebas hidrostticas y neumticas. 2.4.27. Para coordinar los trabajos de las diferentes especialidades del Contratista

(civil, mecnica, elctrica e instrumentos), en la etapa de energizacin de

7 de 26

SUBDIRECCIN DE PROYECTOS COORDINACIN DE PROYECTOS DE MODERNIZACIN Y AMPLIACIN DE CAPACIDAD SUBGERENCIA DE SEGUIMIENTO, PROTECCIN AMBIENTAL Y CALIDAD

equipos e instalaciones elctricas (motores, centros de control de motores, cuartos de control centralizado, subestaciones elctricas, entre otros); que incluya el cumplimiento de los requisitos en materia de SSPA.
2.4.28. Para lavado y soplado de lneas y equipos. 2.4.29. Para el manejo y gestin integral de residuos. 2.4.30. Para el tratamiento, manejo y descarga de aguas residuales, incluyendo las

provenientes de lavado y pruebas hidrostticas de tuberas y equipos.

2.4.31. Para realizar anlisis de seguridad de los trabajos (AST). 2.4.32. Para estimular y sancionar la actitud del personal.

3. El Contratista debe difundir su poltica en materia de SSPA para la Obra, misma que ser acordada con PEMEX REFINACIN, as como tambin mensajes relativos a la Seguridad, Salud y Proteccin Ambiental mediante carteles de tipo; informativo, preventivo y restrictivo. 4. El Contratista debe proporcionar identificacin con fotografa a todo su personal y de sus subcontratistas y registrar en el reverso de dicha identificacin los temas 6.1 y 6.2 del Programa de Capacitacin del numeral 6, la cual deber incluir al menos el nombre del Contratista, el nombre del trabajador, nmero de empleado, nmero de registro en el IMSS, informacin referente a alergias, as como los datos de a quien informar en caso de algn evento, ver Figura 1. El Contratista deber tomar las medidas necesarias para que todo su personal y el de sus subcontratistas porten la citada identificacin durante su estancia en la Obra. El Contratista ser responsable de entregar a la Residencia de Obra las credenciales de los trabajadores que causen baja en un periodo no mayor de tres das hbiles posteriores a la baja. 5. El Contratista debe contar, dentro de las instalaciones provisionales de la Obra, por su propia cuenta y cargo, con un local para la capacitacin del personal propio y personal subcontratado, con el equipo y material requerido para poder impartir la capacitacin. 6. El Programa de Capacitacin debe incluir, sin ser limitativo los siguientes temas, mismos que debern impartirse con la frecuencia indicada.
TEMAS 6.1 Pltica de induccin en materia de SSPA y Poltica de SSPA del Contratista y de PEMEX REFINACIN.
6.2 Requerimientos en materia de SSPA de

PARTICIPANTES Todo el personal

FRECUENCIA 1 vez al inicio (nuevo ingreso) 1 vez al inicio (nuevo ingreso) 1 vez al inicio (nuevo ingreso)

PEMEX REFINACIN aplicables a la Obra y los estipulados en el contrato. diferentes manuales. de SSPA para las especialidades de trabajos

Todo el personal

6.3 Recomendaciones

Personal tcnico y manual

8 de 26

SUBDIRECCIN DE PROYECTOS COORDINACIN DE PROYECTOS DE MODERNIZACIN Y AMPLIACIN DE CAPACIDAD SUBGERENCIA DE SEGUIMIENTO, PROTECCIN AMBIENTAL Y CALIDAD

6.4 Identificacin y sealizacin de riesgos en

sustancias qumicas, Hoja de datos de seguridad Modelo Rombo

Todo el personal Personal tcnico y manual que lo requiera Personal tcnico y manual que lo requiera Personal tcnico y manual que lo requiera Personal tcnico y manual. Personal tcnico y manual Personal tcnico y manual que lo requiera. Personal tcnico, Mandos medios y Supervisores. Todo el personal contraincendio y de las brigada. Todo el personal Todo el personal Todo el personal Personal que lo requiera. Personal que lo requiera. Personal que lo requiera. Personal que lo requiera. Personal que lo requiera. Personal que lo requiera. Personal que lo requiera Personal que lo requiera

1 vez al inicio y anualmente 1 vez al inicio (nuevo ingreso) 1 vez al inicio (nuevo ingreso) 1 vez al inicio (nuevo ingreso) 1 vez al inicio (nuevo ingreso) 1 vez al inicio (nuevo ingreso) 1 vez antes de iniciar el trabajo Cada vez que se concluya el anlisis de un incidente y/o accidente. 1 vez al inicio (nuevo ingreso) 1 vez al inicio (nuevo ingreso) 1 vez al inicio (nuevo ingreso) 1 vez al inicio (nuevo ingreso) 1 vez al inicio (nuevo ingreso) 1 vez al inicio (nuevo ingreso) 1 vez al inicio (nuevo ingreso) 1 vez al inicio (nuevo ingreso) 1 vez al inicio (nuevo ingreso) 1 vez al inicio (nuevo ingreso) 1 vez al inicio (nuevo ingreso) 1 vez al inicio (nuevo ingreso)

6.5 Permiso de trabajo. 6.6 Reglas de Seguridad para efectuar trabajos

en espacios confinados. 6.7 Manejo y Almacenamiento de Materiales Inflamables y Cilindros de Gases Comprimidos. 6.8 Uso, mantenimiento y pruebas del equipo de proteccin personal de acuerdo a las actividades a desarrollar. 6.9 Seleccin y uso de equipo de Proteccin Respiratoria: Para trabajos en espacios confinados. Para trabajos en atmsferas txicas. 6.10 Trabajos en altura: Proteccin contra cadas. Rescate y primeros auxilios. 6.11 Difusin de incidentes ocurridos durante el desarrollo de la obra y la causa raz que los origin, para evitar su recurrencia.
6.12 Prcticas

contraincendio especialidad del contrato.

sobre

la

6.13 Plan de Respuesta a emergencias. 6.14 Reglamento de SSPA para Contratistas y

Proveedores DG-SASIPA-SI-08200. 6.15 Informacin sobre los Sistemas de alarma por fuego, por atmsferas riesgosas y por emergencias.
6.16 Pruebas elctricas a arrancadores. 6.17 Pruebas

para interruptores termomagnticos. 6.18 Pruebas de campo para la recepcin de cables aislados de alta tensin. 6.19 Puesta en servicio de centro de control de motores o de subestacin elctrica.
6.20 Recepcin de motores elctricos. 6.21 Reglamento para libranzas en circuitos y

equipos elctricos. 6.22 Libranza de circuitos, sistemas y equipos elctricos que operan a tensiones inferiores a 480 volts. 6.23 Instalacin de portacandado, candados, etiquetas y doble seguro de desconexin en arrancadores.

9 de 26

SUBDIRECCIN DE PROYECTOS COORDINACIN DE PROYECTOS DE MODERNIZACIN Y AMPLIACIN DE CAPACIDAD SUBGERENCIA DE SEGUIMIENTO, PROTECCIN AMBIENTAL Y CALIDAD

6.24 Colocacin y retiro de juntas ciegas en

lneas y equipos en y fuera de operacin.

Personal que lo requiera. Personal que lo requiera Personal que lo requiera Personal Tcnicoadministrativo involucrado.

6.25 Trabajos de corte y soldadura. 6.26 Para trabajos de Radiografiado. 6.27 Procedimiento

para verificar las condiciones de seguridad en el Prearranque.

1 vez al inicio (nuevo ingreso) 1 vez al inicio (nuevo ingreso) 1 vez al inicio (nuevo ingreso) 1 vez al inicio (nuevo ingreso)

Los temas arriba referidos, as como la frecuencia de capacitacin no son limitativos, el Programa se puede ampliar segn las polticas del Contratista y las necesidades de la Obra. Todo el material de capacitacin en materia de SSPA deber ser presentado a la Residencia de Obra y autorizado por sta. La Pltica de Induccin en materia de SSPA sealada en el Tema 6.1 de la lista de capacitacin ser impartida por el personal de SSPA de la Residencia de Obra, con una frecuencia no mayor a dos veces por semana, una vez que el trabajador haya recibido la pltica, el instructor firmar la identificacin con fotografa que se menciona en el punto 4 de este Anexo. El Contratista deber programar a su personal para que ste inicie los cursos sealados en los Temas 6.2 y 6.3 del temario anterior, segn corresponda, antes del inicio de labores en la Obra. A fin de asegurar que el personal obrero identifique y conozca los riesgos particulares de la actividad que le sea encomendada; adems el Contratista deber implementar un esquema de plticas diarias de al menos 5 minutos a todo su personal obrero, impartidas por el responsable de cuadrilla (Cabo), con apoyo del Responsable de la actividad a ejecutar y el Supervisor de SSPA, en las que se informe al personal, las actividades que deber realizar y los riesgos propios de stas y del rea donde se realizarn los trabajos. El Programa debe incluir controles administrativos de la seleccin y capacitacin de cada trabajador, donde se registren los temas impartidos y las fechas correspondientes con los datos generales del mismo, debidamente avalados por las instituciones y/o instructores que hayan impartido dicha capacitacin e informar a PEMEX REFINACIN mensualmente sobre el cumplimiento del programa. 7. El Contratista debe utilizar los formatos de Permiso de Trabajo de PEMEX REFINACIN, para la ejecucin de actividades de construccin. Los formatos de permisos de trabajo de PEMEX REFINACIN debern ser impresos y suministrados por el Contratista a la Residencia de Obra para su Administracin. Los requerimientos especficos para su llenado sern entregados al Contratista en las reuniones diarias de planeacin de los trabajos para el siguiente da. Todos los trabajos debern realizarse de una manera planeada y ordenada, bajo el control de un responsable de la especialidad del trabajo que se est realizando, en el caso de trabajos crticos, ser necesaria la autorizacin expresa de la Residencia de Obra para la realizacin de los mismos, as como la supervisin conjunta de los responsables de SSPA del Contratista, de la Residencia de Obra y de la Refinera.

10 de 26

SUBDIRECCIN DE PROYECTOS COORDINACIN DE PROYECTOS DE MODERNIZACIN Y AMPLIACIN DE CAPACIDAD SUBGERENCIA DE SEGUIMIENTO, PROTECCIN AMBIENTAL Y CALIDAD

El Contratista debe programar e informar a los Supervisores de la Residencia de Obra con al menos 3 das de anticipacin de los trabajos crticos (interconexiones, libranzas, etc.) a fin de que se tramiten oportunamente todos los Permisos de trabajo y se verifiquen las condiciones necesarias para la realizacin del trabajo, evitando as los tiempos muertos. Ningn trabajo considerado como crtico, podr efectuarse sin la autorizacin correspondiente. 8. El Contratista debe suministrar a su personal el Equipo de Proteccin Personal necesario, para laborar en la Obra. El equipo de proteccin personal bsico, a considerar, para todos los trabajadores es: ropa 100% de algodn color naranja (pantaln y camisa de manga larga u overol) con el logotipo de la Compaa, casco (naranja) de seguridad, con barboquejo, lentes de seguridad y calzado de proteccin con casquillo metlico, excepto para aquellos cuya actividad presente riesgos elctricos, el cual deber ser dielctrico, al igual que el casco, de acuerdo a la normatividad. El Contratista deber tambin proveer el equipo complementario, especfico de acuerdo a las actividades a desarrollar (proteccin facial, auricular y respiratoria, guantes, prevencin de cadas, cinturones porta herramientas, para todo el personal que lo requiera). Todo el personal del Contratista y de sus subcontratistas tanto tcnico-administrativo como manual deber utilizar en la obra en todo momento su equipo de proteccin personal bsico. 9. El Contratista debe contar con un archivo especfico para hacer acopio de lo relativo a la Seguridad, Salud y Proteccin Ambiental, mismo que deber contener la informacin organizada y actualizada de al menos los siguientes temas:
9.1. 9.2. 9.3. 9.4. 9.5. 9.6. 9.7. 9.8. 9.9.

Programa de Seguridad, Salud y Proteccin Ambiental. Programa de Capacitacin de Personal y registros de cumplimiento. Programa y Registro del suministro y dotacin de equipo de proteccin personal. Control administrativo que contenga: Relacin, programa de inspeccin y ubicacin de equipos y material contraincendio (extintores, hidrantes, monitores, entre otros). Copia de los Permisos de Trabajo. Copia de los Permisos para el trnsito de equipo pesado en el interior de la Obra. Control de acceso y retiro del almacn de cilindros de gases comprimidos. Control de entrada y salida de almacn de materiales peligrosos. Relacin de parque vehicular del Contratista y Subcontratistas, plizas de seguros de vehculos y copia de licencias expedidas por la SCT, para operadores de vehculos de transporte de materiales y residuos peligrosos. Ambiental e Informes mensuales de cumplimiento de las acciones realizadas para la atencin de desviaciones. de la Obra, Anlisis de Causa Raz, Informes de Investigacin y Anlisis de los

9.10. Programa de Auditorias Efectivas y de Auditorias de Seguridad, Salud y Proteccin

9.11. Reportes de incidentes con y sin consecuencias que ocurran durante el desarrollo

11 de 26

SUBDIRECCIN DE PROYECTOS COORDINACIN DE PROYECTOS DE MODERNIZACIN Y AMPLIACIN DE CAPACIDAD SUBGERENCIA DE SEGUIMIENTO, PROTECCIN AMBIENTAL Y CALIDAD

mismos, Informes de Seguimiento y Cierre de las Recomendaciones derivadas de los Anlisis.


9.12. Reporte mensual de Indicadores de Accidentabilidad del Contratista. 9.13. Resultados de las Auditorias de Seguridad, Salud y Proteccin Ambiental realizadas

por PEMEX REFINACIN al Contratista y los reportes de cumplimiento de recomendaciones. este Anexo de Disposiciones en materia de SSPA, revisados por la Residencia de Obra. ambiente.

9.14. Reportes mensuales del cumplimiento de cada uno de los puntos contenidos en

9.15. Copia de la pliza de seguro de responsabilidad civil por contaminacin del medio 9.16. Trmites ante autoridades (pago de derechos de agua, descarga de aguas

residuales, uso de bancos de tiro para depositar los residuos slidos, incluyendo los de construccin, etc.) y dems sealados en el anexo Permisos y Licencias de las Bases de Licitacin de Entrega, Transporte, Recepcin de Residuos Peligrosos Enviados a Tratamiento y/o Disposicin Final, Reporte Semestral de Residuos Peligrosos Enviados para Tratamiento y/o Disposicin Final.

9.17. Copia del Manifiesto de Empresa Generadora de Residuos Peligrosos y Manifiestos

9.18. Certificados de inspeccin de equipos de izaje.

Esta informacin deber estar disponible para la Residencia de Obra en todo momento durante la ejecucin de la Obra, y a solicitud de sta el Contratista deber presentar las evidencias que le requiera. 10. El Responsable de Seguridad, Salud y Proteccin Ambiental; (SSPA) del Contratista debe:
10.1. Permanecer en el Sitio durante la realizacin de la Obra y verificar que se cumplan

las Normas, Procedimientos y Disposiciones en materia de SSPA, as como actuar en nombre y por cuenta del Contratista en todo lo referente a en materia de SSPA. de ste documento y coordinar su implementacin con los Supervisores de SSPA, el seguimiento al mismo, el informe mensual de avances y entregarlo a la Residencia de obra.

10.2. Elaborar el Programa de SSPA de acuerdo a lo sealado el punto 2, del apartado I,

10.3. Elaborar el Plan de Respuesta a Emergencias de la Obra (PRE-O) acorde a los

riesgos propios de las actividades a realizar y del rea de la Obra, en coordinacin con la Residencia de Obra. En caso de ocurrir cualquier emergencia en la Obra, debe mantenerse informado de la evolucin de la misma, a travs de la Residencia de Obra, para en caso necesario, proceder de acuerdo a lo establecido en el PREO. De ser necesaria la evacuacin del personal, la dirigir, auxiliado por los Supervisores de SSPA, de acuerdo a las instrucciones de la Residencia de la Obra.

12 de 26

SUBDIRECCIN DE PROYECTOS COORDINACIN DE PROYECTOS DE MODERNIZACIN Y AMPLIACIN DE CAPACIDAD SUBGERENCIA DE SEGUIMIENTO, PROTECCIN AMBIENTAL Y CALIDAD

10.4. Elaborar el Atlas de Riesgo del proyecto, considerando los riesgos por el manejo de

sustancias qumicas utilizadas en la Obra, as como la informacin contenida en las Hojas de Datos de Seguridad, mismas que debern estar disponibles de acuerdo a lo indicado en el punto II.19 de este anexo. de personal, ya sea en vehculos o caminando.

10.5. Definir y tramitar conjuntamente con la Residencia de Obra las rutas para el acceso 10.6. Tramitar los permisos para el bloqueo de calles en el interior de la Refinera,

originado por maniobras y/o trabajos relativos al desarrollo del Proyecto, anexando un croquis con la ruta alterna propuesta y sealizacin a utilizar.

10.7. Mantener actualizada una Bitcora de Seguridad, Salud y Proteccin Ambiental, en

la que registre todos los eventos relevantes relacionados con estas materias, desde el inicio hasta el trmino la Obra, la cual debe estar disponible siempre para revisin por parte de PEMEX REFINACIN. talleres de; fabricacin, elctrico y mecnico; entre otros) al Sistema de Seguridad, Salud y Proteccin Ambiental, de acuerdo a un programa establecido e informar mensualmente al Residente de Obra los resultados obtenidos y las acciones correctivas desarrolladas para atender las desviaciones, hasta su total cumplimiento (seguimiento). Debe realizar un anlisis estadstico de la informacin presentada por sus supervisores; as como participar en las Auditoras Externas de SSPA que se realicen a la Obra. incidentes (con o sin consecuencias), que ocurran durante el desarrollo de la Obra, participar conjuntamente con los Supervisores de SSPA y los trabajadores involucrados, en la investigacin, anlisis y seguimiento de las medidas que se deriven hasta su conclusin y llevar la estadstica de ndices de accidentalidad, con reportes mensuales, de acuerdo al formato Indicadores de Accidentabilidad de Compaas Contratistas (Tabla 1).

10.8. Realizar Auditorias Internas (procedimientos, permisos de trabajo, almacn general,

10.9. Reportar inmediatamente a la Residencia de Obra todas las emergencias y los

10.10.Suministrar, para su distribucin, los carteles relativos a la Seguridad, Salud y

Proteccin Ambiental.

10.11.Gestionar ante la Residencia de Obra, los permisos de trabajo que representen

riesgo (potencialmente peligrosos), as mismo los de acceso y pases de salida de vehculos del Contratista.

10.12.Administrar y verificar el adecuado manejo y gestin integral de los Residuos. 10.13.Integrar el archivo especfico de Seguridad, Salud y Proteccin Ambiental de

acuerdo a lo establecido en el Punto 9 del apartado I.

10.14.Participar en los Anlisis de Seguridad en el Trabajo. 10.15.Reportar mensualmente las actividades realizadas para el cumplimiento de las

condicionantes establecidas en el Oficio Resolutivo que en su momento emita la SEMARNAT.

11. Los Supervisores de SSPA del Contratista, deben:


13 de 26

SUBDIRECCIN DE PROYECTOS COORDINACIN DE PROYECTOS DE MODERNIZACIN Y AMPLIACIN DE CAPACIDAD SUBGERENCIA DE SEGUIMIENTO, PROTECCIN AMBIENTAL Y CALIDAD

11.1. Permanecer durante toda la jornada de trabajo en su rea de responsabilidad,

verificar y dar soporte al Responsable de especialidad del trabajo en ejecucin, para que se cumplan las normas, procedimientos y disposiciones en materia de SSPA en todos los trabajos que se realicen.

11.2. Conocer el Plan de Respuesta a Emergencias de la Obra. En caso de ocurrir

cualquier emergencia, deben mantenerse informados de la evolucin de la misma, a travs del Responsable de SSPA y proceder de acuerdo a lo establecido en el Plan de Respuesta a Emergencias de la Obra. De ser necesaria la evacuacin del personal, la realizarn de acuerdo a las instrucciones del Responsable de SSPA. el cumplimiento del Programa de SSPA, en sus reas de responsabilidad, verificando su estricto cumplimiento por parte de todos los trabajadores. necesarias para mantenerlas limpias y libres de obstculos. y para el bloqueo de calles en la Refinera. en su rea de responsabilidad.

11.3. Conocer y aplicar el Atlas de Riesgo del Proyecto. 11.4. Supervisar

11.5. Supervisar que el personal accese por las rutas autorizadas y realizar las acciones 11.6. Supervisar el cabal cumplimiento de los permisos para el trnsito de equipo pesado 11.7. Mantener informado al Responsable de SSPA, de los eventos relevantes ocurridos 11.8. Realizar continuamente Inspecciones Preventivas de Riesgo, en su rea de

responsabilidad e informar al Responsable de SSPA los resultados obtenidos y las acciones correctivas desarrolladas para atender las desviaciones. Debe generar un reporte donde sealen las desviaciones encontradas en el rea de trabajo, as como las acciones tomadas, y en su caso proponer las modificaciones necesarias para mejorar el desempeo en materia de SSPA. emergencia o incidente en las reas de su responsabilidad y en su caso aplicar los procedimientos establecidos, participar en la investigacin y anlisis de los incidentes y dar seguimiento a las recomendaciones que se deriven de los mismos. sus actividades, siempre observe el entorno, la direccin del viento a travs de los conos indicadores color naranja, detecte las posibles condiciones inseguras y las reporte para su eliminacin mitigacin.

11.9. Dar aviso inmediato al Responsable de SSPA, sobre la ocurrencia de cualquier

11.10. Instruir y supervisar al personal bajo su responsabilidad, para que antes de iniciar

11.11. Instruir y supervisar los trabajos a realizar por el personal de contraincendio. 11.12. Supervisar la colocacin y conservacin, por parte de todo el personal, de los

carteles relativos a la Seguridad, Salud y Proteccin Ambiental y asegurar su cumplimiento.

11.13. Para los permisos de trabajo propios del Contratista, elaborar y entregar al

Responsable de SSPA, para su trmite, los permisos de trabajo que representen

14 de 26

SUBDIRECCIN DE PROYECTOS COORDINACIN DE PROYECTOS DE MODERNIZACIN Y AMPLIACIN DE CAPACIDAD SUBGERENCIA DE SEGUIMIENTO, PROTECCIN AMBIENTAL Y CALIDAD

riesgo, (potencialmente peligrosos). En el caso especfico de los permisos de trabajo que tengan continuidad, supervisar el trmite de revalidacin.
11.14. Supervisar desde el inicio hasta su conclusin, todos los trabajos peligrosos en las

instalaciones que requieran autorizacin escrita por parte de PEMEX REFINACIN, como son entre otros: trabajos en espacios confinados, excavaciones, demoliciones, de tipo elctrico, de corte y/o soldadura, con flama abierta, con proteccin respiratoria. interna.

11.15. Verificar la instalacin de matachispas en el escape a los equipos de combustin 11.16. Verificar que se

suspenda la operacin de los equipos de combustin interna, mientras se les suministra combustible; as como que esta operacin se realice con bomba y manguera con dispensador (vlvula ON/OFF, pistola) y que de preferencia, se realice antes de iniciar actividades, a la hora de comida o al trmino de la jornada. Los vehculos que sean utilizados para el transporte y suministro de combustibles dentro de las instalaciones de la obra debern contar con autorizacin de la Residencia de Obra.

11.17. Supervisar el adecuado manejo y gestin integral de los Residuos.

12. PEMEX REFINACIN a travs de la Subgerencia de Seguimiento, Proteccin Ambiental y Calidad, efectuar Evaluaciones al Contratista en materia de SSPA, durante el desarrollo de la Obra para verificar el cumplimiento de estas disposiciones y las condiciones estipuladas en el contrato; para lo cual, el Contratista otorgar las facilidades necesarias para su desarrollo y participar en las mismas. Los resultados de estas evaluaciones se darn a conocer por escrito al Residente de Obra. II. SEGURIDAD. 1. El Contratista debe almacenar los cilindros de oxgeno, acetileno y otros gases comprimidos que se utilicen en los trabajos de corte y soldadura y otros, en lugares secos y ventilados y fuera de las reas de trabajo, en interiores no deber almacenarlos a una distancia menor de 6 metros por tipo de gas, en caso contrario separarlos por material divisorio resistente al fuego, adems de separar los vacos de los llenos, con sus capuchones respectivos, sujetos en posicin vertical e identificados, el sitio de almacenamiento debe ser de materiales resistentes al fuego y debe contar con sealamientos de seguridad, extintores y control de acceso y retiro de los cilindros. Para su transporte deben utilizarse carritos diseados ex profeso, donde los cilindros deben estar sujetos por medio de cadenas y/o barandales, para su uso debe incluirse arrestaflama en los equipos de oxicorte. 2. El Contratista debe proporcionar sin cargo econmico para el trabajador, el equipo de seguridad y herramientas requeridos en ptimas condiciones adecuado para cada actividad que se realice durante el desarrollo de la Obra: arns de seguridad para el cuerpo, cables de sujecin de 1.80 m de longitud mximo, con amortiguamiento, proteccin ocular, proteccin facial, proteccin auricular, proteccin respiratoria, etc., y

15 de 26

SUBDIRECCIN DE PROYECTOS COORDINACIN DE PROYECTOS DE MODERNIZACIN Y AMPLIACIN DE CAPACIDAD SUBGERENCIA DE SEGUIMIENTO, PROTECCIN AMBIENTAL Y CALIDAD

reemplazar el equipo que se deteriore y/o no cubra los requisitos establecidos por las Normas de Seguridad aplicables. 3. El Contratista debe suministrar desde el inicio de la Obra y hasta el final de las pruebas de comportamiento, personal de contraincendio capacitado que formar parte de las brigadas contraincendio, mismo que deber contar con la aprobacin de PEMEX REFINACIN, as como el equipo requerido para proporcionar la proteccin contraincendio y de acuerdo a la etapa del proyecto, detectores de gases (explosmetros), mangueras de 2 y 1 pulgadas de dimetro, llaves, reducciones de 2 a 1 pulgadas, conexiones, boquillas de chorro regulable y cierre rpido, extintores de polvo qumico seco y de CO2, de 20 a 150 libras. En caso de requerirse la utilizacin de agua de la red contraincendio de la Refinera en su oportunidad, cuando se realicen trabajos que por su naturaleza puedan ocasionar un incendio, se deber acordar con la Residencia de Obra el apoyo requerido. Como medida preventiva de contraincendio, se efectuar revisin a los registros de drenaje en las reas adyacentes a los trabajos de construccin para verificar el nivel de explosividad y en caso de requerirse, tomar las medidas preventivas necesarias. 4. El Contratista debe suministrar, sin cargo econmico para el trabajador, el equipo y accesorios, necesarios para la realizacin de trabajos que requieran proteccin respiratoria (espacios confinados, colocacin y/o retiro de juntas ciegas, entre otros), los cuales deben cumplir con la normatividad correspondiente, como son: respiradores, mascaras, equipos autnomos, ventiladores y/o extractores de aire, el uso y por tanto la actividad est restringido para personas con vello facial o barba; equipo de monitoreo para determinar condiciones ambientales seguras (O2, CO2, CO, SO2, H2S, Txicos, Explosividad, entre otros) en cantidad suficiente, al menos 2 equipos para cada parmetro, mismos que debern estar debidamente calibrados. Lo anterior debe permanecer hasta el trmino de la Obra. 5. El Contratista debe suministrar la proteccin necesaria para los trabajos en espacios confinados de acuerdo a su procedimiento especfico, haciendo nfasis en la planeacin de las actividades a realizar, el conocimiento de los riesgos potenciales o existentes, instrumentos apropiados, calibrados y certificados para la evaluacin de la atmsfera (oxgeno, inflamabilidad, toxicidad, temperatura); la iluminacin, fuentes de alimentacin, conexiones y accesorios deben ser intrnsecamente seguras, a prueba de explosin y con circuitos protegidos con interruptores de falla a tierra; evaluaciones mdicas a los trabajadores; observador de entrada/salida al espacio confinado (registro, ventilacin, extraccin, comunicacin permanente, sealamientos); bloqueo (tarjeta/candado/despeje/prueba); rescate y evacuacin en situacin de emergencia. 6. El Contratista debe suministrar, sin cargo econmico para el trabajador, el equipo de proteccin personal correspondiente, en calidad y cantidad suficiente, necesario para la realizacin de trabajos de tipo elctrico (conexiones de baja, media y alta tensin e instalacin de equipos, entre otros), los cuales deben ser aprobados por PEMEX REFINACIN, como son tapetes, guantes, casco y calzado de proteccin dielctricos, entre otros. Lo anterior debe permanecer hasta el trmino de la Obra.

16 de 26

SUBDIRECCIN DE PROYECTOS COORDINACIN DE PROYECTOS DE MODERNIZACIN Y AMPLIACIN DE CAPACIDAD SUBGERENCIA DE SEGUIMIENTO, PROTECCIN AMBIENTAL Y CALIDAD

7. El Contratista debe verificar las condiciones de los equipos (gras, malacates, montacargas, etc.) y accesorios de izaje (eslingas, estrobos, grilletes, separadores, ganchos, etc.), utilizados para el movimiento de equipos y materiales, debiendo en el caso de los equipos de izaje, obtener previo al inicio de actividades, el Certificado de Inspeccin emitido por una Empresa Certificadora, en el que se incluyan las condiciones mecnicas, elctricas, electrnicas, dispositivos de seguridad, as como las pruebas con carga; no se permitir la operacin de equipos certificados que tengan observaciones que limiten su capacidad. En caso de que se vaya a certificar en Sitio se deber notificar al personal de SSPA de la Residencia de Obra para que atestige la revisin y las pruebas. Adicionalmente, todos estos equipos debern contar con su bitcora de mantenimiento, tablas de carga, y deber ser sujeto a una verificacin previa a cada maniobra (lista de verificacin). Toda maniobra que se realice en reas en operacin, requiere de un plan de izaje. 8. El Contratista debe delimitar con malla de polipropileno color naranja y letreros alusivos, las zonas de riesgo derivadas de la ejecucin de la Obra, como son: trabajos en altura, demoliciones, excavaciones, compactaciones, armado de fierro, colados, montaje de tuberas y almacenamiento de materiales, entre otros; en caso de utilizar cadenas y/o cintas de advertencia, considerar el color rojo como restrictivo y el amarillo como preventivo. En los trabajos de limpieza abrasiva y aplicaciones de recubrimiento anticorrosivo, se deben instalar mamparas para evitar contaminacin por dispersin de partculas. 9. El Contratista debe instalar estratgicamente conos indicadores de viento color naranja, en cantidad acorde al avance de la Obra. 10. El Contratista debe cumplir con la normatividad de trnsito interior de vehculos en instalaciones industriales, administrativas y de servicio de PETRLEOS MEXICANOS, para su acceso en vehculos, el Contratista se obliga a contar con las plizas de seguro de todos los vehculos, con vigencia hasta el trmino de los trabajos, cubriendo las responsabilidades derivadas del uso de los vehculos utilizados en la ejecucin de la Obra. Tratndose de transportes de carga, deber incluirse la cobertura de daos por la carga, en el caso de transporte de materiales o residuos peligrosos, el monto mnimo de la cobertura por daos al medio ambiente, se establecer de acuerdo a lo dispuesto en la Ley aplicable. Cuando su personal conduzca un vehculo debe observar las siguientes prioridades:
10.1. El peatn y los ciclistas, en ese orden, siempre tendrn la preferencia. 10.2. Los vehculos de atencin de emergencias (ambulancias y camiones de bomberos)

tienen prioridad de paso sobre cualquier otro vehculo. los lmites de velocidad,

10.3. Dar preferencia a cualquier otro tipo de trnsito (gras y/o vehculos pesados con

carga) y respetar estacionamientos.

tanto

en

calles

como

en

10.4. Contar con la licencia de conducir/operar correspondiente y vigente.

17 de 26

SUBDIRECCIN DE PROYECTOS COORDINACIN DE PROYECTOS DE MODERNIZACIN Y AMPLIACIN DE CAPACIDAD SUBGERENCIA DE SEGUIMIENTO, PROTECCIN AMBIENTAL Y CALIDAD

10.5. Portar en el vehculo los documentos reglamentarios de trnsito vigentes (tarjeta de

circulacin y/o permisos), as como copia legible de la pliza de seguro del vehculo.

10.6. Verificar adems del buen funcionamiento del vehculo (condiciones mecnicas y

elctricas), la colocacin de matachispas en el escape, la existencia de extintor, silenciador, de cinturones de seguridad y alarma de reversa para gras, vehculos de carga y de emergencia.

10.7. Utilizar el cinturn de seguridad y verificar que los pasajeros lo usen. 10.8. Transitar por las reas de la Refinera solo con la autorizacin correspondiente. 10.9. Estacionar los vehculos slo en los lugares indicados (autorizados y siempre en

reversa).

10.10.Estacionar los vehculos sin obstaculizar; hidrantes, casas de bombas, centrales

contraincendio, subestaciones elctricas y vialidades de circulacin. de materiales.

10.11.La capacidad de carga de los camiones no deber ser rebasada para evitar la cada 10.12.Colocar lona a los vehculos que realizarn el traslado de materiales ptreos y

residuos no peligrosos, para evitar la cada de los mismos y evitar la emisin de polvos a la atmsfera. permitindose para este efecto camiones de carga, de redilas y volteo. Los operadores debern contar con la credencial de identificacin sealada en el numeral I.4 de este anexo.

10.13.Los vehculos para el transporte de personal debern estar acondicionados no

11. El Contratista debe instalar andamios metlicos de uso industrial para efectuar trabajos en altura (incluyendo en el interior de excavaciones) que deben cumplir los requisitos de la NOM-009-STPS-2011, en general:
11.1. Los andamios deben tener capacidad para soportar su propio peso y por lo menos

cuatro veces la carga mxima que se le aplique.

11.2. El armado y desarmado de los andamios debe ser realizado por personal con

entrenamiento bsico y supervisado por una persona experimentada y competente, quin validar diariamente con tarjetas color verde (que son seguros) o rojas (en proceso de modificacin o inseguros).

11.3. Antes de iniciar el armado del andamio el Supervisor responsable del trabajo, debe

verificar que las partes no estn alteradas (libres de deformaciones, corte, perforacin, doblado, abolladuras, corrosin severa). Todos los andamios defectuosos debern marcarse y desecharse. contrario, se deben emplear tornillos niveladores que no podrn extenderse mas de 0.3 m. o calzas de madera de 12 x 12 x 2 pulgadas. cual se utilizan e instaladas de manera continua desde la base hasta la plataforma

11.4. Los andamios deben desplantarse sobre un piso slido y nivelado, en caso

11.5. Las escaleras deben ser diseadas especficamente para el tipo de andamio con el

18 de 26

SUBDIRECCIN DE PROYECTOS COORDINACIN DE PROYECTOS DE MODERNIZACIN Y AMPLIACIN DE CAPACIDAD SUBGERENCIA DE SEGUIMIENTO, PROTECCIN AMBIENTAL Y CALIDAD

de trabajo. No se deben mezclar secciones y/o accesorios de andamios de diferentes marcas.


11.6. Cualquier nivel de trabajo sobre un andamio debe tener plataformas completas

para cubrir el nivel, conformada por secciones de 0.30 m. de ancho como mnimo, metlicas fijadas a la estructura para evitar deslizamientos o cualquier otro movimiento que ponga en riesgo de cada a los trabajadores; debe contar con barandal de proteccin compuesto por un pasamanos tubular de 1 metro de altura, barra intermedia de proteccin y rodapi de 0.15 m. de altura.

11.7. Los andamios que tengan una altura cuatro veces mayor que el ancho de su base

no podrn tener ruedas, y deben contar con plataformas de descanso en las escaleras y estar amarrados a estructuras fijas adyacentes. utilizar arns de seguridad para el cuerpo Clase II y doble cable de sujecin con gancho de seguridad, de 1.80 m. de longitud mximo, con amortiguador de choque. En caso necesario se debe instalar cable de vida. mayores a 30 Km/hr.

11.8. Todo el personal que desarrolle actividades en la plataforma del andamio debe

11.9. No se debern realizar trabajos sobre andamios al estar lloviendo con vientos 11.10. No se acepta el uso de andamios de carga como plataformas de trabajo. 11.11. Cualquier configuracin de plataforma de trabajo distinta a lo antes sealado,

deber ser propuesta con la documentacin necesaria, para su aprobacin, a la Residencia de Obra.

12. El Contratista debe proporcionar escaleras en buen estado del tipo I y IA, para carga pesada y extrapesada, en todos aquellos trabajos que lo requieran y adherida la informacin de seguridad (calcomanas), queda prohibido el uso de escaleras tipo II y III, para trabajos elctricos debe utilizar escaleras de fibra de vidrio. 13. El Contratista debe instalar escaleras de acceso en todas las excavaciones de ms de 1.20 m. de profundidad y ademes dependiendo del tipo de suelo, acordonarlas y humedecer, de ser necesario el producto de estas, para evitar la emisin de polvos a la atmsfera; se deben considerar las instalaciones subterrneas existentes tanto en el rea de la excavacin como en sus proximidades, as como las afectaciones a y de, la circulacin de vehculos; todo el material producto de la excavacin deber ser colocado a una distancia no menor a 1 metro del borde de la excavacin y solamente en un lado de la misma. 14. El Contratista debe disponer de equipo y personal capacitado para efectuar maniobras de rescate de personal, mismo que debe permanecer desde el inicio de la Obra y hasta el final de las pruebas de comportamiento. 15. El Contratista debe evitar actos y condiciones inseguras que pongan en riesgo al personal, a las instalaciones y/o al medio ambiente, llevando a cabo Inspecciones Preventivas de Riesgo.

19 de 26

SUBDIRECCIN DE PROYECTOS COORDINACIN DE PROYECTOS DE MODERNIZACIN Y AMPLIACIN DE CAPACIDAD SUBGERENCIA DE SEGUIMIENTO, PROTECCIN AMBIENTAL Y CALIDAD

16. El Contratista debe suministrar la proteccin contraincendio necesaria con material retardante al fuego en los trabajos de corte y soldadura, para proteger ductos en operacin o por la existencia de materiales inflamables en reas cercanas al sitio de los trabajos (madera, cartn, grasas, entre otros). Se debe verificar con explosmetro, que no exista mezcla explosiva antes y durante la ejecucin de los trabajos, as como las condiciones de los equipos de soldar, mismos que deben estar aterrizados, contar con matachispas y guardas de proteccin en sus partes mviles. 17. Las instalaciones elctricas provisionales, generadores y tableros de distribucin, debern cumplir con los requerimientos que apliquen de acuerdo a la Norma Oficial Mexicana NOM-001-SEDE-2005 Instalaciones elctricas (utilizacin), considerando que:
17.1. Las instalaciones elctricas provisionales en general, deben estar rotuladas, contar

con cajas de fusibles segn carga, clavijas industriales con seguro de de vuelta y cables de uso rudo, sin empalmes, deben estar perfectamente sujetas y aterrizadas, no deben obstruir la circulacin de vehculos ni de personas, en caso de que se requiera cruzar calles, deber realizarse por el piso, protegindolos con conchas metlicas o de manera area a una altura no menor de 7.6 metros, no deben estar cerca de registros de drenaje, ni materiales inflamables y combustibles. paredes, fondo y techo sern de madera de primera, debern estar pintados de color amarillo y rotulados (rtulos informativos, preventivos y prohibitivos) y tener puertas con candados. sobre tarimas de madera que sobrepasen al menos un metro alrededor del tablero.

17.2. Los tableros debern se construidos con estructura de acero ligero (ngulo), sus

17.3. El rea de los tableros deber estar delimitada con malla cicln, colocar el tablero 17.4. El tablero deber contar con un techo estructural para cubrirlo de la lluvia. 17.5. Los accesorios en los tableros debern ser para uso a la intemperie, (interruptores

termomagnticos, clavijas de seguridad de de vuelta y cables de uso rudo sin empates, las capacidades de los accesorios sern de acuerdo a la carga que se este utilizando. operables los cuales correspondiente. se encontrarn sealizados y con el instructivo

17.6. Los generadores debern contar con mecanismos de interrupcin accesibles y

17.7. Todos los equipos y herramientas que por sus caractersticas operativas

representan un riesgo particular, debern contar con los dispositivos de seguridad necesarios de acuerdo a las normas correspondientes y ser operados por personal calificado.

17.8. Ya que los equipos de soldar por su naturaleza y la de las reas donde se realizan

los trabajos, han demostrado ser fuentes potenciales de accidentes, el Contratista y sus Subcontratistas debern poner especial cuidado en los mismos, por lo que deben de ser operados solo por personal calificado, las mquinas de soldar deben contar con su tarjeta de identificacin, inspeccin y mantenimiento, proteccin acstica en el caso de las de combustin interna, estar aterrizadas, contar con

20 de 26

SUBDIRECCIN DE PROYECTOS COORDINACIN DE PROYECTOS DE MODERNIZACIN Y AMPLIACIN DE CAPACIDAD SUBGERENCIA DE SEGUIMIENTO, PROTECCIN AMBIENTAL Y CALIDAD

matachispas, sus cables deben ser de una sola pieza sin empalmes ni remiendos (slo se aceptan conectores especficamente diseados para este efecto), no deben cruzar reas peligrosas ni convertirse en un estorbo para el trnsito de personas ni vehculos y sus partes mviles deben contar con proteccin. 18. El Contratista debe mantener ordenada y limpia toda el rea de la Obra y las adyacentes, almacenando adecuadamente los equipos y materiales de uso continuo, sin que se afecte el avance de la Obra. Los desechos que se generen en la ejecucin de los Trabajos debern ser retirados del Sitio en un plazo no mayor de cinco Das, los desechos orgnicos deben ser retirados diariamente, as como los residuos peligrosos tambin deben ser retirados del Sitio diariamente al almacn temporal del Contratista, el cual debe contar con reas cercadas, techadas y sobre superficies impermeables dotadas de dique contenedor y con crcamo para captar derrames, con sealamientos de seguridad, entre otros los rombos de comunicacin de riesgos de cada sustancia, as como un control de acceso. 19. El Contratista debe manejar y almacenar adecuadamente todos los productos qumicos, reactivos, combustibles, pinturas, solventes, materiales diversos, fuentes radiactivas, entre otros, que se requieran durante la Obra, designando un lugar especfico como almacn. En este sitio se debe contar con las Hojas de Datos de Seguridad de los materiales considerados como peligrosos, debiendo estar disponibles para el personal que los maneja. 20. El Contratista debe delimitar con malla cicln todas las instalaciones provisionales que construya en la Obra, quedando bajo su responsabilidad la vigilancia y el resguardo de las mismas. 21. En el rea de construccin no est permitido el uso de telfonos celulares, por lo que de requerir medios de comunicacin entre su personal, el Contratista deber proveer radios, los cuales debern ser intrnsecamente seguros, y sujetarse a la aprobacin por la Residencia de Obra en funcin de sus caractersticas y reas donde se pretenden emplear. Todo el personal de SSPA del Contratista (Responsable y Supervisores) debern contar con equipo de radiocomunicacin con una frecuencia exclusiva y acceso a la frecuencia abierta del resto del personal. El Contratista deber proveer a la Coordinacin de Seguridad de la Residencia de Obra al menos 5 equipos con las mismas caractersticas, con acceso nicamente a la frecuencia de seguridad. 22. El Contratista debe instalar un sistema de alumbrado provisional, en caso de requerirse la realizacin de actividades nocturnas, el cual deber cumplir con la normatividad aplicable. III. SALUD. 1. El Contratista debe contratar personal fsicamente apto para desarrollar las actividades propias del puesto a ocupar y deber evaluar su estado general de salud mediante exmenes mdicos antes de su contratacin (examen de nuevo ingreso). 2. El Contratista debe instalar y equipar un Consultorio Mdico y contar con Ambulancia de urgencias bsicas, destinada al servicio de pacientes que requieren atencin prehospitalaria de la urgencias mdicas mediante soporte bsico de vida, los cuales
21 de 26

SUBDIRECCIN DE PROYECTOS COORDINACIN DE PROYECTOS DE MODERNIZACIN Y AMPLIACIN DE CAPACIDAD SUBGERENCIA DE SEGUIMIENTO, PROTECCIN AMBIENTAL Y CALIDAD

debern permanecer desde el inicio de la Obra hasta el final de las pruebas de comportamiento, mismos que estarn ubicados en forma estratgica dentro del rea de construccin. El Consultorio debe contar con bao y tarja con agua corriente, agua purificada, mobiliario, equipo y material necesario para la auscultacin y atencin de primeros auxilios a los trabajadores, as como, el personal capacitado para dar atencin a curaciones y urgencias, que debe incluir, sin ser limitativo:
2.1 Un Mdico. 2.2 Un Tcnico en Urgencias Mdicas y 2.3 Operador de Ambulancia.

Siendo responsabilidad del Contratista la afiliacin de todos sus trabajadores al Instituto Mexicano del Seguro Social (IMSS), para recibir la atencin mdica especializada que se llegara a requerir a juicio del mdico, quien decidir, en caso necesario, su traslado al hospital del IMSS o de alguna Institucin Mdica que preste servicio al Contratista. En caso de requerirse efectuar actividades despus del horario normal de trabajo establecido o si hubiera doble jornada de trabajo, se deber contar durante toda la jornada o en el segundo turno, con la cantidad mnima antes indicada para dar atencin a curaciones y urgencias. 3. El Mdico debe asentar en una bitcora de Servicios Mdicos, toda circunstancia y/o acontecimiento relacionado con los servicios en salud brindados al personal del Contratista y sus Subcontratistas, particularmente lo referente a enfermedades, accidentes o lesiones de trabajo y casos de primeros auxilios, esta bitcora debe estar disponible en todo momento al personal de SSPA de la Residencia de Obra. El Contratista pondr a disposicin de la Residencia de Obra las evidencias documentales, que le sean solicitadas de aquel personal que se encuentre involucrado en un incidente. 4. El Contratista debe cumplir con todos los puntos indicados en la NOM-015-STPS-2001, independientemente de lo sealado en el 5.10 de la misma, para todas aquellas actividades a desarrollar, donde exista exposicin de los trabajadores a condiciones trmicas, provocadas por fuentes que generen que la temperatura corporal de los trabajadores sea superior a 38 C. 5. El Contratista debe contar con los registros de que su personal est en condiciones saludables para su ingreso a la obra, con mayor nfasis para los operadores de gras y equipo de izaje, as como el que labora en altura, espacios confinados y equipos energizados, quienes deben ser evaluados por el Servicio Mdico del Contratista, previo al inicio de las actividades diarias. 6. El Contratista debe instalar y mantener hasta el final de la Obra, lavamanos y sanitarios porttiles para el personal masculino y femenino en forma independiente, los cuales deben ubicarse estratgicamente en el rea de construccin, considerando 1 sanitario por cada 20 personas, considerando el total de trabajadores, tanto del contratista como el de sus subcontratistas. Los sanitarios deben contar con receptculos para el manejo de los desechos, mismos que deben ser retirados con frecuencia de dos veces por jornada; el Contratista debe verificar la limpieza de los mismos y de la disposicin final de acuerdo a la autorizacin municipal. En caso de utilizar un vehculo para el servicio de limpieza de

22 de 26

SUBDIRECCIN DE PROYECTOS COORDINACIN DE PROYECTOS DE MODERNIZACIN Y AMPLIACIN DE CAPACIDAD SUBGERENCIA DE SEGUIMIENTO, PROTECCIN AMBIENTAL Y CALIDAD

los sanitarios, ste deber estar equipado para este fin, deber contar con las protecciones necesarias para su ingreso a la obra y la autorizacin del personal de SSPA de la Residencia de Obra. 7. El Contratista deber instalar fosas para captar las descargas del drenaje sanitario de las oficinas, comedores y otras instalaciones temporales, mismas que debern limpiarse peridicamente y ser retiradas al final de la obra. El tipo deber ser de acuerdo a la normatividad especfica y la localizacin debe ser acordada con la Residencia de Obra. 8. El Contratista debe suministrar agua purificada con hielo para el personal, en depsitos limpios con tapa de sello hermtico. Se debe verificar la calidad del agua en estos depsitos peridicamente, mediante anlisis bacteriolgicos, previo acuerdo con la Residencia de Obra; las muestras deben ser tomadas de dichos depsitos. La cantidad de agua depender de la fuerza de trabajo con que se cuente para la realizacin de las Obras, considerando un mnimo de 3 litros por persona por jornada de trabajo. 9. El Contratista debe construir sus oficinas temporales, en el lugar que PEMEX REFINACIN le indique, as como comedores techados con lamina y con piso de concreto, adecuadamente ventilados y cerrados para evitar la contaminacin con polvos de las reas de construccin, equipados con sillas, mesas, alumbrado, con capacidad suficiente en los turnos establecidos para la fuerza de trabajo mxima esperada, de tal manera que todo el personal de campo consuma sus alimentos en sta rea, lavamanos con jabn, papel para las manos y tarja con agua corriente con descarga al drenaje sanitario de las instalaciones temporales del Contratista, instalaciones elctricas, contenedores hermticos para la basura, identificados con letreros y colores distintos para la clasificacin y separacin de la basura, misma que debe mantenerse limpia, donde no se debe fumar, ni utilizar hornillas de cualquier tipo ni encender fuego. En los contenedores hermticos, recolectar los materiales orgnicos e inorgnicos de desecho, por separado, mismos que deben ubicarse fuera del rea de preparacin de alimentos y en lugares accesibles; as mismo retirar diariamente la basura de estos recipientes, trasladarla y depositarla en el sitio que indique la autoridad municipal. Los contenedores deben mantenerse limpios despus de ser retirada la basura. No se admitirn carpas provisionales. 10. El Contratista debe contratar personal capacitado y en condiciones saludables para operar la maquinaria y equipo, para operadores de vehculos de transporte de materiales y residuos peligrosos debe contar con licencia vigente expedida por las autoridades de la SCT. 11. El Contratista debe cumplir los requerimientos de la normatividad, respecto a los tiempos de exposicin del personal que opere equipos que transmitan vibraciones, como son rotomartillos, compactadores, entre otros. IV. PROTECCION AMBIENTAL. 1. El Contratista debe cumplir con lo establecido en las Normas Oficiales Mexicanas, relativas a la contaminacin por ruido. 2. El Contratista debe utilizar en las diferentes etapas de la Obra, equipo y maquinaria en ptimas condiciones de operacin. Referente a vehculos automotores, debern cumplir
23 de 26

SUBDIRECCIN DE PROYECTOS COORDINACIN DE PROYECTOS DE MODERNIZACIN Y AMPLIACIN DE CAPACIDAD SUBGERENCIA DE SEGUIMIENTO, PROTECCIN AMBIENTAL Y CALIDAD

con los niveles mximos permisibles de emisin de contaminantes provenientes del escape, de acuerdo a la normatividad aplicable. 3. El Contratista debe cumplir con lo indicado en las Normas Oficiales Mexicanas respecto a la descarga de las aguas residuales que se generen en cualquier etapa de la Obra, incluyendo las utilizadas en pruebas hidrostticas, de inundacin y durante el lavado de maquinaria y equipo. 4. El Contratista debe manejar y disponer los residuos que se generen en la Obra de acuerdo a lo previsto en la Ley General para la Prevencin y Gestin Integral de los Residuos y su Reglamento y las Normas Oficiales Mexicanas aplicables. Debe depositar en tambores debidamente identificados, los materiales impregnados con hidrocarburos, aceites, pinturas y/o solventes (madera, estopa, ropa de algodn, trapo, guantes, calzado, botas, entre otros), bateras (acumuladores) de desecho, envases vacos, as como los que hayan contenido materiales y/o residuos clasificados como peligrosos, los cuales deben ser entregados para su disposicin a empresas debidamente autorizadas. Debe asentar en una bitcora el manejo de los residuos peligrosos. Esta bitcora deber estar disponible en todo momento para revisin del personal de SSPA de la Residencia de Obra. 5. El Contratista debe dar cumplimiento a las condicionantes establecidas en el Oficio Resolutivo, como resultado del dictamen que en su momento emita la SEMARNAT y elaborar un reporte escrito para informar mensualmente a la Residencia de Obra de las actividades realizadas para el cumplimiento de dichas condicionantes.

24 de 26

SUBDIRECCIN DE PROYECTOS COORDINACIN DE PROYECTOS DE MODERNIZACIN Y AMPLIACIN DE CAPACIDAD SUBGERENCIA DE SEGUIMIENTO, PROTECCIN AMBIENTAL Y CALIDAD

Figura 1 IDENTIFICACIN CON FOTOGRAFA


FRENTE
PEMEX REFINACIN REFINERA GRAL. LZARO CRDENAS

LOGO CIA. PROYECTO:


NOMBRE: CATEGORA: DEPTO.: IMSS:

FOTO

No. EMP.:

SUPTTE. DE CONSTRUCCIN

RESIDENTE DE OBRA REVERSO

FIRMA DEL EMPLEADO

EMPRESA O SUBCONTRATISTA: EN CASO DE ACCIDENTE AVISAR A : TEL:

VIGENCIA:

ALERGIAS:

AUTORIZA

DEPTO. DE PERSONAL TEMA 6.1 INDUCCIN Y POLTICA SSPA: TEMA 6.2 REQUERIMIENTOS SSPA:

RESIDENCIA DE OBRA

DEPTO. DE CAPACITACIN

Notas: En el frente de la credencial se deben incluir las autorizaciones del Personal de SSPA del Contratista y de la Residencia de Obra. En el reverso se debe incluir la firma del Personal autorizado para impartir la capacitacin en materia de SSPA.

25 de 26

SUBDIRECCIN DE PROYECTOS COORDINACIN DE PROYECTOS DE MODERNIZACIN Y AMPLIACIN DE CAPACIDAD SUBGERENCIA DE SEGUIMIENTO, PROTECCIN AMBIENTAL Y CALIDAD

Tabla 1 Indicadores de Accidentabilidad de Compaas Contratistas


Centro de Trabajo _______________ Mes/ao ___________________ ndice de Actos Seguros IAS

Compaa

Total de Trabajadores en la Instalacin

Total de Horas Hombre Laboradas

Total Accidentes, Incapacitantes (con ms de 24 hrs)

Total de ndice de Accidentes Frecuencia Fatales

ndice de Gravedad

TOTAL Nota.- Los indicadores de Accidentabilidad debern ser integrados diferenciadamente con el personal de la contratista y los datos de sus subcontratistas en caso de existir estos.

26 de 26

PEMEX REFINACION INVITATION TO BID GRAL. LAZARO CARDENAS REFINERY

SECTION 2 FABRICATION/INSTALLATION

2013-05-03

UOP Technical Requisition Instrument Installation

Page 1 of 7 970086 R601F-1

1.

Instrumentation
Instrumentation installation and related goods and services shall be provided in accordance with the following documents:

1.1.

Specifications and data sheets


1. 2. 3. 4. 970086 S601F-1, SpecificationInstrument Installation 970086 S601N-1, SpecificationInstrument Checkout 970086 S601T-1, SpecificationInstrument Tubing Installation NOM-001-SEDE-2005 Electrical Installations

1.2.

UOP standard drawings


1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 6-105-7, Standard DrawingThermowells 6-106-6, Standard DrawingThermometer Assemblies 6-107-7, Standard DrawingThermocouple head Assemblies 6-108-6, Standard DrawingThermowell and Skin Thermocouple Installation Assemblies 6-111-6, Standard DrawingOrifice Plates 6-112-4, Standard DrawingPiping Arrangements at Orifice Plates

1.3.

UOP installation details: Refer to Instrumentation Installation detail examples (all drawings in this section to follow at later date) Work all support hookups in conjuction with Dwg. 970086-D670-20
1. Pressure gaugesPressure Gauge Installations: 970086-D667-14 No. of pressure gauges to be installed- 4 qty.

2.

Transmittersa. Transmitter Electrical Hook-Up Details 970086-D669-1 No. of transmitters 27 qty.

3. Flow a. Flow Transmitter (Gas Service) Mechanical Installation: 970086-D667-1 No of flow transmitters to be installed 6 qty. b. Flow Transmitter - Gas Service w/honed flow section Mechanical Installation: 970086-D667-2 No. of flow transmitters to be installed 2 qty.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-05-03

UOP Technical Requisition Instrument Installation c.

Page 2 of 7 970086 R601F-1

Dual Flow Transmitter (Gas Service) installed on one flow element mechanical installation: 970086-D667-3 No. of transmitters to be installed- 4 qty. (2 pairs)

d.

Coriolis Mass Flow Meter Mechanical Installation970086 D667-4 1qty 970086-D667-2 1qty. Coriolis Mass Flowmeter Electrical Hookup 970086-D669-5 No. of transmitters to be installed 2 qty. Supplementary Wiring Diagram 970086- D676 and 970086-D678

e.

Flow transmitter with two rotameters Mechanical Installation 970086 D667-7 No. of flow transmitters 1 qty. with rotameters 2 qty.

f.

Flow Transmitter with steam tracing Mechanical Installation: 970086-D667-12 No. of transmitters 2 qty.

3.

Differential Pressure a. Differential Pressure Transmitter Mechanical Installation: 970086-D667-8 No. of transmitters- 1 qty. with rotameters 2 qty. b. Differential Pressure Transmitter Mechanical Installation: 970086-D667-9 No. of transmitters 2 qty. with Rotameters 2qty. c. Differential Pressure Transmitter Mechanical Installation: 970086-D667-10 No. of transmitters 1 qty. d. Differential Pressure Transmitter with steam tracing Mechanical Installation: 970086-D667-13 No. of transmitters 1 qty.

4.

Pressure Transmitters 970086-D667-18 No. of transmitters 2 qty.

5.

Temperature a. Temperature Element Electrical Hook-up 970086-D669-18 No. of temperature elements - 7 qty. b. Instrument Wiring Diagram Temperature Element/Transmitter Location 970086-D648 c. Regeneration Tower Temperature Element Mechanical Hook-up953469-606 Sketch C Temperature element mechanical hook-up 953469-606 Sketch D No. of temperature elements 8 qty.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-05-03

UOP Technical Requisition Instrument Installation d.

Page 3 of 7 970086 R601F-1

Two temperature elements in one thermowell mechanical hook-up 953469-606 Sketch E 953469-606 Sketch F No. of temperature elements 1 pair (2 elements)

e.

Thermocouple with Temperature Transmitter Electrical Hook-up970086-D669-2 No. of thermocouples with temperature transmitters- 19 qty.

f.

Skin Temperature Elements Electrical Hook-up 970086-D669-3 No. of Skin Temperature Elements- 24 qty.

g.

Skin Thermocouple mechanical Hook-upSee UOP Standard Drawing 6-108 detail B. (Skin Thermocouples on Heaters will be installed by heater manufacturer)

h.

Skin Temperature Elements with Temp Transmitter Electrical Hook-up970086-D669-4 No. of Skin Temp Elements with Transmitters 4 qty.

i.

Multi-point temperature detection on Regeneration Tower Electrical Installation970086-D669-8 No. of temperature element points- 36 qty. (4 sets of 9 points each) Mechanical Installation of Multi-point thermocouple on Regeneration towerSee 953469-305-05

6.

Instrument Supports a. Instrument Support Differential pressure transmitter with 2 Rotameters Existing Structure 970086-D670-11 No. of transmitter supports 2 qty.

b.

Instrument Support Differential Pressure transmitter with 1 rotameter V00000-90005-0264 No. of transmitter support 2 qty.

c.

Support Hook-Up Single Transmitter on one support

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-05-03

UOP Technical Requisition Instrument Installation New structure 970086-D670-2 No. of transmitters 12 quantity

Page 4 of 7 970086 R601F-1

d.

Support Hook-Up Dual transmitters on one support New Structure 970086-D670-5 No. of transmitters 3 pair (6 transmitters)

e.

Dual Temperature Transmitter Support Hook-Up 970086-D670-9 New Structure 970086-D670-9 No. of Instrument Supports needed 7 Qty (14 transmitters)

f.

Single Temperature transmitters support hook-up 970086-D670-2 No. of skin thermocouples with transmitters- 4

g.

Flow Transmitter at grade support hook-up 970086-D670-1 No. of transmitters 1 qty.

h.

Coriolis Meter Horizontal Installation Support Hookup 970086-D670-6 New structure No. of transmitters 1 qty.

i.

Coriolis Meter Vertical Installation Support Hookup 970086-D670-4 Existing structure No. of transmitters 1 qty.

7.

Rotameter a. Mechanical Installation: 970086-D667-6 No. of rotameters- 2 qty. b. New structure support hook-up 2 rotameters on one stand- 970086-D670-10 No. of instrument supports 2 qty. support hook-up 1 rotameter per stand No. of instrument supports 1 qty.

8.

Hydrocarbon analyzera. Electrical Hook-up 970086-D669-11

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-05-03

UOP Technical Requisition Instrument Installation b. Instrument Support Hook-up 970086-D670-16 No. of Hydrocarbon Analyzers 2 qty. c. Supplementary Wiring Diagram 97008-D681

Page 5 of 7 970086 R601F-1

9.

Oxygen Analyzer a. b. c. Mechanical hook-up- 970086-D667-16 Electrical Hook-up- 970086-D669-7 Instrument Support Hook-Up 970086-D670-15

No. of analyzers 1 qty. d. Supplementary wiring diagram 970086-D671

10. Blower Seal Gas Panels a. b. c. d. e. Lift Gas Blower Mechanical Hookup 970086-D667-17 Lift Gas Blower Electrical Hookup 970086-D669-1 Lift Gas Blower Instrument Support Hookup 970086-D670-21 Regen Blower Mechanical Hook-up 970086-D667-15 Regen Blower Instrument Support Hook-Up 970086-D670-14

11. Oil Mist System a. b. c. d. Mechanical Hook-up 970086-D667-18 Electrical Hook-up 970086-D669-16 Support Hook-up 970086-D670-7 Supplementary Wiring Diagram 970086-D680

12. Nuclear Level a. Electrical Hook-Up 970086-669-6

No. of switches 4 qty. b. c. d. Lock Hopper No. 1 Brackets Fabrication Drawing Lock Hopper No. 2 Brackets Fabrication Drawing Supplementary Wiring Diagrams 970086-D672 through D675

13. Valvesa. Pneumatic Installation Details for valves 970086-D668-1 No. of valves- 26 qty. b. Electrical Hook-up for control valves 970086-D669-10 No. of valves- 10 qty.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-05-03

UOP Technical Requisition Instrument Installation c.

Page 6 of 7 970086 R601F-1

Electrical Hook-up for Solenoid On/Off Valves 970086-D669-12 No. of valves 15 qty.

d.

Supplementary Wiring Diagram 970086-D628 and D629

14. Dust Collector Blowback System a. Electrical hook-up 970086-D669-17 No. of Dust Collectors 1 qty.

15. Air Dryer Panel a. Electrical Installation Details 970086-D669-9 No. of air dryers 1 qty. b. Supplementary Wiring Diagram 970086-D677

16. Junction Box Details a. Electrical Hook-Up 970086-D699-14 Junction Boxes 12 qty. b. Single Junction Box support 970086-D670-18 No. of supports 6 qty. c. Dual Junction Boxes support 970086-D670-19 No. of supports 3 qty.

17. Dust Collector Fines Collection Valves a. pneumatic hookup970086-D668-2

Stack selector and valves 2 qty. b. Stack Selector Support Hook-up 9700876-D670-8

18. Dust CollectorTimer Box a. b. c. Support Hookup 970086-D670-12 Electrical Hookup 970086-D669-9 Supplementary Wiring Diagram 970086-D679

19. Bentley Nevada Monitor for Regeneration Blower a. b. c. Support Hookup 970086-D670-17 Electrical Hookup 970086-D669-9 Supplementary Wiring Diagram 970086-D682

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-05-03

UOP Technical Requisition Instrument Installation

Page 7 of 7 970086 R601F-1

1.4.

Project specifications (all drawings in this section to follow at later date)


Instrument Design Summary 970086-D601 Instrument Symbol List and General Notes 970086-D603 Instrument Location Plan IFC 970086 D605 through D619 Instrumentation Homerun Cable Schedule 970086-D625 Instrumentation Homerun Conduit Routing Plan 970086-D626 Instrument Junction Box Wiring Diagrams 970086-D628 through D633 Instrument Junction Box Wiring Diagrams 970086-D636 through D641 Instrument Junction Box Wiring Diagrams 970086-D628 through D633 Instrument Junction Box Wiring Diagrams 970086-D644 and D645 Instrumentation Cable Block Diagram 970086-D650 Instrument Junction Box Assembly Drawing Discrete/Analog 970086-D653 Instrument Junction Box Assembly Drawing Thermocouple 970086-D654 Instrument Bill of Material 970086-D660

2.

Other
Instrument installation and related goods and services shall comply with the most recent version, except as otherwise noted, of the following documents: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 970086 S140A-0, SpecificationLanguage, Units, and Documents 970086 S140C-0, SpecificationDocumentation for Custom-Designed Goods and Services 970086 S140S-0, SpecificationSupplier Document Index 970086 S150-A, SpecificationExamination, Testing, and Inspection Plan and Record 970086 S999C-0, SpecificationCross-Discipline Clearance and Accessibility

3.

Conflicting requirements
In case of conflicts among documents outlined in this Technical Requisition, the following shall apply: 1. 2. 3. Drawings shall take precedence over Specifications. 601 documents shall take precedence over 701 documents. 701 documents shall take precedence over others.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-05-03

Instrument Installation

Page 1 of 9 970086-S601F-1

1.

Scope
This document defines technical requirements for instrument installation.

2.

Fabrication
1. Bolded instruments on Mechanical Flow Diagram (MFD) shall be installed and supported. Bolded instruments fall into three categoriesa. b. c. New instruments that currently do not exist on the current unit New instruments that are replacing instruments that exist on the current unit. Existing instruments that are to be removed from the existing location and installed (reused) in new location.

Refer to the Instrument Design Summary IFC (status column) for which instruments fall into what category. 2. All affected instruments (whether being replaced, reused or new) shall be wired to new junction boxes with new conduit and cable. Demolition of existing conduit and cable not being used for replaced or reused instruments shall be taken as far back as per the instrument demolition drawing. All affected instruments (whether being replaced, new, or reused) shall have new impulse and/or instrument air tubing installed as per instrument requirements. All affected instruments (whether being replaced, new, or being reused) shall have new instrument support stands. Any new support stand in the existing structure shall be painted and bolted to either the grating or support beam. Any support stand in the new structure shall be galvanized and bolted either to the grating or support beam. Brackets to attach the new Nuclear Level Instrument to the existing brackets on Lock Hopper No. 1 (FA-511) and Lock Hopper No. 2 (FA-516) shall be fabricated based on UOP supplied drawings.

3. 4.

5.

3.

General
1. Electrical Installation shall conform to all the requirements of the governing code shown below. IEC Other: NOM-001SEDE-2005

NEC

2. 3. 4.

Instrument except PDT/PDI shall be mounted 2.0 ft (600 mm) - 8.0 ft (2.4 m) from process connection. Instrument shall be mounted to avoid high vibration. Instrument and support shall not be mounted inline with flanges, valve packing, etc. or in such a manner as to interfere with the future removal or installation of other equipment item or instrument. Instrument shall be located so as to maintain clearances required for walkway or access way, and operation/maintenance of equipment and valve. Instrument cable and instrument air tubing shall be routed through pipeways and areas provided for this routing, so as to protect them from damage during plant operation and maintenance.

5. 6.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or produced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without is written permission.

2013-05-03

Instrument Installation

Page 2 of 9 970086-S601F-1

7. 8. 9.

Movement of instruments due to thermal expansion shall be taken into consideration when running conduit and instrument air tubing. Sufficient flexibility shall be provided to permit instrument to move without straining cable or tubing. Unless prohibited for other technical reasons, cable entry shall be from bottom of instrument.

10. Conduit seals, for explosion proof installations of instrument loops, shall not be filled unless otherwise directed by UOP. 11. Instruments shall be protected from damage before, during, and after installation. 12. Stainless steel surface shall be protected from iron filing from nearby grinding and welding. 13. Instrument shall be protected from rain. 14. Cable adjacent to horizontal cable entry shall have a drip loop. 15. All instruments (new or reused) are to be kept in a clean, dry, indoor environment before installation. 16. Supply and installation of instrument material shall be accordance with NEC classification: Class I, Division 1, Groups B,C,and D except where noted. 17. Electrical Certification for instruments shall be UL and/or FM.

4.

Instrument installation 4.1. Scope of supply


1. UOP a. b. c. Tagged instrument shall be obtained from UOP. Transmitter manifold, where required, shall be supplied assembled to the transmitter. Nuclear Level bracket drawings for new nuclear level detector and source being replaced on existing equipment- Lock Hopper No. 1 (FA-511), and Lock Hopper No. 2 (FA-516)

2.

Fabricator to supply a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. Junction Box Cable (non-armored acceptable) PVC coated Galvanized Steel Conduit PVC coated Conduit seals and fittings Flexible conduit (needs to be Explosion proof/Flameproof) Cable label and wire tag Stainless steel tubing and fitting Instrument air tubing and impulse tubing Conduit piping support Instrument and junction box stand Instrument stand and junction box stand name plates

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or produced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without is written permission.

2013-05-03

Instrument Installation

Page 3 of 9 970086-S601F-1

l.

Supporting steel

m. Accessories n. o. Hardware and consumable items required to complete instrument installation. Fabricated nuclear level brackets to attach new instrument on existing brackets on the Reactor, Lock Hopper No. 1 (FA-511) and Lock Hopper No. 2 (FA-516)

4.2.

General Installation
Tagged instruments shall be installed as per applicable instrument mechanical installation detail, instrument electrical installation detail, instrument tracing detail, instrumentation support installation detail and conduit routing plan.

4.3.

Tubing
1. Pocket (low point) shall be avoided. a. b. 2. Impulse tubing shall slope continuously down to process connection in gas service and continuously down to the instrument in liquid service. Minimum slope is 1 per 1 (25 mm per 300 mm).

Instrument piping shall be supported from prefabricated pipe supports, and any other permanent vibration free structure, except as follows: a. b. c. Instrument piping and tubing shall not be supported from process piping. Sufficient supports shall be installed to maintain instrument piping in a neat manner. Tubing shall have support every 3 (1m).

4.4.

Instrument wiring
1. 2. 3. 4. 24 VDC wiring, thermocouple wiring, and AC power wiring shall be kept separate from each of the other type. No splices are permitted in any wire from the junction box to the instrument. Individual wire insulation shall be stripped back about 1 (25 mm) or only as long as required to make a reliable connection. Shields / drain wires shall be landed to terminal provided at the junction box. Shields / drain wires are not to be terminated at the instrument. They should be taped back at the instrument. For grounding details refer to electrical drawing package. Wire Labels a. Thermocouple and analog-instrument conductor shall be labeled at instrument and junction box. Label shall include instrument tag number and polarity [e.g., FT-4430 (+), FT-4430(-)]. Discrete-instrument conductor shall be labeled at instrument and junction box. Label shall include de-energized contact state and instrument tag number [e.g., LSL-4421(NO), LSL-4421(C)] Label for individual wires shall be the tubular heat shrink type. Label on individual wires shall be completely on the insulated portion of the wire

5. 6.

b.

c. d.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or produced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without is written permission.

2013-05-03

Instrument Installation

Page 4 of 9 970086-S601F-1

e. f. g.

Label font shall be type written, permanent, black, size of at least ten point, and on white background. Hand written labels are not permitted. Label shall be suitable for harsh applications.

4.5.

Instrument air piping


1. For portions of the instrument air header that may be field fit the following guidelines apply. a. b. c. d. Take-offs from the sub head (to the air user) should be taken from the top side of the sub-header. The end of each sub-header shall be fitted with a valve and threaded plug to allow condensation to be drained from the sub-header. Low point pockets shall be avoided. End users should be above the sub-header in order to avoid low point pockets. Each end user (air consumer) shall have a shut off valve within reach (approximately 1 meter). The final shut off valve for each air user should generally be below the end user so that the final tubing to the end user will not have a low point pocket.

4.6.

Pressure gauge
1. 2. Refer to piping plan for location of pressure gauge. Pressure gauge shall be installed so that indicator is visible from grade or grating.

4.7.

Pressure transmitter
1. 2. Refer to instrument location plan for location of pressure transmitters. LCD indicator shall be oriented so that indicator is in correct orientation with respect to grade or grating, and will be visible to operations/maintenance workers.

4.8.

Differential pressure transmitter (flow and differential pressure service)


1. 2. Refer to instrument location plan for location of differential pressure transmitters. LCD indicator shall be oriented so that indicator is in correct orientation with respect to grade or grating, and will be visible to operations/maintenance workers.

4.9.

Remote indicators
1. 2. Refer to instrument location plan for location of remote indicators. Remote LCD indicators shall be oriented so that LCD indicators are in a correct orientation relative to grade or grating.

4.10. Orifice plates and orifice flanges 4.10.1.Orifice plates


1. Install plate with side marked inlet facing toward direction of flow.

4.10.2.Orifice flanges
1. Refer to piping plan for location of orifice flanges

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or produced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without is written permission.

2013-05-03

Instrument Installation

Page 5 of 9 970086-S601F-1

4.10.3.Honed flow sections


1. 2. Refer to piping plan and instrument plan for location of honed flow sections. Honed flow sections shall be installed with the longer section of meter run at the upstream side of the process flange. The shorter section of meter run shall be installed at the downstream side of the process flange. For gas services honed flow sections and shall be installed such that all taping locations are off the top side of the pipeline. For liquid services honed flow section shall be installed so that all taping locations are on the side of the pipe. For honed flows, fabricator to install 10 mm spacer between orifice flanges, orifice plate and gaskets to be shipped loose.

3.

4.

4.11. Coriolis Mass Flow Meters


1. 2. Refer to piping and instrument plan for location of Coriolis Mass Flow Meters Proper mounting of the senor is required. Use of mounting kit provided by Coriolis Mass Flow Meter vendor required. Refer to mechanical installation drawing for each Coriolis meter. Use of pipe mounting brackets supplied by Coriolis Meter Vendor required. Refer to support installation drawing for each Coriolis Meter. Verification that filters are installed upstream of the Coriolis Meter is required. LCD indicator shall be oriented so that indicator is in correct orientation with respect to grade or grating, and will be visible to operations/maintenance workers

3. 4. 5.

4.12. Thermocouples, thermometer and thermowells


1. 2. Refer to piping plan for location of thermocouples and thermowells. Fabricator to note length of themowell and thermowell nozzle when installing all thermowells. For installation on the same level or at an angle of 45 to the line wall, the wet length immersion of the themowells should be a minimum of 2. Fabricator to alert UOP in writing if thermowell(s) do not meet this requirement.

4.13. Temperature transmitters


1. 2. Refer to instrument location plan for location of transmitters LCD indicator shall be oriented so that indicator is in correct orientation with respect to grade or grating, and will be visible to operations/maintenance workers.

4.14. Nuclear level instruments


1. 2. 3. Refer to instrument location plan for location of nuclear level detectors and switches Nuclear sources ship direct to refiners site from manufacturer and will need to be installed on the appropriate vessels. Brackets to attach to the new Nuclear Level Instrument (detector and source) to the existing brackets on the Reactor, Lock Hopper No. 1 (FA-511) and Lock Hopper No. 2 (FA-516) will be fabricated and installed by the on-site fabricator based on UOP supplied drawings.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or produced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without is written permission.

2013-05-03

Instrument Installation

Page 6 of 9 970086-S601F-1

4.15. Control valves 4.15.1. General


1. 2. 3. 4. Refer to piping plan for location of control valves All control valves are supplied with accessories mounted and tubed except as noted. Valves shall be installed so that the flow arrow on the body is in direction of flow in piping. If a valve is installed with its flow arrow in the correct direction and the valve accessories are facing so that access to the accessories is, obstructed, or less than optimal, the fabricator shall notify UOP in writing in a timely manner. No valve should ever be installed with the top of the actuator pointed toward the grating.

5.

4.15.2.Automated and Manual Ball valves


1. 2. Refer to piping plan for location of ball valves. Prior to installing any ball valve, manual or automated, the alignment of the piping shall be confirmed. The intent is to assure that the two piece valve is not subjected to stresses from misaligned inlet and outlet flanges. UOP resident shall witness the confirmation of the alignment of inlet and outlet piping flanges. The alignment shall be to within the dimension defined by the flange bolt hole radius less the radius of the bolt. The intent is to assure that the two piece valve is not subjected to stresses from misaligned inlet and outlet flanges. Prior to installing any ball valve in the catalyst path, UOP resident shall witness the proper taper bore has been established. Valves shall be installed so that the flow arrow on the body is in direction of flow in piping. If a valve is installed with its flow arrow in the correct direction and the valve accessories are facing so that access to the accessories is, obstructed, or less than optimal, the fabricator shall notify UOP in writing in a timely manner. Metal seated ball valves shall not be stroke tested unless agreed to and witnessed by UOP.

3.

4. 5. 6.

7.

4.16. Oxygen analyzer


1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Refer to instrument location plan for location. Class I Div 2 area classification has been approved for the oxygen analyzer. The manufactures supplied gasket shall be used. UOP resident shall witness and photograph the installation to ensure that the analyzer probe is orientated correctly. Do not use Teflon on the threaded portion of the analyzer probe. The probe shall be dry threaded.

4.17. Rotameters
1. Refer to instrument location and or piping plan for location

4.18. Manual control station


1. Refer to instrument location plan for location

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or produced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without is written permission.

2013-05-03

Instrument Installation

Page 7 of 9 970086-S601F-1

4.19. H2/HC analyzer


1. Refer to instrument location plan for location.

4.20. Restriction orifices


1. 2. Refer to piping plan for location of restriction orifices. Install plate with side marked inlet facing toward direction of flow.

4.21. Instrument junction boxes


1. 2. 3. Refer to conduit routing plan for location of instrument junction boxes. Fabricator to build junction box per UOP junction box assembly drawing. Refer to UOP junction box support details for support.

4.22. Conduit
1. Refer to electrical installation specifications (S713F or S712F)

5.

Demolition of existing instrumentation 5.1. Affected instrumentation being removed and reused 5.1.1. Valves
1. 2. Care should be taken when removing electrical connection and tubing connections at instrument air header isolation valve. Care should be taken that valve flange face is not damaged during removal. Fabricator to inform UOP in writing of damage to valve flanges and seat that will affect operation of valve. Remove and discard old flange gaskets and bolts. Replace with new gaskets and bolts. Store valve in a clean, dry, indoor environment while awaiting installation. Contractor to contact UOP if valve being reused does not have legible flow arrow.

3. 4. 5.

5.1.2. Rotameters
1. Care should be taken when removing process connections and removing from instrument stand. Contractor shall inform UOP in writing of irreparable damage that would prevent reuse of rotameters. Store in a clean, dry, indoor environment while awaiting installation

2.

5.1.3. Flow transmitter


1. Care should be taken when removing electrical connection and tubing connections at process isolation valve. Contractor shall inform UOP in writing of irreparable damage that would prevent reuse of flow transmitter. Care should be taken when removing from instrument stand. Manifold brackets should be retained for reinstallation on new stand. Manifold may remain connected to transmitter. Store transmitter and bracket together in a clean, dry, indoor environment while awaiting installation

2. 3. 4.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or produced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without is written permission.

2013-05-03

Instrument Installation

Page 8 of 9 970086-S601F-1

5.1.4. Thermocouples/Thermowells
1. Thermocouple shall be disconnected from electrical and not removed from thermowell before removing thermowell. Care should be taken when disconnecting electrical that the thermocouple wires are not bent or broken. Thermocouple/thermowell shall be removed as an assembly. Care should be taken to preserve thernowell flanges when removing from piping. Thermocouple/thermowell assembly shall be stored in a clean, dry, indoor environment while awaiting installation.

2. 3.

5.2.

Affected instrumentation being removed 5.2.1. Instrumentation being removed and replaced in existing piping
1. Care should be taken to preserve pipe flange faces. Contractor to inform UOP in writing of damage to piping flanges that would affect installation and operation of new instrumentation. Remove and discard old flange gaskets and bolts. Replace with new gaskets and bolts. Instrumentation shall be transported to a designated location within the Pemex Minatitlan refinery with the exception of the nuclear level sources (see item 4). Pemex will be responsible for disposal of all items stored in this designated location. Written notification of when nuclear level sources will be removed shall be given to Pemex prior to removal. Pemex to inform contractor of disposal requirements. The appropriate Pemex official(s) need to be present when nuclear sources are removed.

2. 3.

4.

5.2.2. Instruments being removed and discarded (location of instrument has changed)
1. Removed Instrumentation shall be transported to a designated location within the Pemex Minatitlan refinery. Pemex will be responsible for disposal of all items stored in this designated location

5.2.3. Instrument Stands


1. Instrument stands on instrumentation shall be replaced with new instrument stands. Instrument stands on the existing structure shall be painted and bolted to either the grating or support beam. Instrument stands removed shall be be transported to a designated location within the Pemex Minatitlan refinery. Pemex will be responsible for disposal of all items stored in this designated location.

2.

5.2.4. Tubing
1. Remove existing tubing from valves and flow transmitters back to its isolation valve or as far back as possible without interfering with existing instruments.

5.2.5. Instrument Wiring


1. Demolition of existing conduit for instruments that are not being replaced in their current location shall be taken as far back as possible without interfering with existing instruments. Refer to demolition drawings.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or produced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without is written permission.

2013-05-03

Instrument Installation

Page 9 of 9 970086-S601F-1

6.

Inspection and testing


1. Refer to S601N

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or produced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without is written permission.

2013-05-03

UOP Specification Instrument Checkout

Page 1 of 3 970086 S601N-1

1.

Scope
This document defines technical requirements for instrument wiring-continuity test, functional check, and tube-fitting check.

2.

Functional check
Instrument, except pressure gauge and thermometer, shall be functionally checked.

2.1.

Test equipment and pneumatic supply


1. 2. Microprocessor-based smart instrument shall be tested using a portable communicator. Electronic test equipment shall have resolution values less than or equal to the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. 3. mA DC 0.01 mA mV DC 0.01 mV V DC V AC 1.00 mV 1.00 mV 0.06% of full scale 0.10 Hz

Resistance Frequency

Pneumatic test equipment shall have uncertainties less than or equal to the following values: a. b. c. d. 0.0 - 25.0 in. H2O (635 mm) 0.0 - 15.0 psig (1.05 kgf/cm ) 0.0 - 100.0 psig (7.0 kgf/cm ) 0.0 - 1000.0 psig (70.0 kgf/cm2)
2 2

0.30 % of full span 0.10 % of full span 0.05 % of full span 0.05 % of full span

4.

Pneumatic supply shall have the following characteristics: a. b. c. Pressure of at least 70 psig (5.0 kgf/cm2) Filtered to less than 10 microns Dew point temperature less than -20F (-29C)

2.2.

Wiring
Installed wiring shall be checked for the following: 1. Continuity between terminations a. 2-wire Pressure, Differential pressure and temperature transmitter continuity shall be checked with smart communicator from junction box. Successful test will have soft tag verified and visual confirmation that integral indicator illuminated Circuit continuity for solenoids and limit switches shall be checked during valve stroke test from junction box. Ohmmeter or limit switch tester shall be used depending on type of limit switch output. Limit switches shall be adjusted so that ZSC (open limit switch) has closed contacts at 100% valve stroke and ZSO (closed limit switch) has closed contacts at 100% valve stroke.

b.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-05-03

UOP Specification Instrument Checkout c.

Page 2 of 3 970086 S601N-1

Positioner continuity shall be checked with smart communicator and with valve stroke test with 4-20 mA signal from junction box. Software tag shall be verified Circuit continuity for other instruments (4 wire instruments,analyzer alarms, pressure switches etc.) shall be checked by shorting the wires at the instrument end and verifying the result at junction box terminal strip.

d.

2.

Isolation from other conductors, including shielding a. Each wire shall be checked using ohmmeter to verify isolation from all other conductors within junction box including shield drain wires.

2.3. 2.4.

Metal-seated ball valve


1. Metal-seated ball valve shall not be stroked.

Control valve, except metal-seated ball valve


1. On/off-control-valve action shall be confirmed using the following procedure: a. b. 2. Verify valve position against P&ID with solenoid deenergized. Energize solenoid and verify valve position against data sheet.

Throttling-control-valve action shall be confirmed using the following procedure: a. b. Verify valve position against P&ID with no input signal present . [Solenoid shall be deenergized if supplied] solenoid Using 50% and 100% input, verify valve stem moves over range. [Solenoid shall be energized if supplied]

2.5.

Errors
1. 2. Incorrect smart-instrument span setting shall be corrected. Other errors shall be reported within five working days.

3.

Tube-fitting check
1. 2. 3. Tube-fitting insertion depth shall be checked in accordance with manufacturers instructions. Tube fitting shall be tested using tube-fitting manufacturers gap inspection or go/no-go gauge in accordance with manufacturers instructions. Fitting not in compliance shall be replaced.

4.

Instrumentation Check List Documentation:


The fabricator will advise UOP of checkout schedule Fabricator shall record instrument checkout results on fabricator supplied checklist The fabricator instrument check will include but not be limited to, following: 1. 2. Updating common master set of instrument fabrication drawings with as built information Verification that instrument bulk material is in compliance to UOP specifications and quantity.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-05-03

UOP Specification Instrument Checkout 3. 4. 5. 6.

Page 3 of 3 970086 S601N-1

Verfication that position of instrument installation is clear of accessways and does not infringe on operator access. Verfication that filter is installed on upstream side of Coriolis mass flow meter. Verification that local indicators are visible from associated manual valves wherever indicated on the P&IDs. O2 Analyzer: a. b. c. d. e. Photos to be taken of Oxygen analyzer installation. Photos to verify sample tube and sample exhaust tube are installed and properly oriented. Verification that instrument air purge connection for Oxygen sensor installed Verification that nitrogen connection for aspiration of sample installed Verification that Oxygen sensor sample probe and exhaust probee was dry threaded to sample flange,i.e. threads were not prepared with lubricant or tape. Verification that manufacturer supplied sensor gasket was installed.

7.

H2/HC analyzer: a. Verification that sampling line from dust removal header and from nitrogen header are within maximum distances specified on the P&IDs

8.

Following to be verified on control valves a. b. c. d. Direction of flow arrow on control valve bodies same as process flow Visibility of air supply and output gauges Instrument air supply shutoff valve shall be piped within 3 feet of valve air filter regulator and be clear of accessways Bug screens for all solenoids vents provided.

9.

Following to be verified for impulse tubing of transmitters a. b. c. Slope requirement for all the transmitter impulse lines is per the installation drawings Primary isolatation valve installed is same size and valve type (e.g. globe, gate, ball) as the P&ID. High & low taps connections are correct

10. Verify color code and proper tagging for cables and conductors 11. Measure length of all thermowell nozzles and highlight where thermowell does not extend into piping or vessel 12. Verification grounding of instrument, junction boxes and cable trays complies with installation drawingss. 13. Verification electric power installed from instrument power pan to four wire instruments

5.

Documentation
Fabricator Inspection and Test Plan (ITP) shall be completed and provided.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-05-03

UOP Specification Instrument Tubing Installation

Page 1 of 1 970086 S601T-1

1.

Scope
This document defines technical requirements for installation of instrument tubing.

2.

Tubing end
1. 2. Tubing shall be cut square and deburred. Length inserted into compression fitting shall be clean, round, and free of scratches.

3.

Tubing bend
1. 2. 3. Bend shall be made using a tubing bender. Bend radius shall be at least three times tube outside diameter. Distance from bend or fitting to bend or fitting shall be at least 4 inches (100 mm).

4.

Tubing union
1. 2. Union elbow fitting is prohibited. Tubing run less than 1 m long shall have no union.

5.

Tubing fitting-manufacturers instructions


1. 2. 3. Fitting-manufacturers installation instructions shall be furnished two weeks prior to beginning work. Fitting-manufacturers installation instructions shall be available on demand at fabrication facility. Fitting installation shall comply with the tubing-fitting-manufacturers installation instructions.

6.

Tubing support
1. 2. 3. Support spacing shall be less than or equal to 1 m. Support shall not be connected to process piping. Tubing shall be supported as follows: a. b. c. Tubing shall be supported from structural steel or grating. Sufficient supports shall be installed to maintain instrument piping in a neat manner. Tubing span over 6 ft (2 m) shall be continuously supported in tubing tray.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

Revision Indication
R

UOP LLC 25 East Algonquin Road Des Plaines, Illinois 60017-5017, USA

STANDARD DRAWING 6-105-7


DATE STATUS APVD AUTHD

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP LLC and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

THERMOWELLS
30APR11 REAFFIRMED RED RGP

1/2 NPT (NATIONAL STANDARD PIPE TAPER THREAD) SEAL WELD 1.315 (33)

ASME B16.5 FLANGE. FOR SIZE AND CLASS SEE UOP PROJECT SPECIFICATION. FLANGE FURNISHED AND FABRICATED BY THERMOWELL SUPPLIER.

5/8

1 1/2 1/2

(16)

1 NPT

3/16 (5) RADIUS CURVE AND TAPER


(NOTE 1)

ALL THREADS IN FLANGE SHALL BE COVERED BY THREADS ON THE THERMOWELL (CHASE THREADS TO SUIT)
11

TANGENTIALLY

LENGTH

STEM SHALL BE BUFFED AND

/ 16 (17.5) (NOTE 2, 3) BORE SHALL BE CONCENTRIC WITH OUTSIDE

POLISHED DIAMETER WITHIN 10% OF WALL THICKNESS


1/4 (6)

/ 32
17

11

+ + 0.002 (8.73 0.05) (NOTE 2) -

/ 32 (13.5)

(13)

(38)

DETAIL B DETAIL A
FLANGED THERMOCOUPLE / RESISTANCE ELEMENT THERMOWELL FLANGED TEST THERMOWELL SAME AS DETAIL A EXCEPT WITH PLUG AND CHAIN PER DETAIL Z

1 1/2 STANDARD PIPE (38) TAPER THREAD)

7/8 (22)

5/8 (16)

1/2 NPT (NATIONAL

1/4 (6)

CHAIN ATTACHED WITH DRIVE SCREWS


1/2 (13) 7/8

1 NPT

(22)

KNURLED HEAD

CURVE AND TAPER TANGENTIALLY


11

3/16 (5) RADIUS / 16 (17.5) (NOTE 2, 3) 1/2 NPT

(NOTE 1)

LENGTH

STEM SHALL BE BUFFED AND POLISHED


1/4 (6)
11

BORE SHALL BE CONCENTRIC WITH OUTSIDE DIAMETER WITHIN 10% OF WALL THICKNESS / 32 + + 0.002 (8.73 0.05) (NOTE 2) -

DETAIL Z
17

/ 32 (13.5)

DETAIL E
SCREWED THERMOCOUPLE / RESISTANCE ELEMENT THERMOWELL

DETAIL F
SCREWED TEST THERMOWELL SAME AS DETAIL E EXCEPT WITH PLUG AND CHAIN PER DETAIL Z

NOTES:
1. SEE UOP PROJECT SPECIFICATION FOR LENGTH DATA. 2. 3. 4. CONFIRM INSIDE AND OUTSIDE DIAMETER BASED ON TEMPERATURE ELEMENT REQUIRMENTS. OUTSIDE DIAMETER: 7/8 (22) MAXIMUM DIMENSIONS SHOWN IN PARENTHESES ARE IN MILLIMETERS.

Revision Indication
R

UOP LLC 25 East Algonquin Road Des Plaines, Illinois 60017-5017, USA

STANDARD DRAWING 6-106-6


DATE STATUS APVD AUTHD

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP LLC and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

THERMOMETER ASSEMBLIES
30APR11 REAFFIRMED RED RGP
1/2 NPT (NATIONAL STANDARD PIPE TAPER THREAD)

ALL THREADS IN FLANGE SHALL BE COVERED BY SEAL


2 +3/8 (50 + 10) 2 + -3/8 (50 + 10) -

THREADS ON THE THERMOWELL (CHASE THREADS TO SUIT)

1/2 NPT (NATIONAL STANDARD PIPE TAPER THREAD)


(25) 1 THERMOMETER STEM LENGTH (NOTE 1)

WELD

THERMOMETER STEM LENGTH (NOTE 1)

1 NPT

/ 16 (5) RADIUS

1 NPT

ASME B16.5 FLANGE. FOR SIZE AND CLASS SEE UOP

/ 16 (5) RADIUS

PROJECT SPECIFICATION. FLANGE FURNISHED AND FABRICATED BY

7/8 (22) MAXIMUM

7/8 (22) MAXIMUM THERMOWELL SUPPLIER.

STEM SHALL BE
3
1/4

/ 32 (2.4)

3
1/4

BUFFED AND POLISHED

/ 32 (2.4) MINIMUM

STEM SHALL BE BUFFED AND POLISHED

(6)

MINIMUM

DETAIL A
THERMOMETER WITH SCREWED THERMOWELL

(6)

DETAIL B
THERMOMETER WITH FLANGED THERMOWELL

DETAIL C
SCREWED TEST THERMOWELL SAME AS DETAIL A EXCEPT WITH PLUG AND CHAIN PER DETAIL Z

DETAIL D
FLANGED TEST THERMOWELL SAME AS DETAIL B EXCEPT WITH PLUG AND CHAIN PER DETAIL Z

CHAIN ATTACHED WITH DRIVE SCREWS KNURLED HEAD

1/2 NPT

DETAIL Z

NOTES:
1. SEE UOP PROJECT SPECIFICATION FOR LENGTH DATA. 2. 3. DIAL THERMOMETER COMPLETE WITH THERMOWELL SHALL BE FURNISHED BY THERMOMETER SUPPLIER. THERMOWELL AND THERMOMETER SHALL BE INSTALLED SUCH THAT THERMOMETER DIAL IS NOT IN THE HORIZONTAL PLANE. WHERE NECESSARY A SWIVEL NECK THERMOMETER MAY BE USED. 4. 5. WHEN TEST THERMOWELL IS SPECIFIED, FURNISH THERMOWELL ONLY, WITHOUT THERMOMETER. DIMENSIONS SHOWN IN PARENTHESES ARE IN MILLIMETERS.

Revision Indication
R

UOP LLC 25 East Algonquin Road Des Plaines, Illinois 60017-5017, USA

STANDARD DRAWING 6-107-7


DATE STATUS APVD AUTHD

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP LLC and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

TEMPERATURE SENSOR TERMINAL HEAD ASSEMBLIES


6 (150) HEAD AND TERMINAL CONNECTOR 1/2 CONDUIT NIPPLES MINIMUM LENGTH 1 1/2 (38) 1/4 SET SCREW HEAD AND TERMINAL CONNECTOR 1/2 (13) CONNECT TO THERMOWELL 1 SCHEDULE 80 PIPE

30APR11

REAFFIRMED

RED

rgp

1/2 CONDUIT NIPPLE 1/2 NPT (NATIONAL HEAD AND TERMINAL STANDARD PIPE TAPER THREAD) 3/4 X 1/2 BUSHING NOTE 3 CONNECTOR NOTE 3 1 NPT (NATIONAL NOTE 1 CONNECTOR STANDARD PIPE TAPER THREAD) NOTE 1 3/4 X 1/2 BUSHING 1/2 NPT (NATIONAL TO FIT) 1/2 UNION (COMPLETE) 1/2 SCHEDULE 40 PIPE SCREWED INTO HEADER THERMOWELL (FURNISHED IN FIELD LENGTH 3 (75) TO 6 (150) CONNECTOR 1/2 UNION (COMPLETE) MINIMUM LENGTH 1 1/2 (38)

DETAIL A
FOR USE WITH THERMOCOUPLE THERMOWELLS

DETAIL C
FOR USE WITH THERMOCOUPLE WELL INSIDE HEATER TUBE HEADER COMPARTMENT NOTE 3

1/2 SCHEDULE 40 PIPE STANDARD PIPE SCREWED INTO HEADER TAPER THREAD) THERMOWELL 3/4 X 1/2 BUSHING CONNECTOR (FURNISHED IN FIELD)

NOTE 1

HEAD AND TERMINAL CONNECTOR

1/2 STAINLESS STEEL COMPRESSION FITTING 1/2 CONDUIT NIPPLES MINIMUM LENGTH 1 1/2 (38) FOR USE WITH THERMOCOUPLE WELL OUTSIDE HEATER TUBE HEADER COMPARTMENT CONDUIT OUTLET BODY (NOTE 2)

DETAIL D

MINERAL OXIDE INSULATED STAINLESS STEEL SHEATH 1/2 UNION THERMOCOUPLE ELEMENT (COMPLETE) 3/4 X 1/2 BUSHING NOTE 3 CONNECTOR CONNECTOR NOTE 1 1/2 NPT (NATIONAL STANDARD PIPE TAPER THREAD)

3 COVER

NOTES:
NOTE 1 1. LIQUID TIGHT FLEXIBLE CONNECTION ASSEMBLY (BY OTHERS). INSTALL AS DRIP LOOP. 2. CONDUIT OUTLET BODY SHALL BE SUITABLE FOR THE ELECTRICAL CLASSIFICATION OF THE INSTALLATION. 3. FASTEN THE CAP TO THE BASE BY A SMALL CHAIN ON A SWIVEL. CAPS SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH SCREW DRIVER SLOT, AND A HEAT AND MOISTURE RESISTANT GASKET. 5. DIMENSIONS SHOWN IN PARENTHESES ARE IN MILLIMETERS.

DETAIL E
FOR USE WITH MINERAL OXIDE INSULATED STAINLESS STEEL SHEATH THERMOCOUPLE ELEMENT

DETAIL F
FOR USE WITH RESISTANCE ELEMENT THERMOWELLS 4.

Revision Indication
R

UOP LLC 25 East Algonquin Road Des Plaines, Illinois 60017-5017, USA

STANDARD DRAWING 6-108-6


DATE STATUS APVD AUTHD

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP LLC and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

THERMOWELL AND SKIN THERMOCOUPLE INSTALLATION ASSEMBLIES


(NOTE 1) "C"

30APR11

REAFFIRMED

RED

RGP

INCREASE TO 3 AS INDICATED
6 (150)

"C"

FOR SMALLER LINES

1 CLASS 3000 THREADED ELBOLET


FL O W

1 LONG WELDING NECK NOZZLE


FL O W

MINIMUM SIZE 3. FOR SMALLER LINES INCREASE TO 3 AS INDICATED

MINIMUM

(NOTE 1)

MINIMUM SIZE 3.

REDUCER

REDUCER

SCREWED

ELBOW INSTALLATION
"C" 6 (150)

FLANGED
(NOTE 1) MINIMUM

(NOTE 1)

"C"

1 CLASS 3000 FULL COUPLING OR THREDOLET

1 LONG WELDING NECK NOZZLE

MINIMUM SIZE 6. 1-0 (300) FOR SMALLER LINES INCREASE TO 6 AS INDICATED SCREWED FLANGED 1-0 (300)

VESSEL AND LINE INSTALLATION DETAIL A NOTES:


1. "C" DIMENSION SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 3-0 (915) CLEAR SPACE FOR REMOVAL OF TEMPERATURE SENSOR. INCREASE CLEARANCE FOR VESSEL THERMOWELLS. 2. WHEN INSTALLING REDUCERS IN A TO CLEAR OUTSIDE HORIZONTAL LINE, USE THE ECCENTRIC DIAMETER OF WELD TYPE TO AVOID POCKETS. 3. 4. FLANGES SHALL BE ASME B16.5 STANDARD. SHEATHED TYPE INSIDE DIAMETER OF FLANGED CONNECTION SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 1 (25). 5. FOR THERMOWELL INSTALLATIONS WHERE THE FLUID VELOCITY IS A CONCERN, THE ELBOW INSTALLATION SHOULD BE CONSIDERED. 6. ELBOW INSTALLATION IS PREFERRED FOR LINES 6 AND SMALLER. 7. DIMENSIONS SHOWN IN PARENTHESES ARE IN MILLIMETERS. NOTE: STUDS (NELSON TYPE PREFERRED) SHALL BE WELDED TO THE EQUIPMENT PRIOR TO FINAL POST WELD HEAT TREATMENT IN THE FABRICATORS SHOP. STUDS MUST BE PROTECTED DURING SHIPMENT OF EQUIPMENT TO PREVENT BREAKAGE THERMOCOUPLE ASSEMBLY THE SHEATH MUST EXTEND OUTSIDE ANY INSULATION IN ORDER TO AVOID EXPOSING THE THERMOCOUPLE LEAD WIRE INSULATION TO EQUIPMENT TEMPERATURES. 3/4 (19) INSIDE DIAMETER THERMOCOUPLE WASHER 1/2 (13) DIAMETER X 1 1/2 (40) LONG THREADED STUD WITH WASHER AND 2 HEX NUTS. THE STUD AND HEX NUTS SHALL BE THE SAME METALLURGY AS THE EQUIPMENT TO WHICH THEY ARE ATTACHED.

SKIN THERMOCOUPLE FOR EXTERNAL INSTALLATION DETAIL B

Revision Indication
R

UOP LLC

NOTE:
Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP LLC and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.
INLET SHALL BE INDICATED ON TAB FOR RAISED FACE FLANGES ORIFICE PLATES.

TAG NUMBER LINE SIZE FLANGE CLASS BORE MATERIAL

25 East Algonquin Road Des Plaines, Illinois 60017-5017, USA

STANDARD DRAWING 6-111-6


DATE STATUS APVD AUTHD

ORIFICE PLATES

08SEP08

REAFFIRMED

RED

RGP

DETAIL C
DATA TAB 2 (50) 1 (25) MINIMUM MINIMUM 1/8 (3) DATA TAB DETAIL C
(NOTE 8) (NOTE 8)

QUADRANT EDGE
1/8 (3)

(QUARTER CIRCLE) ORIFICE PLATE


THE ANGLE OF THE BEVEL SHALL BE APPROXIMATELY (a) (b)

1 1/4 (32) MINIMUM

DATA TAB DETAIL C

"Y"

CALCULATION TO DETERMINE 3/8 (10) TAP

NOTE 9

"Y"

45 DEGREES.

r r ROUNDED EDGE IS 1/4 CIRCLE

FLOW

3/8 (10) ROD

"A"

CALCULATION TO DETERMINE
d

BEVEL PER DETAIL D

"G"

(c) ORIFICE
"A"

(d)

FLOW DIAMETER
d "P"

3 / (1.2) LESS 64

THAN INSIDE RADIUS OF PIPE

C
/ 64 (1.2) LESS THAN
3

FLOW

NOTE:
DO NOT BEVEL BEVEL ECCENTRIC PER DETAIL D PLATE ORIFICE PLATES.

"T"

INSIDE RADIUS OF PIPE

NOTE:
PLATE THICKNESS "T" SHOULD EQUAL THE RADIUS " r " AS SHOWN IN (a), BUT NEVER SMALLER THAN VALUES

/ 32 (2.4) DIAMETER WEEP HOLE (NOTES 2, 4)

/ 32 (2.4) DIAMETER

"W" INSIDE DIAMETER TO SUIT PIPE SIZE

NOTE:
FLOW ARROW STAMPED ON RING

"t"

NOTE 5

OF "T" LISTED IN THE TABLE. IF PLATE THICKNESS EQUAL TO " r " IS IMPRACTICAL, THEN CONSTRUCTIONS SHOWN IN (b) OR (c) MAY BE USED. FOR d/D RATIOS GREATER THAN 0.63 USE (d). VALUES OF " r " MAY BE OBTAINED FROM FLOW MEASUREMENT ENGINEERING

WEEP HOLE (NOTES 2, 4)

DETAIL A
FOR ASME RAISED FACE FLANGES

DETAIL B
FOR ASME RING JOINT FLANGES

DETAIL D

RD HANDBOOK, BY RICHARD MILLER, 3 EDITION.

"A" PIPE SIZE "T" FLANGE CLASS (NOTE 3) 150 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2 2 1/2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) 2 5/8 3 3 3/8 4 1/8 4 7/8 5 3/8 6 7/8 7 3/4 8 3/4 1 1 13 3/8 16 1/8 17 3/4 20 1/4 21 5/8 23 7/8 28 1/4 (67) (76) (86) (105) (124) (137) (175) (197) (222) (279) (340) (410) (451) (514) (549) (606) (718) 7 1/8 8 1/2 9 7/8 12 1/8 14 1/4 16 5/8 19 1/8 21 1/4 23 1/2 25 3/4 30 1/2 300 2 7/8 3 1/4 3 3/4 4 3/8 5 1/8 5 7/8 (181) (216) (251) (308) (362) (422) (486) (540) (597) (654) (775) (73) (83) (95) (1 1 1) (130) (149) 7 5/8 9 1/2 10 1/2 12 5/8 15 3/4 18 19 3/8 22 1/4 24 1/8 26 7/8 31 1/8 (194) (241) (267) (321) (400) (457) (492) (565) (613) (683) (791) 19 5/8 20 1/2 22 5/8 25 1/8 27 1/2 33 6 5/8 8 1/8 9 3/4 1 1 3/8 14 1/8 600 900 3 1/8 3 1/2 3 7/8 5 5/8 6 1/2 (168) (206) (248) (289) (359) 17 1/8 (498) (521) (575) (638) (699) (838) (79) (89) (98) (143) (165) 6 7/8 8 1/4 10 1 1 1/8 1 3 7/8 (435) 20 1/2 22 3/4 25 1/4 27 3/4 29 3/4 35 1/2 (521) (578) (641) (705) (756) (902) (175) (210) (254) (283) (352) 1500 2500 3 3/8 4 1/8 4 5/8 5 3/4 6 5/8 7 3/4 9 1/4 1 1 12 1/2 15 1/4 18 3/4 21 5/8 (86) (105) (1 17) (146) (168) (197) (235) (279) (318) (387) (476) (549) 3 1/4 4 (83) (102) 4 7/8 5 7/8 7 1/8 (124) (149) (181) 8 5/16 10 5/8 12 3/4 15 16 1/2 18 1/2 21 23 27 1/4 (21 1) 300 & 600 900 2 2 3/8 2 11/16 (51) (60) (68) 3 3/4 4 1/4

"P" FLANGE CLASS 1500 2500 2 3/8 2 3/8 3 1/4 (95) (108) 5 3/8 6 3/8 7 5/8 (137) (162) (194) 4 4 3/8 5 6 3/16 7 1/2 9 1 1 13 1/2 16 (60) (60) (83) (102) (1 1 1) (127) (157) (191) (229) (279) (343) (406) 1 1/16 1 3/16 1 3/16 1 1/4 1 7/16 1 1/16 1 1/16 1 1/16 1 1/16 (27) (30) (30) (32) (37) 1 1/16 1 1/16 1 1/16 1 1/16 (27) (27) (27) (27) 1 5/16 1 7/16 1 9/16 1 9/16 1 7/8 (33) (37) (40) (40) (48) 1 300 & 600

"W"
FLANGE CLASS 900 1 1 (25) 1 1/16 (27) (27) (27) (27) 1 1/8 1 5/16 1 5/16 1 9/16 1 3/4 2 2 2 1/8 2 5/16 (29) (33) (33) (40) (44) (51) (51) (54) (59) (27) 1 3/16 1 3/16 1 5/16 1 7/16 1 7/16 1 9/16 1 7/8 2 (30) (30) (33) (37) (37) (40) (48) (51) 7/16 7/16 7/16 1/2 5/8 7/16 7/16 7/16 7/16 (1 1) (1 1) (1 1) (13) (16) 7/16 7/16 7/16 7/16 (1 1) (1 1) (1 1) (1 1) 5/8 5/8 3/4 3/4 1 (16) (16) (19) (19) (25) 1500 (25) (25) 1 1/16 (27) 5/16 2500 300 & 600

"G"
PIPE FLANGE CLASS SIZE 900 5/16 5/16 (8) 7/16 (1 1) (1 1) (1 1) (1 1) 1/2 5/8 5/8 7/8 1 1 1/8 1 1/8 1 1/4 1 3/8 (13) (16) (16) (22) (25) (29) (29) (32) (35) (1 1) 1/2 1/2 5/8 3/4 3/4 7/8 1 1/8 1 1/4 (13) (13) (16) (19) (19) (22) (29) (32) (8) (8) 7/16 (1 1) 1500 2500
1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2 2 1/2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24

1/4 (6) 1/4 (6) 1/4 (6) 1/4 (6) 1/4 (6) 3/8 3/8 3/8 (9.5) (9.5) (9.5)

(270) (324) (381) (419) (470) (533) (584) (692)

NOTES:
1. INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION FOR STANDARDIZATION (ISO) 5167-1, IS CONSIDERED SUPPLEMENTARY TO THIS DRAWING. IF A CONFLICT OCCURS, THIS DRAWING SHALL GOVERN. 2. 3. WEEP HOLES ARE ACCEPTABLE BUT ARE NOT REQUIRED. OMIT WEEP HOLES IF THE ORIFICE BORE DIAMETER IS LESS THAN 1 (25). ORIFICE PLATE THICKNESS "T" AS SHOWN IS FOR SERVICE UNDER 650 F (343 C). FOR SERVICES ABOVE THIS TEMPERATURE, INCREASE PLATE THICKNESS "T" BY 1/8 (3). 4. 5. IF WEEP HOLES ARE USED, THEY SHALL BE INSTALLED AT THE TOP IN LIQUID LINES, AND AT THE BOTTOM IN GAS OR VAPOR LINES. 8. 7. 6. FOR RING TYPE JOINT FLANGES: a. OCTAGONAL RING-SUITABLE FOR FLAT BOTTOM GROOVE. PITCH DIAMETER "P" AND CONTOUR OF RING CONFORM TO ASME STANDARD B16.5. b. MATERIAL OF RING GASKET AND MATERIAL OF ORIFICE PLATE - SEE UOP PROJECT SPECIFICATION. ECCENTRIC ORIFICE PLATES SHALL NOT BE BEVELED. THE ECCENTRIC ORIFICE PLATE SHALL BE MANUFACTURED SUCH THAT NO PORTION OF THE HOLE SHALL BE CLOSER THAN 1% OF THE PIPE DIAMETER TO THE PIPE WALL. THE MINIMUM "Y" DIMENSION SHALL BE 4 (100) OR SHALL EXTEND BEYOND THE OUTSIDE DIAMETER OF THE FLANGE A MINIMUM OF 2 (50), WHICHEVER IS GREATER. 9. FOR SURFACE FINISH REQUIREMENTS OF GASKET ZONE, SEE UOP PROJECT SPECIFICATION.

t" OF THE ORIFICE PLATE AT THE ORIFICE EDGE SHALL BE BETWEEN 0.005D AND 0.02D, THE THICKNESS "
(D=PIPE INSIDE DIAMETER). WHERE REQUIRED, THE ORIFICE PLATE SHALL BE BEVELED ON THE DOWNSTREAM SIDE IN ORDER TO MEET THE MAXIMUM THICKNESS "

t " REQUIREMENTS.

10. DIMENSIONS SHOWN IN PARENTHESES ARE IN MILLIMETERS.

Revision Indication
R

UOP LLC 25 East Algonquin Road


No t e : T h ei n f o r ma t i o n i n t h i sd o c u me n ti sc o n f i d e n t i a l a n d t h ep r o p e r t yo f UOP L L C a n d mu s tn o tb ed i s c l o s e d t oo t h e r so rr e p r o d u c e d i n a n y ma n n e ro ru s e d f o ra n yp u r p o s e wh a t s o e v e rwi t h o u ti t s wr i t t e n p e r mi s s i o n .

STANDARD DRAWING 6-112-4


DATE STATUS APVD AUTHD

Des Plaines, Illinois 60017-5017, USA

PIPING ARRANGEMENTS FOR ORIFICE PLATE INSTALLATIONS


(WITH TAPPED ORIFICE FLANGES)
R M K H GLOBE, CONTROL, OR CHECK VALVE

11JAN12 REAFFIRMED

RED

RGP

ORIFICE PLATE

*
TWO PLANE FLOW 10D OR LESS THAN 10D FLOW

F VALVE

ECCENTRIC REDUCER OR EXPANDER

GREATER

CONCENTRIC REDUCER OR EXPANDER

CONCENTRIC TEE, EXPANDER CROSS, OR LATERAL

WIDE OPEN GATE OR BALL VALVE

CONCENTRIC REDUCER ECCENTRIC REDUCER OR

*WHEN DISTANCE BETWEEN ELBOWS IS 10D OR LESS.


NOMINAL PIPE DIAMETER A D 7D 1 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 10 (270) 10D 1-3 (385) 1-8 (510) 2-6 (765) 3-4 (1020) 5-0 (1525) 6-8 (2035) 8-4 (2540) 14D 1-9 (535) 2-4 (715) 3-6 (1070) 4-8 (1425) 7-0 (2135) 9-4 (2845) 1 1-8 (3560) 15D 1-10 (575) 2-6 (765) 3-9 (1 145) 5-0 (1525) 18D 31 D 38D F G H K M R

LENGTH OF STRAIGHT RUN


Z 5D 7 (195) 10 (255) 1-3 (385) 1-8 (510) 2-6 (765) 3-4 (1020) 4-2 (1270) 5-0 (1525) 5-10 (1780) 6-8 (2035) 7-6 (2290) 8-4 (2540)

2-3 (690) 3-10 (1 185) 3-0 (915) 4-6 (1375) 6-0 (1830) 5-2 (1575) 7-9 (2365) 10-4 (3150) 15-6 (4725)

4-9 (1450) 6-4 (1935) 9-6 (2900) 12-8 (3865) 19-0 (5795)

1-2 (360) 1-9 (535) 2-4 (715) 3-6 (1070) 4-8 (1425) 5-10 (1780) 7-0 (2135) 8-2 (2490) 9-4 (2845) 10-6 (3200) 1 1-8 (3560)

7-6 (2290) 9-0 (2745)

10-0 (3050) 12-0 (3660) 20-8 (6300) 25-4 (7725) 12-6 (3810) 15-0 (4575) 25-10 (7875) 31-8 (9655)

10-0 (3050) 14-0 (4270) 1 1-8 (3560) 13-4 (4065) 15-0 (4575) 16-4 (4980)

15-0 (4575) 18-0 (5490) 17-6 (5335) 21-0 (6405)

31-0 (9450) 38-0 (1 1585) 36-2 (1 1025) 44-4 (13515) 41-4 (12600) 50-8 (15445) 46-6 (14175) 57-0 (17375) 51-8 (15750) 63-4 (19305)

18-8 (5690) 20-0 (6100) 24-0 (7320) 21-0 (6405) 22-6 (6860)27-0 (8230) 25-0 (7620)30-0 (9145)

16-8 (5080) 23-4 (71 15)

14-0 (4270) 20-0 (6100) 28-0 (8535) 30-0 (9145) 36-0 (10975) 62-0 (18900) 76-0 (23165) 10-0 (3050)

NOTES:
1. TABULATED DIMENSIONS ARE GENERALLY BASED ON INFORMATION IN THE INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION FOR STANDARDIZATION (ISO) 5167-1 AND ALSO AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS (ASME), FLUID METERS - 6th EDITION, AT A MAXIMUM

ORIFICE DIAMETER RATIO (d/D) OF 0.70. 2. THE DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE TO THE UPSTREAM FACE OF THE ORIFICE PLATE AND ARE THE MINIMUM REQUIRED. WHEN POSSIBLE THE DIMENSIONS SHOULD BE INCREASED. 3. WHEN SEVERAL FITTINGS (OTHER THAN 90 BENDS) ARE UPSTREAM OF THE ORIFICE PLATE, THE FIRST FITTING CLOSEST TO THE ORIFICE PLATE SHALL BE PER THE TABLE. THE MINIMUM STRAIGHT LENGTH FROM THE SECOND FITTING (TO THE FIRST FITTING) SHALL BE OF THE DIMENSION LISTED IN THE TABLE FOR THE SECOND FITTING.

4. WHEN BENDS ARE USED INSTEAD OF FITTINGS TO CHANGE DIRECTION, DIMENSION LINES SHALL BE TO TANGENT LINE OF BEND. 5. DIMENSIONS SHOWN IN PARENTHESES ARE IN MILLIMETERS.

D EXPANDER

40

20

20

10

23 9 x2 holes

245
51

200 125

443

410

211 SOURCE BRACKETS

50

140 DETECTOR BRACKETS

15

DETECTOR ELEVATION VIEW

SOURCE ELEVATION VIEW

150 70

50 105
NOTES: 1. PROVIDE BRACKETS WITH SUFFICIENT THICKNESS TO SUPPORT THE FOLLOWING WEIGHTS: A. SOURCE WEIGHT = 59 KG B. DETECTOR WEIGHT = 7.1 KG 2. INSULATION THICKNESS ASSUMED TO BE 0 MM

UOP LLC

uop

25 East Algonquin Road Des Plaines, Illinois 60017-5017 USA

DETECTOR BRACKETS

SOURCE BRACKETS

970086 PEMEX MINATITLAN CCR LOCK HOPPER NUMBER 1 POINT LEVEL TRANSMITTER BRACKETS LE/LSHH-1307
DATE REV

03/06/13

40

20

20

10

23 9 x2 holes

245
51

200 125

473

440

211 SOURCE BRACKETS

50

140 DETECTOR BRACKETS

15

DETECTOR ELEVATION VIEW

SOURCE ELEVATION VIEW

150 70

50 105
NOTES: 1. PROVIDE BRACKETS WITH SUFFICIENT THICKNESS TO SUPPORT THE FOLLOWING WEIGHTS: UOP LLC

uop
A. SOURCE WEIGHT = 59 KG B. DETECTOR WEIGHT = 7.1 KG

25 East Algonquin Road Des Plaines, Illinois 60017-5017 USA

DETECTOR BRACKETS

SOURCE BRACKETS

2. INSULATION THICKNESS ASSUMED TO BE 0 MM

970086 PEMEX MINATITLAN CCR LOCK HOPPER NUMBER 2 POINT LEVEL TRANSMITTER BRACKETS LE/LSHH-1347
DATE REV

03/06/13

2013-05-03

UOP Technical Requisition Electrical Installation

Page 1 of 2 970086 R701F-1

1.

Scope
This document defines technical requirement for electrical installation.

2.

Electrical installation
Electrical installation and related goods and services shall be provided in accordance with the following documents:

2.1.

Standards, specifications, and data sheets


1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Official Mexican Standard, NOM-001-SEDE-2005, Electrical Installations (Use) 970086 S701F-0, SpecificationElectrical System Installation 970086 S701SS-0, SpecificationSubstation No.3 Modification 970086 S712F-0, SpecificationConduit and Conduit Installation 970086 T701F-0, Technical Data SheetElectrical Installation 970086 U701F-0, Inspection Data SheetElectrical Systems

2.2.

Electrical Installation Details


The following Electrical Installation Details are provided: 1. Welding Receptacle Mounting on Grade and on Deck: 970086-D746 / D747 2. Convenience Receptacles/Socket Outlet Mounting on Grade and on Deck: 970086-D744 / D745 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Power system Conduit Feed: 970086-D751 / D752 / D753 Electrical Heater Connections: 970086-D755 Grounding System: 970086-D759 / D760 Control Stations: 970086-D751 / D752 / D753 Lighting System Mounting: 970086-D748 / D749

2.3.

Electrical Detail Design Drawings


The following Electrical Detail Design Drawings are provided: 1. Power, Grounding and Lighting Plans: 970086-D707 thru D721 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Electrical Homerun Conduit Routing Plan: 970086-D727 Electrical Underground Conduit Routing Plan: 970086-D728 Electrical Homerun Cable Schedule: 970086-D735 Substation 3 Electrical Plan: 970086-D706 Electrical Panelboard schedules: 970086-D739 / D740 / D741 / D742 Motor Control Schematics: 970086-D762 / D763 / D764

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-05-03

UOP Technical Requisition Electrical Installation

Page 2 of 2 970086 R701F-1

2.4.

Electrical Demolition Drawings


The following Electrical Demolition Drawings are provided: 1. Demolition Single Line Diagram: 970086-D703D 2. 3. 4. 5. Demolition Electrical Homerun Cable Schedule: 970086-D7735D Demolition Motor Control Schematics: 970086-D762D Demolition Motor Drawings: D770D thru D776D Demolition Air Compressor and Regeneration Heater Drawings: 970086-D777D / D778D

3.

Other
Electrical installation and related goods and services shall comply with the most recent version, except as otherwise noted, of the following documents: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 970086 S059F, SpecificationPreparation of Opening for Overland Shipment 970086 S065, SpecificationModule Preparation for Shipment 970086 S140A, SpecificationLanguage, Units, and Certification 970086 S140C, SpecificationDocumentation for Custom-Designed Goods and Services 970086 S140S, SpecificationSupplier Document Index 970086 S150, SpecificationExamination, Testing, and Inspection Planning 970086 S999C, SpecificationCross-Discipline Clearance and Accessibility

4.

Conflicts
In case of conflicts among the documents in this Requisition, the following shall apply: 1. 2. Drawings shall take precedence over Specifications. 701 documents shall take precedence over others.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-05-03

UOP Specification Electrical System Installation

Page 1 of 4 970086 S701F-0

1.

Scope
This document defines technical requirements for electrical supply and installation.

2.

Modification / Installation
1. 2. Supply and installation of electrical materials shall be in accordance with area classification: Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C, D. All previously used underground raceway/manholes will not be used for the new CCR electrical installation and should be capped. All associated existing raceway and cabling for CCM-1 located within Substation 3 shall be disconnected and existing underground cable from Substation 3 to existing CCR module should be abandoned. Conduit entering underground ductbank from demolished heaters and demolished motors shall be cut and capped. Contractor shall transport all removed/demolished electrical materials and store them at a designated location within Pemex Minatitlan Refinery. Pemex will be responsible for disposal of materials. New overhead conduit using rigid, hot dipped galvanized steel conduit with PVC coating shall be furnished and installed by Contractor from Substation 3 to new and modified CCR electrical installations. Overhead conduit shall be installed per conduit routing plan from detail design package. Electrical homerun cable should be furnished by Contractor and installed as referenced in 970086 S701SS-0. The conduit and wiring shall be installed from Substation 3 to new and modified CCR electrical installations. This includes furnishing, installing and connecting all associated raceway, cabling and miscellaneous materials required to make a complete installation. The Contractor shall adequately protect all electrical items and material from the adverse effects of the environment and activities of his own and subcontractors. Electrical equipment and materials are installed by the Contractor except as noted on drawings. Electrical panel boards shall be provided by UOP, installed by module Contractor for Normal Lighting, Emergency Lighting, Receptacle Power, and Instrument power circuits; power feeders to these panel boards shall be provided and installed by Contractor on site. Mounting supports and accessories for electrical equipment installations are supplied, fabricated and installed by Contractor. PVC coated junction boxes, lighting fixtures, receptacles and associated electrical materials and supports shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor. The PVC coated galvanized rigid conduit must be UL Listed. Hazardous location fittings, prior to plastic coating must be UL listed. All conduit and fittings must be new, unused material. Installation of the PVC Coated Conduit System shall be performed in accordance with the Manufacturer's Installation Manual. All clamping, cutting, threading, bending, and assembly instructions listed in the manufacturer's installation guide should be vigorously followed.

3. 4.

5.

6.

7. 8. 9.

10. 11.

12.

13.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-05-03

UOP Specification Electrical System Installation

Page 2 of 4 970086 S701F-0

14. Feraloy iron alloy conduit outlet fittings with PVC coating shall be furnished and installed Contractor to install on modules as per the installation detail drawings. Drain fittings shall be installed in all low points of the conduit system including the bottom of pull, termination and junction boxes. 15. Conduits shall be supported at 8 ft. (2.5) intervals maximum and clamped together at 4 ft. (1.25) intervals using hot dipped galvanized unistrut system. Conduit must be supported within 3 ft. (900) of each box or fitting. 16. Mounting height for electrical equipment shall be as follows, measured from finished surface or grating: Receptacle: Panel: 36 in. (900 mm) 48 in. (1220 mm) 90 in. (2286 mm) bottom of lamp

Lighting fixture (pendant or stanchion): guard Switch / control station:

3 ft 6 in. (1067 mm)

3.

Lighting
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Conduit and wiring for lighting fixtures shall be provided from distribution panel or interface junction box to each fixture. Lighting fixture lamp shall be installed. Lighting fixture and receptacle shall be installed within three feet (914.4 mm) of location shown on plan drawing. Ship-loose fixture shall be assembled and strapped to the platform it serves. Pendant-mounted light fixture shall be properly supported while hanging to the side during fabrication and shipping.

4.

Electrical certification
1. Electrical equipment that is not specified in the design or listed in the bill of materials shall bear Underwriters Laboratories (UL) or Factory Mutual (FM) approval label.

5.

Electrical testing
1. 2. 3. 4. A megger test shall be performed for each cable spool. A functional illumination test shall be performed for the lighting system. All circuits shall be checked for continuity and compliance using a volt-ohm meter. Electrical wiring shall be checked for insulation resistance before connections to light fixtures, switches etc.

6.

Grounding
1. 2. Ground wire penetrating platform shall be provided with rigid galvanized steel or aluminum conduit sleeve with bushings. Main ground cable shall be installed from grounding station on lower deck of module to grounding stations on upper decks of the same module.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-05-03

UOP Specification Electrical System Installation 3.

Page 3 of 4 970086 S701F-0

Sufficient length of main ground cable shall be connected to upper deck grounding station to allow for final field connection to lower grounding station on the module above it. Support steel for PVC pipe shall be welded to structural steel. Branch ground cable serving equipment on platforms shall be installed below module platform. Branch ground cable serving equipment at grade shall be routed in order of preference: a. b. c. Below under intermediate steel beams if PVC conduit is at a higher elevation than outside steel beams On top of steel in PVC pipe and then ascending to service Above service in PVC pipe or in cable tray and then descending to service

4. 5. 6.

7. 8. 9.

Connection between grounding cables shall be compression type connection. Bolted connection shall be protected against corrosion by wrapping with grease impregnated tape. Ground lug or clip shall be as follows: a. b. Welded to equipment or structural steel Of the same metallurgy as the equipment

7.

Electrical equipment labeling


1. Electrical nameplate shall be as follows: a. b. Provided for electrical interface junction box and local control station Three layer laminated plastic construction 1. 2. c. d. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Danger labels shall have white characters on a red background. Other labels shall have black characters on a white background.

Engraved with straight, 6.0 mm, vertical letters. 4 in. (100 mm) by 2 in. (50 mm) by 0.125 in. (3 mm) thick

Nameplate attachment hardware shall be brass or type 300 series stainless steel. Nameplate attachment hardware shall not void enclosure certification. Nameplate for junction box shall designate junction box tag number, panel and circuit number of wiring Nameplate for control stations shall denote tag number and service of equipment controlled Danger labels shall be as follows: a. Be provided for the following: 1. 2. b. Welding receptacle junction box Heater interface box

State DANGER LIVE TERMINALS. ISOLATE ELSEWHERE BEFORE OPENING

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-05-03

UOP Specification Electrical System Installation

Page 4 of 4 970086 S701F-0

8.

Clearance
1. 2. Electrical equipment and raceways shall have a minimum clearance of 12 in (300 mm) from hot surfaces. Lighting fixture shall have adequate clearance from trolleys, cranes, and monorails such that removal of process equipment will not require removal of fixture or electrical raceway. Conduit and tray risers shall have a minimum clearance of 4 inches (100 mm) from column steel, ladders, piping, and insulated services. Clearance between conduit and piping, as well as between conduit and equipment, shall be at least 6 inches (150 mm). Electrical equipment including lighting fixtures and conduit riser shall be located and oriented, so removal of process equipment does not require removal of fixture or electrical raceway.

3. 4. 5.

9.

Support
Electrical raceway shall not be supported from ladder, ladder cage, or ladder support clip.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-05-03

UOP Specification Electrical Substation No.3 Modification

Page 1 of 2 970086 S701SS-1

1.

Scope
This document defines the technical requirements for the modification of existing electrical Substation No.3

2.

Modification / Installation
1. Disconnect and remove existing motor control center CCM-1 (transport to a designated location within the Pemex Minatitlan Refinery. Pemex will be responsible for disposal of all items stored at this designated location) and all associated existing raceway and cabling located within the substation. Coordinate this effort with the field effort. This includes capping previously used underground raceway which will not be used for the new CCR electrical installation. Receive, handle, store, install and connect new motor control center CCM-1 and furnish, install and connect all associated raceway, cabling and miscellaneous materials required to make a complete installation for the equipment located within the substation Disconnect and remove existing heater controller panels for BH-500 and BH-502 (transport to a designated location within the Pemex Minatitlan Refinery. Pemex will be responsible for disposal of all items stored at this designated location) and all associated existing raceway and cabling located within the substation. Coordinate this effort with the field effort. Receive, handle, store, install and connect new heater controller panels BH-500 and BH-502. This includes furnishing, installing and connecting all associated raceway, cabling and miscellaneous materials required to make a complete installation within the substation. Receive, handle, store, Install and connect new VFD for Regeneration Blower GB505 (90 KW). This includes furnishing, installing and connecting all associated raceway, cabling and miscellaneous materials required to make a complete installation within the substation. Receive, handle, store, Install and connect new freestanding, mtal clad 5KV motor starters in Substation No.3 for new air compressors GB-507A (260 KW) and GB507B (260 KW). Modify existing breakers in existing Square D 5 KV switchgear to provide feed to these starters. This includes furnishing, installing and connecting all associated raceway, cabling and miscellaneous materials required to make a complete installation.. Disconnect and remove cable from existing 45 kVA transformer (480V-220/127 V) located in CCM-1 to existing CCM-1A. Furnish, install and connect new cable from new 45kVA transformer located in new CCM-1. Furnish, install and connect new circuit breakers in existing CCM-1A to supply new lighting panel LP-1 and new receptacle panel RP-1 located at the new CCR unit. This includes furnishing, installing and connecting all associated raceway, cabling and miscellaneous materials required to make a complete installation within the substation.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

2013-05-03

UOP Specification Electrical Substation No.3 Modification

Page 1 of 2 970086 S701SS-1

3.

Reference Drawings
The following Electrical Detail Design Drawings will be provided when the electrical detail design is complete: 1. Demolition Substation 3 Electrical Plan 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Demolition Single Line Diagram Substation 3 Electrical Plan Motor Control Center CCM-1 Plan & Elevation Heater Controllers Plan & Elevation Heater Controllers Vendor Schematics & Wiring Diagrams GB-505 VFD Plan & Elevation GB-505 VFD Vendor Schematic & Wiring Diagram Existing 5 kV MCC Elevation

10. CCM-1A Circuit Schedule

2013-05-03

UOP Specification Conduit Supply and Installation

Page 1 of 3 970086 S712F-0

1.

Scope
This document defines technical requirements for supply and installation of conduit.

2.

Conduit and conduit fitting


1. 2. 3. 4. Rigid conduit, coupling, elbow, bend, and nipple shall comply with ANSI C80.1, American National Standard for Rigid Steel Conduit - Zinc Coated (GRC). Conduit and conduit fittings shall be coated with external 1 mm thick PVC, and internal .5 mm thick Urethane). ESPP-6940 and NMX-J534-ANCE. Rigid conduit system shall be certified by Underwriters Laboratories (UL). Supply and installation of electrical materials is in accordance with area classification: Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C, D

3.

Separation of instrument and power conduits


Separation between parallel runs of conduit used for instrument wiring or cable and conduit used for power wiring or cable shall comply with this section.

3.1.

Definitions
1. 2. 110-to-240-volt instrument circuit for alarm and solenoid shall be considered a type of Power Wiring or Cable in this section. Wire or cable type shall be as defined in the following table: Type II III IV V VI Description Single, unshielded twisted wire pair Single, shielded twisted wire pair Multipair cable of Type II wire Multipair, overall shielded cable of Type II wire Multipair, overall shielded cable of Type III wire

3.2.

Separation
1. If instrument wiring is Type III or if instrument cable is Type VI, separation shall be at least as great as shown in the following table:

Power Wiring or Cable Less than 125V @ 20A 125V to 500V @ 200A Over 500V 2.

Millivolts 4 in. (100 mm) 12 in. (300 mm) 36 in. (900 mm)

4-20 or 10-50 maDC None required 6 in. (150 mm) 18 in. (450 mm)

If instrument wiring is Type II or if instrument cable is Type IV or V, separation shall be at least as great as shown in the following table:

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-05-03

UOP Specification Conduit Supply and Installation Power Wiring or Cable Less than 125V @ 20A 125V to 500V @ 200A Greater than 500V Millivolts 8 in. (200 mm) 15 in. (375 mm) 48 in. (1200 mm)

Page 2 of 3 970086 S712F-0 4-20 or 10-50 maDC 4 in. (100 mm) 8 in. (200 mm) 24 in. (600 mm)

4.

Routing
1. 2. 3. Conduit shall be installed parallel with or at right angles to main columns and beams. Clearance between conduit and piping, as well as between conduit and equipment, shall be at least 2 in. Clearance from conduit to surface and from conduit to location shall be at least as great as shown in the following table: Surface or Location Temperature 113F to 149F (45C to 65C) Greater than 149F (65C) Clearance 6 in. (152 mm) 12 in. (305 mm)

5.

Support
1. Box for the following shall be supported independently from conduit system: a. b. c. d. 2. 3. Selector switch Indicator light Push-button station Receptacle

Conduit shall not be supported from piping, ladder, ladder cage, or ladder support. On fireproofed beams, the design shall permit conduit supports to be installed prior to fireproofing and in such a manner that the conduit does not become imbedded in the fireproofing. Conduit shall be four inches from fireproofing. Unless otherwise approved, spacing between conduit supports shall not exceed 7 feet (2.14 meters). Supports are required at bends, fittings and fixtures to make conduit system rigid and free from vibrations. Supports shall be adequate for the load impose. Fasteners used for support of conduit shall be 316 stainless steel. Framing channel supports shall be installed in such a manner that the conduits are supported on top of the framing channel, wherever possible.

4. 5. 6. 7.

6.

Drain and breather


1. 2. 3. Conduit run shall have drain at each low point. Closed vertical conduit run of length more than 20 ft (6 m) shall have breather at high point. Conduit drain and breather material shall be 300-series stainless steel.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-05-03

UOP Specification Conduit Supply and Installation

Page 3 of 3 970086 S712F-0

7.

Installation requirements
1. 2. 3. The requirements for conduit installation as defined by NFPA 70 (NEC) for hazardous locations shall be adhered to. Conduit expansion fittings are required at as shown on conduit riser diagram. Conduit and fitting thread shall be lubricated with a lithium based anti-seize compound such as Crouse Hinds STL8 lubricant (or approve equal), and made up tight with wrench work or Spin It tool. Plugs are required in all unused conduit entries. A conduit fitting or pull box is required for every 180 degrees of bends. Explosion proof flexible conduit coupling shall be installed from the conduit system to instrument, electric heaters and motors as per the installation details. Conduit entry into enclosures is bottom and side only. Cutting structural members to provide passage for conduit is prohibited. Field bends shall be made with approved bending tools; Bends shall be of uniform radius and free from cracks, crimps or other damage to the pipe including flattening of the pipe cross section.

4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

10. Conduit cuts shall be square, perpendicular to the axis of the conduit. Conduit must be reamed, and free of internal burrs and rough edges. 11. Conduit fittings are to be installed accessible from grade, platform or with the use of a portable ladder. 12. As a minimum, 6 full threads engagements shall be provided on each conduit connection. 13. PVC coated junction boxes, lighting fixtures, receptacles and associated electrical materials and supports shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor. 14. The PVC coated galvanized rigid conduit must be UL Listed. Hazardous location fittings, prior to plastic coating must be UL listed. All conduit and fittings must be new, unused material. 15. Installation of the PVC Coated Conduit System shall be performed in accordance with the Manufacturer's Installation Manual. All clamping, cutting, threading, bending, and assembly instructions listed in the manufacturer's installation guide should be vigorously followed.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-01-17

UOP Technical Data Sheet Electrical Installation

Page 1 of 1 970086 T701F-0

Conduit Type: Rigid Galvanized Conduit with PVC coating Fittings: Crouse Hinds Type EABL, EABX, EAJT or EAJL, series; Felaloy iron body and cover, PVC coated Service: Power, lighting, control, field instrumentation Electrical Connection Thread specification: PG Metric NPT BSP Parallel, PF, G Other: Junction Box Manufacturer: Hoffman stainless steel with hinged ABB CEAG cover, NEMA 4X Crouse-Hinds as per the Design & MTO 10 Other: Per the design and MTO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 12 13 Type:

Wire in Conduit THHN/THWN, 90 C, 600V rated, Insulation, stranded XHHW-2, 600 V insulation for #12 to #10 AWG, stranded.

14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

RHH/Hypolon for #8 up to 500 KCMIL, 90 C, 600V Insulation, stranded Other: SF-1, 2 fixture wire

Branch-Circuit Conductor Color Hot: Black (A), Blue (C), Red (B) Neutral: White Ground: Green 1 Remarks For wiring connections inside junction boxes, terminal strips are required. Wire nuts are not acceptable; Grounding conductor for electrical equipments shall be green color PVC, stranded copper conductor. Phase conductors Neutral Conductor Grounding Conductor

Note: Th information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-01-17 UOP Examination or Testing 1. Motor megger test

UOP Inspection Data Sheet Electrical Installation PEMEX

Page 1 of 1 970086 U701F-0 UOP PEMEX

WIT OBS WIT OBS Other Activities 1. Kickoff meeting with Module shop Electrical fabricator

WIT OBS WIT OBS

2.

Insulation resistance test on all module installed wiring Instrument wiring continuity test Lighting energization and foot-candle measurement of each deck Receptacle circuit testing Notes:

3. 4.

5.

1.

If WIT (witnessed) column is selected and if the examination, test, or other activity is performed: a. b. c. A hold point shall be applied to the production schedule. Examination, test, or other activity shall be performed with the indicated party or parties in attendance. For mechanical running or performance tests, written notification of a successful preliminary test shall be provided.

2.

If OBS (observed) column is selected and if the examination, test, or other activity is performed: a. b. Indicated party or parties shall be notified of the timing of examination, test, or activity. Examination, test, or other activity may be performed as scheduled if indicated party or parties are not present.

3.

Written and verbal notice shall be provided for witnessed or observed examination, test, or other activity. a. b. Written notice shall arrive at UOP ten workdays prior to examination, test, or other activity. Verbal notice shall be provided two workdays prior to examination, test, or other activity.

4.

Inspection forecast shall comply with both of the following: a. b. Forecast shall include projected dates for witnessed or observed examination, tests, and other activities. Forecast shall be updated and resubmitted: Weekly Biweekly Monthly

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-01-17

UOP Documentation Data Sheet Electrical Installation


OMM Finalb Note 3 MRB Finalb Note 3

Page 1 of 1 970086 V701F-0

Proposala Note 1

Reviewb Note 2

DESCRIPTION

General 1. 0S 0S 0S 0S 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Inspection / Test Reports Motor Megger Test Instrument Wiring Continuity Test Cable Spool Megger Test Lighting Energization Photographs of inside of junction boxes, power distribution panels, and control panels

6F

0S

7.

Electrical apparatus vendor data/catalog cut sheets (lighting fixture, receptacle outlets, pushbutton station, selector switches, cable tray)

Nomenclature: S - number of weeks prior to shipment. F - number of weeks after firm order. D - number of weeks after receipt of approved drawings. X to be provided (X if no due date is established)

Notes: 1. 2. 3. For documents indicated in the Proposal column, provide an electronic copy or one hard copy. For documents indicated in the Review column, provide an electronic copy or one hard copy. For documents indicated in the Final columns provide an electronic copy and three hard copies.

a Proposal drawings and data do not have to be certified or as built. Typical data shall be clearly identified as such. b Purchaser will indicate in this column the time frame for submission of materials using the nomenclature given at the end of this form.

2013-02-12

UOP Technical Requisition Piping Fabrication, Assembly, Erection, and Examination

Page 1 of 3 970086 R801F-1

1.

Scope
This document defines technical requirements for the fabrication, assembly, erection, and examination of piping.

2.

Piping
Piping and related goods and services shall be provided in accordance with the most recent version, unless otherwise indicated, of the following documents:

2.1.

Specifications and data sheets


1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 970086 S801F-1, SpecificationPiping Fabrication, Assembly, Erection, and Examination 970086 U801F-10, Inspection Data SheetPiping Fabrication, Assembly, Erection, and Examination 970086 V801F-10, Documentation Data SheetPiping Fabrication, Assembly, Erection, and Examination 970086 S801L-10, SpecificationLeak Testing of Piping 970086 T801EL-43, Technical Data SheetPiping Line Index 970086 S801FW-10, SpecificationPiping Welding 970086 S890-0, SpecificationPiping Specialty Items 970086 S801P-0, UOP SpecificationPipe Bending 970086 V801P-0, UOP Documentation Data SheetPipe Bending

2.1.1. References (not attached to document)


1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. ASME B31.3, Code for Pressure Piping, Process Piping PFI ES-3, Piping Fabrication InstituteFabricating Tolerances PFI ES-7, Piping Fabrication InstituteMinimum Length and Spacing for Welded Nozzles PFI ES-24, Piping Fabrication Institute Pipe Bending Methods, Tolerances, Process and Material Requirements. TPA-CBS-98, Cold Bending of Pipe & Tube TPA-IBS-98, Induction Bending of Pipe & Tube

2.2.

Piping material line classes


1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 970086 S8 Branch-01, UOP Specification Branch Connection Table 970086 S8B1A1-23, UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class B1A1 970086 S8B2A1-2, UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class B2A1 970086 S8B2A2-1, UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class B2A2 970086 S8M1A1-1, UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class M1A1 970086 S8MS1-23, UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class MS1 970086 S8MS2-0, UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class MS2 970086 S8MS7-0, UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class MS7

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-02-12

UOP Technical Requisition Piping Fabrication, Assembly, Erection, and Examination 9.

Page 2 of 3 970086 R801F-1

970086 S8MS11-23, UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class MS11

10. 970086 S8MS12-2, UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class MS12 11. 970086 S8PR1-2, UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class PR1 12. 970086 S8PR2-1, UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class PR2 13. 970086 S8PR3-0, UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class PR3 14. 970086 S8PR4-01, UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class PR4 15. 970086 S8PR5-1, UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class PR5 16. 970086 S8PR6-01, UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class PR6 17. 970086 S8PR8-12, UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class PR8 18. 970086 S8PR10-1, UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class PR10 19. 970086 S8PR15-12, UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class PR15 20. 970086 S8PR17-1, UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class PR17 21. 8-1303-0, UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class PR22 22. 970086 S8PR24-0, UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class PR24 23. 970086 S8PR36-12 , UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class PR36

2.3.

UOP valve code index


1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 970086 S8V003 0, UOP Specification Carbon Steel Gate Valves 970086 S8V004 0, UOP Specification Carbon Steel Globe Valves 970086 S8V005 0, UOP Specification Carbon Steel Check Valves 970086 S8V006 0, UOP Specification Carbon Steel Ball Valves 970086 S8V013 0, UOP Specification Alloy Steel Gate Valves 970086 S8V023 0, UOP Specification Stainless Steel Gate Valves 970086 S8V024 0, UOP Specification Stainless Steel Globe Valves 970086 S8V025 0, UOP Specification Stainless Steel Check Valves 970086 S8V026 0, UOP Specification Stainless Steel Check Valves

10. 970086 S8V029 0, UOP Specification Stainless Steel Needle Valves 11. 970086 S8V033 0, UOP Specification Bronze and Iron Gate Valves 12. 970086 S8V034 0, UOP Specification Bronze and Iron Globe Valves 13. 970086 S8V035 0, UOP Specification Bronze and Iron Check Valves 14. 970086 S8V036 0, UOP Specification Bronze and Iron Ball Valves 15. 970086 S8V037 0, UOP Specification Bronze and Iron Butterfly Valves 16. 970086 S8V053 0, UOP Specification Nickel and Nickel Alloy Gate Valves 17. 970086 S8V054 0, UOP Specification Nickel and Nickel Alloy Globe Valves 18. 970086 S8V055 0, UOP Specification Nickel and Nickel Alloy Check Valve

2.4.

Design drawings
1. Piping Plan (Later)

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-02-12

UOP Technical Requisition Piping Fabrication, Assembly, Erection, and Examination

Page 3 of 3 970086 R801F-1

3.

Painting
Painting of piping shall be provided in accordance with the most recent version, unless otherwise specified, of the following documents: 1. See Reference document: 970086 R905F-0 Complete, Paint Specifications and Applications.

4.

Other
Piping fabrication, assembly, erection, examination, and related goods and services shall comply with the most recent version, except as otherwise indicated, of the following documents: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 970086 S140A, SpecificationLanguage, Units, and Documents 970086 S140C, SpecificationDocuments for Custom-Designed Goods and Services 970086 S140S, SpecificationSupplier Document Index 970086 S150, SpecificationExamination, Testing, and Inspection Plan and Record 970086 S999C, SpecificationCross-Discipline Clearance 970086 S159, SpecificationPositive Material Identification for UOP Modular Plants CCR Unit

5.

Conflicting requirements
In case of conflicts among documents outlined in the Technical Requisition, the following shall apply: 1. 2. Drawings shall take precedence over Specifications and standards. UOP-generated documents shall take precedence over Piping Fabrication Institute Engineering Standards and Technical Bulletins.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-02-12

UOP Specification Piping Fabrication, Assembly, Erection, and Examination

Page 1 of 7 970086 S801F-1

1.

Scope
This document defines technical requirements for fabrication, assembly, erection, and examination of piping.

2.

Special Project Requirements


1. 2. All bolting shall be provided with Certified Material Test Reports (CMTR). All bolting shall be supplied with proper marking per the applicable codes. Prior to any welding of existing piping; pipe wall thickness must be confirmed to meet the minimum wall thickness. Contractor shall check the pipe wall thickness to ensure it meets the minimum requirement as established by UOP. If any existing flanged connection is disassembled the flange face must be inspected. If the surface finish does not conform to section 6.4 of ASME B16.5 then it must be machined to acceptable conditions or replaced. If flanged connections are disassembled a new gasket and bolts must be used for reassembly per the corresponding pipe classes. For new piping or piping components being welded to existing painted piping; paint requirements shall be applied up to and 6 inches beyond the weld affected area. Removed paint shall be tested to confirm that no lead is in the existing paint. The paint shall be removed back 6" from the heat affected zone. Where new piping connects to existing piping, pipe supports of the existing pipe system shall be visually inspected for mechanical integrity by the Contractor. Welds on existing piping shall not be hydro tested. Examination of welds shall be 100% radiographed or 100% ultrasonically examined per 345.9.1 of ASME B31.3.

3.

4. 5.

6. 7.

3.

Fabrication 3.1. Pipe support attachment


The pipeline installation is allowed only after installation and fastening of the support constructions and hangers in compliance with the project requirements. The assembly units and the assemblies of the pipelines shall be arranged at least on two supports (or fixed on two hangers) with their security against tilting and turning.

3.1.1. Pipe support welded attachment (excluding trunnions)


1. For carbon steel and ferrous pipe materials through 9% chrome operating between 20F (-29 C) and 500F (260 C), pipe support attachment material shall be carbon steel. For carbon steel and ferrous pipe material through 9% chrome operating above 501F (261C), pipe support attachment material shall be the same as the supported pipe. For other pipe material pipe support attachment material shall be the same as the supported pipe.

2.

3.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-02-12

UOP Specification Piping Fabrication, Assembly, Erection, and Examination

Page 2 of 7 970086 S801F-1

3.1.2. Pipe support clamped attachment


1. Clamp material shall be in accordance with the following table: ---------------------------------Pipe Material--------------------------------Carbon Steel (CS)/ Chrome-Moly -20 F to 500 F (-29 C to 260 C) 501F to 750 F (261C to 399 C) >750 F (> 399 C) Galvanized CS Galvanized or Coated CS Compatible Material Suitable for Temp. Stainless Steel (SS) Galvanized or Coated CS SS or Coated CS with Shield SS Other Alloys Galvanized or Coated CS Coated CS Compatible Material Suitable for Temp. Temperature

3.1.3. Pipe support welded trunnion


1. 2. 3. Materials for trunnion, reinforcing pad, and gusset shall be the same nominal composition as supported pipe. Reinforcing pads shall not be used at elbow. Adjustable base trunnion shall be used to accommodate differences in elevation or field tolerances.

3.1.4. Reinforcing pad and wear pad for pipe support


1. Reinforcing pad and wear pad shall be as follows: a. b. 2. Attached using continuous fillet weld to avoid crevice type corrosion Provided with a 1/4 (6mm) diameter vent hole at the lowest point to drain any environmental moisture.

Wear pads shall be as follows: a. b. c. d. Length shall be at least 16 inch (406 mm). For NPS 24 and smaller, thickness shall be at least 1/4 inch (6 mm). For NPS larger than 24, thickness shall be at least 3/8 inch (10 mm). Circumference shall cover at least 1/4 of pipe circumference.

4.

Seal Welding 4.1. Contaminants


Seal-welded threaded joints shall be free of the following substances: 1. 2. 3. Sealing compound PTFE tape Cutting oil

4.2.

Seal-welded services
Threaded connections to piping, except for connection at instrument, shall be seal welded if any of the following is contained: 1. Hydrogen

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-02-12

UOP Specification Piping Fabrication, Assembly, Erection, and Examination 2. 3. Caustic Steam if flange rating is ASME Class 300 or higher.

Page 3 of 7 970086 S801F-1

4.3.

Drain and vent valve


Threaded connection on non-instrument-piping drain and vent valve shall not be seal weld the solid threaded pluged.

4.4.

Auxiliary piping for equipment


Threaded connections of auxiliary piping associated with equipment shall be seal welded in the following services: 1. 2. Pressurized lube oil piping except oil mist system Pressurized seal oil piping except at the connection to mechanical seal end plates

4.5.

Piping for instruments


Threaded instrument-piping fittings shall be seal welded except for the following connections: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Connections to instruments Vent plug, drain plug, fill plug, and rod-out plug Variable area flow meters and check valves in purge piping Union nut rings Connections to pre-fabricated instrument manifold blocks Instrument tube fittings Miscellaneous connections approved by UOP Thermowells

5.

Assembly and Erection 5.1. Piping


1. 2. 3. If the pipe in the process of installation is cut into several parts then it is necessary to apply the stamp corresponding to that of the initial pipe on each new formed part. Steam, instrument-air, and fuel-gas connection shall be from top of horizontal supply header. Condensate connection into condensate return header shall be to top of horizontal header.

5.2.

Spacing 5.2.1. Minimum Spacing


1. 2. The distance from the valves flange or the compensator flange to the support, hanger, wall, partition or the ceiling shall be at least 400 mm. Welded joints of pipelines with a diameter up to 50 mm shall be located at least 50 mm from supports and hangers, those of pipelines with a diameter over 50 mm shall be located at least 200 mm from supports and hangers.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-02-12

UOP Specification Piping Fabrication, Assembly, Erection, and Examination 3. 4.

Page 4 of 7 970086 S801F-1

The distance from a nozzle to transverse seam or to the beginning of rounded bend shall be at least equal to the pipe OD, but no less 100 mm. The length of straight section between welded joints of two adjacent bends shall be at least 100 mm for nominal sizes below 150 mm, and 200 mm for nominal sizes of 150 mm and over. The distance between circumferential seams connecting inserts to a pipeline shall be at least 100 mm.

5.

5.2.2. Girth butt welds


Distance between centerlines of adjacent girth butt welds shall be both of the following: 1. 2. At least four times the pipe wall thickness At least 1 inch (25 mm) welding toe to toe

5.2.3. Branch connections


Clear distance between attachment welds for adjacent branch connection fittings shall be all of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. At least four times the thickness of the run wall At least 1 inch (25 mm) welding toe to toe At least the dimensions shown in PFI Standard ES-7 At least the dimensions required by ASME B31.3, Para 304.3.3

5.3.

Flanged joints
1. 2. Flange bolt holes shall straddle established centerlines. Contractor to stamp TB mark at least three locations on the taper bore flange outer surface with low stress stamp. Each flange shall have photographic record of the internal surface for future review.

5.4. 5.5.

Threaded joints
Pipe threads shall be taper pipe threads (NPT) and shall comply with ASME B1.20.1.

Cleaning of piping
1. 2. 3. After fabrication and heat treatment, foreign material such as sand, scale, weld splatter, and cutting chips shall be removed from inside and outside of pipe spools. Stainless-steel weld shall be wire buffed or cleaned to remove discoloration after welding. Approval shall be obtained from UOP for chemical-cleaning, acid-cleaning, pickling, or passivation procedure and application prior to use.

3.4. Piping shall be cleared by air blower before erection.

5.6.

Valves
1. Soft-sealed ball and plug valves with butt-welding ends, socket-welding ends, or threaded ends requiring seal welds shall not be welded into the line with any softseal material in place. These valves shall be disassembled prior to welding. After the welding has been completed the valve shall be reassembled with a new bonnet gasket.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-02-12

UOP Specification Piping Fabrication, Assembly, Erection, and Examination 2. Threaded bronze valves shall not be seal welded.

Page 5 of 7 970086 S801F-1

5.7.

Use of pipe unions


Pipe unions between process vessels, piping, or equipment and the first block valve are prohibited.

5.8.

Bolt coating
Alloy steel bolts and nuts shall be coated with Fluorokote #1.

6.

Examination 6.1. Supplementary examination 6.1.1. Normal fluid service


1. Random radiography shall include the following: a. b. 100 percent radiography of selected welds The work of each welder or welding operator including representative samples from each of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 2. Material group Welding process Pipe diameter Welding position

100 percent ultrasonic testing (UT) examination may be performed instead of radiography.

6.1.2. Category D fluid service


Category D Fluid Service piping shall receive random radiography including the following: 1. 2. 3. At least 5 percent of circumferential butt and miter-groove welds 100 percent radiography of selected welds The work of each welder or welding operator including representative samples from each of the following: a. b. c. d. Material group Welding process Pipe diameter Welding position

6.2.

Application of required examination


1. 2. 3. If post weld heat treatment (PWHT) is performed, non-destructive examination (NDE) for final acceptance shall be performed after PWHT. Personnel qualified in accordance with ASNT Recommended Practice SNT-TC-1A shall perform NDE. Certification of personnel shall be made available upon request.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-02-12

UOP Specification Piping Fabrication, Assembly, Erection, and Examination 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

Page 6 of 7 970086 S801F-1

NDE shall be performed in accordance with written procedures that conform to ASME Section V. No examination shall be performed without a written procedure. Results of NDE shall be reported on written forms and provided in the final documentation package. NDE to be performed shall be noted on approved fabrication drawings. NDE performed shall be recorded on a fabrication drawing mark up to allow traceability of test records, e.g., radiographs, to the actual weld at any time. Work of each welder shall be recorded in a log to allow tracebility of each weld and welder who performed corresponding weld.

6.3.

Weld smoothness and flushness


Internal surface of weld in following locations shall be ground smooth and flush with inside bore of adjacent pipe. These welds shall be inspected and signed off by UOP, and photographic records shall be maintained by Contractor.: 1. 2. Catalyst lines Orifice flanges

6.4.

Dimensional examination
Dimensional examination shall be performed on both of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Taper flange bore Piping to off-module connections The pipeline deviation from the vertical (if no instructions are given in the project) shall not exceed 2 mm per 1 m of the pipeline length. The deviation of the flange sealing surface from the perpendicularity to the pipe or the part axis shall not exceed the values given in Table below.

Pipe (Part) Diameter (mm)


25-60 60-160 160-400 400-775 Above 750

Deviation (mm)
0, 15 0, 25 0, 35 0, 5 0, 6

7.

References
The most recent edition and addenda, except as otherwise specified, of the following documents are cited in this document. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) ASME B1.20.1, Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch) ASME B31.3, Code for Pressure Piping Process Piping ASME Section V, Nondestructive Examination American Society for Nondestructive Testing Recommended Practice No. SNT-TC-1A 2001

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-02-12

UOP Specification Piping Fabrication, Assembly, Erection, and Examination Piping Fabrication Institute (PFI)

Page 7 of 7 970086 S801F-1

PFI Standard ES-3, Fabricating Tolerances (Reaffirmed 1994) PFI Standard ES-7, Minimum Length and Spacing for Welded Nozzles

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-02-12

UOP Inspection Data Sheet Piping Fabrication, Assembly, Erection, and Examination

Page 1 of 1 970086 U801F-1

UOP Examination or Testing 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Notes 1. Leak test

PEMEX

UOP

PEMEX

WIT OBS WIT OBS Other Activities 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. WPS and PQR approval Pneumatic testing procedure approval Release for shipment Release for leak test Kickoff meeting

WIT OBS WIT OBS

If WIT (witnessed) column is selected and if the examination, test, or other activity is performed: a. b. c. A hold point shall be applied to the production schedule. Examination, test, or other activity shall be performed with the indicated party or parties in attendance. For mechanical running or performance tests, written notification of a successful preliminary test shall be provided.

2.

If OBS (observed) column is selected and if the examination, test, or other activity is performed: a. b. Indicated party or parties shall be notified of the timing of examination, test, or activity. Examination, test, or other activity may be performed as scheduled if indicated party or parties are not present.

3.

Written and verbal notice shall be provided for witnessed or observed examination, test, or other activity. a. b. Written notice shall arrive at UOP ten workdays prior to examination, test, or other activity. Verbal notice shall be provided two workdays prior to examination, test, or other activity.

4.

Inspection forecast shall comply with both of the following: a. b. Forecast shall include projected dates for witnessed or observed examination, tests, and other activities. Forecast shall be updated and resubmitted: Monthly Bimonthly Weekly Biweekly

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-02-12

UOP Documentation Data Sheet Piping Fabrication, Assembly, Erection, and Examination

Page 1 of 2 970086 V801F-1

Proposal Note 1

Review Note 2

Final Note 3

DESCRIPTION

General M A X X 2S 2S X X A X A X X X X X X X 0S 0S 0S 0S 0S 0S 0S 0S 0S 0S 0S 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 23.24. 0S 0S 0S 0S X 0S 0S A 0S 24.25. 25.26. 26.27. 27.28. 28.29. 29.30. 30.31. 31.32. 32.33. 0S 0S 0S 0S 0S 0S 0S X 0S 0S 0S 0S 0S 0S 0S 33.34. 34.35. 35.36. 36.37. 37.38. 38.39. 39.40. 40.41. 41.42. 42.43. 43.44. 44.45. 45.46. 46.47. 47.48. Progress Report including Production Schedule Quality Control Manual Inspection and Test Plan Paint Manufacturers Product Data Sheets. Two years Spare Parts List, if applicable Approved Deviations Procedures Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Records (PQR) Welding Plan Welder/Welding Operator Qualifications NDT Procedure NDT Personnel Qualification Certificates Material Control and Traceability Procedure Visual and Dimensional Inspection Procedure Hydrostatic and Pneumatic testing Procedures PMI Procedure, if applicable Heat Treatment Procedures, if any (including PWHT, Normalizing and Forming) Hardness Testing Procedure Surface Preparation & Painting Procedure Test Records Certified Material Test Reports (CMTRs) for all piping components and welding consumables. NDT Records & Certificates. NDE Personnels Certificates per ASNT SNT-TC-1A Material Traceability Records Chloride Analysis Certificate of Hydrotest water. Hydrostatic and pneumatic pressure test records including charts & logs. PMI Reports, if applicable. Detailed records of Heat treatment, if any (including PWHT, Normalizing and Forming). Welding Logs Air and Soap Bubble test records for pads. Repair Records Details of repairs including description, sketches, photos or drawings indicating location and size of repaired areas Inspection Reports Visual and Dimensional Inspection reports Weld ground smooth reports including pictures Hardness inspection reports, where applicable. Inspection and Test Plan Record Completed Paint Application & Inspection Log. Soluble Salt Measurement test report. Valves Receiving Inspection. Sectional assembly drawing(s). Material Test Reports (MTRs) and Certificates of Compliance for all valves pressure containing components. Test certificates and inspection reports (including NDT records, pressure test reports, tightness, and leak test reports). Leak testing report. Hydrostatic test report. Heat Treatment records if any. PMI reports if required.

a Proposal drawings and data do not have to be certified or as built. Typical data shall be clearly identified as such. b Purchaser will indicate in this column the time frame for submission of materials using the nomenclature given at the end of this form.

2013-02-12

UOP Documentation Data Sheet Piping Fabrication, Assembly, Erection, and Examination
Review Note 2 Final Note 3

Page 2 of 2 970086 V801F-1

Proposal Note 1

DESCRIPTION

0S 0S

48.49. 49.50.

API-598 Certificates. API-607 Certificates if applicable.

Nomenclature:
S - number of weeks prior to shipment. F - number of weeks after firm order. D - number of weeks after receipt of approved drawings. Available for review at manufacturers facility upon request Provide Monthly Provide Weekly Per the Purchase Order
For documents indicated in the Proposal column, provide an electronic copy or one hard copy. For documents indicated in the Review column, provide an electronic copy or one hard copy. For documents indicated in the Final columns provide an electronic copy and three hard copies.

A M W X
Notes: 1. 2. 3.

a Proposal drawings and data do not have to be certified or as built. Typical data shall be clearly identified as such. b Purchaser will indicate in this column the time frame for submission of materials using the nomenclature given at the end of this form.

2013-02-12

UOP Specification Leak Testing of Piping Contents

Page 1 of 9 970086 S801L-1

1. Scope........................................................... 1 2. Definitions .................................................... 1 3. Testing Selection Basis ............................... 1 4. Leak Test Methods ...................................... 2 4.2. Hydrostatic Test - Symbol H ............... 2 4.3. Pneumatic Test - Symbol P ................ 2 4.4. Initial Service Leak Test - Symbol F ... 2 4.5. Sensitive Leak Test - Symbol B.......... 3 4.6. Alternative Test - Symbol A ................ 3 5. Test Pressure .............................................. 3 6. General Requirements ................................ 3 6.1. Prior Work ............................................. 3 6.2. The Field Representative ...................... 3 6.3. Acceptance Criteria ............................... 4 6.4. Report ................................................... 4 6.5. Repairs or Additions After Leak Testing4 7. Shop Leak Test ........................................... 4

8. test procedures............................................ 4 8.1. Test Conditions ..................................... 4 8.2. General Requirements.......................... 5 8.3. Test Symbol H .................................... 5 8.4. Test Symbol P .................................... 5 8.5. Test Symbol F .................................... 6 8.6. Test Symbol B .................................... 6 9. Preparation For Test ................................... 7 9.1. Define Test Loops................................. 7 9.2. Painting and Insulation ......................... 7 9.3. Pneumatic Testing ................................ 7 9.4. Other Preparation ................................. 7 10. Status of Instruments During Pressure Test8 10.1. Table 1 .................................................. 8 10.2. Table 1 Notes ....................................... 9 11. References .................................................. 9

1.

Scope
This document defines technical requirements for leak testing of piping systems, in accordance with the Code, and describes requirements that are in addition to those of the Code.

2.

Definitions
For the purposes of this Specification, the following definitions apply: Code, ASME B31.3, Process Piping Field Representative, The authorized individual representing UOP at the construction site Symbol H, Hydrostatic Test, see Section 4.1 Symbol P, Pneumatic Test, see Section 4.2 Symbol F, Service Test, see Section 4.3 Symbol B, Sensitive Leak Test, see Section 4.4 Symbol A, Alternative Leak Test, see Section 4.5 Supplier, The firm hired to do the leak testing

3.

Testing selection basis


1. The leak tests required by the Code are shown in the following table.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-02-12

UOP Specification Leak Testing of Piping Fluid Service Required Tests Category D st Normal Hydrostatic, Pneumatic, or Alternative For process system: a. b.

Page 2 of 9 970086 S801L-1

2.

A hydrostatic test is generally preferred over a pneumatic test. Use the pneumatic test only when performing the hydrostatic test is impractical. The hydrostatic test may be considered impractical when piping cannot sustain the weight of water or other test liquid, or piping is to contain fluid incompatible with any test liquid.

3.

A sensitive leak test may be used following a primary leak test to meet Code or process requirements.

4.

Leak test methods


1. 2. Test methods described here are related to a Test Symbol. The test conditions, the procedures to be used, and post test requirements for each Test Symbol are described Section 8.

4.2.

Hydrostatic test - symbol H


1. 2. Where a large test volume is involved, consider how to dispose of the contents of the system after the test. This fluid may be useable for hydrotesting other systems. The piping must be water-free after the test. System shall be dried by one of the following methods: a. Compressed air shall be dry (-40C dew point) and free of oil, dirt, and other foreign matter. Other nonflammable gases (e.g., dry nitrogen) may be used with the Field Representative's approval. Heating with vacuum drying.

b.

4.3.

Pneumatic test - symbol P


1. Pneumatic Test involves the hazard of disruptive release of energy stored in the compressed gas. Pneumatic testing should be used only after reasonable alternates to test with a liquid have been exhausted. Conditions for pneumatic testing are: a. b. Pneumatic testing should be prohibited for piping of brittle material (e.g., cast iron) and all plastics not specified for compressed gas service. Pneumatic testing should not be used at an ambient temperature below the design minimum temperature for carbon and low-alloy steel piping. (See Code, Para. 323.2.2.) Prepare the system properly for the test. See Section 8.4 The area must be vacated during the test until the pressure is lowered for close inspection. Pneumatic testing may limit Code allowed pressure and temperature excursions. See the Code, Para. 302.2.4.

2.

c. d. e.

4.4.

Initial service leak test - symbol F


Initial Service Leak Test, the preferred test method for Category D Fluid Service piping, can be accomplished when the service fluid is first introduced to the piping system. If

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-02-12

UOP Specification Leak Testing of Piping

Page 3 of 9 970086 S801L-1

Initial Service Leak Test must be completed as part of a contract, use of water or air instead of the service fluid may be preferable. Pressurize the system to as high as the operating pressure but not more than 150 psig (1035 kPa). Further requirements can be found in the Code, Para. 345.7.

4.5.

Sensitive leak test - symbol B


1. Sensitive Leak Test is the preferred gas and bubble test when a sensitive leak test is required (in addition to test H or P) for Code compliance or to minimize fugitive emissions. Usually two Test Symbols have to be specified e.g., H, B. Air should be of the same quality as for a pneumatic test. Sequence of Tests: If test B is required, it will ordinarily follow the primary test (H or P). The piping must be dry for test B to be effective. Rather than reverse the preferred order of testing, circulate warm air or apply vacuum to thoroughly remove the residual water after hydrostatic testing.

2.

4.6.

Alternative test - symbol A


Alternative Test is based on a Code provision for a situation where neither the hydrostatic nor pneumatic test can be applied, such as at a tie-in. Requirements for Alternative Testing are: 1. 2. 3. 4. Formal flexibility analysis of the piping system shall be made. Radiography of 100 percent of circumferential, longitudinal, and spiral groove welds that will not otherwise be leak tested shall be completed. Examination of 100 percent of all other welds, including structural attachment welds, by the liquid penetrant method shall have been performed. A bubble test, Symbol B, shall be performed.

5.

Test pressure
The recommended test pressure for various tests is as follows: Symbol H P F B A Test Pressure 150% of design pressure corrected for temperature (min.) 110% of design pressure Maximum operating pressure, not over 150 psig (1035 kPa) The lesser of 15 psig (103 kPa) recommended maximum or 25% of the design pressure See Symbol B

6.

General requirements 6.1. Prior work


Fabrication and/or installation, examination, and any required cleaning, except chemical cleaning, shall be complete and in accordance with the applicable specification.

6.2.

The field representative


The Field Representative shall approve preparations for and witness all leak tests.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-02-12

UOP Specification Leak Testing of Piping

Page 4 of 9 970086 S801L-1

6.3. 6.4.

Acceptance criteria
Piping which is free of leakage for the duration of specified tests shall be accepted.

Report
The Supplier shall provide the Field Representative with a report in accordance with the Code, Paragraph (Para.) 345.2.7.

6.5.

Repairs or additions after leak testing


Repairs or additions made following the leak test shall be tested in accordance with Para. 345.2.6 of the Code.

7.

Shop leak test


A shop may be either a commercial shop or a shop set up in the field near a work site. Leak testing of shop-fabricated piping shall be performed before shipment. 1. 2. Hydrostatic testing shall be done at the test pressure specified on UOP Piping Line Index T801EL. A pneumatic test (P), may be made only with UOPs specific agreement, and if P is identified as the test. Test assemblies at the pressure stated using air unless otherwise directed. Protect personnel and property from possible harm of disruptive pressure release. Where a sensitive leak test (B) is required, the test shall be performed prior to priming and painting.

3.

8.

Test procedures
Leak testing of piping shall be performed after examination and repair are complete, and before start-up.

8.1.

Test conditions
Before conducting any leak test, the conditions listed below shall be met: 1. 2. Plant safety rules and personnel precautions shall be observed. Temporary supports, blinds, spool pieces, and other preparatory items shall be in place. All joints not previously tested under this specification shall be left uninsulated. For a sensitive leak test, all joints and components other than seamless pipe, seamless butt welding fittings, and forged fittings and valves not previously tested under this specification shall be left uninsulated and unpainted. Items to be excluded from test shall be removed or blanked. Hydrotest stops in spring hangers and supports shall remain in place during the hydrotest. If ambient temperature is not above 40 F (4 C), the Field Representative must specifically approve the test procedure of hydrostatic (H), pneumatic (P), or service (F) tests, considering the need to drain the piping before it freezes. Testing shall not be performed at an ambient temperature below the design minimum temperature for carbon and low alloy steel piping. See Code, Para. 301.3.1 and Para. 323.

3. 4. 5.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-02-12

UOP Specification Leak Testing of Piping

Page 5 of 9 970086 S801L-1

8.2.

General requirements
The Test Symbols listed in the following paragraphs are used to indicate the type of leak test(s) required for each pipeline and/or test loop:

8.2.1. Preliminary test preparation


The following requirements apply to all leak tests. 1. A pressure gauge shall be provided at the low point of the test loop. The gauge shall have a dial scale 4-1/2 in. (110 mm) diameter, a range such that the test pressure is within 40-80 percent of full scale, and accompanied by documentation showing it is calibrated within 2 percent at full scale reading. Piping designed for vapor or gas operation shall have temporary supports, if designated by the Field Representative, to support the weight of the test liquid. Expansion joints shall be tested in accordance with the Code, or as described by the Field Representative. The Field Representative shall describe the limits of the piping to be tested. If at any time the person(s) conducting the test is not in attendance, the pressure shall be reduced below design pressure. Each joint (weld, flange, packing gland, threaded or other joints) not previously examined for leaks according to this specification, shall be examined. Repairs shall be in accordance with Para. 345.2.6 of the Code.

2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

8.3.

Test symbol H
A Hydrostatic Test requires that: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Water from a source approved by the Field Representative as test liquid. See also Section 9.4.2. Fill piping with vents open; close the vents after piping is air-free. Drain the system after the test, with vents open, through lines or hoses leading to a discharge or recovery point acceptable to the Field Representative. Stainless steel systems may require special flush or drying procedures to avoid chloride concentration. Water used for hydrotesting testing shall be free of suspended solids and biologically inert. Chlorination at a level of 0.2 to 1.0 ppm is recommended to prevent biological attack. Water used for hydrostatic testing in stainless steel piping shall have a chloride content less than 50 ppm. If the chloride content is greater than 50 ppm and less than 250 ppm, a sufficient quantity of sodium nitrate shall be added to provide a 0.5% by weight sodium nitrate solution. Water with a chloride content greater than 250 ppm shall not be used for hydrostatic testing in stainless steel piping. Water temperature shall not be less than 40F (4C) nor greater than 140F (60C). The preferred water temperature range is between 60F (16C) and 100F (38C).

6.

7.

8.4.

Test symbol P
A Pneumatic Test requires: 1. A written procedure shall be prepared for each test loop, approved by the Field Representative including:

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-02-12

UOP Specification Leak Testing of Piping a. b. c. 2. Minimum piping temperature during the test

Page 6 of 9 970086 S801L-1

Method of limiting access to the area in which the piping is being tested Stored energy in the system when at the maximum test pressure

Compressed air shall be dry (-40C dew point) and free of oil, dirt, and other foreign matter. Other nonflammable gases (e.g., dry nitrogen) may be used with the Field Representative's approval. Precautions shall be taken against asphyxiation if gas could be released in a confined area. Drain water and condensate before testing; pressurize with vents and drains closed. A pressure relief valve shall be provided in the test loop. The set pressure shall be test pressure + 50 psig (345 kPa) or test pressure + 10 percent of test pressure, whichever is the lower. Initially pressurize the pipe to 25 psig (170 kPa) or one half the test pressure, whichever is less, make a preliminary check for leaks and repair all that are found. Gradually increase pressure in steps to the test pressure. Hold at steps so that piping strains are equalized. Reduce pressure from 110 percent of design to design pressure, check for leaks, repair any that are found. Regulated release of pressure after the test.

3. 4. 5.

6. 7.

8.

8.5.

Test symbol F
A Service test requires: 1. Fill piping with the service fluid (water or air may be substituted for liquid or gas if necessary), as specified by the Field Representative. Vents shall be open for liquid filling. Closing the vents and pressurizing the piping using the source of pressure normal for the service (or the same pressure using water or air). Releasing any excess liquid or gas to an acceptable discharge point. Test pressure shall be increased, and a preliminary check made, in steps in accordance with the Code, Para. 345.7.2.

2. 3. 4.

8.6.

Test symbol B
A Sensitive Leak Test requires: 1. 2. 3. The Field Representative shall specify the sequence of tests and any required additional cleaning or drying for each pipeline. The test pressure shall be as specified by the Field Representative. The Supplier shall provide, and the Field Representative shall approve a written, qualified procedure, and evidence of operator qualifications for each type of leak test, in accordance with BPV Code, Section V, Articles 1 and 10. An acceptable bubble formation solution, that produces an adherent and persistent film shall be used. The piping to be tested shall be fully in place, ready for operation. Painting, insulation, removal of temporary supports, etc. shall be completed after the sensitive leak test has been successfully completed.

4. 5.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-02-12

UOP Specification Leak Testing of Piping 6. 7.

Page 7 of 9 970086 S801L-1

Initially pressurize to 25 psig (170 kPa) or half the test pressure, whichever is less, make a preliminary check for leaks and repair any that are found. Raise the pressure in steps of 25 percent of test pressure or 25 psig (170 kPa), whichever is greater, holding for one minute at each step. Repeat the check for leaks, repairing any found, until test pressure is reached, at which time a final check of all joints shall be made. Application of bubble solution to welds and to threaded, flanged, and other joints by a technique which minimizes initial bubbles in the solution shall be made. Application of tape to the perimeter of the flanges and checking leaks through a punched hole is one method to check flanges.

8.

9.

Preparation for test 9.1. Define test loops


1. In most instances a single pipeline will be the test loop. In some cases, several pipelines (and possibly equipment items, see Code, Para. 345.4.3) can be tested as a unit. If there are in-line items (valves, sensors, relief valves, etc.) that cannot stand the test pressure, decide whether to blind off (if flanged ends) and test each piping segment separately, or replace items with a spool and test the whole pipeline. Gate, globe and check valve closures are generally capable of being tested at a differential pressure of 110 percent of the valve body rating. Quarter turn valve closures are frequently rated at still lower pressures. If the test pressure exceeds the valve closure rating, the valve must be tested in the open position.

2.

9.2.

Painting and insulation


1. For hydrostatic and pneumatic tests it is necessary to be able to examine every threaded, bolted, and welded joint (excluding welds made by a piping component manufacturer and any welds previously tested to this specification by a manufacturer) for leakage. The insulation must be left off. Joints may be painted except where a sensitive leak test is specified by the Owner. For a sensitive leak test, castings and factory welds (excluding 100 percent radiographed welds) must be accessible for examination. Except for welds prevously tested to this specification, both insulation and paint must be left off.

2.

9.3.

Pneumatic testing
Because of the high amount of stored energy, all joints must be checked for tightness before commencing the test. UOP must approve of the use of Pneumatic testing.

9.4.

Other preparation 9.4.1. Supports and restraints


Expansion joints must be fitted with restraints designed for operation. Piping for gas or vapor not designed to bear the weight of hydrostatic test liquid shall be provided with added support. If additional support is not practical, a pneumatic test may be used with the Field Representatives consent.

9.4.2. Test fluid supply


1. Verify that water of adequate purity will be available in the quantities needed for hydrostatic tests. Potable water may be acceptable even for tests on stainless steel piping, but the chloride content shall not be greater than 50 ppm.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-02-12

UOP Specification Leak Testing of Piping 2.

Page 8 of 9 970086 S801L-1

Any selected test liquid should be nontoxic and nonflammable, and an acceptable means of recovery or disposal must be determined. A combustible liquid with flash point 140 F (60 C) may be used, but the potential losses from burning of the liquid must be considered. Flammable liquids with a flash point < 140 F (60 C) are prohibited. The air supply required for pneumatic test is equivalent to instrument air.

3.

10.

Status of instruments during pressure test 10.1. Table 1


See Note 6 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Analyzers Control Valves - except regulators & pressure balanced Control Valves Pressure balances Flow Instruments - D/P Cell & Bellows type Flow Instruments Rotameters Flow Meters - positive displacement type Flow Meters - turbine type Flow Indicating Switches - bellows type Flow Switches - vane type X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 4,5 2 3 2 X X X X 1 Block & Vent X X X 7 Remove Blankoff Include in Test See Note

10. Gage Glasses 11. Level Instruments - displacer type 12. Level Instruments - C/P cell & bellows type 13. Level Switches - float type 14. Orifice Plates - D/P elements 15. Pressure Gages 16. Pressure Transmitters - all types 17. Pressure Regulators 18. Pressure Switches 19. PSVs - Flanged 20. PSVs, TSVs - Screwed 21. Thermowells 22. Rupture disks 23. Flame arrestors

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-02-12

UOP Specification Leak Testing of Piping See Note 6 Block & Vent Remove Blankoff X X

Page 9 of 9 970086 S801L-1 Include in Test See Note

24. Steam traps 25. Filter elements

10.2. Table 1 notes


1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Caution - Do not force reverse flow. Caution - Do not over-pressure float or displacer. If in doubt, do not test, block and drain instead. Install after hydrotesting and line flushing. Test gag may be used if one is furnished. Blinds not required on PSV outlets discharging into system being tested at 15 PSIG or less. All instruments shall be protected from damage due to freezing. In preparation for cold weather and during cold weather testing, all instruments must be drained and process lead lines blown out with air or nitrogen. Consult manufacturer for bellows stem sealed valves.

7.

11.

References
The most recent edition, except as otherwise specified, of the following documents are cited in this document. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) ASME B31.3-2002, Process Piping, ASME Code for Pressure Piping, B31

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-02-12

UOP Specification Piping Welding

Page 1 of 4 970086 S801FW-1

1.

Scope
This document defines technical requirements for pipe welding.

2.

General
Welding shall comply with the following codes and standards:

2.1.1. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)


1. 2. 3. ASME BPVC Section II Part C ASME BPVC Section IX ASME B31.3

2.1.2. American Welding Society (AWS)


1. 2. AWS A2.4 AWS A3.0

3.

Welding qualification
1. 2. 3. Welder, welding operator, and welding procedure shall be qualified in accordance with ASME Section IX. Approval of WPSs and PQRs shall be obtained from UOP prior to fabrication. The location where each WPS will be used shall be provided in either one of the following forms as part of welding procedure approval: a. b. 4. Reference to UOP Piping Classification Number, joint type, and location of weld Weld map

Welder performance qualification records (WPQs) shall be made available upon demand.

4.

Welding processes
Welding processes shall be one of the following: 1. 2. Gas Tungsten-Arc Welding (GTAW) Shielded Metal-Arc Welding (SMAW), with the following restriction: a. 3. SMAW shall not be used for root pass of single-sided joint.

Flux-Cored Arc Welding (FCAW), with the following restrictions: a. b. c. External shielding gas shall be used. Welding process for root pass of single-sided joint shall not be FCAW. Welding process used for field fabrication shall not be FCAW.

4.

Gas Metal-Arc Welding (GMAW), with the following restrictions: a. b. c. Mode shall not be short-circuiting. Welding process for root pass of single-sided joint shall not be GMAW. Welding process for field fabrication shall not be GMAW.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-02-12

UOP Specification Piping Welding 5.

Page 2 of 4 970086 S801FW-1

Submerged-Arc Welding (SAW), with the following restrictions: a. Using neutral flux.

5.

Filler metal
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Filler metal shall comply with ASME Section II, Part C. Electrode for welding carbon and low-alloy steels shall be low hydrogen. Filler metal for joining like base materials shall comply with UOP Standard Specification 8-12-4. Approval of filler metal for joining dissimilar base materials shall be obtained from UOP. If welding P-8 to P-8 material with at least 0.04% carbon, the following shall apply: a. b. 6. 7. 8. Filler metal shall have at least 0.04% carbon. Electrode manufacturer certificates shall be provided.

Electrode-material-control procedure shall meet electrode manufacturer recommendations for storage and handling. Electrode-material-control procedure shall be made available upon request. Electrode manufacturers certificates shall be made available upon request.

6.

Joint preparation
1. Weld backing bars or back-up rings shall be as follows: a. b. c. 2. 3. 4. The same metallurgy as the base metals The same as the higher metallurgy when joining dissimilar metals Removed after use

Consumable inserts shall not be used. Double-welded groove joints shall have root passes back gouged to sound metal before welding the backside. If material is stainless steel, the following shall apply: a. b. c. d. Grinding wheel and wire brush shall not have been previously used. Grinding wheel material shall be aluminum oxide or silicon carbide. Wire brush material shall be stainless steel. Marking material shall not contain chloride, sulfur, lead, zinc, aluminum, antimony, bismuth, cadmium, gallium, magnesium, tin, or any harmful compounds thereof.

d.e. Space material shall be identical to base metal, if used for joint fit-up 5. Tack weld shall be; a. b. c. d. Used for alignment or to maintain root spacing only. Made using the same electrode used for the root pass. Made such that it can be incorporated with the root pass. Ground out and thoroughly cleaned, if cracked or broken, prior to being fused in with the final weld.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-02-12

UOP Specification Piping Welding e. 6. Made by welder qualified to ASME Section IX.

Page 3 of 4 970086 S801FW-1

Single-sided groove joint containing over 2% chromium shall be welded using GTAW with argon back purge maintained for at least two passes. The internal purge shall confirm a O2 level of less than 2% before welding begins. A O2 portable analyzer to confirm the environmental conditions of the space is required. Weld process for root pass of piping requiring mechanical or chemical internal cleaning shall be GTAW.

7.

7.

Preheat and interpass temperatures


1. The interpass temperatures shall be as follows: a. b. 2. 175C (350F) for regular grades of 300 series stainless steel Less than or equal to 250C (500F) for low carbon and stabilized grades of 300 series stainless steel.

Material requiring preheat for welding shall receive preheat for thermal cutting, gouging, and tacking.

8.

Postweld heat treatment


1. If postweld heat treatment (PWHT) is required, one of the following shall be done: a. b. 2. 3. 4. Weld shall be heat treated before cooling below 150C (300F) after welding. Weld and adjacent pipe shall be heated to 315C (600F), wrapped with insulation, allowed to cool, and heat-treated later.

Pressure-retaining P-4 materials shall be post weld heat treated. The tensile test results of any PQR for P-4 material shall not exceed 100,000 psi (7,000 kg/cm2) at room temperature. Local postweld heat treatment shall be performed by induction heating or resistance heating. a. b. Top and bottom thermocouples shall be installed on nominal pipe size greater than or equal to 6 One thermocouple shall be installed on nominal pipe size less than 6.

5. 6. 7.

The use of exothermic kits is not allowed. At least two thermocouples shall be in contact with the materials in each furnace load to monitor the PWHT temperature. For batch treatment, thermocouples shall be in contact with the components located in both the top and bottom layers or in the hottest and coldest zones of the furnace charge. A continuous record of the temperature indicated by all thermocouples shall be made on chart recorders. Chart records shall be included in final document package provided.

8. 9.

9.

Cleaning
1. Peening shall not be permitted.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-02-12

UOP Specification Piping Welding 2.

Page 4 of 4 970086 S801FW-1

After fabrication and heat treatment, loose foreign material such as sand, dirt, wood, tools, rags, scale, weld spatter, and cutting chips shall be removed from the inside and outside of the pipe spools. Discoloration shall be removed from stainless-steel welds after welding. Weld flux shall be removed from all welds, including refractory anchor and hexmesh attachment welds.

3. 4.

10.

Weld hardness testing


1. 2. 3. 4. Hardness testing shall be performed after PWHT. Hardness testing shall be performed in accordance with an approved written procedure. Minimum of one hardness reading shall be taken in the center of each weld pass that is subject to hardness test. Hardness testing results shall be recorded on a written form. a. b. Hardness testing results shall be traceable to the area taken by means of a marked-up drawing. Hardness testing results and traceability markup shall be included in the final data package.

11.

References
The most recent edition and addenda, except as otherwise specified, of the following documents are cited in this document. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) ASME B31.3, ASME Code For Pressure Piping, Process Piping ASME BPVC Section II Part C, Welding Rods, Electrodes, and Filler Metals ASME BPVC Section IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifications ASME BPVC Section V, Nondestructive Examination American Welding Society (AWS) AWS A2.4, Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing and Nondestructive Examination AWS A3.0, Standard Welding Terms and Definitions

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-01-11

UOP Specification Piping Specialty Items

Page 1 of 2 970086 S890-0

1.

Piping Specialty Items


Piping specialty items shall be supplied in accordance with the following guidelines:

1.1.

Identification Marking Requirements


1. 2. 3. 4. A metal tag shall be attached to each piping specialty item quoting the item tag number: SP-XXX. Metal tags shall be stainless steel or brass. Metal tags shall be minimum 1/32 inch (1 mm) thick Metal tags shall be riveted securely wired to the items with stainless steel wire of a minimum diameter of 1/32 inch (1 mm).

1.2. 1.3.

Materials
1. Materials shall not contain asbestos.

Certification
1. Material Certificates are required and as a minimum shall include: a. b. c. d. e. f. 2. 3. Chemical Analysis by Product Mechanical Properties Heat Treatment Statement Non Destructive Test results Heat or Melt Number All certificates shall state the Manufacturers name and location. Certificates shall include the BUYERS purchase order number and purchase order item number.

Hydrostatic Test Certificates are required for Strainers. Positive Material Identification (PMI) is required for Stainless Steel or Alloy Steel pressure containing components.

1.4.

Surface preparation and protective coating


1. All external surfaces of all Carbon or low alloy steel items, except socket weld, or butt weld ends, shall be prepared and painted in accordance with the following requirements: a. b. 2. Paint shall be suitable for a severe marine environment. UOP requests to review the vendors painting specification for a severe marine environment. Dry film thickness shall be at least 3 mils.

All external surfaces of all Carbon or low alloy steel items, with socket weld, or butt weld ends, shall be prepared and supplied with temporary storage coating, in accordance with manufacturers standard coating system.

2.

Preparation for Shipping


1. Flange surfaces shall be coated with either: a. b. A rust-preventative grease. A protective coating that is removable with one of the following:

Note, these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.

2013-01-11

UOP Specification Piping Specialty Items

Page 2 of 2 970086 S890-0

1. 2. 2.

Acetone. Isopropyl alcohol.

The gasket surface of the connections shall be covered with either: a. b. Heavy-duty plastic connection protectors. Bolted or steel-strapped wood, wood-fiber, or metal covers.

3.

If wood, wood fiber, or metal covers are used, a plastic sheet shall be placed between the coated connection and cover.

Note, these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.

2013-01-14

UOP Technical Data Sheet Piping Specialty Items

Page 1 of 2 970086 T890-0

1.
REV

Piping specialty items List


NO. ITEM SIZE RATING UOP SPEC. LINE NO. UOP MFD NO. DESCRIPTION Strainer Shall Be Furnished With Plugged, Blow-Off Outlet. Cast Stainless Steel, ASTM A 351 Grade CF8M, ASME Class 600, Socket Weld Connections. Screens Shall Be A Minimum Of 24 Gauge (0.0239 Inch) Perforated Type 316 Stainless Steel Plate With 5/32 Inch (4 mm) Diameter Staggered Holes At 3/16 Inch (5 mm) Centers And 63 Percent Open Area, Lined With 30 Mesh (567 Micron) And 0.011 Inch (0.28 mm) Diameter Wire Type 316 Stainless Steel Mesh And 45 Percent Open Area. Mueller Model No 862-SS, Titan Model No. YS82-SS-UOP Or Equal. Strainer Shall Be Furnished With Plugged, Blow-Off Outlet. Cast Stainless Steel, ASTM A 351 Grade CF8M, ASME Class 600, Socket Weld Connections. Screens Shall Be A Minimum Of 24 Gauge (0.0239 Inch) Perforated Type 316 Stainless Steel Plate With 5/32 Inch (4 mm) Diameter Staggered Holes At 3/16 Inch (5 mm) Centers And 63 Percent Open Area, Lined With 30 Mesh (567 Micron) And 0.011 Inch (0.28 mm) Diameter Wire Type 316 Stainless Steel Mesh And 45 Percent Open Area. Mueller Model No 862-SS, Titan Model No. YS82-SS-UOP Or Equal. Perforated Conical Strainer (short pattern), 150% open area relative to flow area of same size pipe , Std. wt. pipe (based on 40% perforated plate) 14 Ga. 304 SS Perforated plate 1/8 dia. Holes on 3/16 centers (40% open area, 33 holes/Sq. in.) Line Size 6, Mating flange class 150# RF, Proposal to include pressure drop calculations across strainer under the following conditions: Flow medium: Nitrogen Molecular Weight: 28.0 Operating Pressure: 0.05 kg/cm2 Operating Temperature: 38 oC

SP1002

Y-TYPE STRAINER

3/4"

150#

M1A1

CL-L502RM1A1-3/4"

D106

SP1003

Y-TYPE STRAINER

3/4"

150#

M1A1

CL-L516RM1A1-3/4"

D106

SP1005

CONE TYPE STRAINER (START-UP)

6"

150#

PR8

RE-L801R-PR86"

D111

Note, these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.

2013-01-14

UOP Technical Data Sheet Piping Specialty Items


NPS Inlet & NPS Outlet

Page 2 of 2 970086 T890-0


Oil Drainer for the Lift Gas Blower Drains. Stainless Steel body, valve, seat, leverage system and cap. Free floating guided lever drain trap. Recommended Model: Armstrong 11-LD

SP1006

Liquid Drainer Assembly

150#

B1A1

V-747-B1A1-

D115

Note, these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.

2013-01-16

UOP Specification Pipe Bending

Page 1 of 2 970086 S801P-0

1.

SCOPE
This document defines technical requirements for pipe bending.

2.

INTRODUCTION
Pipe bending shall comply with PFI Standard ES-24, revised September 2003, as modified herein. Numbering of the following sections and paragraphs corresponds to section and paragraph numbering of PFI Standard ES-24 and defines additions, deletions, and revisions to PFI Standard ES-24. Requirements of PFI Standard ES-24 that are not revised remain applicable.

3.

BENDING METHODS 3.1. Hot bending Methods 3.1.1. Induction Bending


Induction pipe bending shall follow the requirements of TPA-IBS-98, Recommended Standards for Induction Bending of Pipe and Tube.

3.2.

Cold Bending Methods


Cold pipe bending shall follow the requirements of TPA-CBS-98, Recommended Standards for Cold Bending of Pipe and Tube.

3.3.

Bending Procedure
Prior to bending of pipe, approval of a written bending procedure shall be obtained from UOP.

4.

WELDS IN BENDS
1. Circumferential butt welds in the arc of a pipe bend are not allowed.

5.

LINEAR AND ANGULAR TOLERANCES 5.1. Post bend dimensions shall be within the following tolerances:
1. 2. Induction bend Paragraph 9.1, of TPA-IBS-98 Cold bend - Paragraph 9.2, of TPA-CBS-98

6.

FORM TOLERANCES 6.1. Bend shall be measured for ovality. The acceptance criteria for maximum ovality shall be as follows:
1. 2. Induction bends - Table 1-2, of TPA-IBS-98 Cold Bends - Shall not exceed 8%

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-01-16

UOP Specification Pipe Bending

Page 2 of 2 970086 S801P-0

7.

MATERIAL ALLOWANCES 7.1. Bend shall be subject to measurement of post-bend wall thickness by ultrasonic examination. The acceptance criteria shall be as follows:
1. 2. Induction bends Paragraph 9.2 and Table 1-1, of TPA-IBS-98 Cold Bends - Paragraph 9.5 and Figure 5, of TPA-CBS-98

8.

CLEANING 8.1. Stainless Steel Pipe


1. Mechanical cleaning tools shall be clean and shall not have been used on low melting point materials such as aluminum, copper, lead or materials containing lead compounds. The set of tools to be used on stainless-steel materials shall be clearly marked for stainless steel use only. Tools to be used on stainless steel materials shall not have been previously used on carbon or low alloy steel materials. Grinding tools for stainless steels shall be either: a. b. 5. 6. resin-bonded aluminum-oxide, or silicon-carbide.

2. 3. 4.

Brushing shall be performed with clean, austenitic stainless-steel brushes. All dirt, sand, lubricant and other foreign matter shall be completely removed.

8.2.

Carbon Steel Pipe


1. 2. Where lubricant is used for internal mandrel, pipe I.D. shall be free of residue before material is shipped. Where lubricant is used for external tool lubrication, surface of pipe shall be cleaned of residue before surface finishes are applied.

9.

INDUSTRY CODES AND STANDARDS


Pipe Fabrication Institute (PFI) --Standard ES-24, Pipe Bending Methods, Tolerances, Process and Material Requirements Tube and Pipe Association International (TPA) --Standard TPA-CBS-98, Recommended Standards for Cold Bending of Pipe and Tube --Standard TPA-IBS-98, Recommended Standards for Induction Bending of Pipe and Tube

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-01-16

UOP Documentation Data Sheet Pipe Bending

Page 1 of 1 970086 V801P-0

Proposala Review
b

One copies of data and documents indicated shall be provided. One copies of data and documents indicated shall be provided. Two copies of data and documents indicated shall be provided.

Finalb

DISTRIBUTION RECORD

Final-Received from Vendor Final-Due from Vendorc Review-Returned to Vendor Review-Received from Vendor Review-Due from Vendorc DOCUMENT CATEGORY and DESCRIPTION

X X X

X X X X X X X X

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

Schedule of Work Pipe Bending Procedure

TEST PROCEDURES
NDE Procedures

CERTIFICATION
CMTRs Conformity Declaration Test Result (NDE, visual, thickness) Inspection Release Note

FINAL DOCUMENTATION:
As-Built Dimensions

Nomenclature: S - number of weeks prior to shipment. F - number of weeks after firm order. D - number of weeks after receipt of approved drawings. (X if no due date is established)

a Proposal drawings and data do not have to be certified or as built. Typical data shall be clearly identified as such. b Purchaser will indicate in this column the time frame for submission of materials using the nomenclature given at the end of this form. c Vendor shall complete these two columns to reflect his actual distribution schedule and include this form with his proposal.

2013-01-31

UOP Specification Branch Connection Table

Page 1 of 1 970086 S8 Branch-1

BRANCH CONNECTION TABLE The minimum pipe size shall be NPS 3/4, except for instrument lead lines which may be NPS 1/2. Branch connections shall be in accordance with the following table: RUN SIZE 3/4 1 1-1/2 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 30 BRANCH SIZE 3/4 1 11/2 T RT T RT RT T BS RTB RTS S P BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 30

T RT BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW T RT BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW T RT BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW

T RT RT BW BW BW BW BW BW BW

T RT RT RT BW BW BW BW BW

T RT RT RT RT RT BW BW

T RT RT RT RT RT BW

T RT RT RT RT BW

T RT RT RT RT

T RT RT RT

T RT RT

T RT

BRANCH CODES: T RT BS BW SP =STRAIGHT TEE =REDUCING TEE (For Reducing Tees, socket weld reducer inserts fabricated in accordance with MSS SP-79 are permitted) =SOCKOLET (or THREDOLET), Full couplings are permitted, Half Couplings are NOT Permitted. =WELDOLET =Detail Designer to Decide

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-02-06

UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class B1A1

Page 1 of 4 970086 S8B1A1-3

Pipe Class: Service: Rating/Facing: Temperature Range: Corrosion Allowance: Material: Design Code: Pressure Range: UOP Valve Code (Note 1) Flanges Socket Weld Flanges Weld Neck (Note11)

B1A1 GENERAL PROCESS, PROCESS WITH HYDROGEN CLASS 150 RF -20F THRU 700F / -29C THRU 371C 0.063 inch (1.5 mm) KILLED CARBON STEEL ASME B31.3 ASME B16.5 for sizes to NPS 24

NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 105, Class 150 RF, SCH. 80, ASME B16.5. NPS 2 to 24, ASTM A 105, Class 150 RF, SCH. STD., ASME B16.5. NPS 2 to 24, ASTM A 105, Class 150 FF, SCH. STD., ASME B16.5. NPS 30, ASTM A 105, Class 150 RF, SCH STD, ASME B16.47 Series A NPS 2 to 24, ASTM A 105, Class 300 RF, SCH. STD., ASME B16.5. NPS 1-1/2, ASTM A 105, Class 300 RF, SCH. 80, with jack screws ASME B16.36 NPT taps. NPS 2 to 24 ASTM A 105, Class 300 RF, SCH. STD., with jack screws ASME B16.36 NPT taps.

Orifice Flanges Weld Neck

Gaskets (Note11)

For RF Flanges - Spiral wound with flexible graphite (95% min.) filler, TP316 SS winding and carbon steel solid centering ring, per ASME B16.20. NPS 1/2 to 24 for ASME B16.5 flanges, per ASME B16.20. NPS 30 for ASME B16.47 Series A flanges For flat face flanges Compressed non-asbestosThermiculite 715, full face, 1/16" thick NPS 1/2 to 24 ASME 16.21, dimensions per ASME B16.5 Class 150

Small Fittings Large Fittings (Notes 5) Branch Outlet Fittings

NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 105, Class 3000, ASME B16.11, socket weld. NPS 2 to 30, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, BW, wall thickness to match pipe, ASME B16.9. Elbolet. NPS 1 & 1-1/2, ASTM A 105, Class 3000, socket weld. Sockolet. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 105, Class 3000, MSS SP-97. Weldolet. NPS 2 to 24, ASTM A 105, SCH. STD., BW, MSS SP-97. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. 160, seamless, PLE/TSE, MSS SP-95. NPS 1/4 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. 80, seamless, PBE, MSS SP-95.

Concentric Swages (Note 8)

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-02-06

UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class B1A1

Page 2 of 4 970086 S8B1A1-3

Eccentric Swages (Note 8)

NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. 160, seamless, PLE/TSE, MSS SP-95. NPS 1/4 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. 80, seamless, PBE, MSS SP-95. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 106 Grade B, SCH. 160, seamless, TBE. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 106 Grade B, SCH. 160, seamless, POE/TOE. NPS 1/4 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 106 Grade B, SCH. 80, seamless, PBE. NPS 1 to 12, ASTM A 516 Grade 70 Normalized, Class 150 RF, ASME B16.48. NPS 12 to 30, ASTM A 516 Grade 70 Normalized, Class 150 RF, ASME B16.48. NPS 12 to 30, ASTM A 516 Grade 70 Normalized, Class 150 RF, ASME B16.48. GL-800 GL-801 GL-100 NPS 1/4 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged, ASTM A 105, socket weld. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged, ASTM A 105, socket weld x threaded. NPS 2 to 6 Class 150, cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB, flanged. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged, ASTM A 105, socket weld. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged, ASTM A 105, socket weld, full port. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged, ASTM A 105, socket weld x threaded. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 300, forged, ASTM A 105, flanged. NPS 2 to 24, Class 150, cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB, flanged. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged, ASTM A 105, socket weld. NPS 2 to 24, Class 150, cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB, flanged. NPS 2 to 24, Class 150, cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB, retainerless, lug type, flangeless. NPS 1/4 to 1-1/2, 207 bar, ASTM A 582 Grade 303 stainless steel body Female pipe thread, Viton-O-ring seal. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Standard port, socket weld ends, fire safe design carbon steel body 316 stainless steel ball and stem, Reinforced Teflon seat, PTFE/Graphite body seal, TFM/Graphite stem seal, Stud Bolts. ASTM A 193 Grade B7, threaded full length, with two ASTM A 194 Grade 2H heavy semi-finished hexagonal nuts. Jack Screw. ASTM A 307 Grade B, threaded full length, hex head. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 106 Grade B, SCH. 80, PBE. NPS 2 to 14, ASTM A 106 Grade B, SCH. STD., BBE. NPS 16 to 30, ASTM A 672 Grade B65 Class 22, SCH. STD., BBE.

Nipples (Note 6, 9)

Blinds Spectacle Blinds Spacer Ring Blinds Plate Globe Valves (Note 3)

Gate Valves (Notes 2, 3, 4)

GA-800 GA-802 GA-801 GA-803 GA-100 CH-800 CH-100 CH-102 CH-3080 BA-104

Check Valves

Wafer Check Valves Spring Check valve Ball Valve (Max Operating Temp 150 C) Bolting

Seamless Pipe Electric Fusion Welded Pipe

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-02-06

UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class B1A1

Page 3 of 4 970086 S8B1A1-3

BRANCH CONNECTION TABLE The minimum pipe size shall be NPS 3/4, except for instrument lead lines which may be NPS 1/2. Branch connections shall be in accordance with the following table: RUN SIZE 3/4 1 1-1/2 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 30 BRANCH SIZE 3/4 1 11/2 T RT T RT RT T BS RT RT BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 30

T RT BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW

T RT BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW

T RT BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW

T RT RT BW BW BW BW BW BW BW

T RT RT RT BW BW BW BW BW

T RT RT RT RT BW BW BW

T RT RT RT RT BW BW

T RT RT RT RT BW

T RT RT RT RT

T RT RT RT

T RT RT

T RT

BRANCH CODES: T = STRAIGHT TEE RT = REDUCING TEE (Note 10) BS = SOCKOLET (or THREDOLET ) Full couplings are permitted; Half Couplings are NOT Permitted BW = WELDOLET

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-02-06

UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class B1A1

Page 4 of 4 970086 S8B1A1-3

Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 Note 4 Note 5 Note 6 Note 7 Note 8 Note 9 Note 10 Note 11

See UOP Project valve Specification for description of UOP Valve Codes used in this Pipe Class and recommended valve manufacturer and model number. For drain, vent, and purge connections, forged valves shall have one end socket weld, other end threaded. For instrument root valves, forged valves shall have one end socket weld, other end threaded. For level connections, forged valves shall have ASME Class 150 raised face flanged ends. Short radius elbows shall not be used. Use thread compound for threaded joints. Teflon tape is not permitted. Deleted Use of swaged nipples is not permitted when large end exceeds 2 inch NPS. Plain one end / threaded other end (POE / TOE) nipples for use on orifice flanges shall have threaded connection seal welded. For Reducing Tees, socket weld reducer inserts fabricated in accordance with MSS SP-79 are permitted. Use flat face flanges and full face gaskets to match flat face flanges only.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-01-09

UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class B2A1

Page 1 of 3 970086 S8B2A1-2

Pipe Class: Service: Rating/Facing: Temperature Range: Corrosion Allowance: Material: Design Code: Pressure Range: UOP Valve Code (Note 1) Flanges Socket Weld Flanges Weld Neck Orifice Flanges Weld Neck Gaskets Small Fittings Large Fittings (Notes 5) Branch Outlet Fittings (Note 7) Concentric Swages (Note 8)

B2A1 GENERAL PROCESS, PROCESS WITH HYDROGEN CLASS 300 RF -20F THRU 800F / -29C THRU 427C 0.063 inch (1.5 mm) KILLED CARBON STEEL ASME B31.3 ASME B16.5 for sizes to NPS 24

NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 105, Class 300 RF, SCH. 80, ASME B16.5. NPS 2 to 24, ASTM A 105, Class 300 RF, SCH. STD., ASME B16.5. NPS 1-1/2, ASTM A 105, Class 300 RF, SCH. 80, with jack screws ASME B16.36 NPT taps. Spiral wound with flexible graphite (95% min.) filler, TP316 SS winding and carbon steel solid centering ring, NPS 1/2 to 24, per ASME B16.20. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 105, Class 3000, ASME B16.11, socket weld. NPS 2 to 24, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, BW, wall thickness to match pipe, ASME B16.9. Elbolet. NPS 1 & 1-1/2, ASTM A 105, Class 3000, socket weld. Sockolet. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 105, Class 3000, MSS SP-97. Weldolet. NPS 2 to 20, ASTM A 105, SCH. STD., BW, MSS SP-97. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. 80160, seamless, PLE/TSE, MSS SP-95. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. 80, seamless, PBE, MSS SP-95. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. 80160, seamless, PLE/TSE, MSS SP-95. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. 80, seamless, PBE, MSS SP-95. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 106 Grade B, SCH. 160, seamless, TBE. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 106 Grade B, SCH. 160, seamless, POE/TOE. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 106 Grade B, SCH. 16080, seamless, PBE. NPS 1 to 12, ASTM A 516 Grade 70 Normalized, Class 300 RF, ASME B16.48.

Eccentric Swages (Note 8)

Nipples (Note 6, 9)

Blinds Spectacle

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-01-09

UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class B2A1

Page 2 of 3 970086 S8B2A1-2

Blinds Spacer Ring Blinds Plate Globe Valves (Note 3) GL-800 GL-801 GL-300 Gate Valves (Notes 2, 3, 4) GA-800 GA-802 GA-801 GA-803 GA-300 Check Valves CH-800 CH-300 Wafer Check Valves Spring Check valve Ball Valve (Max Opr. Temp 150 C) Ball Valve (Max Opr. Temp 150 C) Bolting CH-302 CH-3080 BA-104

NPS 2 to 24, ASTM A 516 Grade 70 Normalized, Class 300 RF, ASME B16.48. NPS 2 to 24, ASTM A 516 Grade 70 Normalized, Class 300 RF, ASME B16.48. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged, ASTM A 105, socket weld. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged, ASTM A 105, socket weld x threaded. NPS 2 to 6 Class 300, cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB, flanged. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged, ASTM A 105, socket weld. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged, ASTM A 105, socket weld, full port. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged, ASTM A 105, socket weld x threaded. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 300, forged, ASTM A 105, flanged. NPS 2 to 24, Class 300, cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB, flanged. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged, ASTM A 105, socket weld. NPS 2 to 24, Class 300, cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB, flanged. NPS 2 to 24, Class 300, cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB, retainerless, lug type, flangeless. NPS 1/4 to 1-1/2, 207 bar, ASTM A 582 Grade 303 stainless steel body Female pipe thread, Viton-O-ring seal. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Standard port, socket weld ends, fire safe design carbon steel body 316 stainless steel ball and stem, Reinforced Teflon seat, PTFE/Graphite body seal, TFM/Graphite stem seal. NPS 1/2 to 4, Full Port, Soft-Sealed, "Fire-Safe" design, ASME Class 300 flanged RF, cast carbon steel, ASTM A 216 Grade WCB, 316 stainless steel ball and stem, Filled Teflon seats. TFE/Graphite body seal and stem seal, Manufacturers standard gear operator. Stud Bolts. ASTM A 193 Grade B7, threaded full length, with two ASTM A 194 Grade 2H heavy semi-finished hexagonal nuts. Jack Screw. ASTM A 307 Grade B, threaded full length, hex head. All bolts, nuts & screws are to be coated with FluoroKote #1 . NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 106 Grade B, SCH. 80, PBE. NPS 2 to 14, ASTM A 106 Grade B, SCH. STD., BBE. NPS 16 to 24, ASTM A 672 Grade B65 Class 22, SCH. STD.,BBE

BA-304

Seamless Pipe Electric Fusion Welded Pipe

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-01-09 BRANCH CONNECTION TABLE

UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class B2A1

Page 3 of 3 970086 S8B2A1-2

The minimum pipe size shall be NPS 3/4, except for instrument lead lines which may be NPS 1/2. Branch connections shall be in accordance with the following table: RUN SIZE 3/4 1 1-1/2 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 BRANCH SIZE 3/4 1 1-1/2 2 T RT RT BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS T RT RT BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24

T RT BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS

T RT BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW

T RT BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW

T RT BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW

T RT RT BW BW BW BW BW BW

T RT RT RT BW BW BW BW

T RT RT RT RT BW BW

T RT RT RT RT BW

T RT RT RT RT

T RT RT RT

T RT RT

T RT

BRANCH CODES: T = STRAIGHT TEE RT = REDUCING TEE (Note 10) BS = SOCKOLET (or THREDOLET ) Full couplings are permitted; Half Couplings are NOT Permitted BW = WELDOLET Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 Note 4 Note 5 Note 6 Note 7 Note 8 Note 9 Note 10 See UOP Project valve Specification for description of UOP Valve Codes used in this Pipe Class and recommended valve manufacturer and model number. For drain, vent, and purge connections, forged valves shall have one end socket weld, other end threaded. For instrument root valves, forged valves shall have one end socket weld, other end threaded. For level connections, forged valves shall have ASME Class 300 raised face flanged ends. Short radius elbows shall not be used. Use thread compound for threaded joints. Teflon tape is not permitted. Deleted Use of swaged nipples is not permitted when large end exceeds 2 inch NPS. Plain one end / threaded other end (POE / TOE) nipples for use on orifice flanges shall have threaded connection seal welded. For Reducing Tees, socket weld reducer inserts fabricated in accordance with MSS SP-79 are permitted.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-01-09

UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class B2A2

Page 1 of 3 970086 S8B2A2-1

Pipe Class: Service: Rating/Facing: Temperature Range: Corrosion Allowance: Material: Design Code: Pressure Range: UOP Valve Code (Note 1) Flanges Socket Weld Flanges Weld Neck

B2A2 GENERAL PROCESS, PROCESS WITH HYDROGEN CLASS 300 RF -20F THRU 800F / -29C THRU 427C 0.125 inch (3.0 mm) KILLED CARBON STEEL ASME B31.3 ASME B16.5 for sizes to NPS 24

NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 105, Class 300 RF, SCH. 160, ASME B16.5. NPS 2 to 24, ASTM A 105, Class 300 RF, SCH. Same as pipe, ASME B16.5. NPS 2 to 24, ASTM A 105, Class 300 FF, SCH. STD., ASME B16.5. NPS 1-1/2, ASTM A 105, Class 300 RF, SCH. 160, with jack screws ASME B16.36 NPT taps. NPS 2 to 24, ASTM A 105, Class 300 RF, SCH. STD., with jack screws ASME B16.36 NPT taps.

Orifice Flanges Weld Neck

Gaskets

For raised face flanges:-Spiral wound with flexible graphite (95% min.) filler, TP316 SS winding and carbon steel solid centering ring, NPS 1/2 to 24, per ASME B16.20. For flat face flanges:- Compressed non-asbestos, full face, 1/16" thick NPS 1/2 to 24 ASME 16.21, dimensions per ASME B16.5 Class 300.

Small Fittings Large Fittings (Notes 5) Branch Outlet Fittings

NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 105, Class 6000, ASME B16.11, socket weld. NPS 2 to 24, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, BW, wall thickness to match pipe, ASME B16.9. Elbolet. NPS 1 & 1-1/2, ASTM A 105, Class 6000, socket weld. Sockolet. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 105, Class 6000, MSS SP-97. Weldolet. NPS 2 to 20, ASTM A 105, SCH. Match Pipe BW, MSS SP-97. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. XXS160, seamless, PLE/TSE, MSS SP-95. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. 160, seamless, PBE, MSS SP-95. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. XXS160, seamless, PLE/TSE, MSS SP-95. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. 160, seamless, PBE, MSS SP-95.

Concentric Swages (Note 8)

Eccentric Swages (Note 8)

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-01-09

UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class B2A2

Page 2 of 3 970086 S8B2A2-1

Nipples (Note 6, 9)

NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 106 Grade B, SCH. XXS160, seamless, TBE. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 106 Grade B, SCH. XXS160, seamless, POE/TOE. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 106 Grade B, SCH. 160, seamless, PBE. NPS 1 to 12, ASTM A 516 Grade 70 Normalized, Class 300 RF, ASME B16.48. NPS 2 to 24, ASTM A 516 Grade 70 Normalized, Class 300 RF, ASME B16.48. NPS 2 to 24, ASTM A 516 Grade 70 Normalized, Class 300 RF, ASME B16.48. GL-800 GL-801 GL-300 NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged, ASTM A 105, socket weld. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged, ASTM A 105, socket weld x threaded. NPS 2 to 6 Class 300, cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB, flanged. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged, ASTM A 105, socket weld. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged, ASTM A 105, socket weld, full port. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged, ASTM A 105, socket weld x threaded. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 300, forged, ASTM A 105, flanged. NPS 2 to 24, Class 300, cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB, flanged. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged, ASTM A 105, socket weld. NPS 2 to 24, Class 300, cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB, flanged. NPS 2 to 24, Class 300, cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB, retainerless, lug type, flangeless. NPS 1/4 to 1-1/2, 207 bar, ASTM A 582 Grade 303 stainless steel body Female pipe thread, Viton-O-ring seal. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Standard port, socket weld ends, fire safe design carbon steel body 316 stainless steel ball and stem, Reinforced Teflon seat, PTFE/Graphite body seal, TFM/Graphite stem seal. NPS 1/2 to 4, Full Port, Soft-Sealed, "Fire-Safe" design, ASME Class 300 flanged RF, cast carbon steel, ASTM A 216 Grade WCB, 316 stainless steel ball and stem, Filled Teflon seats. TFE/Graphite body seal and stem seal, Manufacturers standard gear operator. Stud Bolts. ASTM A 193 Grade B7, threaded full length, with two ASTM A 194 Grade 2H heavy semi-finished hexagonal nuts. Jack Screw. ASTM A 307 Grade B, threaded full length, hex head. All bolts, nuts & screws are to be coated with FluoroKote #1 . NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 106 Grade B, SCH. 160, PBE. NPS 2 to 14, ASTM A 106 Grade B, SCH. (later if needed), BBE.

Blinds Spectacle Blinds Spacer Ring Blinds Plate Globe Valves (Note 3)

Gate Valves (Notes 2, 3, 4)

GA-800 GA-802 GA-801 GA-803 GA-300 CH-800 CH-300 CH-302 CH-3080 BA-104

Check Valves

Wafer Check Valves Spring Check valve Ball Valve (Max Opr. Temp 150 C) Ball Valve (Max Opr. Temp 150 C) Bolting

BA-304

Seamless Pipe

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-01-09

UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class B2A2

Page 3 of 3 970086 S8B2A2-1

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-01-09 BRANCH CONNECTION TABLE

UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class B2A2

Page 4 of 3 970086 S8B2A2-1

The minimum pipe size shall be NPS 3/4, except for instrument lead lines which may be NPS 1/2. Branch connections shall be in accordance with the following table: RUN SIZE 3/4 1 1-1/2 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 BRANCH SIZE 3/4 1 1-1/2 2 T RT RT BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS T RT RT BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24

T RT BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS

T RT BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW

T RT BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW

T RT BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW

T RT RT BW BW BW BW BW BW

T RT RT RT BW BW BW BW

T RT RT RT RT BW BW

T RT RT RT RT BW

T RT RT RT RT

T RT RT RT

T RT RT

T RT

BRANCH CODES: T = STRAIGHT TEE RT = REDUCING TEE (Note 10) BS = SOCKOLET (or THREDOLET ) Full couplings are permitted; Half Couplings are NOT Permitted BW = WELDOLET Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 Note 4 Note 5 Note 6 Note 7 Note 8 Note 9 Note 10 See UOP Project valve Specification for description of UOP Valve Codes used in this Pipe Class and recommended valve manufacturer and model number. For drain, vent, and purge connections, forged valves shall have one end socket weld, other end threaded. For instrument root valves, forged valves shall have one end socket weld, other end threaded. For level connections, forged valves shall have ASME Class 300 raised face flanged ends. Short radius elbows shall not be used. Use thread compound for threaded joints. Teflon tape is not permitted. Deleted Use of swaged nipples is not permitted when large end exceeds 2 inch NPS. Plain one end / threaded other end (POE / TOE) nipples for use on orifice flanges shall have threaded connection seal welded. For Reducing Tees, socket weld reducer inserts fabricated in accordance with MSS SP-79 are permitted.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-01-07

UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class M1A1 M1A1 CORROSIVE PROCESS CLASS 150 RF -50F THRU 700F / -45C THRU 370C 0.063 inch (1.6 mm) TP 316/316L STAINLESS STEEL ASME B31.3 ASME B16.5

Page 1 of 2 970086 S8M1A1-1

Pipe Class: Service: Rating/Facing: Temperature Range: Corrosion Allowance: Material: Design Code: Pressure Range: UOP Valve Code (Note 1) Flanges Socket Weld Gaskets

NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 182 Grade F316/316L, Class 150, RF, SCH. 80S, ASME B16.5. Spiral wound with flexible graphite (95% min.) filler, TP316 SS winding and carbon steel solid centering ring. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, dimensions per ASME B16.20. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 182 Grade F316/316L, Class 3000, ASME B16.11, socket weld. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 403 Grade WP316/316L S, WP 316L WX or WP 316L WU, SCH. 80S, BW, ASME B16.9. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 182 Grade F316/316L, Class 3000, ASME B16.11, SW or BW. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 182 Grade F316/316L, Class 3000, ASME B16.11, SW or BW. GL-880 GA-880 GA-881 NPS 1/2-to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged stainless steel, ASTM A 182 Grade F316, socket weld. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged stainless steel, ASTM A 182 Grade F316, socket weld. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged stainless steel, ASTM A 182 Grade F316, socket weld x threaded. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged stainless steel, ASTM A 182 Grade F316, socket weld. Stud Bolts. ASTM A 193 Grade B8 threaded full length, with two ASTM A 194 Grade 8 heavy semi-finished hexagonal nuts. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 312 Grade TP316/316L, SCH. 80S, PBE or BBE.

Small Fittings (Socket weld) Small Fittings (Butt weld) (Note 5) Concentric Swages Eccentric Swages Globe Valves (Note 2) Gate Valves (Notes 2)

Check Valves Bolting Seamless Pipe

CH-880

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission..

2013-01-07

UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class M1A1

Page 2 of 2 970086 S8M1A1-1

BRANCH CONNECTION TABLE Branch connections shall be in accordance with the following table: RUN SIZE 3/4 1 1-1/2 3/4 T RT RT 1 T RT 1-1/2

BRANCH CODES: T = STRAIGHT TEE RT = REDUCING TEE BS = SOCKOLET (THREDOLET) CLASS 3000 MINIMUM Full couplings are permitted; Half Couplings are NOT Permitted BW = WELDOLET Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 Note 4 Note 5 See UOP Project valve Specification for description of UOP Valve Codes used in this Pipe Class and recommended valve manufacturer and model number. For instrument root valves, drain, vent, and purge connections forged valves shall have one end socket weld, other end threaded. Short radius elbows shall not be used except for jacketed piping.. Use thread compound for threaded joints. Teflon tape is not permitted. Use butt welded fittings for jacketed piping

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission..

2013-01-28

UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class MS-1

Page 1 of 3 970086 S8MS1-3

Pipe Class: Service: Rating/Facing: Temperature Range: Corrosion Allowance: Material: Design Code: Pressure Range: UOP Valve Code (Note 1) Flanges Threaded Flanges Weld Neck Orifice Flanges Gaskets

MS-1 REFINERY AIR AND WATER CLASS 150 RF/FF -20F THRU 300F / -29C THRU 149C 0.063 inch (1.5 mm) CARBON STEEL / BRONZE / DUCTILE IRON ASME B31.3 ASME B16.5 for sizes to NPS 24, ASME B16.47 for NPS 30

NPS 1/2 to 2, ASTM A 105, Class 150, RF/FF, ASME B16.5. NPS 3 to 24, ASTM A 105, Class 150 RF, SCH. STD., ASME B16.5. NPS 30, ASTM A 105, Class 150 RF, SCH STD, ASME B16.47 Series A. NPS 1/2-1 1/2, ASTM A 105, Class 300 RF, Threaded, with jack screws ASME B16.36 NPT taps. Compressed non-asbestos, ring type, 1/16" thick, punched per ASME B16.5 Class 150, dimensions per ASME B 16.21 NPS 1/2 to 24, for ASME B16.5 flanges NPS 30, for ASME B16.47 series A flanges. NPS 1/4 to 2, ASTM A 105, Class 3000, ASME B16.11, threaded. NPS 3 to 30, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. STD., BW, ASME B16.9. NPS 1/4 to 2, ASTM A 105, Class 3000, MSS SP-83, integral bronze seat, threaded. NPS 1/4 to 2, ASTM A 105, Class 3000, ASME B16.11, Threaded. NPS 1/4 to 2, ASTM A 105, solid forged steel, hex/round head, threaded. Elbolet. NPS 1/4 to 2, ASTM A 105, Class 3000, threaded. Thredolet. NPS 1/4 to 2, ASTM A 105, Class 3000, MSS SP-97. Weldolet. NPS 3 to 10, ASTM A 105, SCH. STD., BW, MSS SP-97.

Small Fittings Large Fittings Unions Couplings Plugs Branch Outlet Fittings

Concentric Swages Eccentric Swages Nipples

NPS 1/2 to 2, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. 160, seamless, TBE, MSS SP-95. NPS 1/2 to 2, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. 160, seamless, TBE, MSS SP-95. NPS 1/2 to 2, ASTM A 106 Grade B, seamless, SCH. 160, TBE.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-01-28

UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class MS-1

Page 2 of 3 970086 S8MS1-3

Blinds Spectacle Globe Valves GL-1160 GL-1170 Gate Valves (Note 2) GA-1160 GA-1170 CH-13160 CH-1170 Ball Valves (Note 2) Butterfly Valves Bolting BA-1160 BF-1170

NPS 1 to 12, ASTM A 516 Grade 70, Normalized, Class 150, RF, ASME B16.48. NPS 1/4 to 2, bronze, ASTM B62 Alloy C83600, Class 150, threaded. NPS 3 to 6, ductile iron body, ASTM A 395, Class 150, flanged, raised face. NPS 1/4 to 2, bronze, ASTM B 62 Alloy C83600, Class 150, threaded. NPS 3 to 12, ductile iron body, ASTM A 395, Class 150, flanged, raised face. NPS 1/4 to 2, bronze, ASTM B 61 Alloy C83600, Class 200, threaded. NPS 3 to 12, ductile iron body, ASTM A 395, Class 150, flanged, flat face. NPS 1/4 to 3, bronze, forged, ASTM B 124 Alloy C37700, or cast ASTM B 584 Alloy C 84400, Class 150, threaded. NPS 2 to 12, ductile iron body, ASTM A 395 or ASTM A 536, Class 150, lug type. Machine Bolts. ASTM A 307 Grade B, square head, with one ASTM A 563 Grade A heavy semi-finished hexagonal nut. Nuts and bolts shall be coated with FluoroKote #1 . NPS 1/2 to 2, ASTM A 106 Grade B, seamless, SCH. 160, TBE. NPS 3 to 14, ASTM A 106 Grade B seamless, SCH. STD., BBE.

Check Valves

Pipe

Electric Fusion Welded Pipe

NPS 16 to 30, ASTM A 672 Grade B65 Class 22, SCH. STD., BBE.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-01-28

UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class MS-1

Page 3 of 3 970086 S8MS1-3

BRANCH CONNECTION TABLE Branch connections shall be in accordance with the following table: RUN SIZE 3/4 1 1-1/2 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 30 3/4 T RT RT BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS 1 1-1/2 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 30

T RT RT BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS

T RT BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS

T RT BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS

T RT BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW

T RT BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW

T RT RT BW BW BW BW BW BW BW

T RT RT RT BW BW BW BW BW

T RT RT RT RT BW BW BW

T RT RT RT RT BW BW

T RT RT RT RT BW

T RT RT RT RT

T RT RT RT T RT RT T RT T

: BRANCH CODES: T = STRAIGHT TEE RT = REDUCING TEE BS = THREDOLET CLASS 3000 MINIMUM, Full couplings are permitted; Half Couplings are NOT Permitted BW = WELDOLET Note 1 Note 2 See UOP Project valve Specification for description of UOP Valve Codes used in this Pipe Class and recommended valve manufacturer and model number. Ball valves may be substituted for gate valves.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2012-10-29

UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class MS-2

Page 1 of 2 970086 S8MS2-0

Pipe Class: Service: Rating/Facing: Temperature Range: Corrosion Allowance: Material: Design Code: Pressure Range: UOP Valve Code (Note 1) Flanges Threaded Gaskets Small Fittings (Note 2) Branch Fittings Unions (Note 2) Connections Couplings (Note 2) Plugs Blinds Spectacle

MS-2 INSTRUMENT AIR, DRINKING WATER CLASS 150 RF -20F THRU 150F / -29C THRU 66C NONE GALVANIZED STEEL / BRONZE / TP316 / MALLEABLE IRON ASME B31.3 100 PSIG / 7.03 kg/cm2g.

NPS 1/2 to 4, ASTM A105, Class 150, RF, ASME B16.5, galvanized inside and outside. Spiral wound with flexible graphite (95% min.) filler, TP316 SS winding and carbon steel solid centering ring, per ASME B16.20. NPS 1/2 to 4, malleable iron, ASTM A 197, Class 150, threaded, ASME B 16.3, galvanized inside and outside. See branch connection table. NPS 1/4 to 3, malleable iron, ASTM A 197 with brass seats, threaded, ASME B16.39, galvanized inside and outside. NPS 1/4 to 4, threaded couplings for steel pipe, galvanized inside and outside. NPS 1/4 to 4, ASTM A 105, Class 3000, ASME B16.11, threaded, galvanized inside and outside, NPS 1/4 to 3, solid forged steel, ASTM A 105, hex head/round, threaded, galvanized. NPS 3/4 to 3, ASTM A 516 Grade 70 normalized , for use with Class 150 RF Flanges, ASME B16.48, galvanized steel 304 or 316 stainless steel can be substituted in lieu of galvanized steel blinds.

Globe Valves Gate Valves

GL-1160 GA-1160

NPS 1/4 to 3, bronze, ASTM B 62 Alloy C 83600, Class 150, threaded. NPS 1/4 to 3, bronze, ASTM B 62 Alloy C 83600, Class 150, threaded.

Check Valves

CH-13160

NPS 1/4 to 3, bronze, ASTM B 61 Alloy C 83600, Class 200, threaded.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2012-10-29 BA-1160

UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class MS-2

Page 2 of 2 970086 S8MS2-0

Ball Valves Bolting

NPS 1/4 to 3, bronze, forged ASTM B 124 Alloy C 37700 or cast ASTM B 584 Alloy C 84400, Class 150, threaded. Stud Bolts. ASTM A 193 Grade B7, threaded full length, with two ASTM A 194 Grade 2H heavy semi-finished hexagonal nuts. Nuts and bolts shall be coated with FluoroKote #1 .

Pipe

NPS 1/2 to 2, ASTM A 106 Grade B, seamless, SCH. 80, TBE, galvanized inside and outside. NPS 3 to 4, ASTM A 106 Grade B seamless, SCH. STD., TBE, galvanized inside and outside.

BRANCH CONNECTION TABLE Branch connections shall be in accordance with the following table: RUN SIZE 1/2 3/4 1 11/2 2 3 4 BREANCH SIZE 1/2 3/4 1 T T RT RT RT RT RT T RT RT RT RT RT 1-1/2 2 3 4

T RT RT RT RT

T RT RT RT T RT RT T RT

BRANCH CODES: T = STRAIGHT TEE RT = REDUCING TEE (or REDUCING FITTING) See UOP Project valve Specification for description of UOP Valve Codes used in this Pipe Class and recommended valve manufacturer and model number. For fittings, unions and couplings, ASTM A 338 material is an acceptable substitute for ASTM A 197 material.

Note 1 Note 2

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2012-10-29

UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class MS-7 MS-7 STAINLESS STEEL TUBING N/A -20F THRU 800F / -29C THRU 427C NONE TP 316 ASME B31.3 Thru 800 psi

Page 1 of 1 970086 S8MS7-0

Pipe Class: Service: Rating/Facing: Temperature Range: Corrosion Allowance: Material: Design Code: Pressure Range: UOP Valve Code (Note 1) Small Fittings (Notes 3, 4) Globe Valves Gate Valves Check Valves Tubing (Note 2) GL-882 GA-882 CH-882

Class 3000, forged, ASTM A 182 Grade F316, threaded, compression type. Parker CPI or Crawford Swagelok. NPS 1/2 to 1, Class 800, forged, ASTM A 182 Grade F316, threaded. NPS 1/2 to 1, Class 800, forged, ASTM A 182 Grade F316, threaded. NPS 1/2 to 1, Class 800, forged, ASTM A 182 Grade F316, threaded. NPS 1/4 to 1/2, seamless, ASTM A 269 Grade TP316, 0.035 inch (0.889 mm) wall. NPS 5/8 to 1, seamless, ASTM A 269 Grade TP316, 0.049 inch (1.25 mm) wall.

Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 Note 4

See UOP Project valve Specification for description of UOP Valve Codes used in this Pipe Class and recommended valve manufacturer and model number. Hydrotest limited by tubing. Seal welding of threaded components not required. Branch connections are to be made with an equal tee and union reducer.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-02-06

UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class MS11 MS11 STEAM AND CONDENSATE CLASS 150 RF -20F THRU 700F / -29C THRU 371C 0.063 inch (1.5 mm) KILLED CARBON STEEL ASME B31.3 ASME B16.5 for sizes to NPS 24

Page 1 of 4 970086 S8MS11-3

Pipe Class: Service: Rating/Facing: Temperature Range: Corrosion Allowance: Material: Design Code: Pressure Range: UOP Valve Code (Note 1) Flanges Socket Weld Flanges Weld neck Gaskets

NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 105, Class 150 RF, SCH. 80, ASME B16.5. NPS 2 to 24, ASTM A 105, Class 150 RF, SCH. STD. ASME B16.5. Spiral wound with flexible graphite (95% min.) filler, TP316 SS winding and carbon steel solid centering ring. NPS 1/2 to 24, per ASME B16.20. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 105, Class 3000, ASME B16.11, socket weld. NPS 2 to 24, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. STD. BW ASME B16.9. Elbolet NPS 1 & 1-1/2, ASTM A 105, Class 3000, socket weld. Sockolet NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 105, Class 3000, MSS SP-97. Weldolet NPS 2 to 24, ASTM A 105, SCH. STD.,BW, MSS SP-97.

Small Fittings Large Fittings (Note 5) Branch Outlet Fittings

Concentric Swages (Note 8, 10)

NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. 160, seamless, PLE/TSE, MSS SP-95. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. 80, seamless, PBE, MSS SP-95. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. 160, seamless, PLE/TSE, MSS SP-95. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. 80, seamless, PBE, MSS SP-95.

Eccentric Swages (Note 8, 10)

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-02-06

UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class MS11

Page 2 of 4 970086 S8MS11-3

Nipples (Note 6, 9, 10)

NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 106 Grade B, SCH. 160, seamless, TBE. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 106 Grade B, SCH. 160, seamless, POE/TOE. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 106 Grade B, SCH. 80, seamless, PBE. NPS 1 to 12, ASTM A 516 Grade 70 Normalized, Class 150 RF, ASME B16.48. NPS 12 to 24, ASTM A 516 Grade 70 Normalized, Class 150 RF, ASME B16.48. NPS 12 to 24, ASTM A 516 Grade 70 Normalized, Class 150 RF, ASME B16.48. GL-800 GL-801 GL-100 NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged ASTM A 105, socket weld. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged ASTM A 105, socket weld x threaded. NPS 2 to 6, Class 150, cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB, flanged. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged ASTM A 105, socket weld. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged ASTM A 105, socket weld, full port. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged ASTM A 105, socket weld x threaded. NPS 2 to 24, Class 150, cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB, flanged. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged ASTM A 105, socket weld. NPS 2 to 24 Class 150 cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB, flanged. NPS 2 to 24, Class 150, cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB, lug type, retainerless, flangeless Stud Bolts ASTM A 193 Grade B7, threaded full length, with two ASTM A 194 Grade 2H heavy semi-finished hexagonal nuts. All bolts, nuts & screws are to be coated with FluoroKote #1 .

Blinds Spectacle Blinds Spacer Ring Blinds Plate Globe Valves (Note 3)

Gate Valves (Notes 2, 3)

GA-800 GA-802 GA-801 GA-100

Check Valves

CH-800 CH-100

Wafer Check Valves Bolting

CH-102

Seamless Pipe Electric Fusion Welded Pipe

NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 106 Grade B, SCH. 80, PBE. NPS 2 to 14, ASTM A 106 Grade B, SCH. STD., BBE. NPS 16 to 24, ASTM A 672 Grade B60 Class 21 SCH.STD. BBE.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-02-06

UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class MS11

Page 3 of 4 970086 S8MS11-3

BRANCH CONNECTION TABLE The minimum pipe size shall be NPS 3/4, except for instrument lead lines which may be NPS 1/2. Branch connections shall be in accordance with the following table: BRANCH SIZE RUN 3/4 1 1-1/2 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 SIZE 3/4 T 1 RT T 1-1/2 RT RT T 2 BS RT RT T 3 BS BS BS RT T 4 BS BS BS BW RT T 6 BS BS BS BW BW RT T 8 BS BS BS BW BW BW RT T 10 BS BS BS BW BW BW RT RT T 12 BS BS BS BW BW BW BW RT RT T 14 BS BS BS BW BW BW BW RT RT RT T 16 BS BS BS BW BW BW BW BW RT RT RT 18 BS BS BS BW BW BW BW BW BW RT RT 20 BS BS BS BW BW BW BW BW BW RT RT 24 BS BS BS BW BW BW BW BW BW BW RT BRANCH CODES: T = STRAIGHT TEE RT = REDUCING TEE (Note 4) BS = SOCKOLET (or THREDOLET) Full couplings are permitted; Half Couplings are NOT Permitted BW = WELDOLET 16 18 20 24

T RT RT RT

T RT RT

T RT

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-02-06

UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class MS11

Page 4 of 4 970086 S8MS11-3

Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 Note 4 Note 5 Note 6 Note 7 Note 8 Note 9 Note 10

See UOP Project valve Specification for description of UOP Valve Codes used in this Pipe Class and recommended valve manufacturer and model number. For drain, vent, and purge connections, forged valves shall have one end socket weld, other end threaded. For instrument root valves, forged valves shall have one end socket weld, other end threaded. For Reducing Tees, socket weld reducer inserts fabricated in accordance with MSS SP-79 are permitted. Short radius elbows shall not be used. Use thread compound for threaded joints. Teflon tape is not permitted. Deleted Use not permitted when large end exceeds 1-1/2 inch NPS. Plain one end / threaded other end (POE / TOE) nipples for use on orifice flanges shall have threaded connection seal welded. Threaded end shall be SCH. 80.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-01-09

UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class MS12 MS12 STEAM AND CONDENSATE CLASS 300 RF -20F THRU 800F / -29C THRU 427C 0.063 inch (1.5 mm) KILLED CARBON STEEL ASME B31.3 ASME B16.5 for sizes to NPS 12

Page 1 of 3 970086 S8MS12-2

Pipe Class: Service: Rating/Facing: Temperature Range: Corrosion Allowance: Material: Design Code: Pressure Range: UOP Valve Code (Note 1) Flanges Socket Weld Flanges Weld Neck Gaskets

NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 105, Class 300 RF, SCH. 80, ASME B16.5. NPS 2 to 12, ASTM A 105, Class 300 RF, SCH. STD., ASME B16.5. Spiral wound with flexible graphite (95% min.) filler, TP316 SS winding and carbon steel solid centering ring, NPS 1/2 to 12, per ASME B16.20. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 105, Class 3000, ASME B16.11, socket weld. NPS 2 to 12, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. STD., BW, ASME B16.9. Elbolet. NPS 1 & 1-1/2, ASTM A 105, Class 3000, socket weld. Sockolet. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 105, Class 3000, MSS SP-97. Weldolet. NPS 2 to 6, ASTM A 105, SCH. STD., BW, MSS SP-97. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. 80160, seamless, PLE/TSE, MSS SP-95. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. 80, seamless, PBE, MSS SP-95.

Small Fittings Large Fittings (Note 5) Branch Outlet Fittings (Note 7) Concentric Swages

Eccentric Swages

NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. 80160, seamless, PLE/TSE, MSS SP-95. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. 80, seamless, PBE, MSS SP-95.

Nipples (Note 6, 9)

NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 106 Grade B, SCH. 80160, seamless, TBE. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 106 Grade B, SCH. 80160, seamless, POE/TOE. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 106 Grade B, SCH. 80, seamless, PBE. NPS 1 to 12, ASTM A 516 Grade 70 Normalized, Class 150 RF, ASME B16.48.

Blinds Spectacle

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-01-09 GL-800 GL-801 GL-300 Gate Valves (Notes 2, 3, 4) GA-800 GA-802 GA-801 GA-300 Check Valves CH-800 CH-300 Wafer Check Valves Bolting CH-302

UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class MS12

Page 2 of 3 970086 S8MS12-2

Globe Valves (Note 3)

NPS 1-1/2 and smaller, Class 800, forged, ASTM A 105, socket weld. NPS 1-1/2 and smaller, Class 800, forged, ASTM A 105, socket weld x threaded. NPS 2 to 6 Class 300, cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB, flanged. NPS 1-1/2 and smaller, Class 800, forged, ASTM A 105, socket weld. NPS 1-1/2 and smaller, Class 800, forged, ASTM A 105, socket weld, full port. NPS 1-1/2 and smaller, Class 800, forged, ASTM A 105, socket weld x threaded. NPS 2 to 12, Class 300, cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB, flanged. NPS 1-1/2 and smaller, Class 800, forged, ASTM A 105, socket weld. NPS 2 to 12, Class 300, cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB, flanged. NPS 2 to 12, Class 300, cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB, retainerless, lug type, flangeless. Stud Bolts. ASTM A 193 Grade B7, threaded full length, with two ASTM A 194 Grade 2H heavy semi-finished hexagonal nuts. All bolts, nuts & screws are to be coated with FluoroKote #1 . NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 106 Grade B, SCH. 80, PBE. NPS 2 to 12, ASTM A 106 Grade B, SCH. STD., BBE.

Seamless Pipe

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-01-09

UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class MS12

Page 3 of 3 970086 S8MS12-2

BRANCH CONNECTION TABLE The minimum pipe size shall be NPS 3/4, except for instrument lead lines which may be NPS 1/2. Branch connections shall be in accordance with the following table: BRANCH SIZE RUN 3/4 1 1-1/2 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 SIZE 3/4 T 1 RT T 1-1/2 RT RT T 2 BS RT RT T 3 BS BS BS RT T 4 BS BS BS BW RT T 6 BS BS BS BW BW RT T 8 BS BS BS BW BW BW RT T 10 BS BS BS BW BW BW RT RT T 12 BS BS BS BW BW BW BW RT RT T BRANCH CODES: T = STRAIGHT TEE RT = REDUCING TEE (Note 4) BS = SOCKOLET (or THREDOLET) Full couplings are permitted; Half Couplings are NOT Permitted BW = WELDOLET (Note 7) PIPET, manufactured by WFI, is acceptable alternate to WELDOLET for branch outlet fittings. See UOP Project valve Specification for description of UOP Valve Codes used in this Pipe Class and recommended valve manufacturer and model number. For drain, vent, and purge connections, forged valves shall have one end socket weld, other end threaded. For instrument root valves, forged valves shall have one end socket weld, other end threaded. For Reducing Tees, socket weld reducer inserts fabricated in accordance with MSS SP-79 are permitted. Short radius elbows shall not be used. Use thread compound for threaded joints. Teflon tape is not permitted. Deleted Deleted Plain one end / threaded other end (POE / TOE) nipples for use on orifice flanges shall have threaded connection seal welded.

Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 Note 4 Note 5 Note 6 Note 7 Note 8 Note 9

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-01-10

UOP M&ET Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-1

Page 1 of 2 970086 S8PR1-2

Pipe Class: Service: Rating/Facing: Temperature Range: Corrosion Allowance: Material: Design Code: Pressure Range: UOP Valve Code (Note 1) Flanges Weld Neck (Note 5) Gaskets

PR-1 CATALYST WITHDRAWL LINE WITH HYDROGEN CLASS 300 RF -20F THRU 1025F / -29C THRU 551C Note 3 1.25 CR - 0.5 MO (Notes 2) ASME B31.3 ASME B16.5

NPS 1 to 2, ASTM A 182 Grade F11, Class 300, RF, SCH. 160, ASME B16.5. NPS 3 to 8, ASTM A 182 Grade F11, Class 300, RF, SCH. 80, ASME B16.5. Spiral wound with flexible graphite (95% min.) filler, TP304 SS winding and carbon steel solid centering ring. NPS 1/2 to 10, dimensions per ASME B16.20. NPS 1 to 2, ASTM A 234 Grade WP11, SCH. 160, ASME B16.9. BW NPS 3 to 8, ASTM A 234 Grade WP11, SCH. 80, BW, ASME B16.9.

Fittings

Branch Outlet Fittings

Elbolet NPS 1 & 1-1/2, ASTM A 182 Grade F11, SCH 160, BW, MSS SP-97. Latrolet NPS 1 & 1-1/2, ASTM A 182 Grade F11 SCH 160, BW, MSS SP-97, for use with reinforcement pad. Weldolet NPS 2, ASTM A 182 Grade F11, SCH. 160, BW, MSS SP-97. Weldolet NPS 2 to 8, ASTM A 182 Grade F11, SCH. 80, BW, MSS SP-97.

Ball Valves (Note 6)

BA-387

NPS 1 to 8, Class 300, 316 SS, flanged, RF, Stellite or 316 SS with Stellite overlay or 316 SS with metallurgically bonded abrasion resistant coating ball and seat, 316 stainless steel stem.

Note, these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.

2013-01-10

UOP M&ET Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-1

Page 2 of 2 970086 S8PR1-2

Bolting

Stud Bolts { 900F (482C) and under} - ASTM A 193 Grade B7, threaded, full length, with two ASTM A 194 Grade 2H heavy semi-finished hexagonal nuts Stud bolts {Over 900F (482C)} - ASTM A 193 Grade B16, threaded, full length, with two ASTM A 194 Grade 4 heavy semifinished hexagonal nuts.

Pipe (Note 3, 4)

NPS 1 to 2, ASTM A 335 Grade P11, seamless, SCH. 160, BE. NPS 3 to 8, ASTM A 335 Grade P11, seamless, SCH. 80, BE.

Note 1 Note 2

See UOP Project Specification UOPM S8V000 for description of UOP Valve Codes used in this Pipe Class. Postweld heat treatment (PWHT) shall follow the requirements of ASME B31.3 and UOP Project specification 801 requirements as listed below, applicable to 1Cr - 1/2 Mo and 1-1/4 Cr - 1/2 Mo Materials Pressure retaining components (regardless of size, thickness or product form) shall be postweld heat treated (PWHT) in accordance with the requirements of ASME B31.3. No exemptions from postweld heat treatment are permitted. The maximum room temperature tensile strength of all pressure retaining components and welds shall be 100,000 psi (7030 kg/cm2). Fillet welds to pressure retaining components shall be ground to a smooth, concave contour. Pressure retaining welds, whether shop or field, shall be 100% radiographed. Branch welds that cannot be radiographed shall be 100% ultrasonically examined. Piping schedules indicated herein include corrosion and erosion allowances due to the process catalyst flow. Design and Fabrication of piping shall allow for all welds to be ground smooth to match I.D. of pipe. This is to minimize catalyst attrition. Welding neck flanges must be tapered bored where indicated on UOP Mechanical Flow Diagrams. Maximum temperature 450 Degrees F ( 232 Degrees C).

Note 3 Note 4 Note 5 Note 6

Note, these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.

2013-01-04

UOP M&ET Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-2

Page 1 of 2 970086 S8PR2-1

Pipe Class: Service: Rating/Facing: Temperature Range: Corrosion Allowance: Material: Design Code: Pressure Range: UOP Valve Code (Note 1) Flanges Weld Neck (Note 4)

PR-2 CATALYST WITHDRAWAL LINE CLASS 300 RF -20F THRU 550F / -29C THRU 288C NOTE 2 KILLED CARBON STEEL ASME B31.3 ASME B16.5

NPS 1/2 to 2, ASTM A 105, Class 300, RF, SCH. 160, ASME B16.5. NPS 2 1/2 to 10, ASTM A 105, Class 300, RF, SCH. 80, ASME B16.5. Spiral wound with flexible graphite (95% min.) filler, TP304 SS winding and carbon steel solid centering ring. NPS 1/2 to 10, dimensions per ASME B16.20. NPS 1/2 to 2, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. 160, BW, ASME B16.9. NPS 3 to 10, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. 80, BW, ASME B16.9.

Gaskets

Large Fittings

Branch Outlet Fittings

Weldolet NPS 1/2 to 2, ASTM A 105, SCH. 160, BW, MSS SP-97. Weldolet NPS 3 to 10, ASTM A 105, SCH. 80, BW, MSS SP-97. Latrolet NPS 1/2 to 2, ASTM A 105, SCH. 160, BW, MSS SP-97.

B-Ball Valves (Note 5) Bolting Pipe (Note 2, 3)

BA-386X

NPS 1 to 10, Class 300, cast Steel, ASTM A 351 Grade CF8M, flanged, RF, 316 Stainless steel ball and stem, Filled Teflon seated Stud Bolts ASTM A 193 Grade B7, threaded, full length, with two ASTM A 194 Grade 2H heavy semi-finished hexagonal nuts. NPS 1/2 to 2, ASTM A 106 Grade B, seamless, SCH. 160, BE. NPS 3 to 10, ASTM A 106 Grade B, seamless, SCH. 80, BE.

Note, these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.

2013-01-04

UOP M&ET Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-2

Page 2 of 2 970086 S8PR2-1

Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 Note 4 Note 5

See UOP Project Specification 970086 S8V000 for description of UOP Valve Codes used in this Pipe Class. Piping schedules indicated herein include corrosion and erosion allowances due to the process catalyst flow. Design and Fabrication of piping shall allow for all welds to be ground smooth to match I.D. of pipe. This is to minimize catalyst attrition. Welding neck flanges must be tapered bored where indicated on UOP Mechanical Flow Diagrams. Valve shall be installed where indicated as B on UOP Mechanical Flow Diagrams.

Note, these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.

2012-11-02

UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-3 PR-3 CATALYST CLASS 150 RF -20F THRU 850F / -29C THRU 454C NOTE 2 KILLED CARBON STEEL ASME B31.3 ASME B16.5

Page 1 of 2 970086 S8PR3-0

Pipe Class: Service: Rating/Facing: Temperature Range: Corrosion Allowance: Material: Design Code: Pressure Range: UOP Valve Code (Note 1) Flanges Weld Neck (Note 4, 5)

NPS 1/2 to 2, ASTM A 105, Class 150, RF, SCH. 160, ASME B16.5. NPS 1/2 to 2, ASTM A 105, Class 300, RF, SCH. 160, ASME B16.5. NPS 2-1/2 to 10, ASTM A 105, Class 300, RF, SCH. 80, ASME B16.5. NPS 2-1/2 to 10, ASTM A 105, Class 300, RF, SCH. 80, ASME B16.5.

Gaskets

Spiral wound with flexible graphite (95% min.) filler, TP316 SS winding and carbon steel solid centering ring. NPS 1/2 to 10, per ASME B16.20. NPS 1/2 to 2, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. 160, BW, ASME B16.9. NPS 2 1/2 to 10, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. 80, BW, ASME B16.9.

Fittings

Branch Outlet Fittings

Weldolet NPS 1/2 to 2, ASTM A 105, SCH. 160, BW, MSS SP-97. Weldolet NPS 2 1/2 to 10, ASTM A 105, SCH. 80, BW, MSS SP-97. Latrolet NPS 1/2 to 2, ASTM A 105, SCH. 160, BW, MSS SP-97. Latrolet NPS 2 1/2 to 10, ASTM A 105, SCH.80, BW, MSS SP-97.

Bolting

Stud Bolts - ASTM A 193 Grade B7, threaded, full length, with two ASTM A 194 Grade 2H heavy semi-finished hexagonal nuts. All bolts, nuts & screws are to be coated with FluoroKote #1 .

Pipe (Note 2, 3)

NPS 1/2 to 2, ASTM A 106 Grade B, seamless, SCH.160, BE. NPS 2 1/2 to 10, ASTM A 106 Grade B, seamless, SCH.80, BE.

Note, these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.

2012-11-02

UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-3

Page 2 of 2 970086 S8PR3-0

Note 1 Note 2

See UOP Project valve Specification for description of UOP Valve Codes used in this Pipe Class and recommended valve manufacturer and model number. Piping schedules indicated herein include corrosion and erosion allowances due to the process catalyst flow. For the purpose of code pipe stress calculations, a minimum corrosion (erosion) allowance of 0.094 shall be used, unless noted otherwise in the project specifications. Design and Fabrication of piping shall allow for all welds to be ground smooth to match I.D. of pipe. This is to minimize catalyst attrition. Welding neck flanges must be tapered bored where indicated on UOP Mechanical Flow Diagrams. Use Class 300 flanges to match with Class 300 flanges.

Note 3 Note 4 Note 5

Note, these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.

2013-01-24

UOP M&ET Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-4

Page 1 of 2 970086 S8PR4-1

Pipe Class: Service: Rating/Facing: Temperature Range: Corrosion Allowance: Material: Design Code: Pressure Range: Flanges Weld Neck (Note 3) Gaskets

PR-4 CATALYST LIFT LINE CLASS 150 RF -20F THRU 550F / -29C THRU 288C NOTE 2 KILLED CARBON STEEL ASME B31.3 ASME B16.5 NPS 1/2 to 8, ASTM A 105, Class 150, RF, SCH. 80, ASME B16.5. Spiral wound with flexible graphite (95% min.) filler, TP304 SS winding and carbon steel solid centering ring, NPS 1/2 to 8, dimensions per ASME B16.20. DUR O LOK coupling. ASTM A 403 Grade WP304-S, SCH. 80., Garfoil flat gasket for High Temp Service. NPS 1 1/2 and smaller, ASTM A 105, Class 3000, forged, socket weld, ASME B16.9 NPS 2 to 8, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. 80, BW, ASME B16.9.

Couplings (Notes 1 &.3) Fittings

Branch Outlet Fittings Swages

Latrolet NPS 1/2 to 8, ASTM A 105, SCH. 80. Weldolet NPS 1/2 to 8, ASTM A 105, SCH. 80. Concentric NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. 80, seamless, PBE, MSS SP-95. Eccentric NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. 80, seamless, PBE, MSS SP-95.

Blinds Spectacle Bolting Pipe (Notes 1 & 2)

NPS 1 to 8, ASTM A 285 Grade C, Class 150, RF, API 590. Stud Bolts ASTM A 193 Grade B7, threaded, full length, with two ASTM A 194 Grade 2H, heavy semi-finished hexagonal nuts. NPS 1/2 to 812, ASTM A 53 Grade B or ASTM A 106 Grade B, seamless, SCH. 80,

Note, these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.

2013-01-24

UOP M&ET Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-4

Page 2 of 2 970086 S8PR4-1

Note 1

To minimize catalyst attrition, this piping is to be fabricated in accordance with the following requirements: 1.1. 1.2. 1.3. Refer to UOP Mechanical Flow Diagrams for piping section requirements and special 110 elbow detail. Use minimum lineal feet (meters) of pipe. Use maximum lengths of pipe. 20 feet (6.1 meters) minimum, to minimize the number of joints. Join pipe sections together as shown on UOP Standard Drawing 8-127 (latest revision) using a TP 304 stainless steel UOP Dur O Lok coupling. No substitution allowed. Use long radius pipe bends for all changes in direction with radius as specified on UOP Mechanical Flow Diagrams.

1.4.

Note 2

Pipe schedule indicated herein includes corrosion and erosion allowances due to the process catalyst flow. For the purpose of code pipe stress calculations, a minimum corrosion (erosion) allowance of 0.094 shall be used, unless noted otherwise in the project specifications. Flanged connections are to be welding neck with the inside weld ground smooth.

Note 3

Note, these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.

2013-01-10

UOP M&ET Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-5

Page 1 of 3 970086 S8PR5-1

Pipe Class: Service: Rating/Facing: Temperature Range: Corrosion Allowance: Material: Design Code: Pressure Range: Flanges Flanges Weld Neck

PR-5 PROCESS CHLORINATED HOT AIR CLASS 150 RF (NOTE 1) -20F THRU 1000F / -29C THRU 540C 0.063 inch (1.5 mm) Inconel 600 (UNS N06600) ASME B31.3 ASME B16.5 NPS 1/2 to 1 1/2, ASTM B 564 Alloy UNS N06600, Class 150, RF, socket weld NPS 2 to 8 inch, ASTM B 564 Alloy UNS N06600, Class 150, RF, ID to match the inside of pipe. 10 inch and larger ASME Class 150 forged lap joint, ASTM A 182 F11 with Inconel 600ASTM B564 UNS N06600 stub ends.

Orifice Flanges

NPS 1-1/2, ASTM B 564 Alloy UNS N06600, Class 150 RF, Socket Weld, with jack screws ASME B16.36 NPT taps. NPS 2 to 24 ASTM B 564 Alloy UNS N06600, Class 150 RF,. ID to match the inside of pipe, with jack screws ASME B16.36 NPT taps.

Gaskets Fittings

Spiral wound with in accordance with ASME B16.20 with Inconel 600 windings and Garfoil filler. NPS 1 1/2 and smaller, ASTM B 564 Alloy UNS N06600, Class 3000, forged, socket weld NPS 2 and larger, ASTM B 366 Class WPNCI, SCH. Same as Pipe. Fittings for tubing Class 3000 forged threaded compression type ASTM B 564 Alloy UNS N06600

Branch Outlet Fittings Swages

ASTM B 564 Alloy UNS N06600, SCH. 80. Concentric NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 234 Grade WPBB366 Class WPNCI, SCH. 80, seamless, PBE, MSS SP-95. Eccentric NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 234 Grade WPBB366 Class WPNCI, SCH. 80, seamless, PBE, MSS SP-95.

Note, these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.

2013-01-10 GL-6180

UOP M&ET Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-5

Page 2 of 3 970086 S8PR5-1

Globe Valves (NOTES 3 & 4)

NPS to 1 , ASME Class 600 cast socket weld, OS&Y, bolted bonnet, ASTM A494 Gr. CY-40 Class 2 Alloy UNS N06600 body/bonnet, Alloy 600 trim, hard faced seats, ASME B16.34 NPS , ASME Class 600 cast, OS&Y, bolted bonnet, ASTM A494 Gr. CY-40 Class 2 Alloy UNS N06600 body/bonnet, Alloy 600 trim, hard faced seats, ASME B16.34, SW X Threaded NPS 2 to 6, CL 150 RF, OS&Y bolted bonnet, ASTM A494 Gr. CY-40 Class 2 Alloy UNS N06600 body/bonnet, Alloy 600 trim, hard faced seats, ASME B16.34 NPS to 1 , ASME Class 600 cast socket weld, OS&Y, bolted bonnet, ASTM A494 Gr. CY-40 Class 2 Alloy UNS N06600 body/bonnet, Alloy 600 trim, hard faced seats, API 602 NPS 2 to 24, CL 150 RF, OS&Y bolted bonnet, ASTM A494 Gr. CY-40 Class 2 Alloy UNS N06600 body/bonnet, Alloy 600 trim, flexible wedge, hard faced seats, API 600. NPS 1, CL 150 RF, OS&Y bolted bonnet, ASTM A494 Gr. CY-40 Class 2 Alloy UNS N06600 body/bonnet, Alloy 600 trim, flexible wedge, hard faced seats, API 600. to 1 , CL 600 SW, bolted Cap, Swing Check, ASTM A494 Gr CY-40 Class 2 Alloy UNS N06600 body/bonnet cap, Alloy 600 trim, HF seat, ASME B16.34 2 to 12, CL 150 RF, bolted Cap, Swing Check, ASTM A494 Gr CY-40 Class 2 Alloy UNS N06600 body/bonnet cap, Alloy 600 trim, HF seat, ASME B16.34 NPS 1 to 8, ASTM A 285 Grade CA168 UNS N06600, Class 150, RF, API 590ASME B16.48. Stud Bolts ASTM A 193 Grade B16, threaded, full length, with two ASTM A 194 Grade 4, nuts. NPS to 1 in, Seamless, ASTM B 167, Alloy UNS N06600 SCH. 80S PE. NPS 2 to 6 in, Seamless, ASTM B 167, Alloy UNS N06600 SCH. STD BE. NPS 24 18 in and larger, Hot rolled, fusion welded per ASTM B168, Alloy UNS N06600, longitudinal welds 100% radiograph per ASME B31.3, SCH 5S0.375 in.

GL-6181

GL-1180

Gate Valves (NOTES 3 & 4)

GA-6180

GA-1180

GA-1181

Check Valves (Notes 3 & 4)

CH-6180

CH-1180

Blinds Spectacle Bolting Pipe (Notes 1 & 2)

Nipples Tubing

NPS to 1 in, Seamless, ASTM B 167, Alloy UNS N06600 SCH. 80S PBE. OD, ASTM B 444 Gr 1, Alloy UNS N06600, 0.035 inch (0.89mm) wall.

Note, these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.

2013-01-10

UOP M&ET Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-5

Page 3 of 3 970086 S8PR5-1

Note 1 Note 2

All Inconel 600 (Alloy UNS N06600) material shall be supplied in annealed condition. Where the flange design temperature exceeds the limit of ASME B16.5, the contractor shall verify the flange ratings in accordance with Appendix 2, section VIII, Division 1 of the ASME Code. Each casting shall meet the hydrostatic test requirements of ASTM Specification A 703. No elastomeric components shall be allowed in the valves.

Note 3 Note 4

Note, these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.

2013-01-25

UOP M&ET Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-6

Page 1 of 2 970086 S8PR6-1

Pipe Class: Service: Rating/Facing: Temperature Range: Corrosion Allowance: Material: Design Code: Pressure Range: Flanges Weld Neck (Note 3) Gaskets

PR-6 CATALYST LIFT LINE WITH HYDROGEN CLASS 300 RF -20F THRU 550F / -29C THRU 288C NOTE 2 KILLED CARBON STEEL ASME B31.3 ASME B16.5 NPS 1/2 to 8, ASTM A 105, Class 300, RF, SCH.80, ASME B16.5. Spiral wound with flexible graphite (95% min.) filler, TP304 SS winding and carbon steel solid centering ring, NPS 1/2 to 8, dimensions per ASME B16.20. DUR O LOK coupling. ASTM A 403 Grade WP 304-S, SCH. 80., Garfoil flat gasket for High Temp Service NPS 1 and smaller, ASTM A 105, Class 3000 forged socket weld NPS 2 to 8, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. 80, BW, ASME B16.9.

Couplings (Note 1.3) Fittings

Branch Outlet Fittings Swages

Latrolet NPS 1/2 to 8, ASTM A 105, SCH. 80. Concentric NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. 80, seamless, PBE, MSS SP-95. Eccentric NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH.80, seamless, PBE, MSS SP-95.

Blinds Spectacle Bolting Seamless Pipe

NPS 1 to 8, ASTM A 515 Grade 70, Class 300, RF, API 590. Stud Bolts ASTM A 193 Grade B7, threaded, full length, with two ASTM A 194 Grade 2H, heavy semi-finished hexagonal nuts. NPS 1/2 to 128, ASTM A 106 Grade B, SCH. 80.

Note, these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.

2013-01-25

UOP M&ET Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-6

Page 2 of 2 970086 S8PR6-1

Note 1

To minimize catalyst attrition, this piping is to be fabricated in accordance with the following requirements: 1.1. 1.2. 1.3. Refer to UOP Mechanical Flow Diagrams for piping section requirements and special 110 elbow detail. Use minimum lineal feet (meters) of pipe. Use maximum lengths of pipe. 20 feet (6.1 meters) minimum, to minimize the number of joints. Join pipe sections together as shown on UOP Standard Drawing 8-127 (latest revision) using a TP 304 stainless steel UOP Dur O Lok coupling. No substitution allowed. Flanges are not allowed except as noted as FLANGE on the UOP Mechanical Flow Diagrams. Flanged connection is to be welding neck with inside ground smooth after welding. The flanged connection is to be inspected by the UOP chief operator before assembly. Use long radius pipe bends for all changes in direction with radius as specified on UOP Mechanical Flow Diagrams.

1.4.

1.5.

Note 2

Pipe schedule indicated herein includes corrosion and erosion allowances due to the process catalyst flow. For the purpose of code pipe stress calculations, a minimum corrosion (erosion) allowance of 0.094 shall be used, unless noted otherwise in the project specifications. Flanged connections are to be welding neck with the inside weld ground smooth.

Note 3

Note, these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.

2013-02-06

UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-8

Page 1 of 4 970086 S8PR8-2

Pipe Class: Service: Rating/Facing: Temperature Range: Corrosion Allowance: Material: Design Code: Pressure Range: UOP Valve Code (Note 1) Flanges Socket Weld Flanges Weld Neck (Note11) Orifice Flanges Weld Neck

PR-8 GENERAL PROCESS CLASS 150 RF -20F THRU 700F / -29C THRU 371C 0.063 inch (1.5 mm) KILLED CARBON STEEL ASME B31.3 ASME B16.5 for sizes to NPS 24, ASME B16.47 series A for NPS 30

NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 105, Class 150 RF, SCH. 80, ASME B16.5. NPS 2 to 24, ASTM A 105, Class 150 RF, SCH. STD., ASME B16.5. NPS 30, ASTM A 105, Class 150 RF, SCH STD, ASME B16.47 Series A NPS 2 to 24, ASTM A 105, Class 300 RF, SCH. STD., ASME B16.5. NPS 1-1/2, ASTM A 105, Class 300 RF, SCH. 80, with jack screws ASME B16.36 NPT taps. NPS 2 to 24 ASTM A 105, Class 300 RF, SCH. STD., with jack screws ASME B16.36 NPT taps.

Gaskets (Note11)

Spiral wound with flexible graphite (95% min.) filler, TP316 SS winding and carbon steel solid centering ring, per ASME B16.20. NPS 1/2 to 24 for ASME B16.5 flanges, per ASME B16.20. NPS 30 for ASME B16.47 Series A flanges NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 105, Class 3000, ASME B16.11, socket weld. NPS 2 to 30, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, BW, wall thickness to match pipe, ASME B16.9. Elbolet. NPS 1 & 1-1/2, ASTM A 105, Class 3000, socket weld. Sockolet. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 105, Class 3000, MSS SP-97. Weldolet. NPS 2 to 24, ASTM A 105, SCH. STD., BW, MSS SP-97. NPS 1/21/4 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. 16080, seamless, PLE/TSE, MSS SP-95. NPS 1/4 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. 80, seamless, PBE, MSS SP-95. NPS 1/21/4 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. 16080, seamless, PLE/TSE, MSS SP-95. NPS 1/4 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 234 Grade WPB, SCH. 80, seamless, PBE, MSS SP-95.

Small Fittings Large Fittings (Notes 5) Branch Outlet Fittings

Concentric Swages (Note 8, 12)

Eccentric Swages (Note 8, 12)

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-02-06

UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-8

Page 2 of 4 970086 S8PR8-2

Nipples (Note 6, 9, 12)

NPS 1/21/4 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 106 Grade B, SCH. 80160, seamless, TBE. NPS 1/21/4 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 106 Grade B, SCH. 80160, seamless, POE/TOE. NPS 1/4 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 106 Grade B, SCH. 80, seamless, PBE. NPS 1 to 12, ASTM A 516 Grade 70 Normalized, Class 150 RF, ASME B16.48. NPS 12 to 30, ASTM A 516 Grade 70 Normalized, Class 150 RF, ASME B16.48. NPS 12 to 30, ASTM A 516 Grade 70 Normalized, Class 150 RF, ASME B16.48. GL-800 GL-801 GL-100 NPS 1/4 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged, ASTM A 105, socket weld. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged, ASTM A 105, socket weld x threaded. NPS 2 to 6 Class 150, cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB, flanged. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged, ASTM A 105, socket weld. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged, ASTM A 105, socket weld, full port. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged, ASTM A 105, socket weld x threaded. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 300, forged, ASTM A 105, flanged. NPS 2 to 24, Class 150, cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB, flanged. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged, ASTM A 105, socket weld. NPS 2 to 24, Class 150, cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB, flanged. NPS 2 to 24, Class 150, cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB, retainerless, lug type, flangeless. NPS 1/4 to 1-1/2, 207 bar, ASTM A 582 Grade 303 stainless steel body Female pipe thread, Viton-O-ring seal. NPS 1/4, Bar stock globe-type metering valve, 316 SS body, 0.063 in (1.5 mm) orifice, female pipe thread. NPS 1/4, integral-bonnet needle valve, 316 SS body, 0.175 in (4.4 mm) orifice, regulating stem, male pipe thread. NPS 1/4, straight through rising plug valve, 316 SS body, 0.187 in (4.8 mm) orifice, female pipe thread.

Blinds Spectacle Blinds Spacer Ring Blinds Plate Globe Valves (Note 3)

Gate Valves (Notes 2, 3, 4)

GA-800 GA-802 GA-801 GA-803 GA-100 CH-800 CH-100 CH-102 CH-3080 NE-3080

Check Valves

Wafer Check Valves Spring Check valve Needle Valves (Temp Limit 250F (120C))

Bolting

Stud Bolts. ASTM A 193 Grade B7, threaded full length, with two ASTM A 194 Grade 2H heavy semi-finished hexagonal nuts. Jack Screw. ASTM A 307 Grade B, threaded full length, hex head. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 106 Grade B, SCH. 80, PBE. NPS 2 to 14, ASTM A 106 Grade B, SCH. STD., BBE. NPS 16 to 30, ASTM A 672 Grade B65 Class 22, SCH. STD., BBE.

Seamless Pipe Electric Fusion Welded Pipe

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-02-06

UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-8

Page 3 of 4 970086 S8PR8-2

BRANCH CONNECTION TABLE The minimum pipe size shall be NPS 3/4, except for instrument lead lines which may be NPS 1/2. Branch connections shall be in accordance with the following table: RUN SIZE 3/4 1 1-1/2 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 30 BRANCH SIZE 3/4 1 11/2 T RT T RT RT T BS RT RT BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 30

T RT BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW

T RT BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW

T RT BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW

T RT RT BW BW BW BW BW BW BW

T RT RT RT BW BW BW BW BW

T RT RT RT RT BW BW BW

T RT RT RT RT BW BW

T RT RT RT RT BW

T RT RT RT RT

T RT RT RT

T RT RT

T RT

BRANCH CODES: T = STRAIGHT TEE RT = REDUCING TEE (Note 10) BS = SOCKOLET (or THREDOLET) Full couplings are permitted; Half Couplings are NOT Permitted BW = WELDOLET

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-02-06

UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-8

Page 4 of 4 970086 S8PR8-2

Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 Note 4 Note 5 Note 6 Note 7 Note 8 Note 9 Note 10 Note 11 Note 12

See UOP Project valve Specification for description of UOP Valve Codes used in this Pipe Class and recommended valve manufacturer and model number. For drain, vent, and purge connections, forged valves shall have one end socket weld, other end threaded. For instrument root valves, forged valves shall have one end socket weld, other end threaded. For level connections, forged valves shall have ASME Class 150 raised face flanged ends. Short radius elbows shall not be used. Use thread compound for threaded joints. Teflon tape is not permitted. Deleted Use of swaged nipples is not permitted when large end exceeds 2 inch NPS. Plain one end / threaded other end (POE / TOE) nipples for use on orifice flanges shall have threaded connection seal welded. For Reducing Tees, socket weld reducer inserts fabricated in accordance with MSS SP-79 are permitted. Use flat face flanges and full face gaskets to match flat face flanges only. NPT end connections are allowed & shall be SCH 80.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2012-12-19

UOP M&ET Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-10

Page 1 of 2 970086 S8PR10-1

Pipe Class: Service: Rating/Facing: Temperature Range: Corrosion Allowance: Material: Design Code: Pressure Range: UOP Valve Code (Note 1) Flanges Weld Neck (Note 7) Gaskets

PR-10 CATALYST LIFT LINE WITH HYDROGEN CLASS 300 RF -20F THRU 1025F / -29C THRU 551C Note 2 1.25 CR - 0.5 MO (Note 3) ASME B31.3 ASME B16.5

NPS 1/2 to 12, ASTM A 182 Grade F11, Class 300, RF, SCH. 80, ASME B16.5.

Spiral wound with flexible graphite (95% min.) filler, TP304 SS winding and carbon steel solid centering ring, NPS 1/2 to 8, dimensions per ASME B16.20. NPS1 1/2 to 12, ASTM A 234 Grade WP11, SCH. 80, BW, ASME B16.9. SCH. 80 Weldolet NPS 1 1/2 to 10, ASTM A 182 Grade F11, SCH. 80, BW, MSS SP-97. GA-820 GA-821 GA-320 NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged, ASTM A 182 Grade F11, socket weld. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged, ASTM A 182 Grade F11, socket weld x threaded. NPS 2 to 12, Class 300, cast steel, ASTM A 217 Grade WC6, flanged, RF. Stud Bolts {900F (482C) and under} - ASTM A 193 Grade B7, threaded, full length, with two ASTM A 194 Grade 2H heavy semi-finished hexagonal nuts. Stud bolts {Over 900F (482C)} - ASTM A 193 Grade B16, threaded, full length, with two ASTM A 194 Grade 4 heavy semifinished hexagonal nuts.

Fittings (Note 4) Branch Outlet Fittings

Gate Valves (Note 5, 6)

Bolting

Pipe

NPS 1/2 to 8, ASTM A 335 Grade P11, seamless, SCH. 80, PEBE.

Note, these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.

2012-12-19

UOP M&ET Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-10

Page 2 of 2 970086 S8PR10-1

Note 1 Note 2

See UOP Specification 970086 S8VCI for description of UOP Valve Codes used in this Pipe Class and recommended valve manufacturer and model number. Pipe schedule indicated herein includes corrosion and erosion allowances due to the process catalyst flow. For the purpose of code pipe stress calculations, a minimum corrosion (erosion) allowance of 0.094 shall be used, unless noted otherwise in the project specifications. Postweld heat treatment (PWHT) shall follow the requirements of ASME B31.3 and UOP Project specification 801 requirements as listed below, applicable to 1Cr - 1/2 Mo and 1-1/4 Cr - 1/2 Mo Materials: Pressure retaining components (regardless of size, thickness or product form) shall be postweld heat treated (PWHT) in accordance with the requirements of ASME B31.3. No exemptions from postweld heat treatment are permitted. The maximum room temperature tensile strength of all pressure retaining components and welds shall be 100,000 psi (7030 kg/cm2). Fillet welds to pressure retaining components shall be ground to a smooth, concave contour. Pressure retaining welds, whether shop or field, shall be 100% radiographed. Branch welds that cannot be radiographed shall be 100% ultrasonically examined. Short radius elbows shall not be used. For drain, vent, and purge connections, forged valves shall have one socket weld end and other threaded end For instrument root valves, forged valves shall one socket weld end and other threaded end Welding neck flanges are to be bored to suit schedule of pipe. In addition the flanges must be tapered bored to a depth of 1 1/2 inch (38 mm) as required to match the ID of all connecting piping and valves.

Note 3

Note 4 Note 5 Note 6

Note 7

Note, these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.

2013-01-24

UOP M&ET Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-15

Page 1 of 3 970086 S8PR15-2

Pipe Class: Service: Rating/Facing: Temperature Range: Corrosion Allowance: Material: Design Code: Pressure Range: UOP Valve Code (Note 1) Flanges Weld Neck (Note 5) Gaskets

PR-15 CATALYST WITHDRAWL LINE WITH HYDROGEN CLASS 600 RF -20F THRU 1025F / -29C THRU 551C Note 3 1.25 CR - 0.5 MO (Notes 2) ASME B31.3 ASME B16.5

NPS 2, ASTM A 182 Grade F11, Class 600, RF, SCH. 160, ASME B16.5. NPS 2 to 8, ASTM A 182 Grade F11, Class 600, RF, SCH. 80, ASME B16.5. Spiral wound with flexible graphite (95% min.) filler, TP304 SS winding and carbon steel solid centering ring. NPS 1/2 to 10, dimensions per ASME B16.20. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 234 Grade WP11WPB, SCH. 160, BW, ASME B16.9., socket weld. NPS 2, ASTM A 234 Grade WP11, SCH. 160, BW, ASME B16.9. NPS 2 to 8, ASTM A 234 Grade WP11, SCH. 80, BW, ASME B16.9.

Fittings

Branch Outlet Fittings

Elbolet NPS 1 & 1-1/2, ASTM A 182 Grade F11, SCH. 160 BW, MSS SP-97. Weldolet NPS 2, ASTM A 182 Grade F11, SCH. 160, BW, MSS SP-97. Weldolet NPS 2 to 8, ASTM A 182 Grade F11, SCH. 80, BW, MSS SP-97.

Ball Valves (Note 6)

BA-680

NPS 1 to 8, Class 600, 316 SS, flanged, RF, Stellite or 316 SS with Stellite overlay or 316 SS with metallurgically bonded abrasion resistant coating ball and seat, 316 stainless steel seat.

Note, these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.

2013-01-24

UOP M&ET Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-15

Page 2 of 3 970086 S8PR15-2

Bolting

Stud Bolts { 900F (482C) and under} - ASTM A 193 Grade B7, threaded, full length, with two ASTM A 194 Grade 2H heavy semi-finished hexagonal nuts Stud bolts {Over 900F (482C)} - ASTM A 193 Grade B16, threaded, full length, with two ASTM A 194 Grade 4 heavy semifinished hexagonal nuts.

Pipe (Note 3, 4)

NPS 1/2 to 2, ASTM A 335 Grade P11, seamless, SCH. 160, BE. NPS 2 to 8, ASTM A 335 Grade P11, seamless, SCH. 80, BE.

Note, these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.

2013-01-24

UOP M&ET Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-15

Page 3 of 3 970086 S8PR15-2

Note 1 Note 2

See UOP Project Specification 970086 S8V000 for description of UOP Valve Codes used in this Pipe Class. Postweld heat treatment (PWHT) shall follow the requirements of ASME B31.3 and UOP Project specification 801 requirements as listed below, applicable to 1Cr - 1/2 Mo and 1-1/4 Cr - 1/2 Mo Materials Pressure retaining components (regardless of size, thickness or product form) shall be postweld heat treated (PWHT) in accordance with the requirements of ASME B31.3. No exemptions from postweld heat treatment are permitted. The maximum room temperature tensile strength of all pressure retaining components and welds shall be 100,000 psi (7030 kg/cm2). Fillet welds to pressure retaining components shall be ground to a smooth, concave contour. Pressure retaining welds, whether shop or field, shall be 100% radiographed. Branch welds that cannot be radiographed shall be 100% ultrasonically examined. Piping schedules indicated herein include corrosion and erosion allowances due to the process catalyst flow. For the purpose of code pipe stress calculations, a minimum corrosion (erosion) allowance of 0.094 shall be used, unless noted otherwise in the project specifications. Design and Fabrication of piping shall allow for all welds to be ground smooth to match I.D. of pipe. This is to minimize catalyst attrition. Welding neck flanges must be tapered bored where indicated on UOP Mechanical Flow Diagrams. Maximum temperature 450 Degrees F ( 232 Degrees C).

Note 3

Note 4 Note 5 Note 6

Note, these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.

2012-12-14

UOPM & ET Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-17

Page 1 of 2 970086 S8PR17-1

Pipe Class: Service: Rating/Facing: Temperature Range: Corrosion Allowance: Material: Design Code: Pressure Range: UOP Valve Code (Note 1) Flanges Weld Neck (Note 5) Gaskets

PR-17 CATALYST LIFT LINE WITH HYDROGEN CLASS 600 RF -20F THRU 1025F / -29C THRU 551C Note 3 1.25 CR - 0.5 MO (Note 2 and 6) ASME B31.3 ASME B16.5

NPS 1/2 to 2, ASTM A 182 Grade F11, Class 600, RF, SCH. 160, ASME B16.5. NPS 2 1/2 to 8, ASTM A 182 Grade F11, Class 600, RF, SCH. 80, ASME B16.5. Spiral wound TP316 winding, Thermiculite TM 835 filler, TP316 inner and outer ring. NPS 1/2 to 8, per ASME B16.20. NPS 1/2 to 2, ASTM A 234 Grade WP11, SCH. 160, BW, ASME B16.9. NPS 2 1/2 to 8, ASTM A 234 Grade WP11, SCH. 80, BW, ASME B16.9.

Fittings

Branch Outlet Fittings

Elbolet NPS 1 & 1-1/2, ASTM A 182 Grade F11, SCH. 160ASTM A 335 Grade P11, Class 6000, BW. Weldolet NPS 1/2 to 2, ASTM A 182 Grade F11, SCH. 160, BW, MSS SP-97. Weldolet NPS 2 1/2 to 8, ASTM A 182 Grade F11, SCH. 80, BW, MSS SP-97.

Blinds Spectacle Bolting

NPS 1 to 10, ASTM A 387 Grade 11, Class 600, RF, ASME B16.48. Stud bolts -ASTM A 193 Grade B16, threaded, full length, with two ASTM A 194 Grade 4 heavy semi-finished hexagonal nuts. All bolts, nuts & screws are to be coated with FluoroKote #1 .

Pipe (Note 3, 4)

NPS 1/2 to 2, ASTM A 335 Grade P11, seamless, SCH. 160, BE. NPS 2 1/2 to 8, ASTM A 335 Grade P11, seamless, SCH. 80, BE.

Note, these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.

2012-12-14

UOPM & ET Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-17

Page 2 of 2 970086 S8PR17-1

Note 1 Note 2

See UOP Project valve Specification for description of UOP Valve Codes used in this Pipe Class and recommended valve manufacturer and model number. Postweld heat treatment (PWHT) shall follow the requirements of ASME B31.3 and UOP Project specification 801 requirements as listed below, applicable to 1Cr - 1/2 Mo and 1-1/4 Cr - 1/2 Mo Materials Pressure retaining components (regardless of size, thickness or product form) shall be postweld heat treated (PWHT) in accordance with the requirements of ASME B31.3. No exemptions from postweld heat treatment are permitted. The maximum room temperature tensile strength of all pressure retaining components and welds shall be 100,000 psi (7030 kg/cm2). Fillet welds to pressure retaining components shall be ground to a smooth, concave contour. Pressure retaining welds, whether shop or field, shall be 100% radiographed. Branch welds that cannot be radiographed shall be 100% ultrasonically examined. Piping schedules indicated herein include corrosion and erosion allowances due to the process catalyst flow. For the purpose of code pipe stress calculations, a minimum corrosion (erosion) allowance of 0.094 shall be used, unless noted otherwise in the project specifications. Design and Fabrication of piping shall allow for all welds to be ground smooth to match I.D. of pipe. This is to minimize catalyst attrition. Welding neck flanges must be tapered bored where indicated on UOP Mechanical Flow Diagrams.

Note 3

Note 4 Note 5 Note 6

Requirements Applicable to 1 Cr-1/2 Mo and 1 1/4 Cr-1/2 Mo Materials for Services with Operating Temperatures Over 825F (440C): a. Charpy V-notch impact testing is required for all pressure retaining longitudinally fusion welded pipe, components and welds. Impact tests shall be conducted in accordance with the requirements of ASME B31.3, except that there shall be no exemptions from impact testing and the test temperature shall be the lower of the design minimum metal temperature and 0F (-18C). The test pecimens shall be supplied in the same heat treated condition as the new pipe. b. The product analysis content of tin and phosphorous for pressure retaining components and welding consumables shall be less than 0.015% and 0.012% respectively. The percentage limits are weight percent.

Note, these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.

uop
25 East Algonquin Road PO Box 5017 Des Plaines, Illinois 60017-5017 USA

STANDARD SPECIFICATION

8-1303-0
PAGE 1
Approved Authorized R - Revision Date REVISED

PIPE CLASSES PR-22

OF 1

NOTE - These data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.

Service Process with Hydrogen Temperature Range -20F thru 1025F / -29C thru 551C
Flanges

Material and Rating 1 1/4%Cr-1/2%Mo Class 300 RF Pressure Range Per ANSI B16.5

Corrosion Allowance 0.125 Inch

ANSI Class 300 forged raised face welding neck. ASTM A 182 Grade F11. 2 inch and smaller socket welding. 2 1/2 inch to 10 inch welding neck bored to suit pipe. Spiral wound per API 601 except with flexible graphite filler. Class 3000 forged socket weld. ASTM A 182 Grade F11. Welding same schedule as pipe. ASTM A 234 Grade WP11 or WP11-W. Branch connection welding fittings. ASTM A 182 Grade F11. 2 inch and smaller Class 800 forged soket weld. ASTM A 182 Grade F11. DSI 4211-C8, Smith G80 KOOOW, Velan W-2074B-05TY, or Vogt SW-12351. 2 1/2 inch to 6 inch Class 300 cast flanged. ASTM A 217 Grade WC6. Poyam 4GBP-2R12-U, or Stockham Triangle A.3822V-U. 2 inch and smaller Class 800 forged socket weld. ASTM A 182 Grade F11. DSI 4111-C8, Smith 800 KOOOW, Velan W-2054B-05TY, or Vogt SW-12321. 2 1/2 inch to 10 inch Class 300 cast flanged. ASTM A 217 Grade WC6. Poyam 45BW-2R12-U, or Stockham Triangle A.3822V-U. 900F (482C) and under - stud bolts ASTM A 193 Grade B7 threaded full length with 2 ASTM A 194 Grade 2H nuts. Over 900F (482C) - stud bolts ASTM A 193 Grade B16 threaded full length with 2 ASTM 194 Grade 4 nuts. ASTM A 335 Grade P11 seamless. Contractor to calculate wall thickness. However, 2 inches and smaller shall be no less than Schedule 80. 1. See UOP Project Specification 801 Piping for notes applicable to 1 1/4Cr - 1/2Mo materials.

Gaskets Fittings

Globe Valves

Gate Valves

Bolting

Pipe

Note

2012-10-29

UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-24 PR-24 PROCESS HOT AIR CLASS 300 RF -20F THRU 1300F / -29C THRU 704C 0.063 inch (1.6 mm) TP 304H / TP 316 STAINLESS STEEL ASME B31.3 ASME B16.5

Page 1 of 3 970086 S8PR24-0

Pipe Class: Service: Rating/Facing: Temperature Range: Corrosion Allowance: Material: Design Code: Pressure Range: UOP Valve Code (Note 1) Flanges Socket Weld Flanges Weld Neck

NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 182 Grade F304H, Class 300, RF, SCH. 80S, ASME B16.5. NPS 2, ASTM A 182 Grade F304H, Class 300, RF, SCH. 80S, ASME B16.5. NPS 3 to 12, ASTM A 182 Grade F304H, Class 300, RF, SCH. 40S, ASME B16.5.

Orifice Flanges Weld Neck

NPS 1-1/2 & 2, ASTM A 182 Grade F304H, Class 300, RF, SCH. 80S, with jack screws ASME B16.36 NPT taps. NPS 3 to 12, ASTM A 182 Grade F304H, Class 300, RF, SCH. 40S, with jack screws ASME B16.36 NPT taps.

Gaskets

Spiral wound with TP304 SS winding, Thermiculite TM 835 filler, 304 stainless steel inner ring. NPS 1/2 to 12, per ASME B16.20. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 182 Grade F304H, Class 3000, ASME B16.11, socket weld. NPS 2, ASTM A 403 Grade WP304H S, WP 304H WX or WP 304H WU, SCH. 80S, BW, ASME B16.9. NPS 3 to 12, ASTM A 403 Grade WP304H S, WP 304H WX or WP 304H WU, SCH. 40S, BW, ASME B16.9.

Small Fittings Large Fittings

Branch Outlet Fittings

Elbolet NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 182 Grade F304H, Class 3000, socket weld. Sockolet NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 182 Grade F304H, Class 3000, MSS SP-97. Weldolet NPS 2, ASTM A 182 Grade F304H, SCH. 80S, BW, MSS SP-97. Weldolet NPS 3 to 10, ASTM A 182 Grade F304H, SCH. 40S, BW, MSS SP-97.

Swages

Concentric NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 403 Grade WP304H, SCH. 80S, seamless, PBE, MSS SP-95. Eccentric NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 403 Grade WP304H, SCH. 80S, seamless, PBE, MSS SP-95.

Note, these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.

2012-10-29

UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-24

Page 2 of 3 970086 S8PR24-0

Nipples Blinds Spectacle Blinds Spacer Ring Blinds Plate Globe Valves (Note 2) GL-883 GL-381 Gate Valves (Note 2) GA-883 GA-884 GA-381 Check Valves (Note 2) CH-883 CH-381 Wafer Check Valve (See Note 2) Bolting CH-383

NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 312 Grade TP304H, SCH. 80S, seamless, PBE. NPS 1 to 12, ASTM A 240 Grade TP304H, Class 300, RF, ASME B16.48. NPS 12, ASTM A 240 Grade TP304H, Class 300, RF, ASME B16.48. NPS 12, ASTM A 240 Grade TP304H, Class 300, RF, ASME B16.48. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged stainless steel, ASTM A 182 Grade F316H, socket weld. NPS 2 to 6, Class 300, cast stainless steel, ASTM A 351 Grade CF8M, flanged, RF. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged stainless steel, ASTM A 182 Grade F316H, socket weld. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged stainless steel, ASTM A 182 Grade F316H, socket weld x threaded. NPS 2 to 12, Class 300, cast stainless steel, ASTM A 351 Grade CF8M, flanged, RF. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged stainless steel,, ASTM A 182 Grade F316H, socket weld. NPS 2 to 12, Class 300, cast stainless steel, ASTM A 351 Grade CF8M, flanged, RF. NPS 2 to 12, Class 300, cast stainless steel, ASTM A351 Grade CF8M retainerless, lug type, flangeless, 316 SS trim, hard faced seat. Stud Bolts ASTM A 193 Grade B8M Class 2, threaded, full length, with two ASTM A 194 Grade 8M heavy semi-finished hexagonal nuts. Jack Screw 304/316 stainless steel, threaded, full length, hex head.

Seamless Pipe

NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 312 Grade TP304H, SCH. 80S, PE. NPS 2, ASTM A 312 Grade TP304H, SCH. 80S, BE. NPS 3 to 12, ASTM A 312 Grade TP304H, SCH. 40S, BE.

Note, these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.

2012-10-29

UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-24

Page 3 of 3 970086 S8PR24-0

BRANCH CONNECTION TABLE Connections on headers and pieces of equipment shall be a minimum of 3/4 inch. Branch connections shall be in accordance with the following table: RUN SIZE 3/4 1 1-1/2 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 BRANCH SIZE 3/4 1 1-1/2 2 T RT RT BS BS BS BS BS BS BS T RT BS BS BS BS BS BS BS 3 4 6 8 10 12

T BS BS BS BS BS BS BS

T RT BW BW BW BW BW

T RT BW BW BW BW

T RT BW BW BW

T RT RT BW

T RT RT

T RT

BRANCH CODES: T = STRAIGHT TEE RT = REDUCING TEE BS = SOCKOLET ( THREDOLET ) CLASS 3000 MINIMUM Full couplings are permitted; Half Couplings are NOT Permitted BW = WELDOLET Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 Note 4 See UOP Project valve Specification for description of UOP Valve Codes used in this Pipe Class and recommended valve manufacturer and model number. All 316 stainless steel material shall have a 0.04% minimum carbon content. Short radius elbows shall not be used. Use thread compound for threaded joints. Teflon tape is not permitted.

Note, these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.

2013-01-24

UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-36

Page 1 of 4 970086 S8PR36-2

Pipe Class: Service: Rating/Facing: Temperature Range: Corrosion Allowance: Material: Design Code: Pressure Range: UOP Valve Code (Note 1) Flanges Weld Neck (Note 2, 7)

PR-36 CATALYST TRANSFER & PROCESS REGENERATION GAS CLASS 300 RF -20F THRU 1100F / -29C THRU 593C 0.125 inch ( 3.2 mm) TP 316H STAINLESS STEEL ASME B31.3 ASME B16.5 for sizes to NPS 24, ASME B16.47 Series A for NPS 30

NPS 1/2 to 2, ASTM A 182 Grade F316H Class 300 RF SCH.160 ASME B16.5. NPS 2 1/2 to 12, ASTM A 182 Grade F316H Class 300 RF SCH.40S ASME B16.5. NPS 14 to 18, ASTM A 182 Grade F316H Class 300 RF SCH. 0.25.Wt. ASME B16.5. NPS 20 to 24, ASTM A 182 Grade F316H Class 300 RF SCH. 0.375.Wt. ASME B16.5. NPS 30, ASTM A 182 Grade F316H Class 300 RF SCH. 0.375.Wt. ASME B16.47 type A .

Orifice Flanges Weld Neck (Note 2)

NPS 2, ASTM A 182 Grade F316H Class 300H RF SCH.160 with jack screws ASME B16.36 NPT taps. NPS 2 1/2 to 12, ASTM A 182 Grade F316H Class 300H RF SCH.40S with jack screws ASME B16.36 NPT taps. Spiral wound TP316 winding, Thermiculite steel inner and outer ring. NPS 1/2 to 24, per ASME B16.20. NPS 30, per ASME B16.47 Series A
TM

Gaskets

835 filler, 316 stainless

Small Fittings (Note 2, 3, 7)

NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 182 Grade F316H, SCH 160, ASME B16.11, BW.

Note, these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.

2013-01-24

UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-36

Page 2 of 4 970086 S8PR36-2

Large Fittings (Note 2, 3, 7)

NPS 2, ASTM A 403 Grade WP 316H S, WP 316H WX or WP 316H WU, SCH. 160, BW, ASME B16.9. NPS 2 1/2 to 12, ASTM A 403 Grade WP 316H S, WP 316H WX or WP 316H WU, SCH. 40S, BW, ASME B16.9. NPS 14 to 18, ASTM A 403 Grade WP 316H S, WP 316H WX or WP 316H WU, SCH. 0.25, BW, ASME B16.9. NPS 20 to 30, ASTM A 403 Grade WP 316H S, WP 316H WX or WP 316H WU, SCH. 0.375, BW, ASME B16.9.

Stub-Ins Reinforced (Note 2) Branch Outlet Fittings (Notes 2, 5, 7)

NPS 14 to 18, ASTM A 358 Grade TP316H Class 1, SCH.0.25 Wt. BBE. NPS 20 to 24, ASTM A 358 Grade TP316H Class 1, SCH.0.375 Wt. BBE. Latroletper MSS SP-97 NPS 1, ASTM A 182 Grade F316H SCH.160, BW Weldoletper MSS SP-97 NPS 2, ASTM A 182 Grade F316H SCH.160, BW Weldoletper MSS SP-97 NPS 2 1/2 to 12, ASTM A 182 Grade F316H SCH.40S, BW NPS 14 to 18, ASTM A 182 Grade F316H SCH.0.25, BW NPS 20 to 24, ASTM A 182 Grade F316H SCH.0.375, BW

Swages (Note 2, 6, 7)

Concentric. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 403 Grade WP316H, SCH.160, seamless BBE, MSS SP-95. Eccentric. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 403 Grade WP316H, SCH.160, seamless BBE, MSS SP-95.

Nipples (Note 2, 7)

NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 312 Grade TP316H SCH. 160 seamless PBE. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, ASTM A 312 Grade TP316H, SCH. 160, seamless POE/TOE.

Blinds Spectacle (Note 2) Blinds Spacer Ring (Note 2) Blinds Plate (Note 2)

NPS 1 to 24, ASTM A 240 Grade TP316H, Class 300 RF, ASME B16.48. NPS 12 to 24, ASTM A 240 Grade TP316H, Class 300 RF, ASME B16.48. NPS 12 to 24, ASTM A 240 Grade TP316H, Class 300 RF, ASME B16.48.

Note, these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.

2013-01-24 GL-883 GL-884 GL-381 Gate Valves (Note 7) GA-883 GA-884 GA-381 Check Valves (Note 7) CH-883 CH-381

UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-36

Page 3 of 4 970086 S8PR36-2

Globe Valves (Note 7)

NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged stainless steel, ASTM A 182 Grade F316H, socket weld. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged stainless steel, ASTM A 182 Grade F316H, socket weld x threaded. NPS 2 to 6, Class 300, cast stainless steel ASTM A 351 Grade CF8M, flanged, RF. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged stainless steel, ASTM A 182 Grade F316H, socket weld. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged stainless steel, ASTM A 182 Grade F316H, socket weld x threaded. NPS 2 to 12, Class 300, cast stainless steel ASTM A 351 Grade CF8M, flanged, RF. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, forged stainless steel, ASTM A 182 Grade F316H, socket weld. NPS 2 to 12, Class 300, cast stainless steel, ASTM A 351 Grade CF8M, flanged, RF. Stud Bolts. ASTM A 193 Grade B8M Class 2 threaded full length, with two ASTM A 194 Grade 8M heavy semi-finished hexagonal nuts. Jack Screw. 304/316 stainless steel, threaded, full length, hex head.

Bolting

Seamless Pipe (Note 2 & 6) Electric Fusion Welded Pipe (Note 2)

NPS 1/2 to 2, ASTM A 312 Grade TP316H SCH. 160 BBE. NPS 2 1/2 to 12, ASTM A 312 Grade TP316H SCH. 40S BBE. NPS 10 to 12, ASTM A 358 Grade TP316H Class 1, SCH. 40S BBE. NPS 14 to 18, ASTM A 358 Grade TP316H Class 1, SCH. 0.25 Wt. BBE. NPS 20 to 40, ASTM A 358 Grade TP316H Class 1, SCH. 0.375 Wt. BBE.

Note, these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.

2013-01-24

UOP Specification Piping Material Line Class PR-36

Page 4 of 4 970086 S8PR36-2

BRANCH CONNECTION TABLE Connections on headers and pieces of equipment shall be a minimum of 3/4 inch, except for steam tracer leads which may be 1/2 inch. Branch connections shall be in accordance with the following table: RUN SIZE 3/4 1 1-1/2 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 30 BRANCH SIZE 3/4 1 1-1/2 T RT RT BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS T RT RT BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 30

T RT BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS BS

T RT BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW

T RT BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW

T RT BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW BW

T RT RT BW BW BW BW BW BW BW

T RT RT RT BW BW BW BW BW

T RT RT RT RT BW BW BW

T RT RT RT RT BW BW

T RT RT RT RT BW

T RT RT RT RT

T RT RT RT

T RT RT

T RT

BRANCH CODES: T = STRAIGHT TEE RT = REDUCING TEE (Note 7) BS = SOCKOLET (or THREDOLET ) CLASS 3000 minimum Full couplings are permitted; Half Couplings are NOT Permitted BW = WELDOLET Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 See UOP Project valve Specification for description of UOP Valve Codes used in this Pipe Class and recommended valve manufacturer and model number All 316 stainless steel material shall have a 0.04% minimum carbon content. Short radius elbows are acceptable only where space considerations dictate and only if the design pressure of the piping system is within the ASME B16.28 allowable pressure ratings. Use thread compound for threaded joints. Teflon tape is not permitted. Weldolets may be replaced by a stub-in with reinforcement pad where weldolet is not available. To minimize the number of joints, use double random length of pipe as applicable. Socket Weld connections are not permitted on Catalyst piping.

Note 4 Note 5 Note 6 Note 7

Note, these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.

2012-10-05

UOP Specification Carbon Steel Gate Valve

Page 1 of 2 970086 S8V003-0

1.

Gate valves
CODE NUMBER GA-100 DESCRIPTION OF VALVE NPS 2 to 24, Class 150, flanged, raised face, smooth 3.2/6.3 Ra facing, API 600, cast steel, ASTM A 216 Grade WCB, API 600 Trim 8 (13% Cr., hard faced seats), solid plain or flexible wedge, bolted gland, outside screw & yoke (OS&Y), bolted bonnet, corrosioninhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with anti-extrusion rings. Hand wheel operator up to 14 NPS Gear operator above 14 NPS NPS 2 to 24, Class 300, flanged, raised face, smooth 3.2/6.3 Ra facing, API 600, cast steel, ASTM A 216 Grade WCB, API 600 Trim 8 (13% Cr., hard faced seats), solid plain or flexible wedge, bolted gland, outside screw & yoke (OS&Y), bolted bonnet, corrosioninhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with anti-extrusion rings. Hand wheel operator up to 10 NPS. Gear operator above 10 NPS NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, socket weld ends, API 602, forged, ASTM A 105, API 600 Trim 8 (13% Cr., hard faced seats), solid plain wedge, bolted gland, outside screw & yoke (OS&Y), bolted bonnet, corrosion-inhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with antiextrusion rings, hand wheel operator. NPS 1/2 to 2, Class 800, socket weld x female threaded, NPT, API 602, forged, ASTM A 105, API 600 Trim 8 (13% Cr., hard faced seats), solid plain wedge, bolted gland, outside screw & yoke (OS&Y), bolted bonnet, corrosioninhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with anti-extrusion rings, hand wheel operator. NPS 1/2 to 2, Class 800, socket weld ends, full bore, API 602, forged, ASTM A 105, API 600 Trim 8 (13% Cr., hard faced seats), solid plain wedge, bolted gland, outside screw & yoke (OS&Y), bolted bonnet, corrosion-inhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with antiextrusion rings, hand wheel operator. RECOMMENDED VALVE MODELS Crane 47-XU Newco 11F-CB2 Powell 1503-C2 Poyam 22SBW-1R8 Velan F-0064C-02TY Walworth 5202-F

GA-300

Crane 33-XU Newco 13F-CB2 Powell 3003-C2 Poyam 22SBW-2R8 Velan F-1064C-02TY Walworth 5206-F

GA-800

Bonney HL-11-SW Newco 18S-FS2 Smith 800-OOOOW Velan W-2054B-02TY Vogt SW-12111 DSI-4111-A8 Bonney HL-11-SW/T Newco 18S/T-FS2 Smith 800-OOOOU Velan C-2054B-02TY Vogt TSW-12111 DSI-4101-A8 Bonney H-11-SW Newco 18S-FS2FP Smith 888-OOOOW Velan W-2064B-02TY Vogt SW-13111 DSI-4161-A8

GA-801

GA-802

Note, these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.

2012-10-05 GA-803

UOP Specification Carbon Steel Gate Valve

Page 2 of 2 970086 S8V003-0

NPS 1/2 to 2, Class 800 body, Class 300, Vogt 363 flanged, raised face, smooth 3.2/6.3 Ra facing, Newco 13F-FS2-INT API 602, forged ASTM A 105, API 600 Trim 8 (13% Cr., hard faced seats), solid plain wedge, DSI 2131-A8 bolted gland, outside screw & yoke (OS&Y), bolted bonnet, corrosion-inhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with anti-extrusion rings, hand wheel operator.

Note, these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.

2012-10-05

UOP Specification Carbon Steel Globe Valve

Page 1 of 1 970086 S8V004-0

1.

Globe valves
CODE NUMBER GL-100 DESCRIPTION OF VALVE NPS 2 to 6, Class 150, straight pattern, flanged, raised face, smooth 3.2/6.3 Ra facing, ASME B16.34, cast steel, ASTM A 216 Grade WCB, API 600 Trim 8 (13% Cr., hard faced seats), plug type disc, bolted gland, outside screw & yoke (OS&Y), bolted bonnet, corrosion-inhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with anti-extrusion rings, hand wheel operator. NPS 2 to 6, Class 300, straight pattern, flanged, raised face, smooth 3.2/6.3 Ra facing, ASME B16.34, cast steel, ASTM A 216 Grade WCB, API 600 Trim 8 (13% Cr., hard faced seats), plug type disc, bolted gland, outside screw & yoke (OS&Y), bolted bonnet, corrosion-inhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with anti-extrusion rings, hand wheel operator. NPS 1/4 to 2, Class 800, straight pattern, socket weld ends, reduced bore, ASME B16.34, forged, ASTM A 105, API 600 Trim 8 (13% Cr., hard faced seats), plug type disc, bolted gland, outside screw & yoke (OS&Y), bolted bonnet, corrosion-inhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with anti-extrusion rings, hand wheel operator. NPS 1/2 to 2, Class 800, straight pattern, socket weld x female threaded NPT, reduced bore, ASME B16.34, forged, ASTM A 105, API 600 Trim 8 (13% Cr., hard faced seats), plug type disc, bolted gland, outside screw & yoke (OS&Y), bolted bonnet, corrosioninhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with anti-extrusion rings, handwheel operator. RECOMMENDED VALVE MODELS Crane 143-XU Newco 21F-CB2 Powell 1531-C2 Poyam 22GBP-1R8 Velan F-0074C-02TY Walworth 5275-F

GL-300

Crane 151-XU Newco 23F-CB2 Powell 3031-C2 Poyam 22GBP-2R8 Velan F-1074C-02TY Walworth 5281-F

GL-800

Bonney HL-31-SW Newco 28S-FS2 Smith G80-OOOOW Velan W-2074B-02TY Vogt SW-12141 DSI 4211-A8 Bonney HL-31-SW/T Newco 28S/T-FS2 Smith G80-OOOOU Velan C-2074B-02TY Vogt TSW-12141 DSI 4201-A8

GL-801

Note, these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.

2012-10-05

UOP Specification Carbon Steel Check Valve

Page 1 of 1 970086 S8V005-0

1.

Check valves
CODE NUMBER CH-100 DESCRIPTION OF VALVE NPS 2 to 20, Class 150, flanged, raised face, smooth 3.2/6.3 Ra facing, ASME B16.34 cast steel. ASTM A 216 Grade WCB, API 600 Trim 8 (13% Cr., hard faced seats), bolted cover, swing type. RECOMMENDED VALVE MODELS Crane 147-XU Newco 31F-CB2 Powell 1561-C2 Poyam 22RBA-1R8 Velan F-0114C-02TY Walworth 5341-F CH-102 NPS 2 to 24, Class 150, serrated raised face Crane Duo Check II H15SPF-169 ends, smooth 3.2/6.3 Ra facing, API 594, dual Goodwin BFR-015-C-E-U-P-R-Y-E plate design, retainerless, lug type, cast steel, ASTM A 216 Grade WCB body, 410 SS plates and pins, 410 SS overlay body seat, Inconel X750 springs. NPS 2 to 20, Class 300, flanged, raised face, smooth 3.2/6.3 Ra facing, ASME B16.34, cast steel, ASTM A 216 Grade WCB, API 600 Trim 8 (13% Cr., hard faced seats), bolted cover, swing type. Crane 159-XU Newco 33F-CB2 Powell 3061-C2 Poyam 22RBA-2R8 Velan F-1114C-02TY Walworth 5344-F CH-302 NPS 1-1/2 to 24 Class 300, serrated raised Crane Duo Check II H30SPF-169 face ends, smooth 3.2/6.3 Ra facing, API 594, Goodwin BFR-030-C-E-U-P-R-Y-E dual plate design, retainerless, lug type, cast ASTM A 216 Grade WCB body, 410 SS plates and pins, 410 SS overlay body seat, Inconel X750 springs. NPS 1/2 to 2, Class 800, socket weld ends, reduced bore, ASME B16.34, forged, ASTM A 105, Stellite seat, bolted cover, ball type, 304 SS ball. Bonney HL-51-SW Newco 58S-FS2 Smith B80-OOOOW Velan W-2024B-02TY Vogt SWB-701 DSI 4511-A8

CH-300

CH-800

Note, these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.

2012-10-05

UOP Specification Carbon Steel Ball Valve

Page 1 of 1 970086 S8V006-0

1.

Ball valves
CODE NUMBER BA-104 DESCRIPTION OF VALVE NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Standard port, socket weld ends, fire safe design meeting requirements of API 607-4 and BS 6755-part 2, ASME B31.3, API 598, MSS-25, carbon steel body 316 stainless steel ball and stem, Reinforced Teflon seat certified to API 607, PTFE/Graphite body seal, TFM/Graphite stem seal, lever operator. RECOMMENDED VALVE MODELS Jamesbury 2236-XT-1

BA-304

NPS 4, Full Port, Soft-Sealed, "Fire-Safe" design, Jamesbury 9300-31API 598 ASME B16.34, B16.5, API 607, MSS SP2236-XTZ -1-M10/Q 25, MSS SP-72 cast steel, ASTM A 216 Grade WCB, ASME Class 300, flanged, raised face, smooth 3.2/6.3 (125/250) Ra facing, 316 stainless steel ball and stem, Filled Teflon seats certified to API 607, TFE/Graphite body seal and stem seal, Manufacturers standard gear operator.

Note, these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.

2012-10-05

UOP Specification Low & Intermediate Alloy Steel Gate Valve

Page 1 of 1 970086 S8V013-0

1.

Gate valves
CODE NUMBER GA-320 DESCRIPTION OF VALVE NPS 2 to 12, Class 300, flanged, raised face, smooth 3.2/6.3 Ra facing, API 600, cast steel, ASTM A 217 Grade WC6, API 600 Trim 8 (13% Cr., hard faced seats), solid plain or flexible wedge, bolted gland, outside screw & yoke (OS&Y), bolted bonnet, corrosioninhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with anti-extrusion rings, hand wheel operator. NPS 2 to 12, Class 600, flanged, raised face, smooth 3.2/6.3 Ra facing, API 600, cast steel, ASTM A 217 Grade WC6, API 600 Trim 8 (13% Cr., hard faced seats), solid plain or flexible wedge, bolted gland, outside screw & yoke (OS&Y), bolted bonnet, corrosioninhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with anti-extrusion rings, hand wheel operator. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, socket weld ends, API 602, forged, ASTM A 182 Grade F11 Class 2, API 600 Trim 8 (13% Cr., hard faced seats), solid plain wedge, bolted gland, outside screw & yoke (OS&Y), bolted bonnet, corrosion-inhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with anti-extrusion rings, hand wheel operator. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, socket weld x female threaded, NPT, API 602, forged, ASTM A 182 Grade F11 Class 2, API 600 Trim 8 (13% Cr., hard faced seats), solid plain wedge, bolted gland, outside screw & yoke (OS&Y), bolted bonnet, corrosion-inhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with anti-extrusion rings, hand wheel operator. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, socket weld ends, FULL BORE, API 602, forged, ASTM A 182 Grade F11 Class 2, API 600 Trim 8 (13% Cr., hard faced seats), solid plain wedge, bolted gland, outside screw & yoke (OS&Y), bolted bonnet, corrosion-inhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with anti-extrusion rings, hand wheel operator. RECOMMENDED VALVE MODELS Powell 3003-P140/P100WC6 Poyam 4SBW-2R8 Velan F-1064C-05TY

GA-620

Powell 6003-P140/P100WC6 Poyam 4SBW-3R8 Velan F-2064C-05TY

GA-820

Bonney HL-19-SW DSI 4111-C8 Velan W-2054B-05TY Vogt SW-12321

GA-821

Bonney HL-19-SW/T DSI 4101-C8 Velan C-2054B-05TY Vogt TSW-12321

GA-822

Bonney W-19-SW Velan W-2064B-05TY

Note, these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.

2012-10-05

UOP Specification Stainless Steel Gate Valve

Page 1 of 2 970086 S8V023-0

1.

Gate valves
CODE NUMBER GA-180 DESCRIPTION OF VALVE NPS 2 to 12, Class 150, flanged, raised face, smooth 3.2/6.3 Ra facing, API 600, cast, ASTM A 351 Grade CF8M, API 600 Trim 12 (316 SS, hard faced seats), solid plain or flexible wedge, bolted gland, outside screw & yoke (OS&Y), bolted bonnet, corrosioninhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with anti-extrusion rings, hand wheel operator. NPS 2 to 12, Class 300, flanged, raised face, smooth 3.2/6.3 Ra facing, API 600, cast, ASTM A 351 Grade CF8M, 0.04% C Min.,. API 600 Trim 12 (316 SS, hard faced seats), solid plain or flexible wedge, bolted gland, outside screw & yoke (OS&Y), bolted bonnet, corrosion-inhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with anti-extrusion rings, hand wheel operator. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, socket weld ends, API 602, forged ASTM A 182 Grade F316, API 600 Trim 12 (316 SS, hard faced seats), solid plain wedge, bolted gland, outside screw & yoke (OS&Y), bolted bonnet, corrosion-inhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with anti-extrusion rings, hand wheel operator. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, socket weld x female threaded, API 602, forged, ASTM A 182 Grade F316, API 600 Trim 12 (316 SS, hard faced seats), solid plain wedge, bolted gland, outside screw & yoke (OS&Y), bolted bonnet, corrosion-inhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with anti-extrusion rings, hand wheel operator. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, female threaded NPT both ends, API 602, forged, ASTM A 182 Grade F316, API 600 Trim 12 (316 SS, hard faced seats), solid plain wedge, bolted gland, outside screw & yoke (OS&Y), bolted bonnet, corrosion-inhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with anti-extrusion rings, hand wheel operator. RECOMMENDED VALVE MODELS Cooper 115 OIC S151G Ladish 8275 Powell 2456-C3 Poyam 12SBF-1R12 Velan F-0064C-13MY Cooper 130 Ladish 8375 OIC S301G Powell 2467-C6 Poyam 12SBF-2R12 Velan F-1064C-13MY

GA-381

GA-880

Bonney HL-18-SW OIC 8GT-6-SW Velan W-2054B-13MY Vogt SW-12401 DSI 4111-D12

GA-881

Bonney HL-18-SW/T OIC 8GT-6-SW/T Velan C-2054B-13MY Vogt TSW-12401 DSI 4101-D12 Bonney HL-18-T OIC 8GT-6-T Velan S-2054B-13MY Vogt 12401 DSI 4121-D12

GA-882

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose without its written permission.

2012-10-05 GA-883

UOP Specification Stainless Steel Gate Valve NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, socket weld ends, API 602, forged, ASTM A 182 Grade F316H, 0.04% C Min., API 600 Trim 12 (316 SS, hard faced seats), solid plain wedge, bolted gland, outside screw & yoke (OS&Y), bolted bonnet, corrosion-inhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with anti-extrusion rings, hand wheel operator. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, socket weld x female threaded NPT, API 602, forged, ASTM A 182 Grade F316, 0.04% C Min., API 600 Trim 12 (316 SS, hard faced seats), solid plain wedge, bolted gland, outside screw & yoke (OS&Y), bolted bonnet, corrosion-inhibited dieformed flexible graphite packing with antiextrusion rings, hand wheel operator.

Page 2 of 2 970086 S8V023-0 Bonney HL-18-SW OIC 8GT-6-SW Velan W-2054B-13MY DSI-4111-D12

GA-884

Bonney HL-18-SW/T OIC 8GT-6-SW/T Velan C-2054B-13MY DSI 4101-D12

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose without its written permission.

2012-10-05

UOP Specification Stainless Steel Globe Valve

Page 1 of 2 970086 S8V024-0

1.

Globe valves
CODE NUMBER GL-180 DESCRIPTION OF VALVE NPS 2 to 6, Class 150, straight pattern, flanged, raised face, smooth 3.2/6.3 Ra facing, ASME B16.34, cast, ASTM A 351 Grade CF8M, API 600 Trim 12 (316 SS, hard faced seats), plug type disc, bolted gland, outside screw & yoke (OS&Y), bolted bonnet, corrosion-inhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with anti-extrusion rings, hand wheel operator. NPS 2 to 6, Class 300, straight pattern, flanged, raised face, smooth 3.2/6.3 Ra facing, ASME B16.34, cast, ASTM A 351 Grade CF8M, 0.04% C Min., API 600 Trim 12 (316 SS, hard faced seats), plug type disc, bolted gland, outside screw & yoke (OS&Y), bolted bonnet, corrosion-inhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with anti-extrusion rings, hand wheel operator. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, straight pattern, socket weld ends, reduced bore, ASME B16.34, forged, ASTM A 182 Grade F316H, API 600 Trim 12 (316 SS, hard faced seats), plug type disc, bolted gland, outside screw & yoke (OS&Y), bolted bonnet, corrosioninhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with anti-extrusion rings, hand wheel operator. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, straight pattern, female threaded NPT both ends, reduced bore, ASME B16.34, forged, ASTM A 182 Grade F316, API 600 Trim 12 (316 SS, hard faced seats), plug type disc, bolted gland, outside screw & yoke (OS&Y), bolted bonnet, corrosion-inhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with anti-extrusion rings, hand wheel operator. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, straight pattern, socket weld ends, reduced bore, ASME B16.34, forged, ASTM A 182 Grade F316H, 0.04% C Min., API 600 Trim 12 (316 SS, hard faced seats), plug type disc, bolted gland, outside screw & yoke (OS&Y), bolted bonnet, corrosion-inhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with anti-extrusion rings, hand wheel operator. RECOMMENDED VALVE MODELS Cooper 215 Ladish 7272 OIC S152G Powell 2475-C3/2629-C3 Poyam 12GBP-1R12 Velan F-0074C-13MY

GL-381

Cooper 230 Ladish 7372 OIC S302G Powell 2447-C6 Poyam 12GBP-2R12 Velan F-1074C-13MY

GL-880

Bonney Forge HL-38-SW OIC 8GL-6-SW Smith G80-HAOOW Velan W-2074B-13MY Vogt SW-12501 DSI 4211-D12 Bonney HL-38-T OIC 8GL-6-T Smith G80-HAOOO Velan S-2074B-13MY Vogt 12501 DSI 4221-D12

GL-882

GL-883

Bonney HL-38-SW Smith G80-HSOOW Velan W-2074B-13MY DSI 4211-D12

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose without its written permission.

2012-10-05 GL-884

UOP Specification Stainless Steel Globe Valve NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, straight pattern, socket weld x female threaded NPT, reduced bore, ASME B16.34, forged, ASTM A 182 Grade F316H, 0.04% C Min., API 600 Trim 12 (316 SS, hard faced seats), plug type disc, bolted gland, outside screw & yoke (OS&Y), bolted bonnet, corrosion-inhibited die-formed flexible graphite packing with anti-extrusion rings, hand wheel operator.

Page 2 of 2 970086 S8V024-0 Bonney HL-38-SW/T Velan C-2074B-13MY DSI 4201-D12

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose without its written permission.

2012-10-05

UOP Specification Stainless Steel Check Valve

Page 1 of 2 970086 S8V025-0

1.

Check valves
CODE NUMBER CH-180 DESCRIPTION OF VALVE NPS 2 to 12, Class 150, flanged, raised face, smooth 3.2/6.3 Ra facing, ASME B16.34, cast, ASTM A 351 Grade CF8M, API 600 Trim 12 (316 SS, hard faced seats), bolted cover, swing type. RECOMMENDED VALVE MODELS Cooper 315 Ladish 5272 OIC S153G Powell 2342/2633 Poyam 12RBA-1R12 Velan F-0114C-13MY CH-183 NPS 1 1/2 to 24, Class 150, serrated raised Crane Duo Check IIG15CPF-385E face ends, smooth 3.2/6.3 Ra facing, API 594, Goodwin BFR-015-S-S-U-P-R-Y-S lug type, cast ASTM A351 Grade CF8M body, dual plate design, 316 SS plates and pins, 410 SS overlay body seat, Inconel X-750 springs. NPS 2 to 12, Class 300, flanged, raised face, smooth 3.2/6.3 Ra facing, ASME B16.34, cast, ASTM A 351 Grade CF8M, 0.04% C Min., API 600 Trim 12 (316 SS, Hardfaced seat), bolted cover, swing type. Cooper 330 Ladish 5372 OIC S303G Powell 2346-C6 Poyam 12RBA-2R12 Velan F-1114C-13TY CH-382 NPS 2 to 24, Class 300, serrated raised face ends, smooth 3.2/6.3 Ra facing, API 594, lug type, cast stainless steel, ASTM A351 Grade CF8M body, 0.04 C-min., dual plate design, retainerless, Monel plates and pins, Monel overlay body seat, Inconel X-750 springs. . NPS 2 to 24, Class 300, serrated raised face ends, smooth 3.2/6.3 Ra facing, API 594, lug type, cast ASTM A351 Grade CF8M body, 0.04 C-min., dual plate design, retainerless, 316 SS plates and pins, 410 SS overlay body seat, Inconel X-750 springs. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, socket weld ends, reduced bore, ASME B16.34, forged, ASTM A 182 Grade F316, Stellite seat, bolted cover, ball type, spring loaded, 304 SS ball and spring. Crane Duo Check II H30-CPF-772 Goodwin BFR-030-S-M-M-P-R-Y-M

CH-381

CH-383

Crane Duo Check II H30 CPF-385E Goodwin BFR-030-S-S-U-P-R-Y-S

CH-880

Bonney HL-58-SW OIC 8CH-6-SW Smith B80-HSOOW Velan W-2024B-13MY DSI 4511-D12 Vogt SW-718

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose without its written permission.

2012-10-05 CH-882

UOP Specification Stainless Steel Check Valve NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, female threaded NPT both ends, reduced bore, ASME B16.34, forged, ASTM A 182 Grade F316, bolted cover, ball type, spring loaded, 304 SS ball and spring. Bonney HL-58-T OIC 8CH-6-T Smith B80-HAOO0

Page 2 of 2 970086 S8V025-0

Velan W-2024B-13MY DSI 4521-D12 Vogt 718

CH-883

NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 800, socket weld ends, reduced bore, ASME B16.34, forged, ASTM A 182 Grade F316H, 0.04% C Min., Stellite seat, bolted cover, ball type, spring loaded, 304 SS ball and spring.

Bonney HL-58-SW OIC 8CH-6-SW Smith B80-HSOOW Velan W-2024B-13MY DSI 4511-D12 Vogt SW-718

CH-3080

NPS 1/4 to 1, 303 Stainless Steel, 3000 psi, spring loaded, Buna-N O-ring seal, female threaded NPT both ends.

Circle Seal 259T-XPP

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose without its written permission.

2013-01-04

UOP Specification Stainless Steel Ball Valve

Page 1 of 1 970086 S8V026-0

1.

Ball valves

CODE NUMBER BA-386

DESCRIPTION OF VALVE NPS 1 to 8, Full Port, Soft-Sealed, "Fire-Safe" design, ASME B16.34, B16.5, API 598, API 607, MSS SP-25, MSS SP-72. Temperature limit shall not exceed 450 F (232 C) for filled Teflon.

CONSTRUCTION: Body:

Cast ASTM A 351 Grade CF8M. (316L SS acceptable alternate). ASME Class 300, flanged, raised face, smooth 3.2/6.3 Ra facing. 316 stainless steel. Filled Teflon certified to API 607. 316 stainless steel. 304 SS / Flexible Graphite. Graphite. Lever or handwheel operated (Manual). Manufacturer's standard testing. Manufacturer's standard.

Rating/Facing: Stem: Seats: Ball: Gaskets: Stem Seals: Actuator: Leakage: Inspection/Testing:

RECOMMENDED VALVE MODELS: Neles-Jamesbury 6300-EH008-3600-ML 9300-EH008-3600-ML

Note, these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.

2012-10-05

UOP Specification Stainless Steel Needle Valve

Page 1 of 1 970086 S8V029-0

1.

Needle valves
CODE NUMBER NE-3080 DESCRIPTION OF VALVE NPS 1/4, Needle Valve, Type 316 Stainless Steel, 3000 psig at 100 Deg. F, straight pattern, metering type, PTFE stem packing. RECOMMENDED VALVE MODELS Hoke 2315F4Y

NE-5080

NPS 1/4, Needle Valve, ASTM A 182 F316 body, 316 Stainless Steel blunt stem, 5000 psig at 100 Deg. F, compression ends, PTFE stem packing.

Parker CPI V6AR-SS

Note, these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.

2012-10-05

UOP Specification Bronze and Iron Gate Valve

Page 1 of 1 970086 S8V033-0

1.

Gate valves
CODE NUMBER GA-1160 DESCRIPTION OF VALVE NPS 1/4 to 3 Class 150, threaded, MSS SP-80, bronze ASTM B 62 Alloy 836 body and bonnet, bronze solid wedge, bronze stem, Teflon packing, union bonnet, rising stem. RECOMMENDED VALVE MODELS Crane 431-UB Lunkenheimer 3151 Milwaukee 1151 Nibco T-135 Powell 2714 Stockham B-120 GA-1170 NPS 3 to 24, Class 150, flanged, flat face, grooved 6.3/12.5 Ra facing, MSS SP-70, ASME B16.10, ASME B16.1, Ductile iron ASTM A 395 body and bonnet, bronze seat rings, solid wedge, iron disc, bronze faced, bronze stem, Teflon packing, outside screw & yoke (OS&Y), bolted bonnet, non-rising stem. Handwheel operator up to 14 NPS Gear operator above 14 NPS Nibco F-637-31 Walworth W9726-F

GA-1161

NPS 4 & 6, Class 150, flanged, ASME B16.24, Powell 1414 bronze, ASTM B 62 Alloy 836 body and Williams 142F bonnet, TP410 SS seat rings, bronze solid wedge, bronze stem, Teflon packing, bolted flanged yoke-bonnet, outside screw rising stem.

Note, these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.

2012-10-05

UOP Specification Bronze and Iron Globe Valve

Page 1 of 1 970086 S8V034-0

1.

Globe valves
CODE NUMBER GL-1160 DESCRIPTION OF VALVE NPS 1/4 to 3, Class 150, female threaded NPT both ends, MSS SP-80, bronze, ASTM B 62 Alloy 836 body and bonnet, Teflon plug type disc, bronze stem, Teflon or Graphite packing, union bonnet. RECOMMENDED VALVE MODELS Crane 7 TF Milwaukee 590-T Nibco T-235-Y Powell 150 Stockham B-22T GL-1170 NPS 3 to 6, Class 150, flanged, flat face, grooved 6.3/12.5 Ra facing, MSS SP-85, ASME B16.1, Ductile iron ASTM A 395 body and bonnet, bronze seat rings, solid bronze disc or iron bronze faced, bronze stem, Teflon packing, outside screw & yoke (OS&Y), bolted bonnet. Nibco F-738-31

Note, these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.

2012-10-05

UOP Specification Bronze and Iron Check Valve

Page 1 of 1 970086 S8V035-0

1.

Check valves
CODE NUMBER CH-1170 DESCRIPTION OF VALVE NPS 3 to 24, Class 150, flanged, flat face, grooved 6.3/12.5 Ra facing, MSS SP-71, ASME B16.10, ASME B16.1, Ductile iron ASTM A 395 body and cap, cast iron seat rings, solid bronze disc, iron bronze faced, bolted cap, horizontal swing type. NPS 1/4 to 3, Class 150, female threaded NPT both ends, MSS SP-80, bronze, ASTM B 61 Alloy 836 body and cap, bronze disc, screwed cap, Y-pattern, horizontal swing type. RECOMMENDED VALVE MODELS Nibco F-938-31 Walworth W9928-F

CH-13160

Crane 36 Milwaukee 510-T Nibco T-433-Y Stockham B-345

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose without its written permission.

2012-10-05

UOP Specification Bronze and Iron Ball Valve

Page 1 of 1 970086 S8V036-0

1.

Ball valves
CODE NUMBER BA-1160 DESCRIPTION OF VALVE NPS 1/4 to 2, Reduced Port, Soft-Sealed, ASME B16.34, B1.20.1, MSS SP-25, MSS SP-110.

CONSTRUCTION: Body:

Forged Brass ASTM B 124 Alloy UNS No. C37700, or Cast Bronze ASTM B 584 Alloy UNS No. C84400. ASME Class 150, female threaded NPT both ends. Brass. Teflon (TFE). Brass (Chromium plated acceptable alternate). Teflon (TFE) Lever or handwheel operated (Manual). Manufacturer's standard testing. Manufacturer's standard.

Rating/Facing: Stem: Seats: Ball: Stem Seals: Actuator: Leakage: Inspection/Testing:

RECOMMENDED VALVE MODELS: Conbraco Industries, Inc. Apollo 70-100 Series Crane 9302 Nibco T-585-70 Smith 125-T Watts B-6000 Stockham S216-BR-RT

Note, these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.

2012-10-05

UOP Specification Bronze and Iron Butterfly Valve

Page 1 of 1 970086 S8V037-0

1.

Butterfly valves
CODE NUMBER BF-1170 DESCRIPTION OF VALVE NPS 2 to 24, Class 150, lug type, MSS SP-67, API 609, Ductile iron, ASTM A 395 or ASTM A 536 body, bronze disc, TP316 SS or 17-4PH SS shaft and pins, BUNA-N resilient seat, luberized bronze bushings. Latch lock handle for sizes up to 6" Enclosed weatherproof gear operator for 8" and over. RECOMMENDEDVALVE MODELS Centerline Series 200 Keystone 122/129 Nibco LD 2100 Mueller Steam 52-U

Note, these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.

2013-01-15

UOP Specification Nickel and Nickel Alloy Gate Valve

Page 1 of 2 970086 S8V053-0

1.

Gate valves
CODE NUMBER GA-1180 DESCRIPTION OF VALVE NPS 2 to 24, Class 150, flanged, RF, cast, ASTM A 494 Grade CY-40 Class 2 Alloy UNS N06600, API 600, hard faced seat, flexible wedge, bolted bonnet, Alloy 600 trim, outside screw & yoke (OS&Y), Graphoil packing and gasket, handwheel operator. NPS 1, Class 150, flanged, RF, cast, ASTM A 494 Grade CY-40 Class 2 Alloy UNS N06600, API 600, hard faced seat, flexible wedge, bolted bonnet, Alloy 600 trim, outside screw & yoke (OS&Y), Graphoil packing and gasket, handwheel operator. NPS 1/2 to 1 1/2, Class 300, socket weld ends, cast, ASTM A 494 Grade CY-40 Class 1 or ASTM A351 Grade CT-15C, API 602, integral seat, solid plain wedge, bolted bonnet, rising stem, outside screw & yoke (OS&Y), bolted bonnet, Graphoil packing and gasket, handwheel operator. RECOMMENDED VALVE MODELS Cooper 115RF Xanik G-B-015-R-CY4060H-F Cooper 115RF Xanik G-B-015-R-CY4060H-F Cooper 3381-X

GA-1181

GA-3180

GA-3181

NPS 1/2 to 1 1/2, Class 300, socket weld end Cooper 3381-X/SE x screwed end NPT, cast, ASTM A 494 Grade CY-40 Class 1 or ASTM A351 Grade CT-15C , API 602, integral seat, solid plain wedge, bolted bonnet, rising stem, outside screw & yoke (OS&Y), bolted bonnet, Graphoil packing and gasket, handwheel operator. NPS 1, Class 300, flanged, RF, cast, ASTM A 494 Grade CY-40 Class 1 or ASTM A351 Grade CT-15C, API 602, integral seat, solid plain wedge, bolted bonnet, rising stem, outside screw & yoke (OS&Y), bolted bonnet, Graphoil packing and gasket, handwheel operator. NPS 2 to 6, Class 300, flanged, RF, cast, ASTM A 494 Grade CY-40 Class 1 or ASTM A351 Grade CT-15C, API 600, integral seat, solid plain wedge, bolted bonnet, rising stem, outside screw & yoke (OS&Y), bolted bonnet, Graphoil packing and gasket, handwheel operator. Cooper 130 RF

GA-3182

GA-3183

Cooper 130 RF

Note, these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.

2013-01-15 GA-3184

UOP Specification Nickel and Nickel Alloy Gate Valve NPS 2 to 6, Class 300, flanged, RF, cast, ASTM A 494 Grade CY-40 Class 1 or ASTM A351 Grade CT-15C, API 600, hard faced seat, flexible wedge, bolted bonnet, outside screw & yoke (OS&Y), corrosion-inhibited dieformed Graphite packing with braided antiextrusion rings Cooper 130RF

Page 2 of 2 970086 S8V053-0

Xanik G-B-03-R-CY40-60HF

GA-6180

NPS 1/2 to 1 1/2, Class 600, socket weld, cast, Cooper 3611X ASTM A 494 Grade CY-40 Class 2 Alloy UNS N06600, API 602, hard faced seat, Alloy 600 Xanik G-B-06-W-CY40trim, bolted bonnet, outside screw & yoke 60H-H (OS&Y), corrosion-inhibited die-formed Graphite packing with braided anti-extrusion rings

Note, these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.

2012-10-30

UOP Specification Nickel and Nickel Alloy Globe Valve

Page 1 of 1 970086 S8V054-0

1.

Globe valves
CODE NUMBER GL-1180 DESCRIPTION OF VALVE RECOMMENDED VALVE MODELS

NPS 2 to 6, Class 150, raised face, ASME Cooper 215RF B16.34, cast, ASTM A 494 Grade CY-40 Class 2, Alloy UNS N06600 body/bonnet, hard faced Xanik Fig Number: B-B-015seat, Alloy 600 trim, bolted bonnet, outside R-CY40-60H or equal screw & yoke (OS&Y), corrosion-inhibited dieformed Graphite packing with braided antiextrusion rings. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 300, socket weld Cooper 4301-X ends, ASME B16.34, cast, ASTM A 494 Grade CY-40 Class 1, ASTM A351 Grade CT-15C, integral seat, solid plain wedge, bolted bonnet, rising stem, outside screw & yoke (OS&Y), Graphoil packing and gasket, handwheel operator. NPS 2 to 6, Class 300, raised face, ASME Cooper 230RF B16.34, cast, ASTM A 494 Grade CY-40 Class 2, Alloy UNS N06600 body/bonnet, hard faced Xanik Fig Number: B-B-03seat, Alloy 600 trim, bolted bonnet, outside R-CY40-60H or equal screw & yoke (OS&Y), corrosion-inhibited dieformed Graphite packing with braided antiextrusion rings. NPS 2 to 6, Class 300, flanged, ASME B16.34, Cooper 230 cast, ASTM A 494 Grade CY-40 Class 1, ASTM A351 Grade CT-15C, integral seat, solid plain wedge, rising stem, outside screw & yoke (OS&Y), bolted bonnet, Graphoil packing and gasket, handwheel operator. NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 600, socket weld Cooper 4601-X ends, ASME B16.34, cast, ASTM A 494 Grade CY-40 Class 2, Alloy UNS N06600 Xanik Fig Number: B-B-06body/bonnet, hard faced seat, Alloy 600 trim, W-CY40-60H-H or equal bolted bonnet, outside screw & yoke (OS&Y), corrosion-inhibited die-formed Graphite packing with braided anti-extrusion rings. NPS 3/4, Class 600, socket weld X Threaded Cooper 4601-X/SE Ends, ASME B16.34, cast, ASTM A 494 Grade CY-40 Class 2, Alloy UNS N06600 Xanik Fig Number: B-B-06body/bonnet, hard faced seat, Alloy 600 trim, W/T-CY40-60H-G-H or bolted bonnet, outside screw & yoke (OS&Y), equal corrosion-inhibited die-formed Graphite packing with braided anti-extrusion rings.

GL-3180

GL-3181

GL-3183

GL-6180

GL-6181

Note, these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.

2012-10-30

UOP Specification Nickel and Nickel Alloy Check Valve

Page 1 of 1 970086 S8V055-0

1.

Check valves
CODE NUMBER Ch-1180 DESCRIPTION OF VALVE RECOMMENDED VALVE MODELS

NPS 2 to 12, Class 150, raised face, ASME Cooper 315RF B16.34, cast, ASTM A 494 Grade CY-40 Class 2 Alloy UNS N06600, Alloy 600 trim, ASME Xanik W-B-015-R-CY40-60H B16.34, hard faced seat, swing check, bolted cap NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 300, socket weld Cooper 2301-X ends, ASME B16.34, cast, ASTM A 494 Grade CY-40 Class 1 or ASTM A351 Grade CT-15C, ASME B16.34, integral seat, Swing type, bolted cap, Graphoil packing and gasket, NPS 1/2 to 4, ASME Class 300 cast raised face flanged, Incoloy 800 ASTM A351 Grade CT-15C body/ bonnet cap, Incoloy 800 trim, spiral wound with Incoloy 800 windings cap gasket, incompliance with ASME B16.34. Cooper 330-RF

CH-3180

CH-3181

CH-3182

NPS 2 to 10, Class 300, raised face, ASME Cooper 330RF B16.34, cast, ASTM A 494 Grade CY-40 Class 2 Alloy UNS N06600, Alloy 600 trim, ASME Xanik W-B-03-R-CY40-60H B16.34, hard faced seat, swing check, bolted cap NPS 1/2 to 1-1/2, Class 600, socket weld, ASME B16.34, cast, ASTM A 494 Grade CY40 Class 2 Alloy UNS N06600, Alloy 600 trim, ASME B16.34, hard faced seat, swing check, bolted cap Cooper 2601-X Xanik W-B-06-W-CY40-60H

CH-6180

Note, these data are confidential and the property of UOP and shall not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever except by written permission or as provided in a signed agreement with UOP relating to such data.

COMPLETE REVISION
February 2011

Process Industry Practices Structural

PIP STS05120 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Fabrication Specification

PURPOSE AND USE OF PROCESS INDUSTRY PRACTICES In an effort to minimize the cost of process industry facilities, this Practice has been prepared from the technical requirements in the existing standards of major industrial users, contractors, or standards organizations. By harmonizing these technical requirements into a single set of Practices, administrative, application, and engineering costs to both the purchaser and the manufacturer should be reduced. While this Practice is expected to incorporate the majority of requirements of most users, individual applications may involve requirements that will be appended to and take precedence over this Practice. Determinations concerning fitness for purpose and particular matters or application of the Practice to particular project or engineering situations should not be made solely on information contained in these materials. The use of trade names from time to time should not be viewed as an expression of preference but rather recognized as normal usage in the trade. Other brands having the same specifications are equally correct and may be substituted for those named. All Practices or guidelines are intended to be consistent with applicable laws and regulations including OSHA requirements. To the extent these Practices or guidelines should conflict with OSHA or other applicable laws or regulations, such laws or regulations must be followed. Consult an appropriate professional before applying or acting on any material contained in or suggested by the Practice. This Practice is subject to revision at any time. Process Industry Practices (PIP), Construction Industry Institute, The University of Texas at Austin, 3925 West Braker Lane (R4500), Austin, Texas 78759. PIP Member Companies and Subscribers may copy this Practice for their internal use. Changes or modifications of any kind are not permitted within any PIP Practice without the express written authorization of PIP. Authorized Users may attach addenda or overlays to clearly indicate modifications or exceptions to specific sections of PIP Practices. Authorized Users may provide their clients, suppliers and contractors with copies of the Practice solely for Authorized Users purposes. These purposes include but are not limited to the procurement process (e.g., as attachments to requests for quotation/ purchase orders or requests for proposals/contracts) and preparation and issue of design engineering deliverables for use on a specific project by Authorized Users client. PIPs copyright notices must be clearly indicated and unequivocally incorporated in documents where an Authorized User desires to provide any third party with copies of the Practice.

PRINTING HISTORY November 1994 Issued January 1999 Revision January 2000 Technical Correction February 2011 Complete Revision Not printed with State funds

COMPLETE REVISION
February 2011

Process Industry Practices Structural

PIP STS05120 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Fabrication Specification


Table of Contents 1. Introduction................................. 2
1.1 Purpose ............................................ 2 1.2 Scope ............................................... 2

2. References .................................. 2
2.1 Process Industry Practices .............. 2 2.2 Industry Codes and Standards ........ 2 2.3 Government Regulations ................. 4

3. Definitions ................................... 5 4. Requirements.............................. 5


4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 Quality Control ................................. 5 Submittals ........................................ 7 Performance .................................... 8 Products and Materials .................... 8 Connections ..................................... 9 Fabrication ..................................... 14 Galvanizing .................................... 15 Handling, Shipping, and Delivery ... 17

Process Industry Practices

Page 1 of 18

PIP STS05120 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Fabrication Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
February 2011

1.

Introduction
1.1 Purpose This Practice provides requirements for the fabrication of structural and miscellaneous steel. 1.2 Scope This Practice describes the requirements for material, connections, detailing, fabricating, galvanizing, and delivery of structural and miscellaneous steel. Structural and miscellaneous steel are as defined in AISC Code of Standard Practice. This Practice does not include requirements that may be applicable for structures that require special seismic detailing.

2.

References
Applicable parts of the following Practices and references shall be considered an integral part of this Practice. The edition in effect on the date of contract award shall be used, except as otherwise noted. Short titles are used herein where appropriate. 2.1 2.2 Process Industry Practices (PIP) PIP STS05130 - Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Erection Specification Industry Codes and Standards American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) AISC 303 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges ANSI/AISC 360 - Specification for Structural Steel Buildings AISC Steel Construction Manual AISC Detailing for Steel Construction ASTM International (ASTM) ASTM A1 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Tee Rails ASTM A6/A6M - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and HotDipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless ASTM A106/A106M - Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service ASTM A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, ColdFinished ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products

Page 2 of 18

Process Industry Practices

COMPLETE REVISION
February 2011

PIP STS05120 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Fabrication Specification

ASTM A143/A143M - Standard Practice for Safeguarding Against Embrittlement of Hot-Dip Galvanized Structural Steel Products and Procedure for Detecting Embrittlement ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength (AASHTO No. M164) ASTM A325M - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa Minimum Tensile Strength (Metric) ASTM A384/A384M - Standard Practice for Safeguarding Against Warpage and Distortion During Hot-Dip Galvanizing of Steel Assemblies ASTM A385/A385M - Standard Practice for Providing High-Quality Zinc Coatings (Hot-Dip) ASTM A490 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength (AASHTO No. M253) ASTM A490M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Steel Bolts, Classes 10.9 and 10.9.3, for Structural Steel Joints (Metric) ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes ASTM A501 - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing ASTM A563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts ASTM A563M - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts (Metric) ASTM A572/A572M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel ASTM A759 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Crane Rails ASTM A780/A780M - Standard Specification for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings ASTM A786/A786M - Standard Specification for Hot-Rolled Carbon, LowAlloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy, and Alloy Steel Floor Plates ASTM A992/A992M - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength ASTM B695 - Standard Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on Iron and Steel ASTM E376 - Standard Practice for Measuring Coating Thickness by Magnetic-Field or Eddy-Current (Electromagnetic) Examination Methods ASTM F436 - Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers ASTM F436M - Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers (Metric)

Process Industry Practices

Page 3 of 18

PIP STS05120 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Fabrication Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
February 2011

ASTM F606 - Standard Test Methods for Determining the Mechanical Properties of Externally and Internally Threaded Fasteners, Washers, Direct Tension Indicators, and Rivets ASTM F606M - Standard Test Methods for Determining the Mechanical Properties of Externally and Internally Threaded Fasteners, Washers, and Rivets (Metric) ASTM F959 - Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners ASTM F959M - Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators for Use With Structural Fasteners (Metric) ASTM F1852 - Standard Specification for Twist Off Type Tension Control Structural Bolt/Nut/Washer Assemblies, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength ASTM F2280 - Standard Specification for Twist Off Type Tension Control Structural Bolt/Nut/Washer Assemblies, Steel, Heat Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength ASTM F2329 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating, Hot-Dip, Requirements for Application to Carbon and Alloy Steel Bolts, Screws, Washers, Nuts, and Special Threaded Fasteners American Welding Society (AWS) AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel AWS D1.3/D1.3M - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel AWSD14.1/D14.1M - Specification for Welding of Industrial and Mill Cranes and Other Material Handling Equipment AWS QC1 - Standard for AWS Certification of Welding Inspectors National Association of Architectural Metals Manufacturers (NAAMM) NAAMM MBG 531 - Metal Bar Grating Manual Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC) RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts Steel Deck Institute (SDI) SDI Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks and Roof Decks Steel Joist Institute (SJI) SJI Standard Specifications and Load Tables 2.3 Government Regulations Requirements by state or local agencies that have jurisdiction where the structural steel is to be erected, shall apply. US Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) OSHA 29 CFR Part 1910 OSHA 29 CFR Part 1926

Page 4 of 18

Process Industry Practices

COMPLETE REVISION
February 2011

PIP STS05120 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Fabrication Specification

3.

Definitions
contract documents: Any and all documents, including codes, studies, design drawings, specifications, sketches, practices, and data sheets, that the purchaser or engineer of record has transmitted or otherwise communicated, either by incorporation or reference, and made part of the legal contract agreement or purchase order between the purchaser and the fabricator. engineer of record: Purchasers authorized representative with overall authority and responsibility for the engineering design, quality, and performance of the civil works, structure, foundations, materials, and appurtenances described in the contract documents. The engineer of record shall be licensed as defined by the laws of the locality in which the work is to be constructed, and be qualified to practice in the specialty discipline required for the work described in the contract documents. Also known as structural engineer of record in AISC Code of Standard Practice. engineer-designed connections: Structural steel connections which are designed by the engineer of record and detailed in the contract documents. fabricator: The party responsible for providing fabricated structural and miscellaneous steel in accordance with the contract documents. The term fabricator shall apply also to the fabricators subcontractor(s) and/or vendor(s). inspector: The party responsible for verifying the quality of all materials, installations, and workmanship furnished by the fabricator. The inspector shall be qualified by training and experience and hold certifications or documentation of their qualifications. Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, the inspector shall be retained by the fabricator. manufacturer: The party who produces and warrants the performance of the products, materials, and/or items provided in accordance with the contract documents. The products, materials, and/or items are manufactured in a controlled process using standard codes, specifications, tests and possibly include shop drawings to assist in proper application, installation and/or use. The term manufacturer shall apply also to the manufacturers subcontractor(s) and/or vendor(s). owner: The party who owns the facility wherein the structural steel will be used. professional engineer: An engineer, other than the engineer of record licensed as defined by the laws of the locality in which the steel is to be erected, and qualified to practice in the specialty discipline required for the work described in the contract documents. purchaser: The party who awards the contract to the fabricator. The purchaser may be the owner or the owners authorized agent.

4.

Requirements
4.1 Quality Control 4.1.1 Unless approved by the engineer of record, fabricator shall participate in the AISC Certification Program and be designated an AISC Certified Plant, Category STD.

Process Industry Practices

Page 5 of 18

PIP STS05120 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Fabrication Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
February 2011

4.1.2 4.1.3

The fabricator shall be solely responsible for quality control of all materials and workmanship. Each piece of mill material shall be legibly marked with the heat number, size of section, length and mill identification marks in accordance with ASTM A6/A6M, plus fabrication mill order number. Alternate material tracking procedures may be used if approved by the purchaser. For material other than ASTM A36/A36M, the appropriate specification number, grade, heat number and fabrication mill order number shall be transferred to the remnant. Alternate material tracking procedures may be used if approved by the purchaser. Mill material with specified minimum yield strength higher than 36 ksi (250 MPa) shall be marked with the color designated in ASTM A6/A6M. Alternate material tracking procedures may be used if approved by the purchaser. A written Material Handling Procedure, Quality Control Program, and Inspection Procedures document shall be provided. This document shall provide details of how compliance with the requirements in this Practice and the design drawings shall be achieved. The purchaser has the right to inspect all materials and workmanship and shall have unrestricted entry to the fabricators shop at all times while work is being performed. The purchaser may reject improper, inferior, defective, or unsuitable materials and workmanship. All materials and workmanship rejected shall be repaired or replaced as directed by the purchaser.

4.1.4

4.1.5

4.1.6

4.1.7

4.1.8 4.1.9

4.1.10 Bolted connections shall be inspected in accordance with the RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 and A490 Bolts. 4.1.11 Welding procedures and individual welders shall be qualified in accordance with the requirements of AWS D1.1 and when applicable AWS D14.1. 4.1.12 Welding procedures previously qualified for the purchaser may be used without requalification. However, the purchaser reserves the right to require requalification of any questionable procedure before the start of fabrication. 4.1.13 All welding shall be inspected in accordance with AWS D1.1 and when applicable AWS D14.1. Inspectors shall be qualified and certified as AWS Certified Welding Inspectors in accordance with the provisions of AWS D1.1 or AWS QC1 or shall be trained by and working under the supervision of an AWS Certified Welding Inspector. Welding of rigging and under the hook lifting devices shall be inspected in accordance with AWS D14.1. Inspectors shall be qualified and certified as AWS Certified Welding Inspectors in accordance with the provisions of AWS D14.1 or AWS QC1. 4.1.14 Certified mill test reports for each heat of structural steel and each lot of high strength bolts shall be available for review by the purchaser.

Page 6 of 18

Process Industry Practices

COMPLETE REVISION
February 2011

PIP STS05120 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Fabrication Specification

4.1.15 The purchaser may require a quantity of representative samples of bolt assemblies to be used for testing. Testing in accordance with ASTM F606/F606M shall be at the purchasers expense. 4.1.16 The purchaser reserves the right to inspect and reject all galvanized steel in accordance with ASTM A123 and ASTM E376. 4.2 Submittals 4.2.1 The following items shall be submitted to the engineer of record for approval. Work shall not proceed without approval: a. Checked erection and shop drawings b. Checked engineering calculations for each fabricator-designed connection c. Quality Control Program and Inspection Procedures d. Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) e. Procedure Qualification Records (PQR) f. 4.2.2 Welder(s) qualification records Final erection drawings, shop drawings, and field bolt lists shall be sent to the persons responsible for managing construction at their field office by way of next day delivery before shipment of steel. A shipping list (including total weight of release and weight of shipment), a bolt list, and final erection drawings shall accompany the first shipment of each release. As a minimum, the following documents shall be submitted to the purchaser for record purposes: a. Final erection and shop drawings b. Records of Quality Control inspection test reports requested by the purchaser c. Final engineering calculations for each fabricator-designed connection sealed and signed by the responsible Professional Engineer d. Records of calibration or recalibration performed on the tools or equipment used during the work, if requested by the purchaser 4.2.5 Erection and Shop Drawings a. Shop drawings and erection drawings shall be prepared in accordance with the AISC documents listed in Section 2.2. b. Erection drawings shall reference the corresponding design drawings; shop drawings shall reference the corresponding erection drawings. c. Shop drawings shall clearly show the specification and grade of steel to be used. d. Erection and shop drawings shall be grouped in sets and identified separately for each building, structure, or yard area.

4.2.3

4.2.4

Process Industry Practices

Page 7 of 18

PIP STS05120 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Fabrication Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
February 2011

e. Erection drawings shall clearly show the mark number and position for each member. Mark number system shall be agreed upon in advance with purchaser. f. Erection drawings shall clearly identify pretensioned and slip critical high strength bolted connections.

g. The purchasers purchase order number shall be shown on all erection and shop drawings. h. Shop drawings shall state the welding electrode to be used. i. j. Surface preparation and shop applied coatings, including areas to be masked, shall be noted on the shop drawings. A bolt list and list of other fasteners showing the number, grade, size, and length of field bolts and other fasteners for each connection shall be provided. These lists may be shown on either the shop drawings or separate sheets.

k. In the event that drawing revisions are necessary, the shop drawings shall clearly be clouded showing all changes of the latest revisions. l. Shop drawings and erection drawings shall be prepared using a three dimensional steel modeling and detailing software system. All miscellaneous steel such as handrail, stairs, and ladders shall be included in the same three dimensional model as main structural steel and detailed using the same system.

4.3

Performance 4.3.1 All work shall be in accordance with the AISC Code of Standard Practice for Structural Steel Buildings and Bridges, AISC Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, applicable portions of OSHA 29 CFR Part 1910 and Part 1926, and any other applicable federal, state or local regulations. If local specifications, codes, or standards exist for the materials, section properties, design, and test methods covered by this Practice which yield equivalent quality and performance, they may be substituted only with prior written approval by the purchaser. Structural wide flange shapes shall be ASTM A992/A992M, unless otherwise specified in the contract documents. Structural channels, angles, plates, bars, and other shapes shall be ASTM A36/A36M, ASTM unless otherwise specified in the contract documents. Pipe shall be ASTM A53 Type E or S, Grade B or ASTM A106 Grade B. Structural tubing shall be ASTM A501 or ASTM A500 Grade B. High strength bolt assemblies shall be as follows: a. Bolt - ASTM A325/A325M Type 1 or ASTM A490/A490M, if specified on the design drawings b. Washer - ASTM F436/F436M

4.3.2

4.4

Products and Materials 4.4.1 4.4.2 4.4.3 4.4.4 4.4.5

Page 8 of 18

Process Industry Practices

COMPLETE REVISION
February 2011

PIP STS05120 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Fabrication Specification

c. Direct Tension Indicator (D.T.I.) washers - ASTM F959/F959M, if specified in Contract Documents d. Twist-off type bolt assemblies - ASTM F1852 or ASTM F2280, if specified in Contract Documents. e. Heavy Hex Nut - ASTM A563/A563M Grade DH 4.4.6 Standard bolt assemblies shall be as follows: a. Bolt - ASTM A307 Grade A Heavy Hex b. Washer - ASTM F436/F436M c. Heavy Hex Nut - ASTM A563/A563M Grade A 4.4.7 4.4.8 Headed studs shall be ASTM A108 Grade 1010 through 1020, AWS D1.1 Section 7, Type B. Welding filler metal shall be AWS D1.1 Section 3.3 (including Table 3.1), low hydrogen, with an electrode strength of 58 ksi (400 MPa) minimum yield strength and 70 ksi (480 MPa) minimum tensile strength. (For example, use E70XX for SMAW, F7XX-EXXX for SAW, ER70S-X for GMAW, and E7XT-X for FCAW.) Crane rails shall be as follows: a. Rails 60 to 84 lb./yd. - ASTM A1 b. Rails 104 to 175 lb./yd. - ASTM A759 4.4.10 Checkered floor plate shall be ASTM A786/A786M Pattern 4 or 5 and ASTM A36/A36M. 4.4.11 Welded steel bar grating and grating stair treads shall be ASTM A1011/A1011M, Commercial Steel (Type B), galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123 and NAAMM MBG 531. Top surface of bearing bars shall be plain, unless serrated is specified. Grating stair treads shall have abrasive or checkered plate nosing. 4.4.12 Steel deck shall be in accordance with the SDI Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, Roof Decks and Cellular Deck Floor Systems with Electrical Distribution. 4.4.13 Steel joists shall be in accordance with SJI Standard Specifications and Load Tables. 4.5 Connections 4.5.1 General 4.5.1.1 4.5.1.2 All connections shall be engineer-designed, fabricator-selected, or fabricator-designed. Unless otherwise noted in the contract documents, all connections not fully detailed on the design drawings shall be fabricatorselected.

4.4.9

Process Industry Practices

Page 9 of 18

PIP STS05120 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Fabrication Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
February 2011

4.5.2

Engineer-Designed Connections 4.5.2.1 Engineer-designed connections will be fully designed and detailed on the design drawings provided by purchaser, and shall be furnished as shown. Engineer-designed connections shall be only those connections fully detailed on the design drawings provided by purchaser, showing all fastener sizes, arrangement, dimensions, quantities and grades, and all connection material and weld types, sizes, and lengths for each individual member or part to be joined. This information shall be shown on shop drawings. A request to deviate from the specific details of any engineerdesigned connection shall be in writing, with written approval of the engineer of record. Approval of this submittal constitutes acceptance by engineer of record of design responsibility for the structural adequacy of the changed detail. Such changed details shall also be clearly shown on shop drawings. Fabricator-selected connections shall be those for which engineer of record has authority and responsibility for the design adequacy and fabricator has authority and responsibility for the detailing. Fabricator-selected connections shall be simple connections (shear only, or negligible bending moment). These connections shall be detailed by selecting standard details from the accepted standards listed in Section 2.2 and shall meet all other requirements in the contract documents. The approval by engineer of record of shop drawings detailing fabricator-selected connections constitutes acceptance by engineer of record of design responsibility for the structural adequacy, but not the detailing, of the approved fabricator-selected connections. Fabricator-designed connections shall be designed and detailed to equal or exceed the required strength shown on the design drawings or as provided in the contract documents. A professional engineer shall design or supervise the design of all fabricator-designed connections and be responsible for the structural adequacy. Fabricator-designed connections shall meet all requirements of the contract documents. In all cases, the design shall consider the entire joint (including beams, girders, columns, and bracing) and shall take into account all applicable limit states, including bolt shear, combined bolt tension and shear, prying action, local bending, coped beam capacities, block shear, web buckling, etc.

4.5.2.2

4.5.2.3

4.5.3

Fabricator-Selected Connections 4.5.3.1

4.5.3.2

4.5.3.3

4.5.4

Fabricator-Designed Connections 4.5.4.1

4.5.4.2

4.5.4.3 4.5.4.4

Page 10 of 18

Process Industry Practices

COMPLETE REVISION
February 2011

PIP STS05120 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Fabrication Specification

4.5.4.5

Stiffeners for column webs, column flanges, and for elements of other members involved shall be designed and furnished as required. Checked engineering calculations for each fabricator-designed connection shall be sealed and signed by the responsible professional engineer who designed or supervised the design of the connections. If required by the contract documents, all shop drawings containing fabricator-designed connections shall be sealed and signed by the responsible professional engineer. Review of shop drawings detailing fabricator-designed connections and engineering calculation sheets by engineer of record does not relieve the fabricator of responsibility for both the structural adequacy and detailing of connections designed by the fabricator. Design, detailing, and fabrication of bolted connections shall be in accordance with either AISCs Allowable Strength Design (ASD) or Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) method, as noted in the contract documents. Connection design shall be in accordance with the RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 and A490 Bolts, AISC Steel Construction Manual, and AISC Detailing for Steel Construction. The minimum available strength of all bolted, or mixed bolted and welded, framed beam connections shall be the member end reaction shown on the design drawings. Unless otherwise noted on the design drawings, 3/4 inch (20 mm) diameter ASTM A325/A325M high-strength bolts shall be used in all bolted structural connections. ASTM A325/A325M bolts larger than 3/4-inch (20 mm) diameter shall not be used without specific written approval of the engineer of record. ASTM A307 bolts, 5/8-inch (16 mm) or smaller diameter shall be permitted for ladder, stair tread, purlin, girt, door frame, and handrail connections. ASTM A307 bolts larger than 5/8-inch (16 mm) shall not be permitted. The minimum number of bolts in a framed beam connection shall be two bolts. High-strength bolted connections shall be bearing type A325-N with threads included in the shear plane.

4.5.4.6

4.5.4.7

4.5.4.8

4.5.5

Bolted Connections 4.5.5.1

4.5.5.2

4.5.5.3

4.5.5.4

4.5.5.5

4.5.5.6

4.5.5.7 4.5.5.8 4.5.5.9

4.5.5.10 Slip-critical type connections A325-SC shall be used if noted on the contract documents.

Process Industry Practices

Page 11 of 18

PIP STS05120 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Fabrication Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
February 2011

4.5.5.11 Unless otherwise specified on the design drawings or permitted by the following paragraphs, all bolt holes shall be standard holes as defined by AISC 360. 4.5.5.12 For framed beam bearing connections, horizontal short slotted holes as defined by AISC 360 may be used in the outstanding leg of clip angles if approved by engineer of record. 4.5.5.13 For framed beam slip-critical connections, oversized or horizontal short slotted as defined by AISC 360 holes may be used in the outstanding leg of clip angles if approved by engineer of record. 4.5.5.14 Unless otherwise approved by engineer of record, the long direction of the slot shall be perpendicular to the load direction. 4.5.5.15 Slotted or oversized hole dimensions shall be in accordance with Table J3.3 of the AISC 360. 4.5.5.16 Hardened washers shall be provided under all bolt heads and/or nuts adjacent to any ply with oversized or slotted holes. 4.5.5.17 For standard holes, a minimum of one hardened washer shall be supplied with each bolt. 4.5.5.18 If used, direct tension indicator washers shall be in accordance with ASTM F959/F959M and shall be installed according to the washer manufacturers published specifications. 4.5.5.19 All bolt lengths shall be determined in accordance with the Commentary on Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 and A490 Bolts, Table C2. 4.5.5.20 A minimum of 5% extra quantities of each bolt size and length, including nuts and washers, shall be provided for field erection. 4.5.5.21 Mechanically galvanized bolts or nuts shall not be interchanged with hot dipped galvanized nuts or bolts, respectively. 4.5.5.22 All column splices shall be field bolted and shall be in accordance with AISC Detailing for Steel Construction, Appendix C. 4.5.5.23 All nuts for high-strength bolts shall be wax-dipped to reduce torque during installation. 4.5.5.24 Each bolt component shall be clearly marked with the component manufacturers identification. 4.5.6 Welded Connections 4.5.6.1 Design, detailing, and fabrication of welded connections shall be in accordance with either AISCs Allowable Strength Design (ASD) or Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) method, as noted in the contract documents. Welded connection design shall be in accordance with AISC 360, AISC Steel Construction Manual, and AISC Detailing for Steel Construction. Welding for monorails, lifting lugs and other below

4.5.6.2

Page 12 of 18

Process Industry Practices

COMPLETE REVISION
February 2011

PIP STS05120 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Fabrication Specification

the hook devices required for lifting or rigging shall conform to AWS D14.1. 4.5.6.3 The minimum available strength of all welded framed beam connections shall be the member end reaction shown on the design drawings. Minimum fillet weld size shall be AISC minimum or 3/16 inch (5 mm), whichever is larger, for structural welds. Seal welds shall be 1/8 inch (3 mm) minimum fillet weld. Welds shall be continuous, unless otherwise indicated on design drawings or approved by engineer of record. Erection clips for field welded connections shall be provided. All run-off bars and extension tabs shall be removed unless otherwise noted. Unless otherwise shown on the design drawings, all field connections shall be bolted and all shop connections shall be either bolted or welded. To ensure electrical continuity if shop applying non-conductive coatings (i.e., epoxies), all contact surfaces shall be masked unless otherwise noted in the contract documents. All locations of no-paint or areas requiring full masking or strip masking shall be noted on the shop drawings. Provide additional bolts or connection devices where required to comply with OSHA 29 CFR Part 1926, Subpart R Steel Erection. Unless otherwise noted on the design drawings, connections for pre-assembled bracing and truss members shall be designed for the required strength shown on the design drawings, but not less than 50% of the available tensile strength of the member. The available tensile strength of the member shall be calculated using the gross cross section of the member. A minimum of two bolts per connection shall be provided. All cross bracing shall be bolted at intersections with one bolt minimum for angles and two bolts minimum for tees. All bracing connections, including gusset plates, shall be designed in accordance with the AISC 360 and AISC Steel Construction Manual. All gusset and stiffener plates shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm) minimum thickness.

4.5.6.4 4.5.6.5 4.5.6.6 4.5.6.7 4.5.6.8 4.5.7

Shop and Field Connections 4.5.7.1

4.5.7.2

4.5.7.3 4.5.7.4 4.5.8

Bracing Connections 4.5.8.1

4.5.8.2 4.5.8.3 4.5.8.4 4.5.8.5

4.5.8.6

Process Industry Practices

Page 13 of 18

PIP STS05120 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Fabrication Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
February 2011

4.5.8.7 4.5.8.8

Unless otherwise noted on the design drawings, all vertical bracing and knee bracing shall have gusset plates on column centerlines. Unless otherwise noted on the design drawings, the following working points shall be used: a. For vertical bracing at the intersection of a column, beam, and brace, the gusset plate shall be connected to both beam and column. The work point shall be the point at which the beam and column centerlines intersect. b. For the connection of V-braces to nominal beams 10 inches (250 mm) or smaller, the working point shall be the intersection of the horizontal centerline of the beam and the centerline of the bay. c. For the connection of V-braces to nominal beams 12 inches (300 mm) or larger, the working point shall be the intersection of a horizontal line 5 inches (125 mm) below the top flange if the brace is above the beam, or 5 inches above the bottom flange if the brace is below the beam, and the centerline of the bay.

4.5.9

Connections for Concrete Fireproofed Members 4.5.9.1 4.5.9.2 Connections for members fireproofed with concrete shall be detailed to minimize blockouts in shop applied fireproofing. Gusset plates for vertical or horizontal bracing members and single-plate shear connections for beams shall extend outside fireproofing a sufficient length to make the connection with the fireproofing in place. Handrails shall not be connected to fireproofed columns.

4.5.9.3 4.6 Fabrication 4.6.1

All fabrication shall be in accordance with the AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges and the AISC Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, state or local laws, or building codes. All welding shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1. Shop splices, substitutions of member sizes, or changes in details or dimensions shall not be permitted without written authorization from engineer of record. All beams, except cantilevers, shall be fabricated with natural mill camber in the up position. All re-entrant corners shall be shaped, notched-free, to a radius. If performing shop assembly work, the tolerances shall not exceed those specified in AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.

4.6.2 4.6.3

4.6.4 4.6.5 4.6.6

Page 14 of 18

Process Industry Practices

COMPLETE REVISION
February 2011

PIP STS05120 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Fabrication Specification

4.6.7

All pieces shall be clearly marked with a permanent identifying erection mark number. Method and location of marking shall be approved by purchaser. Before surface preparation, all sharp corners, burrs (including bolt hole burrs), weld spatter, slag, weld flux, loose mill scale and other foreign matter shall be removed. Platforms, stairways, and handrails shall be shop assembled in the largest units suitable for handling and shipping. Ladder cages shall be shop assembled on ladders.

4.6.8

4.6.9

4.6.10 The method for fastening grating shall be as specified on the design drawings. A minimum of two fasteners per panel shall be used at each support, with a minimum of four per panel. The fasteners shall be supplied with 5% extra to cover losses. 4.6.11 Grating/checkered plate openings dimensioned on the design drawings shall be cut and banded in the shop as shown on the design drawings. 4.6.12 Undimensioned grating/checkered plate openings shall be cut in the field by others. 4.6.13 Joints perpendicular to the span of grating and checkered plate flooring shall be permitted only over support members. 4.6.14 Checkered plate shall have 1/2 inch (12 mm) diameter drain holes provided for each 20 square feet (2 square meters) of area, with a minimum of one hole per panel. 4.7 Galvanizing 4.7.1 General 4.7.1.1 Unless otherwise noted in the contract documents, all materials, except ASTM A490 bolts, ASTM A490M bolts, and crane rails, shall be galvanized. Galvanizing of steel shapes, plates, and hardware shall be in accordance with the following ASTM specifications: a. Steel shapes and plates - ASTM A123 b. ASTM A325/A325M bolts and corresponding nuts and washers - ASTM B695 or ASTM F2329 c. ASTM A36/A36M threaded bar or ASTM A307 bolts and corresponding nuts and washers - ASTM F2329 or ASTM B695 4.7.2 Fabrication 4.7.2.1 It shall be the fabricators responsibility to safeguard against embrittlement and warpage in accordance with ASTM A143 and ASTM A384. Fabrication details shall be in accordance with ASTM A385 to allow for the creation of high quality zinc coatings.

4.7.1.2

4.7.2.2

Process Industry Practices

Page 15 of 18

PIP STS05120 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Fabrication Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
February 2011

4.7.2.3 4.7.2.4 4.7.2.5 4.7.2.6 4.7.2.7 4.7.3

If practical, cutting, drilling and welding shall be performed before galvanizing. Weld slag shall be removed before galvanizing. The edges of tightly contacting surfaces shall be completely seal welded. Vent holes shall be provided for piping or tubular assemblies as required by ASTM A385. Potential problems that require a modification in design shall be brought to the attention of the purchaser before proceeding. Nuts shall be tapped oversize in accordance with ASTM A563/A563M. Nut threads shall be retapped after hot-dip galvanizing to provide proper fit. Direct tension indicators, if used, shall be mechanically galvanized by the indicator manufacturer in accordance with Class 50 of ASTM B695. Any damage to galvanizing shall be repaired in accordance with ASTM A780. Before repair of damaged galvanized coating, exposed substrate metal shall be cleaned to bright metal and free of all visual rust, oil, or grease. Any nonadhering galvanizing shall be removed to the extent that the surrounding galvanizing is integral and adherent. If surface defects exceed 2% of a members area, the defects shall be repaired by redipping the member in the zinc bath. Cold repair using an organic zinc rich coating shall be permitted if the following conditions exist: a. Total damaged area is less than 1% of the total coated area of the member being repaired
2 b. No single repair is greater than 2 square inches (1300 mm )

Galvanizing of Steel Hardware 4.7.3.1 4.7.3.2 4.7.3.3

4.7.4

Repair 4.7.4.1 4.7.4.2

4.7.4.3 4.7.4.4

c. No single repair is greater than 12 inches (300 mm) long. 4.7.4.5 For coating applied for a cold repair, the dry film thickness shall be 2 to 3 mils (0.05 mm to 0.08 mm) and contain a minimum of 65% zinc dust by weight.

Page 16 of 18

Process Industry Practices

COMPLETE REVISION
February 2011

PIP STS05120 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Fabrication Specification

4.7.4.6

Hot repairs shall be made in the shop if any of the following conditions exist: a. Total damaged area is greater than 1% but less than 2% of the total coated area of the member being repaired b. Any single repair is at least 2 square inches (1300 mm2) in area c. Any single repair is 12 inches (300 mm) long or more

4.7.4.7 4.7.4.8 4.7.4.9

Hot repair shall be made using zinc alloy rod or powder manufactured for the repair of galvanized steel. Flux, heavy ash, or heavy dross inclusions shall be removed by brushing, grinding, or filing as required. Galvanized steel which has been rejected shall be stripped, regalvanized, and submitted again for inspection.

4.7.4.10 Correction of excessive warpage that exceeds ASTM A6/A6M criteria shall be performed by press straightening if possible. 4.7.4.11 The application of localized heating to straighten shall be approved by engineer of record. 4.7.4.12 If galvanized tension control bolts are used, all bare steel surfaces (i.e., bolt ends) shall be repair galvanized in accordance with this section. 4.8 Handling, Shipping, and Delivery 4.8.1 Delivery of steel shall be in the order needed for erection. The delivery sequence for the fabricated steel, unless otherwise noted in the contract documents or arranged by the purchaser, shall be as follows: a. Loose base plates b. Steel embedded in concrete c. Erection bolts d. First tier columns and framing for all its levels (including stairs, grating, and handrail) e. Second tier columns and its framing, etc. 4.8.2 4.8.3 4.8.4 4.8.5 4.8.6 All bolts, washers, and nuts shall be packaged and delivered in rigid (not cardboard), weatherproof containers. Railcars and/or trucks shall be loaded and cribbed so they can be readily unloaded by others. Railcars and/or trucks shall be loaded in such a manner that continuous drainage is assured. All steel and its coatings shall be protected from any damage caused by handling, storage, or shipping before receipt by the purchaser. Adequate protection shall be provided for threads on sag rods and any other threaded components to prevent damage during shipping and handling.

Process Industry Practices

Page 17 of 18

PIP STS05120 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Fabrication Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
February 2011

4.8.7 4.8.8

All materials and documentation shall be delivered to the job site in good condition. All materials and documentation will be inspected by the purchaser immediately upon receipt to determine that all items included in the bill of materials have been supplied, to assure that all documentation has been received, and to check for any damage. The purchaser reserves the right to reject all damaged or below quality material or documentation.

4.8.9

Page 18 of 18

Process Industry Practices

COMPLETE REVISION
February 2011

Process Industry Practices Structural

PIP STS05130 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Erection Specification

PURPOSE AND USE OF PROCESS INDUSTRY PRACTICES In an effort to minimize the cost of process industry facilities, this Practice has been prepared from the technical requirements in the existing standards of major industrial users, contractors, or standards organizations. By harmonizing these technical requirements into a single set of Practices, administrative, application, and engineering costs to both the purchaser and the manufacturer should be reduced. While this Practice is expected to incorporate the majority of requirements of most users, individual applications may involve requirements that will be appended to and take precedence over this Practice. Determinations concerning fitness for purpose and particular matters or application of the Practice to particular project or engineering situations should not be made solely on information contained in these materials. The use of trade names from time to time should not be viewed as an expression of preference but rather recognized as normal usage in the trade. Other brands having the same specifications are equally correct and may be substituted for those named. All Practices or guidelines are intended to be consistent with applicable laws and regulations including OSHA requirements. To the extent these Practices or guidelines should conflict with OSHA or other applicable laws or regulations, such laws or regulations must be followed. Consult an appropriate professional before applying or acting on any material contained in or suggested by the Practice. This Practice is subject to revision at any time. Process Industry Practices (PIP), Construction Industry Institute, The University of Texas at Austin, 3925 West Braker Lane (R4500), Austin, Texas 78759. PIP Member Companies and Subscribers may copy this Practice for their internal use. Changes or modifications of any kind are not permitted within any PIP Practice without the express written authorization of PIP. Authorized Users may attach addenda or overlays to clearly indicate modifications or exceptions to specific sections of PIP Practices. Authorized Users may provide their clients, suppliers and contractors with copies of the Practice solely for Authorized Users purposes. These purposes include but are not limited to the procurement process (e.g., as attachments to requests for quotation/ purchase orders or requests for proposals/contracts) and preparation and issue of design engineering deliverables for use on a specific project by Authorized Users client. PIPs copyright notices must be clearly indicated and unequivocally incorporated in documents where an Authorized User desires to provide any third party with copies of the Practice.

PRINTING HISTORY November 1994 Issued December 1998 Revision February 2002 Technical Correction February 2011 Complete Revision Not printed with State funds

COMPLETE REVISION
February 2011

Process Industry Practices Structural

PIP STS05130 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Erection Specification


Table of Contents 1. Introduction................................. 2
1.1 Purpose ............................................ 2 1.2 Scope ............................................... 2

2. References .................................. 2
2.1 Process Industry Practices .............. 2 2.2 Industry Codes and Standards ........ 2 2.3 Government Regulations ................. 3

3. Definitions ................................... 3 4. Requirements.............................. 4


4.1 General ............................................ 4 4.2 Products and Materials .................... 6 4.3 Execution ......................................... 6

Drawing
STS05130-01 Field Located and Field Fabricated Grating Openings

Process Industry Practices

Page 1 of 10

PIP STS05130 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Erection Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
February 2011

1.

Introduction
1.1 Purpose This Practice provides the requirements for structural and miscellaneous steel erection. 1.2 Scope This Practice describes the requirements for the receipt, handling, erection, assembly, and field inspection of structural and miscellaneous steel. Structural and miscellaneous steel are as defined in AISC Code of Standard Practice.

2.

References
Applicable parts of the following Practices, industry codes and standards, and references shall be considered an integral part of this Practice. The edition in effect on the date of contract award shall be used, except as otherwise noted. Short titles are used herein where appropriate. 2.1 Process Industry Practices (PIP) PIP STS03600 - Cementitious Grout Specification PIP STS03601 - Epoxy Grout Specification PIP STS05120 - Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Fabrication Specification 2.2 Industry Codes and Standards American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) AISC 303 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges ANSI/AISC 360 - Specification for Structural Steel Buildings AISC Steel Construction Manual American Society of Safety Engineers (ASSE) ASSE A10.13 - Safety Requirements for Steel Erection American National Standard for Construction and Demolition Operations American Welding Society (AWS) AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code Steel ASTM International (ASTM) ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength (AASHTO No. M164) ASTM A325M - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa Minimum Tensile Strength (Metric) ASTM A490 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength (AASHTO No. M253) ASTM A490M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Steel Bolts, Classes 10.9 and 10.9.3, for Structural Steel Joints (Metric)

Page 2 of 10

Process Industry Practices

COMPLETE REVISION
February 2011

PIP STS05130 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Erection Specification

Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC) RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts Steel Deck Institute (SDI) SDI Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks and Roof Decks Steel Joist Institute (SJI) SJI Standard Specifications and Load Tables 2.3 Government Regulations Requirements by state or local agencies that have jurisdiction where the structural steel is to be erected, shall apply. U.S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) OSHA 29 CFR Part 1910 OSHA 29 CFR Part 1926

3.

Definitions
contract documents: Any and all documents, including codes, studies, design drawings, specifications, sketches, practices, and data sheets, that the purchaser or engineer of record has transmitted or otherwise communicated, either by incorporation or reference, and made part of the legal contract agreement or purchase order between the purchaser and the erector. engineer of record: Purchasers authorized representative with overall authority and responsibility for the engineering design, quality, and performance of the civil works, structure, foundations, materials, and appurtenances described in the contract documents. The engineer of record shall be licensed as defined by the laws of the locality in which the work is to be constructed, and be qualified to practice in the specialty discipline required for the work described in the contract documents. Also known as structural engineer of record in AISC Code of Standard Practice. erector: The party responsible for erecting structural and miscellaneous steel in accordance with the contract documents. The term erector shall apply also to the fabricators subcontractor(s) and/or vendor(s). inspector: The party responsible for verifying the quality of all materials, installations, and workmanship furnished by the erector. The inspector shall be qualified by training and experience and hold certifications or documentation of their qualifications. Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, the inspector shall be retained by the erector. manufacturer: The party who produces and warrants the performance of the products, materials, and/or items provided in accordance with the contract documents. The products, materials, and/or items are manufactured in a controlled process using standard codes, specifications, tests and possibly include shop drawings to assist in proper application, installation and/or use. The term manufacturer shall apply also to the manufacturers subcontractor(s) and/or vendor(s). owner: The party who owns the facility wherein the structural steel will be used.

Process Industry Practices

Page 3 of 10

PIP STS05130 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Erection Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
February 2011

professional engineer: An engineer, other than the engineer of record licensed as defined by the laws of the locality in which the steel is to be erected, and qualified to practice in the specialty discipline required for the work described in the contract documents. purchaser: The party who awards the contract to the erector. The purchaser may be the owner or the owners authorized agent.

4.

Requirements
4.1 General 4.1.1 Quality Control 4.1.1.1 Unless approved by the engineer of record, erector shall participate in the AISC Certification Program and be designated an AISC Certified Erector, Category ACSE. The erector shall be solely responsible for the quality control of all the erector-supplied materials, installations, and workmanship. A written Quality Control Program and Inspection Procedures document that shall provide details of how compliance with the requirements of this Practice and the shop and erection drawings shall be achieved, shall be provided. A complete up-to-date set of erection drawings at the jobsite shall be maintained. Bolted connections shall be installed and inspected in accordance with the RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 and A490 Bolts. Welding procedures and individual welders shall be qualified in accordance with the requirements of AWS D1.1. All welding shall be inspected in accordance with AWS D1.1. Inspectors shall be qualified and certified as AWS Certified Welding Inspectors in accordance with the provisions of AWS D1.1 or AWS QC1 or shall be trained by and working under the supervision of an AWS Certified Welding Inspector. The inspector shall inspect all materials, installations, and workmanship to ensure conformance with all requirements of this Practice and the contract documents. The purchaser shall have the right to inspect all materials, installations, and workmanship and shall have an unrestricted right of access to the work areas.

4.1.1.2 4.1.1.3

4.1.1.4 4.1.1.5

4.1.1.6 4.1.1.7

4.1.1.8

4.1.1.9

4.1.1.10 The purchaser may reject any improper, inferior, defective, or unsuitable materials, installations, and workmanship. 4.1.1.11 Rejected materials, installations, and workmanship shall be repaired or replaced in accordance with the purchasers instructions at no cost to the purchaser.

Page 4 of 10

Process Industry Practices

COMPLETE REVISION
February 2011

PIP STS05130 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Erection Specification

4.1.1.12 Inspection tools and tool calibration records for tools used shall be maintained and available for examination by the purchaser. 4.1.2 Submittals 4.1.2.1 The following items shall be submitted to the engineer of record for approval. Work shall not proceed without approval. a. Safety program b. Quality control program and inspection procedures c. Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) d. Procedure Qualification Records (PQR) e. Welder(s) qualification records f. 4.1.2.2 Assembly lift plan(s) as required by the purchaser or OSHA 29 CFR Part 1926 Subpart R

If requested, the following documents shall be submitted to the purchaser for recording purposes: a. Quality control inspections and test results b. Calibration or recalibration performed on the tools or equipment used during the work

4.1.3

Performance Requirements
4.1.3.1 Safety

1. A written safety program shall be provided that addresses the safety measures that shall be used during steel erection work. 2. The safety program shall be in accordance with the requirements of: a. The contract documents b. AISC Code of Standard Practice for Structural Steel Buildings and Bridges (AISC 303) c. Applicable portions of OSHA 29 CFR Part 1910 and Part 1926 d. Any other applicable federal, state, or local requirements
4.1.3.2 Assembly Lift Plan

The erector shall be responsible for assuring that all preassemblies that are not specifically shown or noted on the design drawings to be preassembled before lifting shall maintain structural integrity during lifting. 1. A written assembly lift plan, prepared by a professional engineer, shall be provided for assemblies larger than 50 feet (15 meters) in one direction, larger than 2,000 square feet (186 square meters) in the plan area, greater than 50 tons (45 metric tons), or if required by the contract documents.

Process Industry Practices

Page 5 of 10

PIP STS05130 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Erection Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
February 2011

2. The assembly lift plan shall demonstrate that the proposed lift shall be performed safely and that the assemblies being lifted shall remain free from distortion or undue bending, and maintain structural integrity during the lift. 3. The assembly lift plan shall contain detailed data on the extent of the lifted assembly, its weights, the structural calculations that prove structural stability of the assembled components during lifting operations, verification of the capacity capabilities for any cranes utilized in the lift, location and positioning of the cranes, and a description of the rigging to be utilized. 4. Review of the assembly lift plan by the purchaser does not relieve the erectors responsibility for the safe erection and/or lifting of any component, structural assembly, or any other item. 4.2 Products and Materials Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be in accordance with PIP STS05120. 4.3 Execution 4.3.1 Receiving, Inspection, and Storage 4.3.1.1 All materials shall be received, unloaded, stored, and otherwise handled in a manner that prevents distortion, deterioration, damage, or staining. Materials shall be kept free of dirt, grease, and other foreign matter. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be inspected immediately after receipt to ensure that the materials are not damaged, that all items on the packing list have been supplied, and that all documentation has been received. If any damage is discovered, or any parts, components, or documentation are missing or otherwise defective, the occurrence shall be immediately reported to the purchaser in writing. Erection of structural steel shall be in accordance with: a. The drawings and other contract documents b. AISC Code of Standard Practice for Structural Steel Buildings and Bridges (AISC 303) c. OSHA 29 CFR Part 1910 and Part 1926 d. Applicable state, municipal, or local regulations or codes 4.3.2.2 Any circumstances discovered that affect progression, performance, or completion of the work activities shall be immediately reported to the purchaser in writing. These may

4.3.1.2 4.3.1.3

4.3.1.4

4.3.2

Erection 4.3.2.1

Page 6 of 10

Process Industry Practices

COMPLETE REVISION
February 2011

PIP STS05130 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Erection Specification

include, but are not limited to, discrepancies between the erection/shop drawings and the delivered steel members, incorrectly fabricated steel members, or incomplete or unacceptable work of other contractors affecting the work. 4.3.2.3 Any damage caused during erection shall be reported to the purchaser in writing. Corrective measures shall be completed as directed by the purchaser at no cost to the purchaser. Erection of steel joists shall be in accordance with: a. The requirements of the Steel Joist Institute (SJI) b. The joist manufacturer c. OSHA 29 CFR 1926 Subpart R 4.3.2.5 Temporary erection loads or permanent loads shall not be placed on any incomplete portions of the structure being erected unless it can be demonstrated by analysis that the contemplated action is safe. Loose timbers, metal sheeting, bolt buckles, tools, debris, and temporary scaffolding shall be kept restrained or removed from work areas. Lifting of painted or galvanized structural members shall be performed with a nonabrasive choker. A daily record, by piece number, of all material erected shall be maintained. Before commencing work, the foundations and other connection points shall be checked to confirm their location, orientation, elevation, and condition. a. The requirements of the Steel Deck Institute (SDI) b. The deck manufacturer c. OSHA 29 CFR 1926 Subpart R 4.3.2.11 Where connecting to existing structures, protect existing structure from weather. 4.3.3 Structural Stability 4.3.3.1 During construction, the erector shall be responsible for maintaining the structure in a stable condition; ensuring that no part shall be overstressed during construction activities. It shall be the erectors responsibility to specify, install and locate all temporary bracing and/or guy cables to maintain the partassembled structure in a stable condition under a combination of construction and wind loads. This responsibility shall also extend to temporary bracing required to ensure safe and stable conditions of partially completed structural assemblies.

4.3.2.4

4.3.2.6

4.3.2.7 4.3.2.8 4.3.2.9

4.3.2.10 Erection of steel deck shall be in accordance with:

Process Industry Practices

Page 7 of 10

PIP STS05130 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Erection Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
February 2011

4.3.3.2

The structure shall be plumbed, leveled, and braced before any final bolted or welded connections are made and before grouting of base plates. The top of bearing surfaces and the bottom of base plates shall be cleaned. The column base plates shall be set and shimmed to correct positions, elevations, and locations as shown on the erection drawings. Shims or wedges shall be provided where required. If setting nuts are used, they shall be loosened before grouting. Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, base plates shall be grouted in accordance with PIP STS03600 or PIP STS03601. Grout shall fill any anchor bolt sleeves and/or shear key openings. Cut off exposed edges of grout at 45 degrees along the edges of base plates after grout has acquired its initial set. If required in the contract documents, anchor bolts shall be tightened to the specified tension. Anchor bolts shall be fully tightened to the specified tension only after the base plates have been grouted and the grout has sufficiently set in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. If structural joints are made using high-strength bolt assemblies, the materials, methods of installation, tension control, types of wrenches to be used, and inspection methods shall be in accordance with the RCSC Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 and A490 Bolts and the contract documents. If used, direct tension indicator (DTI) washers shall be installed according to the washer manufacturers published specifications. All bolts shall be as noted on the shop drawings, erection drawings, or other contract documents. Mechanically galvanized bolts and nuts shall not be intermixed with hot-dip galvanized nuts and bolts. If ASTM A307 bolt assemblies are used for connecting appurtenances (i.e., handrail assemblies, pipe supports, gates, etc.) to structural steel members, the bolts shall be tightened to a snugtight condition. ASTM A490/A490M bolts and galvanized ASTM A325/A325M bolts shall not be reused.

4.3.4

Setting Base Plates 4.3.4.1 4.3.4.2

4.3.4.3 4.3.4.4 4.3.4.5

4.3.4.6 4.3.4.7

4.3.5

Bolted Connections 4.3.5.1

4.3.5.2 4.3.5.3 4.3.5.4 4.3.5.5

4.3.5.6

Page 8 of 10

Process Industry Practices

COMPLETE REVISION
February 2011

PIP STS05130 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Erection Specification

4.3.5.7

Bolts that have been pretensioned shall be color coded, die punched, or otherwise marked on the ends indicating that the bolts have been properly tensioned and are ready for inspection. All welding shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1. Unless approved otherwise by the purchaser, all welds shall be continuous. Minimum fillet weld size shall be AISC minimum 3/16 inch (5 mm), whichever is larger, for structural welds. Seal welds shall be 1/8-inch (3-mm) minimum fillet weld. Welds to connection plates embedded in concrete shall be deposited in a sequence that minimizes distortion of the embedment to plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) of flat or true. If the contract documents require welding to existing facilities that were constructed before 1963 and/or using steel other than ASTM A36, erector shall follow the welding procedure provided by the engineer of record. Fit-up bolts and drift pins shall not be used to bring improperly fabricated members and parts into place (springing). Drift pins shall not be driven with such a force as to damage adjacent metal areas. Holes in connections that misfit by more than 1/16 inch (1 mm) shall be corrected as directed by the engineer of record. Enlargement of holes shall be made only when approved by the engineer of record, and made by reaming or drilling only. Flame cutting, burning, gouging, chipping, or drift punching shall not be permitted. Unless approved by the engineer of record, packing, shimming, filling, or wedging shall not be permitted to correct faulty work. One filler plate up to 1/8-inch (3-mm) thickness may be used in spaces between members to be bolted. The engineer of records approval shall be required for filler plate requirements greater than 1/8 inch (3 mm). Field welding or bolting joists to supporting steel framework shall be in accordance with the SJI specifications for the type of joists used, the erection/shop drawings, and other contract documents. Modifications or repairs to steel joists shall not be performed without prior written approval of the engineer of record.

4.3.6

Welded Connections 4.3.6.1 4.3.6.2 4.3.6.3 4.3.6.4 4.3.6.5

4.3.6.6

4.3.7

Correction of Errors 4.3.7.1 4.3.7.2 4.3.7.3 4.3.7.4

4.3.7.5 4.3.7.6

4.3.8

Steel Joists 4.3.8.1

4.3.8.2

Process Industry Practices

Page 9 of 10

PIP STS05130 Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Erection Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
February 2011

4.3.8.3 4.3.9

Use of power-driven or powder-actuated fasteners in the diagonal and bottom chord members of the joists shall not be permitted. All field-cut floor plate or grating openings requiring toe plate protection or banding shall be installed in accordance with detail STS05130-01. The grating and floor plate shall be fastened in accordance with the design drawings. A minimum of four fasteners per panel shall be used.

Floor Plate and Grating 4.3.9.1

4.3.9.2

4.3.10 Metal Decking for Floors and Roofs 4.3.10.1 Floor and roof deck sheets shall be installed in accordance with the deck manufacturers installation instructions and the contract documents. 4.3.10.2 All sags, deformations, holes, and other irregularities shall be repaired. 4.3.10.3 If damage has occurred to shop-applied coatings on metal decking, field touch-up shall be in accordance with the decking manufacturers recommendations. 4.3.11 Shear Connectors 4.3.11.1 All shear stud attachments shall be welded in strict accordance with the stud manufacturers recommendations for welding procedure and welding equipment. 4.3.11.2 If two or more stud welding guns are operated from the same power source, the guns shall be interlocked so that only one gun can be operated at a time to ensure that the power source has fully recovered from making one weld before another weld is started. 4.3.11.3 All ceramic insulators shall be removed from the base of the studs after welding. 4.3.12 Coating Repairs 4.3.12.1 All erection damage to hot-dip galvanized coatings shall be repaired in accordance with PIP STS05120. 4.3.12.2 All erection damage to shop-applied paint coatings shall be repaired in accordance with the purchasers coating specification. 4.3.12.3 All galvanized bolt assemblies tightened against shop-applied paint shall be painted. 4.3.12.4 Where twist-off bolt assemblies are used, ends of bolts shall be coated to match the steel coating system.

Page 10 of 10

Process Industry Practices

April 2002

Process Industry Practices Structural

PIP STF05511 Fixed Industrial Stairs

PURPOSE AND USE OF PROCESS INDUSTRY PRACTICES In an effort to minimize the cost of process industry facilities, this Practice has been prepared from the technical requirements in the existing standards of major industrial users, contractors, or standards organizations. By harmonizing these technical requirements into a single set of Practices, administrative, application, and engineering costs to both the purchaser and the manufacturer should be reduced. While this Practice is expected to incorporate the majority of requirements of most users, individual applications may involve requirements that will be appended to and take precedence over this Practice. Determinations concerning fitness for purpose and particular matters or application of the Practice to particular project or engineering situations should not be made solely on information contained in these materials. The use of trade names from time to time should not be viewed as an expression of preference but rather recognized as normal usage in the trade. Other brands having the same specifications are equally correct and may be substituted for those named. All Practices or guidelines are intended to be consistent with applicable laws and regulations including OSHA requirements. To the extent these Practices or guidelines should conflict with OSHA or other applicable laws or regulations, such laws or regulations must be followed. Consult an appropriate professional before applying or acting on any material contained in or suggested by the Practice. This Practice is subject to revision at any time by the responsible Function Team and will be reviewed every 5 years. This Practice will be revised, reaffirmed, or withdrawn. Information on whether this Practice has been revised may be found at www.pip.org.

Process Industry Practices (PIP), Construction Industry Institute, The University of Texas at Austin, 3925 West Braker Lane (R4500), Austin, Texas 78759. PIP member companies and subscribers may copy this Practice for their internal use. Changes, overlays, addenda, or modifications of any kind are not permitted within any PIP Practice without the express written authorization of PIP.

PIP will not consider requests for interpretations (inquiries) for this Practice.

Not printed with State funds

April 2002

Process Industry Practices Structural

PIP STF05511 Fixed Industrial Stairs


Table of Contents 1. Introduction .................................. 2
1.1 Purpose ............................................. 2 1.2 Scope................................................. 2

2. References ................................... 2
2.1 Process Industry Practices ................ 2 2.2 Industry Codes and Standards .......... 2 2.3 Government Regulations ................... 3

3. Design ......................................... 3 List of Details


Plan at Landing .......................................... 5 Section A-A ................................................ 6 Section B-B ................................................ 6 Section C-C................................................ 7 Detail 1....................................................... 8 Detail 2....................................................... 8 Detail 3....................................................... 9 Detail 4....................................................... 9 Section D-D.............................................. 10 Section E-E .............................................. 10 Detail 5..................................................... 11 Detail 6..................................................... 11

Process Industry Practices

Page 1 of 11

PIP STF05511 Fixed Industrial Stairs

April 2002

1.

Introduction
1.1 Purpose This Practice provides the fabricator and erector with a standard fixed industrial stair design to be used in process industry facilities. This Practice also provides process industry companies with design guide information to be used in specifying and designing fixed industrial stairs. 1.2 Scope This Practice contains the design details for fabrication and installation of typical OSHA-regulated stairs for open structures and miscellaneous platforms for regular operational access/egress. Details comply with NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code for Industrial Occupancies. These details are to be issued to fabricators supplying these stairs and to the erectors for use in installation. Any conflicts or inconsistencies between this Practice and the design drawings or other contract documents shall be brought to the attention of the buyer for resolution.

2.

References
Applicable requirements in the following PIP Practices, codes, and standards shall be considered an integral part of this Practice. The edition in effect on the date of contract award shall be used, except as otherwise noted. Short titles will be used herein when appropriate. 2.1 Process Industry Practices (PIP) PIP STS05120 - Fabrication of Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Specification PIP STS05130 - Erection of Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Specification PIP STF05520 - Pipe Railing for Walking and Working Surface Details PIP STF05521 - Angle Railing for Walking and Working Surface Details 2.2 Industry Codes and Standards American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/American Society of Safety Engineers (ASSE) ANSI A1264.1 - Safety Requirements for Workplace Floor and Wall Openings, Stairs, and Railing Systems American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners

Page 2 of 11

Process Industry Practices

April 2002

PIP STF05511 Fixed Industrial Stairs

National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code 2.3 Government Regulations Federal standards and instructions of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration and any additional requirements by state or local agencies that have jurisdiction where the stairs are to be installed shall apply. The user should determine whether local codes exist that should be applied to this Practice. U.S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) OSHA 29 CFR 1910, Subpart D - Walking-Working Surfaces

3.

Design
3.1 The project design drawings and data sheets specify the location, orientation, and arrangement of stairs for regular operational use, special fabrication details, and any changes to the requirements of this Practice. All structural material shall be steel and shall comply with PIP STS05120 unless noted otherwise. All welds shall be smooth, continuous, and sealed. Fabrication shall comply with PIP STS05120. Stair design is based on a moving 1000-lbs (4.5-kN) concentrated live load applied to the stair stringers or a uniform load of 100 psf (4.8 kPa) applied to the stair assembly. Stair treads shall resist a 300-lbs (1.33-kN) concentrated load applied at mid span. Maximum height between landings shall not exceed 12.0 feet (3.7 m). Stair width shall be 30 inches (75 cm) unless noted otherwise. The engineer shall check the stair width against NFPA 101 requirements according to total occupant load served by the stairway. NFPA 101 has the following requirements: 3.7 For 20 people or fewer, the minimum width shall be 22 inches (56 cm). For 21 to 49 people, the minimum width shall be 36 inches (91 cm). For 50 or more people, the minimum width shall be 44 inches (112 cm).

3.2 3.3 3.4

3.5 3.6

Stairs shall be installed at angles to the horizontal plane of between 30 deg. and 42 deg.

Process Industry Practices

Page 3 of 11

PIP STF05511 Fixed Industrial Stairs

April 2002

3.8

Minimum tread depth shall be 10 inches (25.4 cm). Maximum riser height shall be 9 inches (22.9 cm). Some rise/tread combinations within the permissible range are as follows:
Angle to Horizontal (deg.) 30.6 32.5* 35.5 38.7 40.4 42 Rise (inches [cm]) 6.5 (16.5) 7 (17.8) 7.5 (19.1) 8 (20.3) 8.5 (21.6) 9 (22.9) Tread Depth (inches [cm]) 11 (27.9) 11 (27.9) 10.5 (26.7) 10 (25.4) 10 (25.4) 10 (25.4) Nominal Tread Width (inches [cm]) 12 (30.5) 12 (30.5) 12 (30.5) 11 (27.9) 11 (27.9) 11 (27.9)

*A minimum tread depth of 11 inches (27.9 cm) and a maximum rise height of 7 inches (17.8 cm) shall be used where stairs service areas other than industrial equipment access or where more than 20 people will use the stairs as a means of egress.

3.9 3.10

Stair railing shall comply with the requirements of PIP STF05520 or PIP STF05521. Stair assemblies shall be coated after fabrication in accordance with the design drawings and the specifications governing the project. Galvanizing (when required) shall be done after fabrication and in accordance with PIP STS05120. Erection of stairs shall comply with PIP STS05130.

3.11

Page 4 of 11

Process Industry Practices

COMPLETE REVISION
April 2007

Process Industry Practices Civil

PIP CVS02100 Site Preparation, Excavation, and Backfill Specification

PURPOSE AND USE OF PROCESS INDUSTRY PRACTICES In an effort to minimize the cost of process industry facilities, this Practice has been prepared from the technical requirements in the existing standards of major industrial users, contractors, or standards organizations. By harmonizing these technical requirements into a single set of Practices, administrative, application, and engineering costs to both the purchaser and the manufacturer should be reduced. While this Practice is expected to incorporate the majority of requirements of most users, individual applications may involve requirements that will be appended to and take precedence over this Practice. Determinations concerning fitness for purpose and particular matters or application of the Practice to particular project or engineering situations should not be made solely on information contained in these materials. The use of trade names from time to time should not be viewed as an expression of preference but rather recognized as normal usage in the trade. Other brands having the same specifications are equally correct and may be substituted for those named. All Practices or guidelines are intended to be consistent with applicable laws and regulations including OSHA requirements. To the extent these Practices or guidelines should conflict with OSHA or other applicable laws or regulations, such laws or regulations must be followed. Consult an appropriate professional before applying or acting on any material contained in or suggested by the Practice. This Practice is subject to revision at any time.

Process Industry Practices (PIP), Construction Industry Institute, The University of Texas at Austin, 3925 West Braker Lane (R4500), Austin, Texas 78759. PIP member companies and subscribers may copy this Practice for their internal use. Changes, overlays, addenda, or modifications of any kind are not permitted within any PIP Practice without the express written authorization of PIP.

PRINTING HISTORY March 1996 Issued May 2001 Complete Revision April 2007 Complete Revision Not printed with State funds

COMPLETE REVISION
April 2007

Process Industry Practices Civil

PIP CVS02100 Site Preparation, Excavation, and Backfill Specification


Table of Contents 1. Introduction................................. 2
1.1 Purpose ............................................. 2 1.2 Scope................................................. 2 2.1 Process Industry Practices ................ 2 2.2 Industry Codes and Standards .......... 2 2.3 Government Regulations................... 3

2. References .................................. 2

3. Definitions ................................... 3 4. Requirements.............................. 4


4.1 General .............................................. 4 4.2 Materials Fill and Backfill ................ 9 4.3. Construction..................................... 10

Process Industry Practices

Page 1 of 17

PIP CVS02100 Site Preparation, Excavation, and Backfill Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
April 2007

1.

Introduction
1.1 Purpose This Practice provides the requirements for site preparation, excavation, and backfill. 1.2 Scope This Practice describes the requirements for excavation, placement, inspection, and management of earthen and organic materials during the site preparation, excavation, and backfill phase of a construction project. This document is a complete revision of PIP CVS02100, and therefore revision markings are not provided.

2.

References
Applicable parts of the following Practices, industry codes and standards, and references shall be considered an integral part of this Practice. The edition in effect on the date of contract award shall be used, except as otherwise noted. Short titles are used herein where appropriate. 2.1 Process Industry Practices (PIP) PIP CVS02700 - Underground Gravity Sewers Specification 2.2 Industry Codes and Standards American Concrete Institute (ACI) ACI 229R - Controlled Low-Strength Materials ASTM International ASTM C136 - Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates ASTM D422 - Standard Test Method for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils ASTM D698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)) ASTM D1140 - Standard Test Methods for Amount of Material in Soils Finer Than the No. 200 (75-m) Sieve ASTM D1556 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method ASTM D1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2700 kN-m/m3)) ASTM D2167 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon Method ASTM D2922 - Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth) ASTM D2937 - Standard Test Method for Density of Soil in Place by the DriveCylinder Method

Page 2 of 17

Process Industry Practices

COMPLETE REVISION
April 2007

PIP CVS02100 Site Preparation, Excavation, and Backfill Specification

ASTM D3740 - Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction ASTM D4253 - Standard Test Methods for Maximum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils Using a Vibratory Table ASTM D4254 - Standard Test Methods for Minimum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils and Calculation of Relative Density ASTM D4318 - Standard Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils 2.3 Government Regulations U.S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) OSHA 29 CFR 1926 - Safety and Health Regulations for Construction U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA) National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permit (or a permit issued by a state agency approved by the EPA as a substitute for the NPDES permit) National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) General Permit for Construction Activity Storm Water Management for Construction Activities

3.

Definitions
engineer of record: Purchasers authorized representative with overall authority and responsibility for the engineering design, quality, and performance of the civil works, structure, foundations, materials, and appurtenances described in the contract documents. The engineer of record shall be licensed as defined by the laws of the locality in which the work is to be constructed, and be qualified to practice in the specialty discipline required for the work described in the contract documents. contract documents: Any and all documents, including design drawings, that purchaser or engineer of record has transmitted or otherwise communicated, either by incorporation or by reference, and made part of the legal contract agreement or purchase order between the purchaser and the constructor owner: The party who has authority through ownership, lease, or other legal agreement over the project site purchaser: The party who awards the contract to the constructor. The purchaser may be the owner or the owners authorized agent. constructor: The party responsible for supplying the materials, equipment, tools, supervision, and labor for performing site preparation, excavation, fill, and backfill in accordance with the contract documents. Unless otherwise noted, the term constructor shall apply also to the constructors subcontractor(s) and vendor(s).

Process Industry Practices

Page 3 of 17

PIP CVS02100 Site Preparation, Excavation, and Backfill Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
April 2007

4.

Requirements
4.1 General 4.1.1 Quality Control
4.1.1.1 General

1. Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, a quality control (QC) program shall be instituted that will verify or ensure that the work performed under the contract meets the requirements of this Practice and the contract documents. 2. Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, as part of the QC program, a qualified independent inspection/testing firm in accordance with the criteria of ASTM D3740 shall be retained to perform the work identified in Sections 4.1.1.3 and 4.1.1.4 of this Practice. The name and qualifications of the proposed inspection/testing firm(s) shall be submitted along with the constructors proposal for purchasers approval. 3. During construction, the purchaser shall have access to all the constructors facilities and records for the purpose of conducting performance inspection/audits. 4. During an audit by the purchaser, any inspection and test reports, and/or engineering analyses and calculations associated with the scope of work shall be provided upon request.
4.1.1.2 Surveying

1. After starting from horizontal and vertical control furnished by the purchaser, all lines and grades shall be provided by the constructor for constructors operations. 2. The constructor shall be solely responsible for the accuracy of survey work performed.
4.1.1.3 Inspection

1. The inspection/testing firm required in Section 4.1.1.1(2) shall be responsible for QC inspection and testing to ensure that the work meets the requirements of this Practice and the contract documents. 2. The inspection/testing firm shall perform tests as outlined in Section 4.1.1.4 or as otherwise specified in the contract documents. 3. If the purchaser furnishes the testing and inspection, the constructor shall not be relieved of the responsibility to meet all requirements of this Practice and the contract documents. 4. If completed work is not in accordance with this Practice, the constructor shall be responsible for repairing or reconstructing the deficiencies to meet this Practice and the other contract documents.

Page 4 of 17

Process Industry Practices

COMPLETE REVISION
April 2007

PIP CVS02100 Site Preparation, Excavation, and Backfill Specification

4.1.1.4 Testing

1. Tests of gradation, plasticity, density, and moisture content shall be performed for each type of fill material. These tests shall include the following: a. One standard sieve analysis in accordance with ASTM C136, ASTM D422, or ASTM D1140 b. One liquid and plastic limit determination in accordance with ASTM D4318 c. One Modified Proctor Test in accordance with ASTM D1557 or one Standard Proctor Test in accordance with ASTM D698 2. For granular soils that do not exhibit a well-defined moisture-density relationship, index density, unit weight, and relative density shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D4253 and ASTM D4254. 3. If the type or the source of fill material changes, the control tests shall be performed again with the new material. 4. Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, the following in-place dry density and moisture content testing (i.e., field density testing) on compacted fill shall be performed using one of the following methods: a. Sand-cone method in accordance with ASTM D1556 b. Nuclear method in accordance with ASTM D2922 c. Rubber balloon method in accordance with ASTM D2167 d. Drive-cylinder method in accordance with ASTM D2937 5. Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, the field density testing shall be performed at the following frequencies: a. Structural fill under foundations and building slabs one test every 1000 square feet (90 square m) of each lift b. Structural fill under roadways, railroads, area pavement and parking areas one test every 2000 square feet (180 square m) of each lift c. Road base and sub-base one test every 2000 square feet (180 square m) of each lift d. Backfill of trenches (for utility lines or foundations) one test for every 50 linear feet (15 m) of each lift e. General fill one test every 5000 square feet (460 square m) of each lift 6. As a minimum, one in-place moisture content and one density test shall be performed on every lift of fill. 7. Until the required dry density has been achieved, further placement of fill shall not be permitted.

Process Industry Practices

Page 5 of 17

PIP CVS02100 Site Preparation, Excavation, and Backfill Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
April 2007

8. The number of field density tests shall be increased if a visual inspection determines that the moisture content is not uniform or if the compacting effort is variable and not considered sufficient to attain the specified dry density. 9. The engineer of record may approve a decrease in the number of tests once a compaction procedure has met project requirements.
4.1.1.5 Protection

1. Temporary fences, guardrails, barricades, lights, and other protective measures required for the safety of personnel and the premises shall be installed and maintained in good condition. 2. All reference points (e.g., property markers, benchmarks, etc.) shall be carefully maintained during excavation, backfilling, compaction, and earthwork. 3. If a reference point is damaged during performance of the work, the reference point shall be repaired or replaced at the constructors expense in accordance with the requirements of the owner. 4. Unless otherwise specified, before earthwork begins, the purchaser shall locate and mark all known utilities within the project limits or note them in the contract documents. 5. If other utility locations become evident as earthwork progresses, work stoppages may be required until utilities are identified and until the owner provides specific direction. 6. During earthwork, all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect and preserve utilities scheduled to remain. If preservation and protection are impractical, temporary service lines shall be installed with owners approval. 7. Bracing and shoring shall be used to protect excavations adjacent to existing underground installations (e.g., foundations, piping manholes, electrical, and duct banks) and personnel engaged in excavation activities during construction. 8. Unless otherwise shown in the contract documents, excavation under foundations shall not be permitted. 9. The constructor shall be responsible for avoiding damage to and preserving trees, shrubs, and all other vegetation in the areas beyond the designated excavation area. 10. Any damage to structure, utility lines, or graded areas caused by erosion shall be repaired to the original condition at no cost to the purchaser. This includes areas that are seeded until such time that the vegetation prevents erosion. 11. During the performance of the work, the constructor shall take proper and efficient measures to reduce dust and to prevent dust from harming individuals and damaging adjacent properties and equipment.

Page 6 of 17

Process Industry Practices

COMPLETE REVISION
April 2007

PIP CVS02100 Site Preparation, Excavation, and Backfill Specification

4.1.2

Submittals 4.1.2.1 The testing/inspection firm shall provide the following submittals to the purchaser and constructor: a. A statement attesting that the constructors work is in accordance with the requirements of this Practice and the contract documents b. Informal daily pass or fail reports c. Formal weekly reports including all test logs and comments. These formal reports shall include density and moisture content test logs, indicating location of tests by coordinates and elevation and any appropriate comments. d. At earthwork completion, all density and moisture content test logs and comments compiled and submitted for permanent project records e. Sources and test results of all borrow materials used for fill 4.1.2.2 The constructor shall provide the following submittals to the purchaser. Data shall include horizontal dimensions, elevations, size, and slope gradients, as appropriate for the utility and as required by the purchaser: a. Accurately recorded as-built locations of project-installed underground utilities b. Tie-in points/interferences encountered during project construction 4.1.2.3 The constructor shall notify the purchaser, in writing, not less than five (5) days in advance of any blasting operation. Written approval shall be furnished by the purchaser before proceeding with intended blasting operations. 4.1.2.4 If excavation bracing (i.e., shoring and sheeting) is required, the constructor shall provide the following submittals to the purchaser: a. Plans, sketches, and/or details b. Supporting calculations prepared by a registered professional engineer c. Description of the materials and shoring system to be used d. Indication of whether any components will remain after filling or backfilling e. Indication of the sequence and method of installation 4.1.2.5 If dewatering of an excavation is required, the constructor shall submit proposed methods and details to the purchaser for review before beginning excavation. 4.1.2.6 If required by an authority having jurisdiction, the constructor shall provide a soil erosion control plan and/or a storm water runoff pollution prevention plan. The plans shall be provided to the purchaser and the appropriate authority.

Process Industry Practices

Page 7 of 17

PIP CVS02100 Site Preparation, Excavation, and Backfill Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
April 2007

4.1.3

Environmental
4.1.3.1 Contaminated Soils

1. Known contaminated soils within the construction limits shall be managed in accordance with a contaminated soil management plan provided by the owner before the start of excavation. 2. If unexpected soil contamination is encountered during the work, the work shall be stopped and the owner shall be notified immediately.
4.1.3.2 Erosion/Sediment Control

1. All procedures and work shall be in accordance with local, state, and federal regulations (e.g., terms of the NPDES General Permit for Construction Activity, other USEPA documents such as Storm Water Management for Construction Activities, or specific project permit). 2. All areas shall be maintained using temporary erosion and sediment control measures during construction until the constructor is relieved by the purchaser or until permanent measures are completed and functioning in a satisfactory manner. 4.1.4 Safety
4.1.4.1 General

1. All work shall be in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR 1926 and any other applicable federal, state, and local codes and with any safety requirements of the owner. 2. Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, a work permit shall be obtained from the owner before performing any earthwork.
4.1.4.2 Rock Blasting

1. If rock blasting is required, a written rock-blasting safety plan shall be submitted for owners approval. 2. Permits for blasting shall be obtained from authorities having jurisdiction. Permits shall be provided at no additional cost to the purchaser. 3. The constructor shall submit copies of blasting permits to the purchaser and shall obtain written permission from the owner before explosives are brought to the site or before drilling is started. 4. Explosives shall be stored, handled, and used in accordance with local regulations and with the owners safety practices. These criteria shall be addressed in the rock-blasting safety plan. 5. The constructor shall be responsible for all blasting operations. 4.1.5 Clean Up 4.1.5.1 Soil that is spilled or washed onto paved areas or streets shall be removed daily from the surface.

Page 8 of 17

Process Industry Practices

COMPLETE REVISION
April 2007

PIP CVS02100 Site Preparation, Excavation, and Backfill Specification

4.1.5.2 Soil that is spilled or washed into drains, pipes, gutters, or ditches or onto adjacent property shall be removed daily. Constructor shall provide measures to prevent recurrence. 4.2 Materials Fill and Backfill 4.2.1 Basic Requirements 4.2.1.1 Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, fill and backfill materials shall be from either on-site excavation, designated borrow areas, or off-site sources in accordance with the requirements of Sections 4.2.1.3, 4.2.2, and 4.2.3. 4.2.1.2 All borrow material and all supply sources shall be approved by the owner. 4.2.1.3 Fill and backfill shall contain no rocks or stones larger than 3 inches (75 mm) and shall be free of frozen lumps, organic matter, trash, chunks of highly plastic clay, snow, ice, contamination, or other unsatisfactory material. 4.2.1.4 Liquid limit and plastic limit shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D4318. 4.2.2 General Fill Material Fill and backfill to be used as general fill shall be material capable of being compacted to the requirements of 4.3.7.7 (2). 4.2.3 Structural Fill Material 4.2.3.1 Fill and backfill to be used as structural fill shall be gravel, sand, clay, or silt, or a mixture of these constituents. 4.2.3.2 Except for sands or gravels that exhibit no plasticity characteristics, the structural fill material shall be in accordance with the following requirements: a. Liquid limit 40 maximum b. Plasticity index 6 through 20 4.2.4 Controlled Low-Strength Material (CLSM) 4.2.4.1 CLSM or flowable fill may be substituted for either structural fill material or general fill material, where approved by the engineer of record. 4.2.4.2 Unless otherwise specified, CLSM shall be in accordance with ACI 229R. 4.2.4.3 The mix design shall be proportioned to produce a 28-day compressive strength between 100 and 200 psi (0.69 and 1.38 Mpa), pretested using the actual raw materials, and approved by the engineer of record before use on the project. 4.2.4.4 Unless otherwise specified, simple visual inspection only shall be required for field testing.

Process Industry Practices

Page 9 of 17

PIP CVS02100 Site Preparation, Excavation, and Backfill Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
April 2007

4.3.

Construction 4.3.1 Site Preparation


4.3.1.1 Clearing and Grubbing

1. Clearing and grubbing shall consist of the removal and satisfactory disposal of trees, stumps, roots, vegetation, logs, rubbish, and other unsuitable material. 2. Except for trees and shrubs in areas designated in the contract documents for preservation, areas designated for clearing and grubbing shall be cleared. 3. During construction operations, trees, shrubs, and other landscape features specifically designated in the contract documents for preservation shall be carefully protected from abuse, marring, or damage. 4. Trees and other vegetation outside the construction area shall not be damaged in any manner. 5. Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, trees, stumps, and other vegetation in the areas designated for clearing and grubbing shall be removed to the bottom of their root zone. 6. Depressions made by clearing and grubbing operations shall be filled with suitable material and compacted to conform to the adjacent surface of the original ground.
4.3.1.2 Stripping

1. Stripping shall consist of the excavation, removal, and satisfactory disposal of all topsoil and soil containing organic material. Such stripped materials shall not be used as structural fill material under any circumstances. 2. Before any soil is removed, the area shall be cleared of all debris. 3. Unless otherwise directed by the engineer of record, topsoil shall be removed to full-depth or as specified in the contract documents. 4. Reusable materials shall be stockpiled as necessary for the constructors operations in areas approved by the purchaser.
4.3.1.3 Rough Grading

1. General area grading shall be completed to within a tolerance of +0.20 feet (+60 mm) of the elevations shown in the contract documents, but shall not be uniformly high or low. 2. Roads, parking areas, and building areas shall be excavated or filled to subgrade elevations shown in the contract documents. 3. Rock encountered through cut sections shall be excavated to 1 foot (0.3 m) below subgrade elevation and shall be backfilled to the proper elevation.

Page 10 of 17

Process Industry Practices

COMPLETE REVISION
April 2007

PIP CVS02100 Site Preparation, Excavation, and Backfill Specification

4. If unsatisfactory field conditions caused by rain, inclement weather, or other circumstances prevent satisfactory performance of the work, earthwork operations shall be suspended after consultation with the engineer of record and the purchaser. 5. After completing grading operations and before grassing operations, the graded areas that are not to be further improved shall be overlaid with topsoil of a compacted thickness of 4 inches (100 mm) minimum. 4.3.2 Excavation
4.3.2.1 Structural Excavation

1. Structural excavation shall include excavations for footings, grade beams, pits, basements, retaining walls, manholes, catch basins, etc. 2. Structural excavation shall be performed in accordance with the contract documents to the dimensions, grades, and elevations as noted and as required for formwork. 3. If soft, compressible soil is encountered at footing grades as shown in the contract documents, the soft soil shall be removed and replaced with structural fill. 4. Over-excavation at footings may be backfilled with lean concrete or CLSM in accordance with Section 4.2.4. Lean concrete shall have a mix design proportioned to achieve a minimum 28-day compressive strength 1,000 psi (6.9MPa).
4.3.2.2 Earthen Structures

1. Earthen structures include permanent work items such as ponds, canals, ditches, etc. 2. Excavation for earthen structures shall be made to the lines, grades, and cross sections in accordance with the contract documents. 3. Side slopes of excavations shall be cut true and straight and shall be graded to the proper cross section. 4. Unstable soil in the slopes shall be removed, and the slopes properly prepared. 5. The bottoms of excavations shall be graded to the elevations and configurations in accordance with the contract documents. 6. Over-excavation shall be backfilled with suitable material and compacted in accordance with Section 4.3.7.7.
4.3.2.3 Trenching

Trenching for underground pipe, conduits, and duct banks shall be in accordance with PIP CVS02700.
4.3.2.4 Rock Excavation

1. Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, rock excavation shall consist of excavation of boulders or pieces of

Process Industry Practices

Page 11 of 17

PIP CVS02100 Site Preparation, Excavation, and Backfill Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
April 2007

detached rock measuring 1 cubic yard (0.76 cubic m) in volume or greater, or rock in ledges, bedded deposits, and conglomerate deposits so firmly cemented that they present all the characteristics of solid rock, which cannot be excavated with heavy equipment. All other excavation shall be earth excavation. 2. If blasting is not permitted, rock shall be excavated with mechanical rippers, mechanical breakers, or mechanical drills with nonexplosive demolition agents. 3. If blasting is permitted and required, blasting operations shall be managed in accordance with the rock-blasting plan (see Section 4.1.4.2). 4. If unexpected hard rock is encountered during the work, the work shall be stopped until a blasting plan is developed or until the owner provides specific direction.
4.3.2.5 Excavation Safety

It is mandated by federal regulation Volume 54, No. 209 (October 1989), the United States Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) , Construction Standards for Excavations, 29 CFR, part 1926, Subpart P that excavations, whether they be utility trenches, basement excavation or footing excavations, be constructed in accordance with the OSHA guidelines. The constructor is solely responsible for designing and constructing stable, temporary excavations and should shore, slope, or bench the sides of the excavations as required to maintain stability of both the excavation sides and bottom. The constructors competent representative, as defined in 29 CFR Part 1926.650 to 652 should evaluate the soil exposed in the excavations as part of the constructors safety procedures. In no case should slope height, slope inclination, or excavation depth, including utility trench excavation depth, exceed those specified in local, state, and federal safety regulations. 4.3.3 Stockpiling 4.3.3.1 Material shall be stockpiled as specified by the owner. 4.3.3.2 Stockpiles shall be placed, graded, and shaped for proper drainage. 4.3.3.3 Storage or stockpiling of material shall not be permitted on a completed subgrade. 4.3.3.4 Stockpiling of contaminated soils shall be in accordance with an owner approved contaminated soils management plan or as specified by the owner. 4.3.4 Drainage 4.3.4.1 Drainage of cuts, excavations, fills, stockpiles, spoil areas, surcharge embankments, and borrow areas shall be maintained at all times to prevent ponding of surface water following rainfall by providing

Page 12 of 17

Process Industry Practices

COMPLETE REVISION
April 2007

PIP CVS02100 Site Preparation, Excavation, and Backfill Specification

temporary ditches, swales, culverts, and/or pumping systems as required in each respective site area. 4.3.4.2 Temporary drainage facilities shall be removed at the completion of the project or as specified by the owner. 4.3.4.3 A surface seal (e.g., sealing with a smooth drum roller) shall be performed as required to prevent saturation during wet weather or temporary shutdown of operations. 4.3.4.4 Soil that becomes saturated shall be removed completely or as specified by the engineer of record. 4.3.4.5 Saturated soil shall be disposed of as specified by owner or shall be reconditioned to be in accordance with this Practice. 4.3.5 Disposal of Excess and Waste Materials 4.3.5.1 If practicable, all suitable materials removed by excavation shall be used as fill. 4.3.5.2 Excavated material in excess of that required for normal embankment construction shall be stockpiled within the construction limits or shall be placed in a designated spoil area beyond the construction limits as specified by the owner. 4.3.5.3 Material unsuitable for fill and debris removed by clearing, grubbing, stripping, and excavation shall be removed to a disposal area approved by the owner. 4.3.5.4 Burning of combustible materials shall be done only with the written approval of the owner and only if permitted by local authorities. 4.3.6 Preparation of Areas for Fill or Loading 4.3.6.1 Areas to receive fill, foundations, or pavement or areas to be used in the future to support structural loads as shown on the contract drawings shall be free of roots, trash, snow, ice, or other foreign material and shall not be frozen. 4.3.6.2 Areas shall be prepared for fill or loading as follows: a. Site shall be drained so that it is free of standing water. b. Proof-rolled crossing the area repeatedly and methodically with a heavy (10-ton (9 tonne) minimum weight) rubber-tired roller or a loaded dump truck Comment: In enclosed areas or tightly spaced areas, where access by heavy equipment is limited and where the subgrade soils have previously been subjected to loads from existing structures and the structures have performed satisfactorily, hand operated rollers or plate compactors may be used instead upon approval by the owner.

c. Soft soils removed and replaced with structural fill d. Top 6 inches (150 mm) scarified and recompacted

Process Industry Practices

Page 13 of 17

PIP CVS02100 Site Preparation, Excavation, and Backfill Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
April 2007

Comment: The engineer of record may require, in the contract documents, over-excavation, moisture conditioning, and recompacting of the upper soils and chemical stabilization or other methods of improving soil conditions before the placement of fill or other loading. 4.3.6.3 The density of the top 6 inches (150 mm) in areas for fill and loading shall not be less than 90% of the maximum Modified Proctor density in accordance with ASTM D1557, or 95% of the maximum Standard Proctor density in accordance with ASTM D698. Comment: The 90% Modified Proctor equivalent to 95% Standard Proctor is a conservative value as a study of 53 soils showed an average of 87% Modified Proctor was equivalent to 95% Standard Proctor. 4.3.6.4 The density of the top 6 inches (150 mm) in areas of fill and loading, where granular soils exist that do not exhibit well-defined moisturedensity relationship, shall be compacted to at least 80% relative density in accordance with ASTM D4253 and ASTM D4254. Comment: Clean granular soils with less than 10% fines may exhibit such behavior. It is important to use both the wet and dry methods of determining Maximum density. Use of the equations in the ASTMs is required. In some instances, geotechnical engineers will use both Relative Density and Proctor densities methods to choose the highest density for proper compaction. 4.3.7 Filling and Backfilling 4.3.7.1 Unless otherwise shown in the contract documents, the following areas shall be filled or backfilled using structural fill: a. Beneath or immediately surrounding foundations b. Beneath slabs, roadways, railroads, area pavement, and parking areas c. Where otherwise indicated on design drawings 4.3.7.2 All other areas not designated above may be filled or backfilled using general fill. 4.3.7.3 Before placement of fill or backfill, the area to receive the fill shall be prepared in accordance with Section 4.3.6. Comment: On sloping sites, the engineer of record may also require, in the contract documents, the excavation of natural soils to key the new fill into the underlying soil. 4.3.7.4 Compacting shall begin only after the fill or backfill has been properly placed and after the material to be compacted is at the proper moisture content. 4.3.7.5 Unless otherwise noted in the contract documents, material shall be placed in loose lifts not exceeding the following criteria, provided that the specified compaction is achieved for the full depth:

Page 14 of 17

Process Industry Practices

COMPLETE REVISION
April 2007

PIP CVS02100 Site Preparation, Excavation, and Backfill Specification

1. Structural fill shall be placed in lifts of 8 inches (200 mm) maximum in loose depth. 2. General fill shall be placed in lifts of 12 inches (300 mm) maximum in loose depth. 3. Unless otherwise approved by the purchaser, for hand-operated compaction equipment, general and structural fill materials shall be placed in lifts of 4 inches (100 mm) maximum in loose depth. 4.3.7.6 Compaction shall be performed with equipment compatible with soil type. 4.3.7.7 Unless otherwise noted in the contract documents, fill and backfill layers shall be uniformly compacted in accordance with the following density and moisture content requirements: 1. Structural Fill Compaction Densities a. Structural fill shall be compacted to at least 90% of the maximum Modified Proctor density in accordance with ASTM D1557, or 95% of the maximum Standard Proctor density in accordance with ASTM D698. b. Granular soil used as structural fill that does not exhibit welldefined moisture-density relationship shall be compacted to at least 80% relative density in accordance with ASTM D4253 and ASTM D4254. 2. General Fill Compaction Densities a. General fill shall be compacted to at least 85% of the maximum Modified Proctor density in accordance with ASTM D1557, or 90% of the maximum Standard Proctor density in accordance with ASTM D698. b. Granular soil used as general fill that does not exhibit well-defined moisture-density relationship shall be compacted to 70% to 75% relative density in accordance with ASTM D4253 and ASTM D4254. 3. The moisture content of the material being compacted shall be within +3% of the optimum moisture content in accordance with the applicable ASTM D1557 or ASTM D698. Fill materials shall be conditioned as necessary to achieve the required moisture content, without additional cost to the purchaser. 4. If approved by the engineer of record in writing, chemical stabilization may be used if modification of liquid limit and plasticity index are necessary to obtain satisfactory compaction. 4.3.7.8 Compaction by water jetting or flooding shall not be permitted. 4.3.7.9 Fill and backfill adjacent to structures such as retaining walls, pits, and basements shall not be compacted with heavy equipment, but with handoperated equipment to a distance of 4 feet (1.2 m) or greater beyond the sides of the structures.

Process Industry Practices

Page 15 of 17

PIP CVS02100 Site Preparation, Excavation, and Backfill Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
April 2007

4.3.7.10 To prevent unnecessary eccentric loading on a structure or foundation, every effort shall be made to place backfill materials symmetrically and in uniform layers. 4.3.7.11 Unless otherwise permitted in writing by the purchaser, backfill around or over cast-in-place concrete shall not be permitted until the concrete has attained 75% of its specified strength. 4.3.7.12 Compacted surfaces of fill and backfill shall be finish-graded to the cross sections, lines, grades, and elevations as specified in the contract documents. 4.3.8 Installation of Base Course 4.3.8.1 The base course for roads, parking areas, and other areas to be surfaced shall be prepared in accordance with this section. 4.3.8.2 The existing ground to the toe of fill slopes shall be cleared, grubbed, and stripped in accordance with Sections 4.3.1.1 and 4.3.1.2. 4.3.8.3 Excavation of areas in cut shall be in accordance with Section 4.3.2. 4.3.8.4 Backfill of base course shall comply with Sections 4.3.6 and 4.3.7, with the following exception. Compaction shall be to at least 95% of the maximum Modified Proctor density in accordance with ASTM D1557, or 100% of the maximum Standard Proctor density in accordance with ASTM D698. If base course materials are clean granular material and Relative Density is the standard, compact to 85% of relative density. 4.3.8.5 Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, base course material shall be structural fill material in accordance with Section 4.2. 4.3.8.6 If specified by the contract documents, geosynthetic materials shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers instructions and/or as detailed in the contract documents. 4.3.8.7 The compacted base course shall be shaped to a smooth and even surface, free of voids, and to the required elevation. 4.3.8.8 Any deviation greater than inch (12 mm) in cross section or inch (12 mm) in length as measured with a 16-foot (5-m) straightedge shall be corrected by loosening, adding, or removing material and then reshaping and recompacting by sprinkling and rolling. 4.3.8.9 The base course shall be maintained in a smooth, true-to-grade, compacted condition until it is covered by other construction. 4.3.9 Dewatering 4.3.9.1 All dewatering methods and disposal of water shall be approved by the engineer of record. 4.3.9.2 If required for construction, before excavation, an approved dewatering system shall be installed and operated when necessary to lower the groundwater. 4.3.9.3 Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, the design of the dewatering system shall be the responsibility of the constructor.

Page 16 of 17

Process Industry Practices

COMPLETE REVISION
April 2007

PIP CVS02100 Site Preparation, Excavation, and Backfill Specification

4.3.9.4 Constructor shall be responsible for any effects of dewatering on adjacent facilities. 4.3.9.5 Surface water shall be prevented from flowing into excavations by installing ditches, trenches, protective swales, pumps, or other purchaser approved measures. 4.3.9.6 All diverted and pumped water shall flow to existing drainage. 4.3.9.7 Excavations for foundations and other underground installations shall not be used as temporary drainage ditches. 4.3.9.8 At all times during construction, ample means with which to remove and properly dispose of all water from every natural source entering the excavation shall be provided and maintained. 4.3.9.9 Any water to be discharged that is potentially suspect of quality shall be tested for water quality to determine whether the water can be disposed of through the natural waterways or whether it shall be contained for treatment.

Process Industry Practices

Page 17 of 17

COMPLETE REVISION
November 2004

Process Industry Practices Civil

PIP CVI02720 Sewer Details

PURPOSE AND USE OF PROCESS INDUSTRY PRACTICES In an effort to minimize the cost of process industry facilities, this Practice has been prepared from the technical requirements in the existing standards of major industrial users, contractors, or standards organizations. By harmonizing these technical requirements into a single set of Practices, administrative, application, and engineering costs to both the purchaser and the manufacturer should be reduced. While this Practice is expected to incorporate the majority of requirements of most users, individual applications may involve requirements that will be appended to and take precedence over this Practice. Determinations concerning fitness for purpose and particular matters or application of the Practice to particular project or engineering situations should not be made solely on information contained in these materials. The use of trade names from time to time should not be viewed as an expression of preference but rather recognized as normal usage in the trade. Other brands having the same specifications are equally correct and may be substituted for those named. All Practices or guidelines are intended to be consistent with applicable laws and regulations including OSHA requirements. To the extent these Practices or guidelines should conflict with OSHA or other applicable laws or regulations, such laws or regulations must be followed. Consult an appropriate professional before applying or acting on any material contained in or suggested by the Practice. This Practice is subject to revision at any time by the responsible Function Team and will be reviewed every 5 years. This Practice will be revised, reaffirmed, or withdrawn. Information on whether this Practice has been revised may be found at www.pip.org.

Process Industry Practices (PIP), Construction Industry Institute, The University of Texas at Austin, 3925 West Braker Lane (R4500), Austin, Texas 78759. PIP member companies and subscribers may copy this Practice for their internal use. Changes, overlays, addenda, or modifications of any kind are not permitted within any PIP Practice without the express written authorization of PIP.

PIP will not consider requests for interpretations (inquiries) for this Practice.
PRINTING HISTORY April 1999 Issued November 2004 Complete Revision Not printed with State funds

COMPLETE REVISION
November 2004

Process Industry Practices Civil

PIP CVI02720 Sewer Details


Table of Contents 1. Introduction .................................. 2
1.1 Purpose ............................................. 2 1.2 Scope................................................. 2 CVI02720-06 - Process Sewer, Concrete Manholes with Reinforced Thermosetting Resin (RTP) Liner CVI02720-07 - Process Sewer, Concrete Manholes with Chemical Resistant Coating CVI02720-08 - Concrete Manhole Tops and Bases CVI02720-09 - Manhole Sections and Details CVI02720-10 - Typical Manhole Fire and/or Vapor Seal CVI02720-11 - Precast or Cast in Place Rectangular or Square Storm Water Inlet CVI02720-12 - Precast Circular Storm Water Inlet CVI02720-13 - Catch Basin Option Sewer Pipe Connection Detail

2. References ................................... 2
2.1 Process Industry Practices ................ 2 2.2 Industry Codes and Standards .......... 2

3. Requirements ............................... 3 Drawings:


CVI02720-01 - Sanitary, Storm, or Process Sewer Fabricated HDPE Manhole CVI02720-02 - Sanitary or Storm Sewer Concrete Pipe or Precast Manholes CVI02720-03 - Sanitary Concrete Drop Manhole CVI02720-04 - Process Sewer, HighDensity Polyethylene (HDPE) Lined Manholes CVI02720-05 - Process Sewer, Concrete Manholes with Chemical Resistant Brick Lining

Process Industry Practices

Page 1 of 16

PIP CVI02720 Sewer Details

COMPLETE REVISION
November 2004

1.

Introduction
1.1 Purpose This Practice provides the installer with standard details for sewer manholes, catch basins, and storm water inlets for underground gravity sewer systems. 1.2 Scope This Practice includes details for concrete pipe and high-density polyethylene (HDPE) manholes. Details for HDPE liners, chemical resistant brick liners, reinforced thermosetting resin (RTP) liners, and chemical resistant coatings are also provided. In addition, details for fire and vapor seals, storm water inlets, catch basins, and sealed slab and equipment drains are provided.

2.

References
Applicable parts of the following Practices and industry codes and standards shall be considered an integral part of this Practice. The edition in effect on the date of contract award shall be used, except as otherwise specified. Short titles will be used herein where appropriate. 2.1 Process Industry Practices (PIP) PIP CVS02100 - Site Preparation, Excavation, and Backfill PIP CVS02700 - Underground Gravity Sewers Specification PIP STS03001 - Plain and Reinforced Concrete Specification PIP STS03600 - Nonshrink Cementitious Grout Specification 2.2 Industry Codes and Standards American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) ASTM A48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings ASTM C76 - Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe ASTM C443 - Standard Specification for Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets

ASTM C478 - Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections
ASTM C923 - Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures, Pipes and Laterals American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) AASHTO - Standard Specification for Highway Bridges

COMPLETE REVISION
November 2004

PIP CVI02720 Sewer Details

3.

Requirements
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 The project design drawings shall specify the location, orientation, and type of manholes and catch basins. Unless specified otherwise, all structures shall be designed for an AASHTO HS20 loading in accordance with AASHTO Standard Specification for Highway Bridges. Unless specified otherwise, all concrete shall be in accordance with PIP STS03001. Unless specified otherwise, all grouting shall be in accordance with PIP STS03600. Bedding and backfilling requirements for piping shall be in accordance with PIP CVS02700 and PIP CVS02100.

Process Industry Practices

Page 3 of 16

COMPLETE REVISION
October 2004

Process Industry Practices Civil

PIP CVS02700 Underground Gravity Sewers Specification

PURPOSE AND USE OF PROCESS INDUSTRY PRACTICES In an effort to minimize the cost of process industry facilities, this Practice has been prepared from the technical requirements in the existing standards of major industrial users, contractors, or standards organizations. By harmonizing these technical requirements into a single set of Practices, administrative, application, and engineering costs to both the purchaser and the manufacturer should be reduced. While this Practice is expected to incorporate the majority of requirements of most users, individual applications may involve requirements that will be appended to and take precedence over this Practice. Determinations concerning fitness for purpose and particular matters or application of the Practice to particular project or engineering situations should not be made solely on information contained in these materials. The use of trade names from time to time should not be viewed as an expression of preference but rather recognized as normal usage in the trade. Other brands having the same specifications are equally correct and may be substituted for those named. All Practices or guidelines are intended to be consistent with applicable laws and regulations including OSHA requirements. To the extent these Practices or guidelines should conflict with OSHA or other applicable laws or regulations, such laws or regulations must be followed. Consult an appropriate professional before applying or acting on any material contained in or suggested by the Practice. This Practice is subject to revision at any time by the responsible Function Team and will be reviewed every 5 years. This Practice will be revised, reaffirmed, or withdrawn. Information on whether this Practice has been revised may be found at www.pip.org.

Process Industry Practices (PIP), Construction Industry Institute, The University of Texas at Austin, 3925 West Braker Lane (R4500), Austin, Texas 78759. PIP member companies and subscribers may copy this Practice for their internal use. Changes, overlays, addenda, or modifications of any kind are not permitted within any PIP Practice without the express written authorization of PIP.

PIP will not consider requests for interpretations (inquiries) for this Practice.
PRINTING HISTORY April 1995 August 2000 Issued Complete Revision October 2004 Complete Revision

Not printed with State funds

COMPLETE REVISION
October 2004

Process Industry Practices Civil

PIP CVS02700 Underground Gravity Sewers Specification


Table of Contents 1. Introduction .................................. 2
1.1 Purpose ............................................. 2 1.2 Scope................................................. 2

2. References.................................... 2
2.1 Process Industry Practices ................ 2 2.2 Industry Codes and Standards .......... 2 2.3 Government Regulations ................... 3

3. Definitions .................................... 3 4. Requirements ............................... 4


4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 General .............................................. 4 Materials ............................................ 5 Construction....................................... 8 Exfiltration Test ................................ 14 Considerations for Existing Facilities ............................. 14

Figure A - Bedding Methods for Trench Conduits ....................... 15

Process Industry Practices

Page 1 of 15

PIP CVS02700 Underground Gravity Sewers Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
October 2004

1.

Introduction
1.1 Purpose This Practice provides requirements for the installation contractor for fabricating and installing underground gravity sewers. 1.2 Scope This Practice describes the requirements for materials, installation, and testing of underground gravity sewers. Requirements for pipe, inlet structures, manholes, and appurtenances for sanitary, storm, and industrial process sewers are included. Requirements for pressurized pipe, double-contained, and emission-controlled industrial process sewers in environmental applications are not included.

2.

References
Applicable parts of the following Practices, industry codes and standards, and references shall be considered an integral part of this Practice. The edition in effect on the date of contract award shall be used, except as otherwise noted. Short titles will be used herein where appropriate. 2.1 Process Industry Practices (PIP) PIP CVC01015 - Civil Design Criteria PIP CVS02100 - Site Preparation, Excavation, and Backfill Specification PIP CVI02720 - Sewer Details PIP STS03001 - Plain and Reinforced Concrete Specification 2.2 Industry Codes and Standards American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) ASTM A36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel ASTM A74 - Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings ASTM C14 - Standard Specification for Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and Culvert Pipe ASTM C76 - Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe ASTM C425 - Standard Specification for Compression Joints for Vitrified Clay Pipe and Fittings ASTM C443 - Standard Specification for Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets ASTM C478 - Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections ASTM C564 - Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings

Page 2 of 15

Process Industry Practices

COMPLETE REVISION
October 2004

PIP CVS02700 Underground Gravity Sewers Specification

ASTM C700 - Standard Specification for Vitrified Clay Pipe, Extra Strength, Standard Strength, and Perforated ASTM C969 - Standard Practice for Infiltration and Exfiltration Acceptance Testing of Installed Precast Concrete Pipe Sewer Lines ASTM C1433 - Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections for Culverts, Storm Drains, and Sewers ASTM D422 - Standard Test Method for Particle - Size Analysis of Soils ASTM D1248 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Molding and Extrusion Materials ASTM D2321 - Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity Flow Applications ASTM D1785 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120 ASTM D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems ASTM D2855 - Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings ASTM D3212 - Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals ASTM D3350 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fittings Materials ASTM F477 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) AASHTO M 36 - Interim Specification for Corrugated Steel Pipe, Metallic Coated for Sewers and Drains AASHTO M 294 - Standard Specification for Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe, 300- to 1200-mm Diameter (for Storm Sewers and Culverts) 2.3 Government Regulations Occupational Safety and Health Administration 29 CFR 1926 Subpart P - Excavations

3.

Definitions
contract documents: Any and all documents, including design drawings, that purchaser has transmitted or otherwise communicated, either by incorporation or by reference, and made part of the legal contract or purchase order agreement between purchaser and supplier supplier: The party responsible for performing excavation, backfill, and pipe installation, including work executed through the use of sub-contractors

Process Industry Practices

Page 3 of 15

PIP CVS02700 Underground Gravity Sewers Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
October 2004

owner: The party who owns the facility wherein the underground gravity sewer will be installed purchaser: The party who awards the contract to the supplier. The purchaser may be the owner or the owners authorized agent. flowable fill: An engineered blend of materials (controlled low-strength material) used as self-leveling and self-compacting backfill and bedding standard dimension ratio (SDR): The ratio of the pipe outside diameter (inches) to the minimum wall thickness (inches)

4.

Requirements
4.1 General 4.1.1 Quality Control 4.1.1.1 Sewers shall be fabricated, installed, and tested in accordance with this Practice; with codes, standards, and procedures specified in this Practice; and with all applicable codes and regulations of the controlling federal, state, and local jurisdictions. 4.1.1.2 Purchaser shall have the right to inspect, at purchasers expense, all materials and workmanship and shall have unrestricted entry to the fabrication shop at all times work is being performed. 4.1.1.3 Purchaser can reject improper, inferior, or defective materials and workmanship at any stage of production. 4.1.1.4 All defective materials and workmanship shall be repaired or replaced at no additional cost to purchaser. 4.1.15 Purchaser inspection shall not replace the suppliers quality control procedures and responsibility for compliance with all applicable requirements for the material, fabrication, and installation. 4.1.1.6 Unless directed otherwise by purchaser, if at any time during installation and testing, weather or any other factor causes the degradation of the pipe foundation, pipe and/or fitting installation, bedding, or backfill, all affected materials shall be removed and the work shall be reinstalled in accordance with this Practice. 4.1.2 Submittals 4.1.2.1 The following documentation shall be submitted to the purchaser 2 weeks before installation: a. Fabrication drawings and instructions for the installation of pipe and appurtenances b. Certification that an OSHA-defined excavation-competent person (ECP) shall oversee all excavation

Page 4 of 15

Process Industry Practices

COMPLETE REVISION
October 2004

PIP CVS02700 Underground Gravity Sewers Specification

c. Documentation of all trench work requiring an ECP d. Certification in writing that the materials to be used under the contract satisfy all the requirements of the project. 4.1.2.2 As-built documentation showing location, line, and grade of newly installed sewer systems shall be submitted to purchaser within 4 weeks after installation. 4.1.3 Safety 4.1.3.1 Field construction activities on owners property shall conform to owners safety requirements, including any special rules that may be in effect at a specific site. 4.1.3.2 Good housekeeping practices shall be maintained in and around the work site throughout the duration of the work. 4.1.3.3 Hazardous and hot work permits for chemical exposure, open flames, spark-producing mechanical equipment, potential explosive mixtures, and any other hazardous conditions shall be required in areas specified by owner. 4.1.3.4 All excavation and trenching shall be in accordance with OSHA standards and owners local requirements and guidelines (as applicable) for the following: a. Shoring, bracing, and/or sloping wall construction b. Marking and flagging open excavations c. Permitting and confined space entry requirements 4.1.4 Environmental 4.1.4.1 All sewer outfalls are required to be permitted by applicable regulations. 4.1.4.2 Before discharging any liquid into drains, catch basins, or manholes in connection with trench dewatering activities, testing, or other activities for which liquids need to be disposed, the owner shall verify that the applicable permit will allow intermittent non-storm flows into storm sewers. 4.1.4.3 Excavated material shall be managed in accordance with a soil management plan. 4.1.4.4 Unless provided by owner, the soil management plan shall be developed by supplier and approved by owner before the start of excavation activities. 4.2 Materials 4.2.1 Pipe and Joints 4.2.1.1 Specifications for materials other than those listed in the following section (such as welded, coated, and wrapped carbon steel) that are

Process Industry Practices

Page 5 of 15

PIP CVS02700 Underground Gravity Sewers Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
October 2004

required for the project shall be as specified in the contract documents.


4.2.1.2 Concrete Pipe/Reinforced Concrete Pipe (CP/RCP) - Rigid Pipe

1. Concrete sewer pipe 10 inches (250 mm) and smaller shall be in accordance with ASTM C14 (class as specified in the contract documents) non-reinforced, bell and spigot, or tongue and groove sewer pipe. 2. Concrete sewer pipe 12 inches (300 mm) and larger shall be in accordance with ASTM C76, reinforced sewer pipe (class and wall as specified in the contract documents). 3. Joints shall be sealed using elastomeric O rings in accordance with ASTM C443 unless otherwise specified in the contract documents. 4. Joints may be sealed with cement grout if the service is for storm sewer lines that are 24 inches (600 mm) in diameter and larger.
4.2.1.3 Corrugated Steel Pipe (CSP) - Flexible Pipe

1. CSP shall be metallic-coated (galvanized) pipe in accordance with AASHTO M 36 (sheet metal thickness and corrugation size as specified in the contract documents). 2. CSP shall be connected with locking corrugated coupling bands of the design indicated in AASHTO M 36, Coupling Bands section. 3. Connecting bands shall be coated in accordance with the pipe coating requirements.
4.2.1.4 Vitrified Clay Pipe (VCP) - Rigid Pipe

1. VCP shall be used only to the extent required to tie into existing VCP systems. Alternative materials should be selected for new piping installations. 2. VCP shall be extra strength in accordance with ASTM C700. 3. Joints shall be compression type in accordance with ASTM C425, unless otherwise specified in the contract documents.
4.2.1.5 Polyvinyl Chloride Plastic (PVC) Pipe - Flexible Pipe

1. PVC pipe 12 inches (300 mm) or less in diameter shall be minimum schedule 40 pipe in accordance with ASTM D1785. 2. Joints shall be solvent cemented in accordance with ASTM D2855, using cement in accordance with ASTM D2564 or shall have elastomeric ring gaskets in accordance with ASTM D3212.

Page 6 of 15

Process Industry Practices

COMPLETE REVISION
October 2004

PIP CVS02700 Underground Gravity Sewers Specification

4.2.1.6 Cast Ductile Iron Soil Pipe (DISP) - Rigid Pipe

1. Cast DISP and fittings shall be hub and plain end coated service weight in accordance with ASTM A74. 2. Joints shall be neoprene sleeve gasketed, push-on type in accordance with ASTM C564.
4.2.1.7 High-Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe - Flexible Pipe

1. HDPE pipe and fittings shall be manufactured from virgin highdensity polyethylene resin, in accordance with ASTM D3350, Cell Class PE345434C minimum, with a standard dimension ratio (SDR) as specified in the contract documents. 2. Joints shall be butt fusion welded, socket fusion welded, or flanged. 3. Alternate joining method shall consist of arch-band split sleeve couplings made of carbon steel conforming to ASTM A36 or stainless steel grade 304L or 316L. The coupling shall be designed with closure plates and sealing pads for installation and a leak-proof seal. O-Ring gaskets shall be used and shall consist of ethylene propylene diene monomer (EPDM), nitrile, silicon, or polyisoprene as required for the service intended. Couplings shall allow for angular deflection, expansion, and vibration if required. If a restrained joint is required, it shall be accomplished with restraining rings welded to the exterior of the pipe and a restraining-type coupling. 4. HDPE mechanical coupling joints are also acceptable if approved by the purchaser. 5. Wall thickness shall be specified as follows:
NPS
4 16 inches 18 48 inches

SDR
17 32.5

4.2.1.8 Reinforced Concrete Box (RCB) Sections - Rigid Pipe

1. RCB sections shall be in accordance with ASTM C1433 unless otherwise specified in the contract documents. 2. The appropriate table of section requirements from the listed ASTM standard shall be used for the design loading specified in the contract documents. 3. Joints shall be pre-formed plastic gasket-type joint sealant, unless specified otherwise in the contract documents.
4.2.1.9 Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe (CPP) - Flexible Pipe

1. CPP and fittings shall be bell and spigot type, manufactured in accordance with AASHTO M 294. Bell shall be an integral part of the pipe.

Process Industry Practices

Page 7 of 15

PIP CVS02700 Underground Gravity Sewers Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
October 2004

2. Pipe shall be Type S with a smooth inner liner unless otherwise specified in the contract documents. 3. Joints shall be sealed using elastomeric gaskets in accordance with ASTM F477 unless otherwise specified in the contract documents. 4.2.2 Manholes, Inlet Structures, Frames, and Covers 4.2.2.1 Manholes and inlet structures (catch basins) shall be precast (monolithic) with integral bottom. See PIP CVC01015 for manholespacing criteria. 4.2.2.2 Precast concrete manholes shall conform to ASTM C478. 4.2.2.3 HDPE plate used for manholes and inlet structures shall be manufactured from virgin high-density polyethylene resin in accordance with ASTM D1248-IIIC5-P34 pipe grade resin. 4.2.2.4 HDPE pipe components used for manholes and inlet structures shall be as specified in Section 4.2.1.7 (this Practice). 4.2.2.5 Site-built concrete manholes shall be in accordance with the contract documents. 4.2.3 Cast-in-Place Concrete Cast-in-place concrete used for sewers shall be constructed in accordance with PIP STS03001. 4.3 Construction 4.3.1 Receiving and Handling 4.3.1.1 Care shall be taken during handling and storage so as not to damage or to cause stresses or deformation in pipe materials. 4.3.1.2 Pipe materials shall be inspected before installation. Any damaged materials that are not acceptable to purchaser shall be rejected and replaced at no cost to purchaser. 4.3.2 Trench Excavation 4.3.2.1 All excavation and trenching shall be made in accordance with PIP CVS02100, OSHA standards, and owners local requirements and guidelines (as applicable) for the following: a. Shoring, bracing, and/or sloping wall construction b. Marking and flagging open excavations c. Permitting and confined space entry requirements d. Employing excavation-competent person (ECP) e. Handling and storing excavated materials 4.3.2.2 Proper care and protection shall be provided to prevent damage to all existing facilities (e.g., foundations, services, pipelines, etc.) on,

Page 8 of 15

Process Industry Practices

COMPLETE REVISION
October 2004

PIP CVS02700 Underground Gravity Sewers Specification

above, or below the surface of the area where excavation and backfill operations are to be performed. 4.3.2.3 Underground obstructions (e.g., piping, foundations, structures, etc.) shall not be removed or altered without owners approval. 4.3.2.4 Trench depth shall be based on the specified invert of the pipe plus the bedding requirements as specified in this Practice and in the contract documents. 4.3.2.5 Trench width shall be as narrow as possible while still permitting proper access for bedding and assembly of the pipe. If practical, maximum trench width from bottom of the trench to 12 inches (300 mm) above the pipe shall be 4/3 the nominal diameter of the pipe plus 8 inches (200 mm). 4.3.2.6 If rock or other unyielding material is encountered, the bottom of the trench shall be over-excavated 1/6 of the pipe diameter but in no case less than 4 inches (100 mm). 4.3.2.7 If unacceptable soil is encountered, as determined by owner, such soils shall be removed. The resulting over-excavation shall be backfilled with suitable material to the specified grade. (See bedding requirements specified in this Practice.) 4.3.2.8 The bottoms of trenches or bedding material (as applicable) shall be firm and graded to provide uniform bearing of the pipe. 4.3.2.9 If pipe joint diameter exceeds pipe outside diameter (e.g., bell and spigot piping), bell holes shall be manually excavated after the trench bottom has been graded. 4.3.2.10 Erosion control measures shall be incorporated as required by applicable regulations and by owners requirements.
4.3.2.11 Flexible Conduit

1. Only as much trench shall be opened as can be safely maintained by available equipment. 2. All trenches shall be backfilled as soon as practicable but not later than the end or each working day. 3. The space between the conduit and trench wall shall be wider than the compaction equipment used in the conduit zone; however, in no case shall it be wider than the conduit diameter times 1.5 plus 12 inches (300 mm). Comment: Flexible conduit requires stable trench walls to assure proper embedment of pipe and compaction of the bedding materials.

Process Industry Practices

Page 9 of 15

PIP CVS02700 Underground Gravity Sewers Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
October 2004

4.3.2.12 Wall Supports

1. If trench wall supports such as sheeting are required, these supports must be left in place to preclude loss of support for the pipe. 2. If sheeting is to be cut off, cuts shall be made a minimum of 1.5 ft (450 mm) above the crown of the pipe. 3. Rangers, whalers, and braces shall be left in place as required to support cutoff sheeting. 4. If timber sheeting is used, it shall be treated as a permanent structure and treated against biological degradation. 4.3.2.13 If ledge rock, hard pan, shale, or other unyielding material, cobbles, rubble, debris, boulders, or stones larger than 1.5 inches (40 mm) are encountered in the trench bottom, the trench shall be excavated to a minimum depth of 6 inches (150 mm) below the bottom of pipe elevation. The excavated materials shall be replaced with proper embedment material. 4.3.3 Dewatering 4.3.3.1 Equipment necessary to collect and discharge water away from excavations, such as pumps, sumps, suction and discharge lines, and all other dewatering system components, shall be provided, installed, and maintained. 4.3.3.2 All water encountered shall be disposed of in such a manner that property is not damaged and no nuisance or health menace results. 4.3.3.3 If required by owner, a means of desilting the water before disposal shall be provided. 4.3.3.4 At any time, the length of open trench shall be limited to that which can be dewatered with methods and equipment available. 4.3.3.5 Dewatering methods shall be used to minimize softening of the soil supporting the pipe and changes in soil characteristics that are detrimental to subgrade stability. 4.3.3.6 Water shall not be allowed to accumulate in excavations. Subsurface water flowing into excavations shall be removed by pumping or if possible by gravity drainage. 4.3.3.7 Surface water shall be diverted away from the work area as directed by owner. 4.3.3.8 The trench shall not be used as a temporary drainage ditch. 4.3.4 Bedding 4.3.4.1 Bedding material shall be granular and well graded. All material shall pass a 1/2-inch (12.5-mm) sieve and shall be at least 90% retained on No. 200 (75 microns) sieve as determined in accordance with ASTM D422.

Page 10 of 15

Process Industry Practices

COMPLETE REVISION
October 2004

PIP CVS02700 Underground Gravity Sewers Specification

4.3.4.2 Bedding material shall be placed under and equally along both sides of the pipe in uniform layers not exceeding 6 inches (150 mm) loose depth to a height of the centerline of the pipe and compacted by hand, pneumatic tamper, or other owner-approved means. 4.3.4.3 Bedding material shall be compacted to a density approximately that of the undisturbed site soil materials or as specified in the contract documents. 4.3.4.4 If compacted, the pipe bed shall provide uniform bearing for the bottom of the pipe (see trenching requirements specified in this Practice). 4.3.4.5 Localized loading and differential settlement shall be minimized where the pipe crosses other utilities or subsurface structures or in areas having special foundations such as pile caps or sheeting. A cushion of bedding shall be provided between the pipe and any such point of localized loading. 4.3.4.6 Bedding shall conform to one of the following classes. Class C bedding shall be used if no class is specified in the contract documents. See Figure A for details. a. Class A - concrete cradle bedding - requires embedment of the lower part of the pipe in plain or reinforced concrete of suitable thickness and extending up to the sides of the pipe a distance not less than 25% of the pipe outside diameter. b. Class B - first class bedding - requires the pipe to be placed on the fine granular materials foundation extending up to the center line of the pipe. The trench shall then be filled to 1 ft (300 mm) over the top of the pipe with granular material in 6-inch (150-mm) layers and compacted to fill all the space around the pipe. c. Class C - ordinary bedding - requires placing the pipe on fine granular material cradle extending up to the sides of the pipe a distance not less than 1/6 of the pipe outside diameter. The trench shall then be filled to 6 inches (150 mm) over the top of the pipe with granular material placed and compacted to fill all space around the pipe. d. Class D - impermissible bedding - allows the pipe to be placed on the bottom of the trench with no effort to shape the trench to fit the pipe. Fill shall be placed around the pipe. 4.3.4.7 Bedding for box culverts shall conform to one of the following classes. Class C bedding shall be used if no class is specified in the contract documents. a. Class B bedding shall be obtained by installing the box section on a minimum thickness of fine granular material of at least 2 inches (50 mm). Compacted granular material shall be placed

Process Industry Practices

Page 11 of 15

PIP CVS02700 Underground Gravity Sewers Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
October 2004

on each side of the box section and up to at least 1 ft (300 mm) over the top of the box. b. Class C bedding shall be obtained by placing the box section on a flat trench bottom. Lightly compacted fill shall be placed on each side of the box section and up to 6 inches (150 mm) over the top of the box. 4.3.4.8 Flowable fill (controlled low-strength material, CLSM) may be used for Class B, C, or D bedding material. CLSM shall be in accordance with PIP CVS02100. 4.3.5 Pipe Laying and Jointing 4.3.5.1 Pipe shall be laid beginning at the lowest point in trenches. 4.3.5.2 Pipes with spigot or tongue ends shall be laid with spigot ends pointing in the direction of flow. 4.3.5.3 Pipe types other than those with spigot or tongue ends shall be laid in accordance with the pipe manufacturers recommendations or instructions. 4.3.5.4 Pipe shall be laid true to line and grade and kept clean and sound. 4.3.5.5 Pipe laying and joining shall be carried out in a dry trench. 4.3.5.6 Each length of pipe shall be inspected for loose gaskets, cracks, and other defects before installation. 4.3.5.7 After inspection, each acceptable length of pipe shall be carefully placed to the line and grade specified and nested in the bedding in such a manner as to provide uniform support throughout its entire length. 4.3.5.8 If pipe laying is suspended, the ends of the pipe shall be kept closed and sealed to keep out soil and foreign materials. 4.3.5.9 After the joints have been made, the pipe shall not be disturbed in any manner. 4.3.5.10 HDPE pipe shall be welded by experienced, qualified welders. All welds shall be fusion welds except at manholes, where extrusion welds are permitted. 4.3.5.11 Manholes, catch basins, dry boxes, etc., shall be constructed in accordance with PIP CVI02720. 4.3.5.12 Bell and spigot joints shall be clean and dry. A lubricant recommended by the pipe manufacturer shall be applied to the joint materials. The spigot shall have full bell penetration. 4.3.6 Backfilling 4.3.6.1 Backfill and compaction material shall be in accordance with PIP CVS02100 and this Practice and shall be similar to in-situ material.

Page 12 of 15

Process Industry Practices

COMPLETE REVISION
October 2004

PIP CVS02700 Underground Gravity Sewers Specification

4.3.6.2 The trench shall be backfilled and compacted to a density equal to that specified on the contract documents or equal to that of the adjacent in situ material. 4.3.6.3 As soon as possible after pipe joints are made, backfill material shall be placed along the sides of the pipe with care to prevent movement of the line or grade. 4.3.6.4 Joints shall be left exposed until completion of leak testing. 4.3.6.5 Backfilling of trenches shall be completed immediately after testing. 4.3.6.6 Backfilling shall be compacted in a manner that avoids displacement or damage to the pipe. 4.3.6.7 Construction machinery or vehicles shall not be allowed to pass over the trench until the trench is backfilled and compacted sufficiently to prevent damage to the pipe. 4.3.6.8 Flowable fill (CLSM) may be used for backfill material if specified in contract documents. 4.3.7 Embedment of Flexible Conduit 4.3.7.1 Embedment configuration, materials, and compaction requirements shall be in accordance with the contract documents. 4.3.7.2 If embedment materials are not specified in the contract documents, Class II or Class III materials shall be in accordance with Table 1 of ASTM D2321, determined to be compatible with pipe and suitable to prevent migration of adjacent soils. 4.3.7.3 If embedment installation requirements are not specified in the contract documents, installation shall be in accordance with the recommendations given in Table 2 of ASTM D2321. 4.3.7.4 Embedment materials shall be placed into the trench, using methods that will not disturb or damage the conduit. 4.3.7.5 Material in the area between the bedding and the underside of the conduit shall be worked in and tamped before placing and compacting the rest of the embedment. 4.3.7.6 Compaction equipment shall not be allowed to contact the conduit and damage the conduit wall. 4.3.7.7 Embedment shall not be compacted by running over the materials with earthmoving equipment. 4.3.7.8 To preclude damage to the installed conduit and disturbance of the conduit embedment, a minimum depth of at least 24 inches (600 mm) or 1 pipe diameter of cover, whichever is greater, shall be maintained over the top of conduit before allowing vehicles to traverse the conduit trench. 4.3.7.9 To preclude potential floatation of the installed conduit, a minimum depth of backfill over the top of conduit of at least 24 inches

Process Industry Practices

Page 13 of 15

PIP CVS02700 Underground Gravity Sewers Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
October 2004

(600 mm) or 1 pipe diameter of cover over the pipe, whichever is greater, shall be maintained. 4.4 Exfiltration Test 4.4.1 Setup 1. Exfiltration shall be measured at a manhole. 2. The section of pipe to be tested shall be plugged at the downstream end of pipe (e.g., as at a manhole). 3. The lateral pipe in the section being tested shall be plugged with removable stoppers. 4.4.2 Procedure for Process and Sanitary Sewers 1. Sections of pipe shall be filled, 400-ft (122-m) maximum length at a time, with water to the top of the manhole but not less than 5 ft (1.5 m) above the top of the pipe. 2. If required, a standpipe shall be used to bring the water level to 5 ft (1.5 m) above the top of the pipe. 3. Water shall be allowed to stand for 4 hours. 4. Manhole shall be refilled and the drop shall be measured after 1 hour. 5. Maximum allowable exfiltration shall be as follows: a. Process sewers - no measurable amount b. Sanitary sewers - 0.0008 gallons/inch diameter/ft/hour (0.00039 liters/mm diameter/m/hour) 4.4.3 4.5 Exfiltration testing of storm sewers shall be done in accordance with ASTM C969.

Considerations for Existing Facilities 4.5.1 4.5.2 If construction of new sewers interferes with existing sewers, satisfactory temporary bypass facilities shall be provided. Open ends of existing sewers that are cut or abandoned in place shall be securely closed with a plug or wall of concrete having a minimum thickness of 3 pipe diameters.

Page 14 of 15

Process Industry Practices

COMPLETE REVISION
October 2004

PIP CVS02700 Underground Gravity Sewers Specification

Figure A - Bedding Methods for Trench Conduits

CLASS "A"
Reinforced A s = 1.0% L f = 4.8 Reinforced A s = 0.4% Lf = 3.4 Plain Lf = 2.8 4/3 Bc+ 8 inches (200 mm) min. 1 1/4 Bc

CLASS "B"
Lf = 1.9 Densely compacted backfill 12 inch (300 mm) min. 12 inch (300 mm) min.
Bc

Bc

1/4 Bc 1/4 D max.

Compacted granular material d

CONCRETE CRADLE CLASS "C"


Lf = 1.5

Concrete

GRANULAR FOUNDATION CLASS "D"


L f = 1.1

Lightly compacted backfill H 6 inch (150 mm) min.

H 6 inch (150 mm) min.

Bc

Compacted granular material 1/6 B c d


Bc

Loose backfill

GRANULAR FOUNDATION Legend Bc = outside diameter H = backfill cover above top of pipe D = inside diameter d = depth of bedding material below pipe As = area of transverse steel in the cradle or arch expressed as a percent of area of concrete at invert or crown. L f = bedding factor

FLAT SUBGRADE

Depth of bedding material below pipe D d (min.) 27 inches (690 mm) 3 inches (75 mm) & smaller 30 inches (760 mm 4 inches (100 mm) to 60 inch (1.53 m) 66 inches (1.68 m) 6 inches (150 mm) & larger

Process Industry Practices

Page 15 of 15

COMPLETE REVISION
October 2011

Process Industry Practices Civil

PIP CVI02350 Roadway and Area Paving General Notes and Typical Details

PURPOSE AND USE OF PROCESS INDUSTRY PRACTICES In an effort to minimize the cost of process industry facilities, this Practice has been prepared from the technical requirements in the existing standards of major industrial users, contractors, or standards organizations. By harmonizing these technical requirements into a single set of Practices, administrative, application, and engineering costs to both the purchaser and the manufacturer should be reduced. While this Practice is expected to incorporate the majority of requirements of most users, individual applications may involve requirements that will be appended to and take precedence over this Practice. Determinations concerning fitness for purpose and particular matters or application of the Practice to particular project or engineering situations should not be made solely on information contained in these materials. The use of trade names from time to time should not be viewed as an expression of preference but rather recognized as normal usage in the trade. Other brands having the same specifications are equally correct and may be substituted for those named. All Practices or guidelines are intended to be consistent with applicable laws and regulations including OSHA requirements. To the extent these Practices or guidelines should conflict with OSHA or other applicable laws or regulations, such laws or regulations must be followed. Consult an appropriate professional before applying or acting on any material contained in or suggested by the Practice. This Practice is subject to revision at any time.

Process Industry Practices (PIP), Construction Industry Institute, The University of Texas at Austin, 3925 West Braker Lane (R4500), Austin, Texas 78759. PIP Member Companies and Subscribers may copy this Practice for their internal use. Changes or modifications of any kind are not permitted within any PIP Practice without the express written authorization of PIP. Authorized Users may attach addenda or overlays to clearly indicate modifications or exceptions to specific sections of PIP Practices. Authorized Users may provide their clients, suppliers and contractors with copies of the Practice solely for Authorized Users purposes. These purposes include but are not limited to the procurement process (e.g., as attachments to requests for quotation/ purchase orders or requests for proposals/contracts) and preparation and issue of design engineering deliverables for use on a specific project by Authorized Users client. PIPs copyright notices must be clearly indicated and unequivocally incorporated in documents where an Authorized User desires to provide any third party with copies of the Practice.

PUBLISHING HISTORY July 2006 Issued as CVI02000 October 2011 Complete Revision and Renumbering

Not printed with State funds

COMPLETE REVISION
October 2011

Process Industry Practices Civil

PIP CVI02350 Roadway and Area Paving General Notes and Typical Details
Table of Contents 1. Introduction................................. 3
1.1 1.2 2.1 2.2 Purpose ....................................... 3 Scope .......................................... 3 Process Industry Practices ......... 3 Industry Codes and Standards ... 3 CVI02350-13 - Area Paving Details Construction Joint CVI02350-14 - Area Paving Details Transition CVI02350-15 - Area Paving Details Free Edge CVI02350-16 - Area Paving Details Free Edge with Curb CVI02350-17 - 19 Reserved CVI02350-20 - Miscellanous Details Guardrail Assembly CVI02350-20M - Miscellanous Details Guardrail Assembly (Metric) CVI02350-21 - Miscellanous Details Guardrail Details CVI02350-21M - Miscellanous Details Guardrail Details (Metric) CVI02350-22 - Miscellanous Details Guard Posts CVI02350-23 - Miscellanous Details Headwall for One Culvert CVI02350-23M - Miscellanous Details Headwall for One Culvert (Metric) CVI02350-24 - Miscellanous Details Headwall with Wings for One Culverts CVI02350-24M - Miscellanous Details Headwall with Wings for One Culvert (Metric) CVI02350-25 - Miscellaneous Details Headwall for Two Culverts

2. References .................................. 3

3. Abbreviations.............................. 4 Drawings
CVI02350-00 - General Notes CVI02350 01 - Roadway Details Contraction Joint CVI02350-02 - Roadway Details Doweled Expansion Joint CVI02350-03 - Roadway Details Doweled Construction Joint CVI02350-04 - Roadway Details Doweled/Keyed Joint CVI02350-05 - 09 Reserved CVI02350-10 - Area Paving Details Expansion Joints CVI02350-11 - Area Paving Details Isolation Joint CVI02350-12 - Area Paving Details Saw Cut Contraction Joints

Process Industry Practices

Page 1 of 4

COMPLETE REVISION
October 2011

CVI02350-25M - Miscellaneous Details Headwall for Two Culverts (Metric) CVI02350-26 - Miscellaneous Details Headwall with Wings for Two Culverts CVI02350-26M - Miscellaneous Details Headwall with Wings for Two Culverts (Metric)

Process Industry Practices

Page 2 of 4

PIP CVI02350
Roadway and Area Paving General Notes and Typical Details

COMPLETE REVISION
October 2011

1.

Introduction
1.1 Purpose This Practice provides typical details for construction of roadways and area paving for use in conjunction with design drawings and project specifications. 1.2 Scope This Practice provides typical details for roadway paving, area paving, guard posts, guard rails and headwalls. General notes are provided to supplement the requirements shown on design drawings and project specifications. Area paving details are for 4- and 6-inch concrete paving intended for pedestrian and light vehicular traffic. Abbreviations commonly used on design drawings are also listed in this Practice.

2.

References
Applicable parts of the following Practices shall be considered an integral part of this Practice. The edition in effect on the date of contract award shall be used, except as otherwise noted. Short titles are used herein where appropriate. 2.1 Process Industry Practices (PIP) PIP CVS02100 - Site Preparation, Excavation, and Backfill Specification PIP CVS02350 - Roadway and Area Paving Construction Specification PIP STI03310 - Concrete Typical Details (STI03310 -00 General Notes) PIP STS03001 - Plain and Reinforced Concrete Specification 2.2 Industry Codes and Standards ASTM International (ASTM) ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and HotDipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength ASTM A992/A992M - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes

Process Industry Practices

Page 3 of 4

PIP CVI02350
Roadway and Area Paving General Notes and Typical Details

COMPLETE REVISION
October 2011

3.

Abbreviations
FTG = FOOTING GA = GAUGE OR GAGE GALV = GALVANIZED HORIZ = HORIZONTAL HP = HIGH POINT HPFS = HIGH POINT FINISH SURFACE HW = HEADWALL ID = INSIDE DIAMETER IE = INVERT ELEVATION INV = INVERT ELEVATION L = LENGTH LF = LINEAR FEET LG = LONG LOC = LOCATION LP = LOW POINT LPFS = LOW POINT FINISH SURFACE MAX = MAXIMUM MES = MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL SUPPORT MH = MANHOLE MIN = MINIMUM MISC = MISCELLANEOUS MPS = MISC PIPE SUPPORT MS = MISCELLANEOUS SUPPORT N = NUMBER NF = NEAR FACE NO. = NUMBER NS = NEAR SIDE NTD = NOTED NTS = NOT TO SCALE OC = ON CENTER OD = OUTSIDE DIAMETER OPNG = OPENING OPP = OPPOSITE P = PROJECTION PC = POINT OF CURVATURE PI = POINT OF INTERSECTION PROJ = PROJECTION PT = POINT OF TANGENCY PVI = POINT OF VERTICAL INTERSECTION QTY = QUANTITY R = RADIUS RAD = RADIUS PCP = REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE REF = REFERENCE REINF = REINFORCING REQD = REQUIRED ROW = RIGHT-OF-WAY RR = RAILROAD SCH = SCHEDULE SIM = SIMILAR SPA = SPACE OR SPACES SPCD = SPACED SPCG = SPACING SPEC = SPECIFICATION SQ = SQUARE STA = STATION STD = STANDARD SUCT = SUCTION SUPT = SUPPORT SYMM = SYMMETRICAL UON = UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED T = TOP THD = THREAD THK = THICK TO. = TOP OF TOC = TOP OF CONCRETE TOG = TOP OF GROUT OR TOP OF GROUND TYP = TYPICAL VERT = VERTICAL W/ = WITH W/O = WITHOUT WP = WORK POINT WWR = WELDED WIRE REINFORCEMENT @ = AT
C

AB = ANCHOR BOLT B = BOTTOM BC = BOLT CIRCLE BM = BENCH MARK BO = BOTTOM OF BOC = BOTTOM OF CONCRETE BOT = BOTTOM C/C = CENTER TO CENTER CB = CATCH BASIN CJ = CONTRACTION JOINT CL = CENTERLINE CLR = CLEAR OR CLEARANCE CMP = CORRUGATED METAL PIPE COL = COLUMN CONC = CONCRETE CONST = CONSTRUCTION CONT = CONTINUOUS COORD = COORDINATE CTRD = CENTERED DB = DRY BOX DET = DETAIL DIA = DIAMETER DISCH = DISCHARGE DWG = DRAWING DWL = DOWEL EA = EACH EF = EACH FACE EJ = EXPANSION JOINT EL = ELEVATION (HEIGHT) ELEV = ELEVATION VIEW EQ = EQUAL OR EQUALLY EW = EACH WAY EXIST = EXISTING FDN = FOUNDATION FF = FAR FACE FG = FINISH GRADE FIN = FINISH FL = FLOW LINE FS = FAR SIDE

= CENTERLINE = DEGREE OF CURVATURE = INFLECTION ANGLE

O = DIAMETER

Process Industry Practices

Page 4 of 4

COMPLETE REVISION
July 2012

Process Industry Practices Civil

PIP CVS02350 Roadway and Area Paving Construction Specification

PURPOSE AND USE OF PROCESS INDUSTRY PRACTICES In an effort to minimize the cost of process industry facilities, this Practice has been prepared from the technical requirements in the existing standards of major industrial users, contractors, or standards organizations. By harmonizing these technical requirements into a single set of Practices, administrative, application, and engineering costs to both the purchaser and the manufacturer should be reduced. While this Practice is expected to incorporate the majority of requirements of most users, individual applications may involve requirements that will be appended to and take precedence over this Practice. Determinations concerning fitness for purpose and particular matters or application of the Practice to particular project or engineering situations should not be made solely on information contained in these materials. The use of trade names from time to time should not be viewed as an expression of preference but rather recognized as normal usage in the trade. Other brands having the same specifications are equally correct and may be substituted for those named. All Practices or guidelines are intended to be consistent with applicable laws and regulations including OSHA requirements. To the extent these Practices or guidelines should conflict with OSHA or other applicable laws or regulations, such laws or regulations must be followed. Consult an appropriate professional before applying or acting on any material contained in or suggested by the Practice. This Practice is subject to revision at any time.

Process Industry Practices (PIP), Construction Industry Institute, The University of Texas at Austin, 3925 West Braker Lane (R4500), Austin, Texas 78759. PIP Member Companies and Subscribers may copy this Practice for their internal use. Changes or modifications of any kind are not permitted within any PIP Practice without the express written authorization of PIP. Authorized Users may attach addenda or overlays to clearly indicate modifications or exceptions to specific sections of PIP Practices. Authorized Users may provide their clients, suppliers and contractors with copies of the Practice solely for Authorized Users purposes. These purposes include but are not limited to the procurement process (e.g., as attachments to requests for quotation/ purchase orders or requests for proposals/contracts) and preparation and issue of design engineering deliverables for use on a specific project by Authorized Users client. PIPs copyright notices must be clearly indicated and unequivocally incorporated in documents where an Authorized User desires to provide any third party with copies of the Practice.

PRINTING HISTORY April 2002 Issued July 2012 Complete Revision Not printed with State funds

COMPLETE REVISION
July 2012

Process Industry Practices Civil

PIP CVS02350 Roadway and Area Paving Construction Specification


Table of Contents 1. Introduction................................. 2
1.1 Purpose ............................................ 2 1.2 Scope ............................................... 2

4. Requirements ............................. 4
4.1 Quality Control/Assurance ............... 4 4.2 Materials .......................................... 4 4.3 Subgrade Preparation, Subbase, and Base Course ............................. 6 4.4 Surfacing .......................................... 8

2. References .................................. 2
2.1 Process Industry Practices .............. 2 2.2 Industry Codes and Standards ........ 2

3. Definitions ................................... 3

Process Industry Practices

Page 1 of 15

PIP CVS02350 Roadway and Area Paving Construction Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
July 2012

1.

Introduction
1.1 Purpose This Practice provides requirements for construction of roadways and area paving within plant boundaries and for access roadways from public roadways to plant facilities. 1.2 Scope This Practice describes minimum requirements for material, construction, and quality control/assurance of roadways and area paving within plant boundaries and for access roadways from public roadways to plant facilities.

2.

References
Applicable parts of the following Practices and industry codes and standards shall be considered an integral part of this Practice. The edition in effect on the date of contract award shall be used, except as otherwise noted. Short titles will be used herein where appropriate. 2.1 Process Industry Practices (PIP) PIP CVI02350 - Roadway and Area Paving General Notes and Typical Details PIP CVS02100 - Site Preparation, Excavation, and Backfill Specification PIP STS03001 - Plain and Reinforced Concrete Specification 2.2 Industry Codes and Standards ASTM International (ASTM) ASTM C33/C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates ASTM C131 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of SmallSize Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete ASTM C989/C989M Standard Specification for Slag Cement for Use in Concrete and Mortars ASTM D977 - Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt ASTM D1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3) ASTM D1883 - Standard Test Method for CBR (California Bearing Ratio) of Laboratory Compacted Soils ASTM D2026/D2026M - Standard Specification for Cutback Asphalt (SlowCuring Type) ASTM D2027/D2027M - Standard Specification for Cutback Asphalt (MediumCuring Type) ASTM D2028/D2028M - Standard Specification for Cutback Asphalt (RapidCuring Type)

Process Industry Practices

Page 2 of 15

PIP CVS02350 Roadway and Area Paving Construction Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
July 2012

ASTM D2041/D2041M - Standard Test Method for Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity and Density of Bituminous Paving Mixtures ASTM D2487 - Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System) ASTM D2726 - Standard Test Method for Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Non-Absorptive Compacted Bituminous Mixtures ASTM D2940/D2940M - Standard Specification for Graded Aggregate Material for Bases or Subbases for Highways or Airports ASTM D2950/D2950M - Standard Test Method for Density of Bituminous Concrete in Place by Nuclear Methods ASTM D3282 - Standard Practice for Classification of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures for Highway Construction Purposes ASTM D3381 - Standard Specification for Viscosity-Graded Asphalt Cement for Use in Pavement Construction ASTM D3628 - Standard Practice for Selection and Use of Emulsified Asphalts ASTM D5249 - Standard Specification for Backer Material for Use with Coldand Hot-Applied Joint Sealants in Portland-Cement Concrete and Asphalt Joints ASTM D6084 - Standard Test Method for Elastic Recovery of Bituminous Materials by Ductilometer ASTM D6373 - Standard Specification for Performance Graded Asphalt Binder ASTM D6938 - Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth) ASTM D7113/D7113M - Standard Test Method for Density of Bituminous Paving Mixtures in Place by the Electromagnetic Surface Contact Method

3.

Definitions
constructor: The party responsible for supplying the materials, equipment, tools, supervision, and labor for the installation of the roadway and area paving work in accordance with the contract documents. The term constructor shall apply also to the constructors subcontractor(s) and vendor(s). contract documents: Any and all documents including codes, studies, design drawings, specifications, sketches, practices, and data sheets that the purchaser has transmitted or otherwise communicated, either by incorporation or reference, and made part of the legal contract agreement or purchase order between the purchaser and the constructor engineer of record: Purchasers authorized representative with overall authority and responsibility for the engineering design, quality, and performance of the civil works, structure, foundations, materials, and appurtenances described in the contract documents. The engineer of record shall be licensed as defined by the laws of the locality in which the work is to be constructed, and be qualified to practice in the specialty discipline required for the work described in the contract documents. inspector: The party responsible for verifying the quality of all materials, installations, and workmanship furnished by the constructor. The inspector shall be qualified by training and experience

Process Industry Practices

Page 3 of 15

PIP CVS02350 Roadway and Area Paving Construction Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
July 2012

and hold certifications or documentation of their qualifications. Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, the inspector shall be an independent party retained by the purchaser. owner: The party who has authority through ownership, lease, or other legal agreement over the site wherein the roadway and area paving will be used purchaser: The party who awards the contract to the constructor. The purchaser may be the owner or the owners authorized agent.

4.

Requirements
4.1 Quality Control/Assurance 4.1.1 Quality Control and Submittals 4.1.1.1 A written Quality Control Program document that provides details of how compliance with the requirements of this specification and contract documents will be achieved shall be submitted to the purchaser for approval at least 15 days before start of construction. 4.1.1.2 Certified laboratory test data for the materials and products to be used in the work shall be submitted to the purchaser for approval at least 15 days prior to shipping of materials and products. 4.1.1.3 Results of the quality control tests required during the performance of the work shall be submitted to the purchaser within 48 hours of completion. 4.1.2 Quality Assurance 4.1.2.1 Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, an inspection and testing agency will be retained by the purchaser to perform field and laboratory testing and/or evaluations to verify compliance of the work with the requirements of this Practice and to ensure the achievement of the intents and purposes of the work. 4.1.2.2 The performance or lack of performance of the tests and inspections by purchasers inspector shall not be construed as granting relief from the requirements of this Practice or the other contract documents. 4.2 Materials 4.2.1 General General requirements for soil and aggregate classification shall be in accordance with ASTM D2487, ASTM D2940/D2940M, and ASTM D3282. 4.2.2 Water 4.2.2.1 Unless approved by the engineer of record, water used in construction shall be free of salts, oils, acids, alkalis, organic matter, or other deleterious substances. Water shall be fresh and not brackish or from the ocean. 4.2.2.2 Source for locally available water suitable for construction shall be obtained from the owner.

Process Industry Practices

Page 4 of 15

PIP CVS02350 Roadway and Area Paving Construction Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
July 2012

4.2.2.3 Water used for concrete construction shall be in accordance with PIP STS03001. 4.2.3 Asphalt 4.2.3.1 Asphaltic concrete paving shall be in accordance with the Superpave system, unless otherwise approved by the engineer of record. Performance graded (PG) binder shall meet the requirements of ASTM D6373. The performance grade provided shall be as specified in the contract documents. If no performance grade is specified, the Performance Grade provided shall be PG 64-22. 4.2.3.2 If the temperature spread for the performance grade specified is 92C or greater, an elastic recovery test in accordance with ASTM D6084 shall be provided and the binder shall be polymer modified. If the temperature range is less than 92C, the asphalt binder shall not be polymer modified unless otherwise specified in the contract documents. 4.2.3.3 A dense-graded mix-type shall be provided unless otherwise specified in the contract documents. 4.2.3.4 Cutback asphalt shall be in accordance with ASTM D2026/D2026M, ASTM D2027/D2027M, or ASTM D2028/D2028M. 4.2.3.5 Emulsified asphalt shall be in accordance with ASTM D977 and ASTM D3628. 4.2.3.6 Liquid asphalt for prime coat shall be grade MC-70 or grade MC-250 in accordance with ASTM D2027/D2027M; or grade RC-70 or grade RC-250 in accordance with ASTM D2028/D2028M. 4.2.3.7 Asphalt cement for tack coat shall be viscosity grade AC-20 in accordance with ASTM D3381. 4.2.4 Aggregate for Subbase, Base and Untreated Gravel Surfaces 4.2.4.1 Materials for aggregate pavement base and subbase (if required) shall consist of durable and sound crushed gravel, crushed stone, or slag. 4.2.4.2 The aggregate materials shall be free from organic matter, lumps of clay, clay coatings, or other objectionable matter; and shall be in accordance with ASTM D2940/D2940M. 4.2.4.3 The aggregate shall have a soaked California Bearing Ratio (CBR) of 80% minimum when tested in accordance with ASTM D1883, and a percentage of wear not greater than 45% when tested in accordance with ASTM C131. 4.2.4.4 Aggregate gradation for untreated gravel surfaces shall conform to base requirements of ASTM D2940 except that a minimum of 8% shall pass 75 m (No. 200) sieve. 4.2.5 Aggregate for Asphaltic Concrete Paving 4.2.5.1 Aggregate for asphaltic concrete paving shall be determined by the Superpave mix design process unless otherwise approved by purchaser. 4.2.5.2 A dense graded mix-type shall be provided.

Process Industry Practices

Page 5 of 15

PIP CVS02350 Roadway and Area Paving Construction Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
July 2012

4.2.5.3 The nominal maximum aggregate size shall be 1/2 in (12.5 mm) for the surface layer and 1 in (25 mm) for the intermediate/binder and base courses unless otherwise specified in the contract documents. 4.2.6 Concrete 4.2.6.1 Materials for concrete construction shall be in accordance with PIP STS03001. 4.2.6.2 Concrete mix design in accordance with PIP STS03001 shall be used for concrete pavement with the following modifications: a. Pozzolans and ground granular blast slag (GGBS) are allowed as replacement for cementitious material or a portion of the fine aggregate in accordance with ASTM C618 and ASTM C989 respectively. b. Portland cement replacement shall be at a ratio of 1:1 with fly ash or GGBS up to a maximum of 20%. c. Alkali reactive aggregates are not permitted. d. Air entrainment of approximately 5% to reduce concrete cracking/deterioration shall be included in the mix design if specified in the contract documents for projects where freeze/thaw is a concern. 4.2.6.3 Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, the mixture shall attain a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 4,000 psi (28 MPa). 4.2.6.4 Coarse aggregate grading shall be as shown in ASTM C33/C33M, Size 67. Deviations shall be approved by the engineer of record. 4.2.6.5 Hot applied joint sealant shall be in accordance with design drawings. 4.2.6.6 Cold applied joint sealant shall be in accordance with design drawings. 4.2.6.7 Burlap shall weigh 9 oz/yd2 (305 g/m2) minimum and be clean and free of substances that can be harmful to freshly placed concrete. 4.2.6.8 Backer rod material shall be in accordance with ASTM D5249, Type I or Type III. 4.2.6.9 The constructor shall select the final mixture proportions that best meets the construction methods and performance criteria. 4.3 Subgrade Preparation, Subbase, and Base Course 4.3.1 Subgrade Preparation and Subbase 4.3.1.1 Clearing, grubbing, stripping, removal of waste, source of borrow, and construction drainage shall be in accordance with PIP CVS02100. 4.3.1.2 Fill material, compaction, and testing shall be in accordance with PIP CVS02100. 4.3.1.3 Subgrade preparation for base and subbase course placement shall be in accordance with PIP CVS02100.

Process Industry Practices

Page 6 of 15

PIP CVS02350 Roadway and Area Paving Construction Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
July 2012

4.3.1.4 Unless otherwise specified, the thickness of the subbase (if required) shall be 4 in (100 mm). 4.3.1.5 If a subbase layer is specified in the contract documents, the layer shall be carried 1 ft (300 mm) minimum beyond the width of the base course, unless otherwise shown on the design drawings. 4.3.1.6 Where shown in the contract documents, the upper surface of in situ subgrade soils shall be stabilized after stripping is complete in accordance with requirements specified in the contract documents. 4.3.1.7 Where shown and specified in the contract documents, geotextile and/or geogrid shall be installed in accordance with manufacturers instructions. 4.3.1.8 Proof roll the compacted subgrade with a 25-T (222 kN) pneumatic tire roller or a fully loaded dump truck. The moisture content of the subgrade should be near optimum. Proof roll at least two complete passes, each trip offset by at most one tire width of the roller. Operate the roller at a speed between 2 and 6 mph (3 and 10 kph). Observe for visible deformations such as rutting, cracking, rolling or elastic rebound (springing). 4.3.1.9 Rutting or springing movement greater than 1 in (25 mm) shall be considered as unacceptable. Substantial cracking or lateral movement shall be considered unacceptable. 4.3.1.10 Unacceptable material shall be removed and replaced in accordance with PIP CVS02100. 4.3.2 Base Course
4.3.2.1 New Construction

1. Aggregate base course shall not be constructed when atmospheric temperature is below 35F (2C), or if other weather conditions may detrimentally affect the quality of the base course. 2. Base course shall be placed in accordance with PIP CVS02100.
4.3.2.2 Thickness Requirements

1. The thickness of the base course should be measured at intervals of 500 yd2 (420 m2) maximum of completed base course. 2. Thickness measurements shall be taken by making test holes, 3 in (75 mm) in diameter minimum, through the base course. 3. No single base course thickness measurement shall have a deficiency greater than 1/2 in (13 mm). 4. The average thickness of the base course, determined by computing the average of the depth measurements, shall not under run the specified thickness by greater than 1/4 in (6 mm). 5. If the measured thickness is greater than 1/2 in (13 mm) thicker than specified, the measured thickness shall be considered to be equal to the specified thickness plus 1/2 in (13 mm) for determining the average.

Process Industry Practices

Page 7 of 15

PIP CVS02350 Roadway and Area Paving Construction Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
July 2012

6. Correct thickness deficiencies by scarifying, adding mixture of proper gradation, reblading, and recompacting affected areas.
4.3.2.3 Density Test

Test base course to the density specified in PIP CVS02100 in accordance with ASTM D6938. Test every 2000 ft2 (180 m2) of each lift and a minimum of one test each day base material is placed.
4.3.2.4 Maintenance

1. All debris, rubbish, and excess material shall be removed from the jobsite after completion of base course. 2. After construction has been completed, the base course shall be protected until final acceptance. Protection shall include drainage, rolling, shaping, and watering as necessary to maintain the base course in proper condition. 3. Areas of base course damaged by freezing, rainfall, or other weather conditions shall be corrected in accordance with the specified requirements. 4.4 Surfacing 4.4.1 General 4.4.1.1 Paving surfaces shall be gravel, asphalt, or concrete as shown on the design drawings. 4.4.1.2 Pavement shall be constructed on a previously completed and approved subgrade, subgrade and base, or existing pavement as shown on the design drawings. 4.4.1.3 The surface of the area to be paved shall be clean and kept from accumulating materials that would contaminate the mixture, prevent bonding, or interfere with placement operations. 4.4.1.4 Surfaces shall be finished such that positive drainage is provided. 4.4.2 Gravel Pavement 4.4.2.1 Compaction shall be continued until 95% of maximum dry density is achieved in accordance with ASTM D1557 and verified in the field using nuclear density testing in accordance with ASTM D6938, or other appropriate density test method approved by the engineer of record. 4.4.2.2 Sampling of compacted mixes from the roadway shall be in accordance with ASTM D3282. 4.4.3 Asphaltic Concrete Pavement
4.4.3.1 General

1. Air temperature shall be above 40F (4C) for duration of the application of prime coat, tack coat, and asphalt surface courses. 2. Air temperature readings shall be taken in the shade and away from artificial heat.

Process Industry Practices

Page 8 of 15

PIP CVS02350 Roadway and Area Paving Construction Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
July 2012

3. Prime coat, tack coat, and asphalt surface courses shall not be applied in unsuitable weather conditions. Unsuitable weather shall include the following conditions: a. Dense fog b. Rain c. Wind that is blowing at such a rate that proper compaction cannot be attained because of cooling of the mixture d. Wind that is blowing at such a rate that proper bonding cannot be achieved because sand, dust, or other debris is being deposited on the underlying surface 4. Asphalt that is discolored, indicating the bitumen has been overheated, shall not be used. 5. The surfaces of curbs, gutters, manholes, and other structures where asphaltic concrete paving is to be placed against shall be covered with a thin, uniform coat of liquid asphalt. 6. Where asphaltic concrete paving is to be placed against the vertical face of an existing pavement, the vertical face shall be cleaned to remove foreign substances and coated with liquid asphalt at a rate of approximately 0.25 gal/yd2 (1.14 L/m2).
4.4.3.2 Prime Coat

1. After the subgrade or base has been prepared and compacted, the prime coat shall be applied and permitted to cure 24 hours minimum before new asphaltic concrete paving is placed. 2. Asphalt for the prime coat shall be of medium curing type cutback asphalt. 3. Apply prime coat at a rate not less than 0.15 gal and not more than 0.33 gal/yd2 (0.7 to 1.5 L/m2) of surface. 4. If the asphalt is not entirely absorbed by the base course within 24 hours, excess asphalt shall be blotted with light, dry sand. 5. Damaged prime coat shall be repaired immediately.
4.4.3.3 Tack Coat

1. The tack coat shall be applied in advance of the asphaltic concrete paving operation under the following conditions: a. Placing asphaltic concrete over existing pavements b. Between asphaltic concrete courses if more than one asphaltic concrete course is used 2. Holes, ruts, and depressions in the existing asphaltic concrete course shall be cleaned out down to the hard surface and dried, and the asphaltic concrete surface shall be thoroughly swept clean.

Process Industry Practices

Page 9 of 15

PIP CVS02350 Roadway and Area Paving Construction Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
July 2012

3. Broken surfaces in the existing asphaltic concrete course shall be repaired as follows: a. Lightly coated with rapid curing type cutback asphalt b. Filled with surface asphaltic concrete c. Compacted to form an even surface 4. Asphalt for the tack coat shall be rapid curing cutback. 5. Apply tack coat at a rate not less than 0.05 gal/yd2 (0.2 L/m2) of surface. 6. The tack coat shall be applied sufficiently in advance of the placement operation of the asphalt mixture to permit volatiles to evaporate from the asphalt cement, but not so far in advance that the tack coat becomes covered with dust or other foreign substances.
4.4.3.4 Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete (HMAC)

1. Debris shall be removed from the tack coat before HMAC is applied. 2. In no case shall the maximum production temperature be more than 350F (177C). The HMAC temperatures shall be within the following requirements from production to finish rolling. a. Maximum production temperature: 350F (177C) b. Breakdown rolling: 320-275F (165-135C) c. Intermediate rolling: 275-200F (135-93C) d. Finish rolling: 200-150F (93-66C) 3. The minimum roadway surface temperatures are shown in Table 1.
Table 1. Minimum Roadway Surface Temperatures Minimum Roadway Surface Temperatures
High Temperature Binder Grade PG 64 PG 70 PG 76 Subsurface Layers or Night Paving Operations 45F (7C) 55F (13C) 60F (16C) Surface Layers Placed in Daylight Operations 50F (10C) 60F (16C) 60F (16C)

4. HMAC shall be placed to the required width and thickness; true to line, grade, and cross section. 5. The paver shall also be capable of providing a smoothly struck finish with uniform density and texture. 6. If the specified thickness of finished paving is greater than 3 in (75 mm), equal lifts consisting of a leveling-up course and a surface course shall be placed.

Process Industry Practices

Page 10 of 15

PIP CVS02350 Roadway and Area Paving Construction Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
July 2012

7. If the specified thickness of paving is 3 in (75 mm) or less, finished paving shall be placed in one layer. 8. A sufficient amount of material shall be placed to assure the specified pavement thickness after compaction. The average thickness of the course or of combined courses shall be within 1/4 in (6 mm) of the specified thickness. 9. Compaction shall be continued until further compaction cannot be obtained and all compactor marks are eliminated. Paving shall be discontinued if unable to achieve the specified density prior to the mixture cooling to 175F (79C). 10. Actual bulk density for full depth of compacted HMAC in accordance with ASTM D2726 shall range between 92% and 97% of theoretical maximum density in accordance with ASTM D2041/D2041M. a. Surface density of pavement shall be tested using electromagnetic surface contact methods in accordance with ASTM D7113/D7113M or with nuclear density methods in accordance with ASTM D2950/D2950M. b. Compaction tests results shall average between 92% to 97% with no test result below 91%. Each test shall consist of an average of four readings at each test location. c. Tests shall be performed on each lane of paving at a minimum of 250 ft (75 m) intervals.
4.4.3.5 Joint Construction

1. Each HMAC layer shall be placed as continuously as possible to minimize joints. 2. Joints shall be made in such a manner as to create a continuous bond between the old and new pavement construction courses. 3. If the pavement construction involves two or more courses, longitudinal joints in successive courses shall be offset by 6 in (150 mm) minimum. 4. If the placing of material is discontinued or if material in place cools to less than 140 F (60 C), a joint running perpendicular to the direction traveled by the paver shall be made. Before placement continues, the edge of the previously placed pavement shall be trimmed to a straight line perpendicular to the paver and cut back to expose an even vertical surface for the full thickness of the course. When placement continues, the paver shall be positioned on the transverse joint so that sufficient hot mixture can be placed to create a joint after compaction that is in accordance with the required smoothness. 5. Joints that are not completed before the previously laid mixture has cooled to a temperature of 140 F (60 C) shall be coated with liquid or emulsified asphalt just before paving is continued.

Process Industry Practices

Page 11 of 15

PIP CVS02350 Roadway and Area Paving Construction Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
July 2012

4.4.4

Concrete Pavement
4.4.4.1 Equipment

1. Mixing plant capacity shall be based on the size of the job and paving capacity to avoid shutdowns and minimize cold joints. 2. Fixed-form paving shall use screeds designed for striking off manual fixed-form concrete pavement conforming to the proper cross section. 3. Slip-form pavers shall be designed to spread, strike off, consolidate, screed, and float finish the freshly placed concrete in one complete pass of the machine to produce a dense and homogeneous pavement requiring minimal hand finishing. The slip form paving machine shall be equipped with the following: a. Automatic controls to control line and grade from either or both sides of the machine. b. Vibrators to consolidate the concrete for the full width and depth of the course placed in a single pass, and designed and constructed so no spreading or appreciable slumping of the concrete occurs. c. A positive interlock system to stop all vibration and tamping elements when forward motion of the machine stops. 4. Internal paving vibrators on paving machines shall vibrate at 5,000 to 8,000 impulses per minute. Surface pan type vibrators shall operate at a minimum of 4,000 impulses per minute. Single spud vibrators shall vibrate at a minimum of 7,000 impulses per minute. 5. Paving saws shall be capable of sawing fresh concrete. Saws shall be equipped with blade guards and guides to control alignment and depth.
4.4.4.2 Forms and Form Setting

1. Forms shall have a depth equivalent to the edge thickness of the pavement and shall be straight and free from warp. 2. The minimum length of a section of forms used on tangents shall be 10 ft (3 m). 3. Size, strength, and stability of forms shall be sufficient to resist movement when subjected to the pressure of concrete placement, including the impact and vibration of the finishing machine. 4. Flexible forms or wooden forms that bend to the required arc may be used on curves with a radius of 150 ft (45 m) or less. 5. Forms shall be set on firm, solid sub grade that is in accordance with required grade and alignment specifications, and joined together neatly and tightly. 6. At least three flange to vertical face braces, pin pockets with pin anchoring keys, and pins shall be used for each 10-ft form section. 7. Forms that show a deviation greater than 1/4 in (6 mm) in line or 1/8 in (3 mm) in grade shall be reset or replaced.

Process Industry Practices

Page 12 of 15

PIP CVS02350 Roadway and Area Paving Construction Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
July 2012

8. Forms shall be marked at locations where reinforcing is discontinued and saw cutting is required for contraction joints.
4.4.4.3 Execution

1. Pavement placement shall use either slip-form paving or fixed-form paving methods. 2. Pavement placement shall comply with the provisions of PIP STS03001 where applicable. 3. In addition to the provisions of PIP STS03001 for hot weather placement, when the maximum daily air temperature is likely to exceed 85F (29C), the following precaution shall be taken: The concrete shall be placed at the coolest temperature practicable, and the temperature of the concrete when placed shall not exceed 90F (32C). 4. Test entire surface before initial set and correct irregularities or undulations before finishing. Surface shall not have irregularities greater than 1/8 in (3 mm) when checked with a 10-ft (3-meter) straight edge held parallel to the centerline of the pavement. 5. Finish pavement with broom or artificial turf drag. Broom finish walks and small areas. Finishing tools shall be kept in good condition. 6. If paving operations are discontinued for more than 30 minutes, a construction joint shall be installed in accordance with the details shown in PIP CVI02350 at the location of the nearest contraction or expansion joint. Excess concrete beyond the location of the construction joint shall be removed. 7. Pavement shall be closed to vehicular traffic until the concrete is at least four days old and has reached a minimum compressive strength of 3000 psi (21 MPa) or 75% of the specified minimum 28-day compressive strength, whichever is greater. 8. After the concrete is at least 4 days old and has reached a minimum compressive strength of 3000 psi (21 MPa) or 75% of the specified minimum 28-day compressive strength, whichever is greater, the pavement may be opened to limited traffic with wheel loads not to exceed 5,000 lb (2,300 kg). 9. After the concrete has reached the specified minimum 28-day compressive strength as verified by the tests, equipment with wheel loads exceeding 5,000 lb (2,300 kg) may be permitted on the pavement.
4.4.4.4 Curing

1. Curing concrete pavement shall comply with the provisions of PIP STS03001. 2. Concrete surfaces subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after the curing compound has been applied shall be re-sprayed unless protected by sheeting.

Process Industry Practices

Page 13 of 15

PIP CVS02350 Roadway and Area Paving Construction Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
July 2012

3. Areas where the curing compound is damaged by subsequent construction operations within the curing period shall be immediately re-sprayed.
4.4.4.5 Quality Control/Quality Assurance

1. Quality Control/Quality Assurance shall be in accordance with PIP STS03001. 2. Locations and results of cylinder strength testing shall be recorded. Strengths shall be as specified in the mix design section of this specification. 3. Pavement sections which have more than 10% of cylinder tests that fall below the specified minimum 28-day compressive strength shall be removed and replaced. If purchaser agrees, additional strength tests may be performed at constructors expense to determine if there is an alternative to pavement removal. 4. Maintain a uniform consistency in consecutive batches of concrete. 5. Use following slumps for the placement method used: SLIP-FORMED - 2.5 in (65 mm) or less FIXED-FORMED - 4 in (100 mm) or less
4.4.4.6 Joint Construction

1. Joints shall be located as shown on the contract documents and constructed as specified in PIP STS03001. 2. Joints shall align with existing or adjacent joints where possible. 3. Before sawing a joint, the concrete shall be examined closely for cracks, and the joint shall not be sawed if a crack has occurred within 10 ft (3 m) from the planned joint location. Sawing shall be discontinued when a crack develops ahead of the saw cut. 4. Joint cuts shall be a minimum of one-fourth pavement thickness. Joints in pavements placed on lime-treated, soil-cement, or lean concrete bases shall be a minimum of one-third pavement thickness. 5. Sealant materials for joints shall be installed in accordance with manufacturers instructions. 6. Protect joint construction while placing concrete to avoid interference with the function of the joint.
4.4.4.7 Jointed Reinforced Concrete Pavement (JRCP)

1. Reinforcement, ties, and dowels shall be placed as shown in the contract documents. 2. Reinforcement installation shall be in accordance with PIP STS03001. 3. Unless otherwise specified in contract documents, see PIP CVI02350 for detail for reinforcing re-entrant corners to reduce cracking. Re-entrant corners commonly occur at footings or inlets.

Process Industry Practices

Page 14 of 15

PIP CVS02350 Roadway and Area Paving Construction Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
July 2012

4. Dowels shall be aligned perpendicular to the joint, parallel to each other and parallel with the bottom and top surfaces of the pavement. Dowels shall be securely supported on chairs. 5. Place the bar steel reinforcement after properly preparing the sub grade. Place the longitudinal bars on top of the transverse bars and firmly tie or fasten together at each intersection. Support the assembled bars on bar chairs at a depth shown in the contract documents. Bar chairs shall be sufficient in strength and number to hold the steel reinforcement in position during construction. 6. Arrangement of splices and splice lap lengths shall be as shown in the contract documents. 7. Install dowels or tie bars at joints as shown in the contract documents. 8. Protect all bar steel reinforcement left protruding from the slab for any extended period from deterioration caused by exposure. 9. Do not bend bar steel reinforcement or subject to loading or forces that distort the steel or weaken the bond to the concrete. 10. Tie coated bars using procedures, equipment, and materials that do not damage or cut the coating. Use one or more of the following materials to tie coated bars: a. Purchaser-approved plastic or nonmetallic material b. Stainless steel wire c. Nylon, epoxy, or plastic-coated wire
4.4.4.8 Jointed Plain Concrete Pavement (JPCP)

1. Reinforcing bars or welded wire reinforcing shall not be used in JPCP except at re-entrant corners. 2. Dowels or tie bars shall only be used in JPCP if shown in the contract documents. 3. Transverse contraction joints in roadway paving shall be sawed on a skew of one unit longitudinal to six units transverse. Skew may be varied to fit area geometry.

Process Industry Practices

Page 15 of 15

COMPLETE REVISION
October 2012

PIP STF05501 Fixed Ladders and Cages Fabrication Details

PUBLISHING HISTORY November 1994 Issued December 1999 Revision August 2000 Technical Correction February 2002 Technical Correction October 2012 Complete Revision

COMPLETE REVISION
October 2012

PIP STF05501 Fixed Ladders and Cages Fabrication Details


Table of Contents 1. Introduction .................................2

2. References ..................................2

3. Definitions ...................................2 4. Requirements ..............................3 Drawings


Process Industry Practices

Page 1 of 4

PIP STF05501 Fixed Ladders and Cages Fabrication Details

COMPLETE REVISION
October 2012

1.

Introduction
1.1 1.2 Purpose Scope

2.

References
2.1 Process Industry Practices (PIP) Concrete Typical Details Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Fabrication Specification 2.2 Industry Codes and Standards Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength 2.3 Government Regulations Regulations 29 CFR 1910 Subpart D (Walking-Working Surfaces)

3.

Definitions
contract documents: design drawings: engineer of record:

Process Industry Practices

Page 2 of 4

PIP STF05501 Fixed Ladders and Cages Fabrication Details

COMPLETE REVISION
October 2012

ladder fabricator: owner: purchaser: structure/platform engineer: structure/platform fabricator: vessel engineer: vessel manufacturer:

4.

Requirements
PIP STS05120 PIP STF05501-01PIP STF05501-11 PIP STF05501-03

Process Industry Practices

Page 3 of 4

PIP STF05501 Fixed Ladders and Cages Fabrication Details

COMPLETE REVISION
October 2012

PIP STF05501-03 PIP STF05501-02 PIP STF05501-03

ASTM A36/A36M PIP STF05501-01 PIP STS05120 OSHA Regulations 29 CFR 1910 Subpart D ASTM A307 PIP STS05120

Process Industry Practices

Page 4 of 4

COMPLETE REVISION
July 2008

Process Industry Practices Structural

PIP STS03600 Nonshrink Cementitious Grout Specification

PURPOSE AND USE OF PROCESS INDUSTRY PRACTICES In an effort to minimize the cost of process industry facilities, this Practice has been prepared from the technical requirements in the existing standards of major industrial users, contractors, or standards organizations. By harmonizing these technical requirements into a single set of Practices, administrative, application, and engineering costs to both the purchaser and the manufacturer should be reduced. While this Practice is expected to incorporate the majority of requirements of most users, individual applications may involve requirements that will be appended to and take precedence over this Practice. Determinations concerning fitness for purpose and particular matters or application of the Practice to particular project or engineering situations should not be made solely on information contained in these materials. The use of trade names from time to time should not be viewed as an expression of preference but rather recognized as normal usage in the trade. Other brands having the same specifications are equally correct and may be substituted for those named. All Practices or guidelines are intended to be consistent with applicable laws and regulations including OSHA requirements. To the extent these Practices or guidelines should conflict with OSHA or other applicable laws or regulations, such laws or regulations must be followed. Consult an appropriate professional before applying or acting on any material contained in or suggested by the Practice. This Practice is subject to revision at any time.

Process Industry Practices (PIP), Construction Industry Institute, The University of Texas at Austin, 3925 West Braker Lane (R4500), Austin, Texas 78759. PIP member companies and subscribers may copy this Practice for their internal use. Changes, overlays, addenda, or modifications of any kind are not permitted within any PIP Practice without the express written authorization of PIP.

PRINTING HISTORY November 1996 Issued June 2002 Complete Revision

July 2008

Complete Revision

Not printed with State funds

COMPLETE REVISION
July 2008

Process Industry Practices Structural

PIP STS03600 Nonshrink Cementitious Grout Specification


Table of Contents 1. Introduction................................. 2
1.1 Purpose ............................................. 2 1.2 Scope................................................. 2 2.1 Industry Codes and Standards .......... 2 2.2 Government Regulations................... 2

2. References .................................. 2

3. Definitions ................................... 2 4. Requirements.............................. 3


4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 General .............................................. 3 Field Quality Control of Grout ............ 3 Testing ............................................... 3 Submittals .......................................... 4 Safety................................................. 4 Materials ............................................ 5 Preparation for Grouting .................... 5 Installation of Grout ........................... 6 Curing ................................................ 7

Process Industry Practices

Page 1 of 6

PIP STS03600 Nonshrink Cementitious Grout Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
July 2008

1.

Introduction
1.1 Purpose This Practice provides the requirements for non-shrink cementitious grout materials and installation. 1.2 Scope This Practice describes the requirements for supplying, testing, and installing nonshrink cementitious grout materials.

2.

References
Applicable parts of the following Practices, industry codes and standards, and references shall be considered an integral part of this Practice. The edition in effect on the date of contract award shall be used, except as otherwise noted. Short titles will be used herein where appropriate. 2.1 Industry Codes and Standards ASTM International (ASTM) ASTM C109/C109M- Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic-Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. [ 50-mm] Cube Specimens) ASTM C827 Standard Test Method for Change in Height at Early Ages of Cylindrical Specimens of Cementitious Mixtures ASTM C1090 Standard Test Method for Measuring Changes in Height of Cylindrical Specimens of Hydraulic-Cement Grout ASTM C1107/C1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic Cement Grout (Nonshrink) 2.2 Government Regulations Federal standards and instructions of the U. S. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), including any additional requirements by state or local agencies that have jurisdiction where the grout is to be installed, shall apply, including the following: Code of Federal Regulations, OSHA Part 1910

3.

Definitions
constructor: The party responsible for supplying the materials, equipment, tools, supervision, and labor for the installation of the grout in accordance with the contract documents. Unless otherwise noted, the term constructor shall apply also to the constructors subcontractor(s) and vendor(s). contract documents: Any and all documents, including codes, studies, design drawings, specifications, sketches, practices, and data sheets, that the purchaser or engineer of record has transmitted or otherwise communicated, either by incorporation or reference, and made

Page 2 of 8

Process Industry Practices

COMPLETE REVISION
July 2008

PIP STS03600 Nonshrink Cementitious Grout Specification

part of the legal contract agreement or purchase order between the purchaser and the constructor grout manufacturer: The party who produces and warrants the performance of the grout provided in accordance with the contract documents. The grout is manufactured in a controlled process using standard codes, specifications, tests and possibly includes shop drawings to assist in proper application, installation and/or use. Unless otherwise noted, the term grout manufacturer shall apply also to the grout manufacturers subcontractor(s) and/or vendor(s). owner: The party who has authority through ownership, lease, or other legal agreement over the site wherein the grout will be used purchaser: The party who awards the contract to the constructor. The purchaser may be the owner or the owners authorized agent.

4.

Requirements
4.1 General 4.1.1 The constructor shall furnish all equipment, materials, labor, and supervision and shall perform all operations necessary for the formwork, proper mixing, placing, finishing, and curing of nonshrink cementitious grout, hereafter referred to as grout, where indicated by the contract documents. Any conflicts or inconsistencies between this Practice, the design drawings, the grout manufacturers specifications and recommendations, and other contract documents shall be brought to the attention of the purchaser for resolution before the work begins.

4.1.2

4.2

Field Quality Control of Grout 4.2.1 The constructor shall be solely responsible for the quality control of all constructor-provided materials, installations, and workmanship, including those items or installations provided by any of the constructors subcontractors or vendors. Notwithstanding the constructors responsibility for quality, the grout manufacturer shall provide a technical representative who shall be on-site to review the grouting set-up procedures and the grouting manufacturers instructions with those who will actually be doing the grouting. The technical representative shall remain at the grouting site as long and as often as required to ensure that the grout manufacturers installation instructions are being followed. This requirement may be waived by the purchaser or as otherwise specified in the contract documents. The purchaser reserves the right to make inspections at any time during mixing of the materials and during execution of all grout work.

4.2.2

4.2.3 4.3

Testing 4.3.1 After initial prequalification, grout shall be sampled and tested if required by the contract documents.

Process Industry Practices

Page 3 of 8

PIP STS03600 Nonshrink Cementitious Grout Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
July 2008

4.3.2 4.3.3 4.3.4 4.3.5

Three sets of three test cubes shall be made in the field each day that grout is mixed and placed. Test cubes shall be in accordance with ASTM C109/C109M. One set of test cubes shall be transported to the testing laboratory after the initial set and tested at 24 hours. Cubes that remain at the site shall be tested as follows: a. The remaining cubes shall be cured in the field for 3 days in the same way as the placed grout is cured. b. At the end of 3 days, the cubes shall be transported to the testing laboratory for compressive strength testing. c. One cube set shall be tested at 7 days and the other cube set at 28 days.

4.3.6

Compressive strength of cubes shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C109/C109M and shall meet the requirements of ASTM C1107/ C1107M.

4.4

Submittals 4.4.1 Unless noted otherwise in the contract documents, the grout manufacturers literature, material safety data sheets, and certified test data for the grout shall be submitted to the purchaser. The literature and certified test data shall include the products compressive strength, adhesive properties, dimensional stability, flowability, consistency, and other requirements in accordance with this Practice. A minimum of fifteen days before installation, a written quality control program, describing in detail how compliance with this Practice shall be ensured, shall be submitted to the purchaser for review and approval. The program shall include procedures for all forming, handling, mixing, placement, locating joints, including joint details, curing, testing, and inspection. If testing is required by the contract documents, the constructor shall submit to the purchaser copies of all inspection and test reports. Reports shall contain the date of grout placement, grout type, identification of foundation of grout placement, design compressive strength, air temperature at time of grout placement, foundation temperature at time of grout placement, and compressive break strengths.

4.4.2

4.4.3

4.5

Safety 4.5.1 The constructor shall be responsible for compliance with the safety requirements specified in the contract documents and by the grout manufacturer. Grout Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs) shall be available, and associated hazards shall be reviewed with all grouting personnel. Goggles or face shields, protective gloves, and aprons shall be worn by those personnel mixing and placing the grout.

4.5.2 4.5.3

Page 4 of 8

Process Industry Practices

COMPLETE REVISION
July 2008

PIP STS03600 Nonshrink Cementitious Grout Specification

4.5.4 4.5.5 4.6

Dust masks or respirators (in accordance with MSDS requirements) shall be worn by those personnel exposed to the grout or aggregate prior to mixing. Soap and water shall be available for periodic hand cleaning, should the need arise.

Materials 4.6.1 4.6.2 All materials shall be provided in accordance with the contract documents and this Practice. Grout Materials 4.6.2.1 All grout materials shall be proportioned products, in accordance with ASTM C1107/C1107M. 4.6.2.2 Grout materials shall be packaged in accordance with ASTM C1107/C1107M. 4.6.2.3 Grout materials shall require only the addition of potable water, and shall not contain metallic substances, aluminum powder, measurable amounts of water soluble chlorides, or other substances that may be potentially harmful to concrete or steel reinforcement. 4.6.2.4 Compressive strength shall be in accordance with ASTM C1107/C1107M (minimum 28-day compressive strength, 5000 psi (34 Mpa)). 4.6.2.5 Cementitious grouts shall not shrink and shall expand no more than 4.0 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM C827 (before set) and no more than 0.3 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM C1090 (after set). 4.6.2.6 All manufactured grout materials shall be delivered to the job site in original unopened packages and shall be stored in accordance with the grout manufacturers recommendations. 4.6.2.7 All materials and tools shall be stored in a clean, dry, and organized manner. 4.6.2.8 Unless specified in the contract documents, admixtures shall not be added to the grout without approval of the purchaser and the grout manufacturer. 4.6.3 Mixing Water Mixing water shall be potable and free of oils, acids, alkalines, organics, and other deleterious materials.

4.7

Preparation for Grouting 4.7.1 Foundation preparation shall be in accordance with the grout manufacturers written instructions and the following. If there is a conflict between the manufacturers instructions and the following, the manufacturers instructions shall take precedence. a. New concrete foundations shall be cured for 7 days minimum before surface preparation unless otherwise approved by purchaser.

Process Industry Practices

Page 5 of 8

PIP STS03600 Nonshrink Cementitious Grout Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
July 2008

b. In the areas that will be covered by grout, the foundation shall be prepared by chipping away all laitance (poor quality concrete) and oilsoaked or damaged concrete down to exposed fractured coarse aggregate. Concrete must be removed in this chipping process down to a depth to permit 1 inch (25 mm) minimum grout (or the grout thickness specified in contract documents) between the concrete and the bottom of of the base or sole plate. Scarifying the surface with a needle gun or bushing tool or sandblasting to remove laitance from the foundation is unacceptable. Concrete chipping and removal shall not be performed with heavy tools, such as jackhammers, as they could damage the structural integrity of the foundation. A chipping hammer with a chisel bit is the preferred tool for this purpose. c. When the surface chipping is complete, the foundation shall be thoroughly swept and air-blown free of all dust with clean, dry, oil-free air. d. The foundation must be kept free of contamination by oil, dirt, water, etc., after it has been prepared for grouting. Protective sheeting (such as sheets of clean polyethylene) shall be used to cover the prepared surfaces when work is not in progress. 4.7.2 Grout Forms a. Grout forms shall be built of materials of adequate strength and securely anchored and sealed to withstand the liquid head and forces developed by the grout during placement. b. Forms shall not be attached to the foundation using power nailing. c. Grout forms shall be sealed to prevent grout leakage. Bitumastic or room temperature vulcanizable (RTV) silicone rubber can be used for this purpose. d. Unless otherwise shown in the contract documents, grout forms shall have minimum 3/4-inch (19 mm), 45 chamfer strips at all exposed grout corners. 4.7.3 4.7.4 4.7.5 All metal surfaces of base plates and equipment bases which are to be in direct contact with the grout shall be free of oil, grease, and other foreign substances. A bond breaker in accordance with the grout manufacturers recommendations shall be applied to the surface of the formwork in contact with the grout. Joints in grout shall be located in accordance with the contract documents or as recommended by the grout manufacturer. Unless otherwise shown in the contract documents, expansion joints shall be made from 1-inch (25 mm) thick closed-cell neoprene foam rubber (polystyrene may also be used). These shall be glued in position prior to the grout placement with silicone rubber (RTV) or elastic epoxy seam sealant (liquid rubber).

4.8

Installation of Grout 4.8.1 Grout shall be stored, mixed, placed, and cured in accordance with the grout manufacturers written requirements and at temperature ranges that are consistent with the grout manufacturers recommendations. The constructor

Page 6 of 8

Process Industry Practices

COMPLETE REVISION
July 2008

PIP STS03600 Nonshrink Cementitious Grout Specification

shall be responsible for reading, understanding, and complying with the grout manufacturers instructions. 4.8.2 Grout shall be dry packed, flowed, or pumped into place in accordance with the grout manufacturers written instructions for the specific grout being installed. Dry packing shall be used only where there is adequate accessibility. Comment: For some grouts, particular installation methods are restricted or prohibited by the grout manufacturer. Therefore, manufacturers written instructions shall be strictly followed.

4.8.3

Grouting shall be performed with ambient temperatures and mix temperatures between 40F (4C) and 90F (32C) unless otherwise permitted by the grout manufacturer. Comply with the manufacturers special requirements for grouting done outside of this temperature range. Concrete surfaces in contact with the grout shall be saturated surface dry (saturated with clean water before grout placement with the surface of the concrete damp but free from standing water). All grout shall be placed in only one direction to prevent trapping air. Grout shall be applied in the thickness specified in the contract documents. Grouting shall be quick and continuous to avoid segregation, bleeding, or premature initial set. Retempering of grout by adding water after stiffening is not permitted. Where forms are not used, the grout shall be cut back to the lower edge of the baseplate after it has reached its initial set. The cutback shall be at a 45 angle, unless otherwise indicated in the contract documents.

4.8.4

4.8.5 4.8.6 4.8.7 4.8.8 4.8.9

4.8.10 If grout is placed through grout holes, the grout shall be placed into one hole continuously until the grout has passed a second hole. A liquid head pressure shall be maintained at the first access hole until a head pressure has been established at the next hole. Grout placement shall continue from the next hole in a similar fashion. 4.8.11 All voids in anchor bolt sleeves (except for rotating equipment) shall be cleared of all foreign material and completely filled with grout, unless shown otherwise on the drawings. Anchor bolt sleeves for rotating equipment, or other equipment shown on drawings, shall be filled with a non-bonding moldable material prior to grout placement. 4.8.12 If grouting around sliding surfaces, (e.g. reactor skirts, exchanger supports, etc.), grout shall be placed in such a manner that does not inhibit movement between sliding surfaces. 4.8.13 All voids that remain after removal of temporary shims shall be filled with the same grout material. 4.9 Curing The following shall be adhered to unless the grout manufacturer specifies otherwise:

Process Industry Practices

Page 7 of 8

PIP STS03600 Nonshrink Cementitious Grout Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
July 2008

4.9.1 4.9.2 4.9.3

Forms shall remain in place for 24 hours minimum after completion of grouting. Moisture loss must be prevented by keeping the exposed surfaces wet for 7 days minimum or by application of a curing compound. Moist curing can be achieved by applying wet rags or burlap to the exposed surfaces. The wet rags or burlap shall be covered with plastic to prevent excessive evaporation. The wet rags or burlap shall be rewetted as necessary to maintain moistness. Temperature of the grouted base and concrete foundation shall be maintained between 40F (4C) and 90F (32C) for 3 days minimum after the initial set. Equipment shall not be placed in service before the grout has attained 80 percent of the specified 28-day design compressive strength.

4.9.3 4.9.4

Page 8 of 8

Process Industry Practices

COMPLETE REVISION
November 2006

Process Industry Practices Structural

PIP STF05530 Grating Fabrication Details

PURPOSE AND USE OF PROCESS INDUSTRY PRACTICES In an effort to minimize the cost of process industry facilities, this Practice has been prepared from the technical requirements in the existing standards of major industrial users, contractors, or standards organizations. By harmonizing these technical requirements into a single set of Practices, administrative, application, and engineering costs to both the purchaser and the manufacturer should be reduced. While this Practice is expected to incorporate the majority of requirements of most users, individual applications may involve requirements that will be appended to and take precedence over this Practice. Determinations concerning fitness for purpose and particular matters or application of the Practice to particular project or engineering situations should not be made solely on information contained in these materials. The use of trade names from time to time should not be viewed as an expression of preference but rather recognized as normal usage in the trade. Other brands having the same specifications are equally correct and may be substituted for those named. All Practices or guidelines are intended to be consistent with applicable laws and regulations including OSHA requirements. To the extent these Practices or guidelines should conflict with OSHA or other applicable laws or regulations, such laws or regulations must be followed. Consult an appropriate professional before applying or acting on any material contained in or suggested by the Practice. This Practice is subject to revision at any time.

Process Industry Practices (PIP), Construction Industry Institute, The University of Texas at Austin, 3925 West Braker Lane (R4500), Austin, Texas 78759. PIP member companies and subscribers may copy this Practice for their internal use. Changes, overlays, addenda, or modifications of any kind are not permitted within any PIP Practice without the express written authorization of PIP.

PRINTING HISTORY March 2001 Issued November 2006 Complete Revision Not printed with State funds

COMPLETE REVISION
November 2006

Process Industry Practices Structural

PIP STF05530 Grating Fabrication Details


Table of Contents 1. Introduction .................................. 2
1.1 Purpose ............................................... 2 1.2 Scope .................................................. 2 2.1 Process Industry Practices.................. 2 2.2 Industry Codes and Standards............ 2

Drawings

2. References ................................... 2

3. Definitions .................................... 2 4. Requirements ............................... 3


4.1 General................................................ 3 4.2 Materials.............................................. 3 4.3 Fabrication........................................... 3

Detail 1. Grating Opening at Interior Column Detail 2. Grating Opening at Base Plate Detail 3. Grating Opening at Corner Column Detail 4. Circular Openings Detail 5. Toe Plate Banding at Opening for Pipe Support Detail 6. Toe Plate Banding at Openings for Equipment Detail 7. Typical Grating Panel Layout Detail 8. Typical Grating Panel Fastener Arrangement Detail 9. Typical Clearances at Perimeter of Floors Detail 10. Typical Clearances at Railing

Process Industry Practices

Page 1 of 9

PIP STF05530 Grating Fabrication Details

COMPLETE REVISION
November 2006

1.

Introduction
1.1 Purpose This Practice provides structural steel fabricators with standard grating details for the fabrication of grating in process industry facilities. 1.2 Scope This Practice describes the requirements for fabrication of grating for typical platforms and is intended to be issued to fabricators supplying grating. Details are provided that show the configurations for openings in the grating and typical details for grating arrangement and clearances.

2.

References
Applicable parts of the following Practices, industry codes and standards, and references shall be considered an integral part of this Practice. The edition in effect on the date of contract shall be used, except as otherwise noted. Short titles are used herein where appropriate. 2.1 Process Industry Practices (PIP) PIP STF05520 - Pipe Railing for Walking and Working Surfaces Fabrication Details PIP STF05521 - Angle Railing for Walking and Working Surfaces Fabrication Details PIP STS05120 - Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Fabrication Specification 2.2 Industry Codes and Standards ASTM International (ASTM) ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability

3.

Definitions
contract documents: Any and all documents, including codes, studies, design drawings, specifications, sketches, practices, and data sheets, that the purchaser or engineer of record has transmitted or otherwise communicated, either by incorporation or reference, and made part of the legal contract agreement or purchase order between the purchaser and the fabricator. engineer of record: Purchasers authorized representative with overall authority and responsibility for the engineering design, quality, and performance of the civil works, structure, foundations, materials, and appurtenances of the project. The engineer of record shall be a professional engineer as defined by these practices.

Page 2 of 9

Process Industry Practices

COMPLETE REVISION
November 2006

PIP STF05530 Grating Fabrication Details

fabricator: The party responsible for furnishing fabricated structural and miscellaneous steel purchaser: The party who awards the contract to the fabricator. The purchaser may be the owner or the owners authorized agent.

4.

Requirements
4.1 General 4.1.1 All equipment, materials, labor, and supervision shall be provided and all operations necessary for the fabrication of grating platforms shall be performed in accordance with the contract documents. Fabricator shall comply with all safety requirements specified in the contract documents. Fabricator shall be solely responsible for quality control of all materials and workmanship. Grating shall be fabricated in accordance with Federal Standards and Instructions of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), including any additional requirements by state or local agencies that have jurisdiction where the grating platform is to be erected.

4.1.2 4.1.3 4.1.4

4.2.

Materials 4.2.1 4.2.2 Unless otherwise specified, the materials for grating shall be in accordance with PIP S S . Unless otherwise specified, steel grating shall be rectangular welded type, with plain 3/16-inch x 1-1/4-inch bearing bars on 1-3/16-inch spacing center-to-center with cross bars on 4-inch spacing center-to-center. The metric equivalent for grating shall be as specified in the contract documents as applicable. Banding and toe plate banding shall be steel in accordance with AS M A A M or AS M A A M. The metric equivalents for bars and plates used for banding and toe plate banding shall be as specified in contract documents as applicable. Fastener assemblies shall be as specified in the contract documents. The fabricator shall provide a minimum of two fastener assemblies per support beam per panel, with a minimum of four fastener assemblies per panel. In addition, the fabricator shall provide a minimum of 5% extra quantity of fastener assemblies.

4.2.3

4.2.4

4.3

Fabrication 4.3.1 4.3.2 All grating shall be fabricated in accordance with PIP S S Details 1 through 10 of this Practice. and

The location and limits of grating and the direction of the span of grating bearing bars shall be in accordance with the contract documents.

Process Industry Practices

Page 3 of 9

PIP STF05530 Grating Fabrication Details

COMPLETE REVISION
November 2006

4.3.3

At joints in the grating floor system, cross sections of bearing bars for grating panels shall be aligned with cross sections of abutting panels to maintain spacing symmetry. Grating joints shall be permitted only at supports. Clearance allowances shall be provided for fitting grating panels together, for penetrations, for toe plates, etc., and shall be in accordance with Details in this practice and the contract documents. Grating shall have 1-inch (25-mm) minimum bearing on supporting steel. If grating areas are shown as removable in the contract documents, the weight of each removable fabricated grating section shall not exceed 350 pounds (160 kgf). Edges of removable grating panels shall be banded. Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, edges of grating panels other than removable panels need not be banded. Where butting grating panel ends occur, stops shall be provided at each side of the panel ends as shown in Detail 7. Openings and cutouts in grating panels for piping, conduit, structural members, and equipment shall be banded as indicated on the following details and the contract documents.

4.3.4

4.3.5 4.3.6

4.3.7 4.3.8

4.3.9

Page 4 of 9

Process Industry Practices

Drawings
Detail 1 - Grating Opening at Interior Column Detail 2 - Grating Opening at Base Plate Detail 3 - Grating Opening at Corner Column Detail 4 - Circular Openings Detail 5 - Toe Plate Banding at Opening for Pipe Support Detail 6 - Toe Plate Banding at Openings for Equipment Detail 7 - Typical Grating Panel Layout Detail 8 - Typical Grating Panel Fastener Arrangement Detail 9 - Typical Clearances at Perimeter of Floors Detail 10 - Typical Clearances at Railing

This page is intentionally left blank.

COMPLETE REVISION
May 2007

Process Industry Practices Structural

PIP STS03001 Plain and Reinforced Concrete Specification

PURPOSE AND USE OF PROCESS INDUSTRY PRACTICES In an effort to minimize the cost of process industry facilities, this Practice has been prepared from the technical requirements in the existing standards of major industrial users, contractors, or standards organizations. By harmonizing these technical requirements into a single set of Practices, administrative, application, and engineering costs to both the purchaser and the manufacturer should be reduced. While this Practice is expected to incorporate the majority of requirements of most users, individual applications may involve requirements that will be appended to and take precedence over this Practice. Determinations concerning fitness for purpose and particular matters or application of the Practice to particular project or engineering situations should not be made solely on information contained in these materials. The use of trade names from time to time should not be viewed as an expression of preference but rather recognized as normal usage in the trade. Other brands having the same specifications are equally correct and may be substituted for those named. All Practices or guidelines are intended to be consistent with applicable laws and regulations including OSHA requirements. To the extent these Practices or guidelines should conflict with OSHA or other applicable laws or regulations, such laws or regulations must be followed. Consult an appropriate professional before applying or acting on any material contained in or suggested by the Practice. This Practice is subject to revision at any time.

Process Industry Practices (PIP), Construction Industry Institute, The University of Texas at Austin, 3925 West Braker Lane (R4500), Austin, Texas 78759. PIP member companies and subscribers may copy this Practice for their internal use. Changes, overlays, addenda, or modifications of any kind are not permitted within any PIP Practice without the express written authorization of PIP.

PRINTING HISTORY December 1995 July 2001 May 2007 Issued Complete Revision Complete Revision

Not printed with State funds

COMPLETE REVISION
May 2007

Process Industry Practices Structural

PIP STS03001 Plain and Reinforced Concrete Specification


Table of Contents 1. Introduction................................. 2
1.1 Purpose ............................................. 2 1.2 Scope................................................. 2 2.1 Industry Codes and Standards .......... 2 2.2 Government Regulations................... 3

2. References .................................. 2

3. Definitions ................................... 3 4. Requirements.............................. 4


4.1 General .............................................. 4 4.2. Materials ............................................ 7 4.3. Execution ........................................... 8 4.4 Loading of Self-Supporting Members.......................................... 14

Tables
Table 1 - Tolerances for Embedments Table 2 - Maximum Sizes of Aggregate Table 3 - Supplier Data Requirements

Process Industry Practices

Page 1 of 15

PIP STS03001 Plain and Reinforced Concrete Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
May 2007

1.

Introduction
1.1 Purpose This Practice provides requirements for cast-in-place concrete construction. 1.2 Scope This Practice describes the technical requirements for furnishing and installing materials and for proportioning, mixing, placing, testing, and curing of plain and reinforced concrete. This Practice supplements ACI 301-05, Specifications for Structural Concrete.

2.

References
Applicable parts of the following Practices, industry codes and standards, and references shall be considered an integral part of this Practice. The edition in effect on the date of contract award shall be used, except as otherwise noted. Short titles are used herein where appropriate. 2.1 Industry Codes and Standards American Concrete Institute (ACI) ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for olerances for Concrete Construction and Materials ACI 211.1 - Standard ractice for Selectin eavywei ht and Mass Concrete ACI 211.2 - Standard ractice for Selectin i htwei ht Concrete roportions for Normal roportions for Structural

ACI 301-05 - Specifications for Structural Concrete ACI 302.1R - uide for Concrete loor and Slab Construction ACI 304R - uide for Measurin Concrete ACI 305R - ot ACI 306R - Cold Mi in ransportin and lacin

ACI 304.2R - lacin Concrete by umpin Methods eather Concretin eather Concretin eather Concretin

ACI 306.1 - Standard Specification for Cold ACI 308R - uide to Curin Concrete ACI 347R - uide to ormwor for Concrete

ACI 504R - uide to Sealin Joints in Concrete Structures ACI SP-66 - CI Detailin Manual

Page 2 of 15

Process Industry Practices

COMPLETE REVISION
May 2007

PIP STS03001 Plain and Reinforced Concrete Specification

ASTM International (ASTM) ASTM A185/A185M - Standard Specification for Steel Reinforcement lain for Concrete elded ire

ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and lain Carbon Steel ars for Concrete Reinforcement ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete re ates ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready Mi ed Concrete ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for ortland Cement ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal ly sh and Raw or Calcined Natural o olan for se in Concrete ASTM C1012 - Standard est Method for en th Chan e of ydraulic Cement Mortars posed to Sulfate Solution National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (NRMCA) 2.2 uality Control Manual - Section Certification of Ready Mi ed Concrete roduction acilities lant Certification Chec ist

Government Regulations U.S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) OSHA 29 CFR 1926 - Safety and ealth Re ulations for Construction

3.

Definitions
constructor The party responsible for supplying the materials, equipment, tools, supervision, and labor for the installation of the concrete in accordance with the contract documents. Unless otherwise noted, the term constructor shall apply also to the constructors subcontractor(s) and vendor(s). contract documents Any and all documents, including codes, studies, design drawings, specifications, sketches, practices, and data sheets, that the purchaser or engineer of record has transmitted or otherwise communicated, either by incorporation or reference, and made part of the legal contract agreement or purchase order between the purchaser and the constructor. en ineer of record Purchasers authorized representative with overall authority and responsibility for the engineering design, quality, and performance of the civil works, structure, foundations, materials, and appurtenances described in the contract documents. The engineer of record shall be licensed as defined by the laws of the locality in which the work is to be constructed, and be qualified to practice in the specialty discipline required for the work described in the contract documents.

Process Industry Practices

Page 3 of 15

PIP STS03001 Plain and Reinforced Concrete Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
May 2007

manufacturer The party who produces and warrants the performance of the products materials and or items provided in accordance with the contract documents. The products materials and or items shall: a. Be manufactured in a controlled process b. Have standard codes, specifications, tests c. Possibly include shop drawings to assist in proper application, installation and/or use Unless otherwise noted, the term manufacturer shall apply also to the manufacturers subcontractor(s) and/or vendor(s). owner The party who has authority through ownership, lease, or other legal agreement over the site facility structure or pro ect wherein what is to be provided or installed will be used. purchaser The party who awards the contract to the constructor. The purchaser may be the owner or the owners authorized agent. supplier The party responsible for supplying concrete materials in accordance with the contract documents.

4.

Requirements
4.1 General 4.1.1 Concrete supply and construction shall be in accordance with all requirements of CI 01 05, except as modified or supplemented in this Practice or by the contract documents. The following ACI documents are acceptable practices and may be helpful in meeting requirements of this Practice and CI 01: a. ACI 211.1 - Standard ractice for Selectin eavywei ht and Mass Concrete b. ACI 211.2 - Standard ractice for Selectin Structural i htwei ht Concrete roportions for Normal roportions for

4.1.2

c. ACI 302.1R - uide for Concrete loor and Slab Construction d. ACI 304.2R - lacin Concrete by umpin Methods e. ACI 306R - Cold f. eather Concretin ACI 308R - uide to Curin Concrete

g. ACI 347R- uide to ormwor for Concrete h. ACI 504R - uide to Sealin Joints in Concrete Structures 4.1.3 4.1.4 Requirements of state or local agencies that have jurisdiction where the concrete is to be placed shall apply. Any conflicts or inconsistencies between this Practice, the design drawings, or other contract documents shall be brought to the attention of the purchaser for resolution.

Page 4 of 15

Process Industry Practices

COMPLETE REVISION
May 2007

PIP STS03001 Plain and Reinforced Concrete Specification

4.1.5

Quality Control 4.1.5.1 A written quality control program and inspection procedures document shall be submitted to the purchaser for approval. These documents shall provide details of how compliance with the requirements of this Practice and contract documents shall be achieved. 4.1.5.2 Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, the purchaser shall be responsible for furnishing a testing agency to act as the owners testing agency as defined by CI 01. 4.1.5.3 The purchaser shall have the right to make inspections at any time at the source of supply of materials, at the place of preparation of materials, at the mixing plant if ready mixed concrete is used, and during execution of all concrete work. 4.1.5.4 Samples for testing shall be obtained in accordance with CI 01. The rate of sampling shall be in accordance with CI 01 and the following: a. For structures and foundations, samples shall be obtained in accordance with the following requirements: (1) One sample minimum per 100 cubic yards (76 cubic meters) of concrete (2) One sample minimum for each structure or foundation, except if placing a number of items each smaller than 15 cubic yards (11 cubic meters) (3) One sample minimum per 15 cubic yards (11 cubic meters) if placing a number of items each smaller than 15 cubic yards (11 cubic meters) b. For paving and slabs on grade, obtain one sample per 50 cubic yards (38 cubic meters) of concrete. c. For underground pipe or electrical encasements and fireproofing, obtain one sample at the beginning of each day of concreting work. d. For all other concrete, obtain samples in accordance with Section 4.1.5.4.a. e. Additional samples shall be obtained if observations of tests for slump, temperature, or air content indicate nonconformance with the contract documents. 4.1.5.5 For each concrete sample obtained, the following tests shall be conducted in accordance with CI 01: a. Strength tests b. Slump

Process Industry Practices

Page 5 of 15

PIP STS03001 Plain and Reinforced Concrete Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
May 2007

c. Temperature d. Air content 4.1.5.6 Test cylinder sets shall be dated and numbered consecutively. 4.1.5.7 Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, concrete quality assurance test reports shall be provided to the purchaser weekly. Data in the test report shall include, but not be limited to, the following: a. Location of concrete on the job and associated drawing numbers and structure/foundation identification b. Specified strength (f c) c. Date poured d. Proportions of concrete mix or mix identification e. 7- and 28-day compressive strength f. Slump, air and concrete temperatures at time of pour, time of day concrete was batched, and time of day concrete was poured

g. Air content h. Name of inspector making cylinders and cylinder number 4.1.5.8 Where concrete is to be placed in the United States of America, ready mixed concrete suppliers shall be certified in accordance with one of the following: a. Certification by holding a current NRMCA Certificate of Conformance for Concrete Production Facilities b. Certification from an independent testing agency stating conformance with NRMCA Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities c. Certification from the State Department of Transportation from the state of the project site location The certifications shall be current for the duration of the concrete supply. 4.1.6 Submittals 4.1.6.1 Before the start of work, documentation in accordance with the requirements of CI 01 which is listed in Table 3, as a minimum, shall be submitted to the purchaser for review and approval. 4.1.6.2 If required by the contract documents, additional documentation in accordance with the requirements of CI 01 which is not listed in Table 3 shall be submitted to the purchaser for review and approval.

Page 6 of 15

Process Industry Practices

COMPLETE REVISION
May 2007

PIP STS03001 Plain and Reinforced Concrete Specification

4.1.7

Safety The work shall be in accordance with all applicable national, state, or local safety requirements, site specific requirements of the purchaser, and all safety requirements specified in the contract documents.

4.2.

Materials 4.2.1 General 4.2.1.1 Unless authorized in writing by the purchaser, materials that are not in accordance with this Practice or the contract documents shall not be permitted. 4.2.1.2 Materials shall be in accordance with applicable local volatile organic compound regulations. 4.2.2 Cementitious Materials 4.2.2.1 Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, Portland cement shall be in accordance with S M C150, Type I or Type II. 4.2.2.2 Only one brand of cement shall be used. 4.2.2.3 Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, fly ash may be used in accordance with CI 01 and shall conform to S M C 1 , Class C or Class F. If Class C fly ash is used in a moderately to extremely aggressive sulfate environment, the mix design shall be tested in accordance with S M C1012 to verify sulfate resistance. Note Class C fly ash which contains relatively hi h levels of amorphous calcium aluminate may ma e more calcium hydro ide available for reaction with sulfates thus contributin to concrete deterioration 4.2.3 Admixtures 4.2.3.1 All admixtures, except air entrainment admixtures, shall require the engineer of records authorization for use. 4.2.3.2 Only one manufacturer for each admixture shall be used. 4.2.3.3 Calcium chloride and admixtures containing soluble chlorides shall not be permitted. 4.2.4 Aggregate 4.2.4.1 Aggregate shall be in accordance with S M C 4.2.4.2 Aggregate shall be obtained from a single source. 4.2.5 Reinforcement 4.2.5.1 Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, reinforcing bars shall be deformed billet steel in accordance with S M 15 15M, grade 60. 4.2.5.2 Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, all reinforcing shall be uncoated.

Process Industry Practices

Page 7 of 15

PIP STS03001 Plain and Reinforced Concrete Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
May 2007

4.2.5.3 Welded wire fabric shall be plain wire fabric and in accordance with ASTM A185/A185M. 4.2.5.4 Tie wire shall be black annealed wire, 16 gage minimum. 4.2.6 Water 4.2.6.1 Water used for mixing water, ice, curing, or any other function relating to placement of concrete shall be potable. 4.2.6.2 Other water may be used if tested for suitability in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M. 4.2.6.3 Wash water from mixer washout operations shall not be used as mixing water. 4.2.7 Accessories All accessories shall be provided in accordance with the contract documents. 4.3 Execution 4.3.1 General Storage, handling, measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing of concrete materials shall follow the methods and means outlined in ACI 304R and comply with manufacturers recommendation for handling, storage, and protection. 4.3.2 Formwork 4.3.2.1 Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, 3/4-inch (20-millimeter) chamfer strips shall be provided at all corners on permanently exposed surfaces. 4.3.2.2 Form-release agents shall not be applied if concrete surfaces shall receive special finishes or where the agent may affect applied coverings. Alternately, inside surfaces of untreated formwork shall be soaked with clean water and kept moist before placing concrete. 4.3.2.3 Form removal shall be in accordance with ACI 301 and the following: a. For structures for which the forms do not provide vertical support (e.g., footings, piers, columns, walls, or sides of beams), the forms may be removed 48 hours after completion of placement if the concrete is sufficiently hard to prevent damage by form removal, and if curing starts immediately. b. Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, forms for self-supporting members may be removed if the concrete strength is at least 80 percent of the specified 28-day strength. Refer to ACI 301-05, Section 2.3.4, for determining strength of concrete for removal of formwork.

Page 8 of 15

Process Industry Practices

COMPLETE REVISION
May 2007

PIP STS03001 Plain and Reinforced Concrete Specification

c. Unless otherwise approved by the purchaser, forms shall not be left permanently in place. 4.3.2.4 Form accessories that remain embedded in the concrete (e.g., ties and hangers) shall be a commercially manufactured type. 4.3.2.5 Unless specified otherwise in the contract documents, formed concrete surfaces shall be constructed in accordance with the tolerances shown in ACI 11 . Tolerances for concrete surfaces not specifically mentioned in ACI 11 shall be in accordance with ACI 11 , Section 4. 4.3.2.6 Formwork for column and wall shall be provided with adequate cleanout openings to permit inspection and easy cleaning after reinforcement has been placed. 4.3.2.7 All side and bottom surfaces of structures that will be exposed shall be formed. Unless otherwise approved by the engineer of record, vertical surfaces of subgrade structures and pavements shall be formed at least to a depth of 300 mm (12 inches) below grade. The structure below this level may be placed against earth. 4.3.3 Joints 4.3.3.1 All joints shall be located and constructed in accordance with the contract documents. Any variation from the location specified shall be approved by the purchaser. 4.3.3.2 Control joints to be cut with a saw shall be cut as soon as the concrete is hard enough to prevent surface raveling and aggregate dislodging, and within 12 hours after concrete placement. a. Control joints shall be cut in accordance with the saw manufacturers written recommendations. b. Sawing sequence shall be based on pour time and size of slab. 4.3.3.3 Control joints in slab toppings shall be located directly above and in line with the control joints in the underlying concrete slab. 4.3.3.4 Isolation joints shall be placed where the pavement adjoins vertical surfaces (e.g., walls, columns, catch basins, manholes, and equipment foundations). Isolation joints shall be located in accordance with the contract documents. 4.3.3.5 Dowels at expansion joints shall be properly aligned to prevent any restraint on expansion movement at the joint. 4.3.3.6 The surface of joints shall be cleaned of scale and laitance and thoroughly wetted, but free of standing water, before placing adjoining concrete.

Process Industry Practices

Page 9 of 15

PIP STS03001 Plain and Reinforced Concrete Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
May 2007

4.3.4

Waterstops Waterstops shall be installed in accordance with the contract documents and the manufacturers recommendations.

4.3.5

Reinforcing and Embedments


4.3.5.1 Detailing and Fabrication

1. Reinforcement placing drawings and bending schedules shall be prepared in accordance with ACI S - . Drawings and schedules shall show number, grade, size, length, mark, location, and bending diagrams for reinforcing bars. 2. Splices in reinforcement shall be detailed, fabricated, and located as shown on the drawings only. 3. Fabrication drawings shall indicate the related PO number, release number, and design drawing number. 4. Reinforcement shall be tagged with weather-resistant metal tags. 5. Each bundle of fabricated bars shall be tagged. The tags shall indicate drawing number, release number, mark number, grade, bar quantity, and bar size. 6. Each bundle of stock-length straight bars shall be tagged to indicate bar quantity, grade, bar size, and bar length. 7. Fabrication tolerances shall comply with the requirements of ACI 117.
4.3.5.2 Installation

1. Embedded aluminum items shall not be permitted. 2. Anchor bolts, anchors, inserts, sleeves, drains, curb and seat angles, nosing, and other embedded items shall be installed before placing concrete. Welding of these items to the reinforcing bars shall not be permitted. 3. Anchor bolt threads shall be protected from damage and kept free of concrete. 4. Anchor bolt sleeves shall be capped or plugged to keep out water, concrete, and debris. 5. Reinforcing bars shall be spliced in accordance with the design drawings only. Unless otherwise approved by the engineer of record, welded or mechanical splices shall not be permitted.
4.3.5.3 Tolerances

Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, embedments shall be installed in accordance with the tolerances shown in Table 1. The term bolt group used in Table 1 is defined as the set of anchor bolts for a single fabricated steel shipping piece, or a single piece of equipment or skid.

Page 10 of 15

Process Industry Practices

COMPLETE REVISION
May 2007

PIP STS03001 Plain and Reinforced Concrete Specification

Table 1 Tolerances for Embedments Measurement


Anchor bolt projection Center of bolt group Center to center of any two anchor bolts within a bolt group Center to center between bolt groups Anchor bolt plumbness Plate insert horizontal and vertical location

Tolerance
+ 1/4 inch (6 mm), 0.00 inch (0 mm) + or 1/4 inch (6 mm) + or 1/8 inch (3 mm) + or 1/4 inch (6 mm) 1/8 inch in 3 feet (4 mm in 1 meter) + or 1/4 inch (6 mm) horizontal and + or 1/32 inch (1 mm) vertical

4.3.6

Proportioning and Mixing 4.3.6.1 The minimum 28-day compressive strength, f c, shall be in accordance with the contract documents. 4.3.6.2 If high early-strength concrete is specified, compressive strength shall be 7-day strength. 4.3.6.3 Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, the maximum size of coarse aggregate in concrete shall be in accordance with ACI 301 and shall not be greater than the sizes shown in Table 2.
Table 2 Maximum Sizes of Aggregate Type of Construction
Slabs and walls less than 8 inches thick Lightweight concrete Liquid retaining structures Underground pipe or electrical encasements Structures (beam and column construction) Fireproofing or structural steel encasements All other items

Maximum Size
3/4 inch (20 mm) 3/4 inch (20mm) 3/4 inch (20 mm) 3/4 inch (20 mm) 3/4 inch (20 mm) 3/8 inch (10 mm) 1-1/2 inch (40 mm)

4.3.6.4 Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, maximum water-soluble chloride ion concentrations in hardened concrete shall be 0.30% by weight of cement, in accordance with ACI 301-05, Table 4.2.2.6, for Other reinforced concrete construction. 4.3.6.5 Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, air content at the point of delivery shall be in accordance with ACI 301-05, Table 4.2.2.4, for moderate exposure. 4.3.6.6 Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, the maximum water-cementitious materials ratio shall be 0.4 for liquid-retaining (hydraulic) structures and 0.5 for all other concrete. 4.3.6.7 Unless otherwise directed by the engineer of record, all admixtures shall be added at the batch plant.

Process Industry Practices

Page 11 of 15

PIP STS03001 Plain and Reinforced Concrete Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
May 2007

4.3.6.8 Concrete envelopes for underground electrical ducts and cover slabs for direct-buried cables shall have a specified 28 day compressive strength of 2,000 psi (14 MPa) and be colored red by adding 10 pounds of red oxide powder per cubic yard (6 kilograms per cubic meter) of concrete unless otherwise noted in the contract documents. 4.3.6.9 Concrete envelopes for underground instrument air-line ducts shall have a specified 28 day compressive strength of 2,000 psi (14 MPa) and be colored yellow by adding 10 pounds of yellow oxide powder per cubic yard (6 kilograms per cubic meter) of concrete unless otherwise noted in the contract documents. 4.3.6.10 Unless otherwise approved by the purchaser, job-mixed concrete shall not be permitted. 4.3.7 Placing Concrete 4.3.7.1 Inspection and authorization shall be obtained from the purchaser before placing concrete. 4.3.7.2 Concrete delivery tickets shall be maintained as a record for ready mixed concrete. 4.3.7.3 Concrete that has achieved initial set or has been contaminated by foreign matter shall not be deposited in the structure. 4.3.7.4 Retempering or addition of water after concrete is first mixed shall not be permitted. 4.3.7.5 The addition of ice at the construction site shall be permitted only if it has been considered in the mix design. The concrete manufacturer shall provide written instructions on the required amount of ice and the mixing procedure. 4.3.7.6 Materials and equipment for protection and curing shall be operational at the placement site before placement begins. 4.3.7.7 Slabs shall be placed in alternating strips. 4.3.7.8 The interval between concrete deliveries shall be such that no more than 20 minutes interruption elapse during placement of a single foundation or slab, unless approved by the engineer of record. 4.3.7.9 Discharge of the concrete shall be completed within 45 minutes after the introduction of the mixing water to the cement and aggregates or the introduction of the cement to the aggregates. This time may be extended up to 90 minutes with approval of the engineer of record. 4.3.8 Curing and Protection 4.3.8.1 Unless otherwise specified in this Practice or in the contract documents, concrete shall be cured and protected in accordance with ACI 301-05, Section 5.3.6.

Page 12 of 15

Process Industry Practices

COMPLETE REVISION
May 2007

PIP STS03001 Plain and Reinforced Concrete Specification

4.3.8.2 Concrete not in contact with forms may utilize any of the methods indicated in ACI 301-05, Section 5.3.6.4, for the preservation of moisture. However, for interior concrete slabs, ponding, sprayed water, or wet sand shall not be permitted. 4.3.8.3 Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, liquid membrane curing compounds shall not be used on surfaces that shall receive bonded treatments, tiles, paint or other adhered finishes, epoxy toppings, or additional concrete.
4.3.8.4 Hydraulic (Liquid-Tight) Structures

Any structure designated as a hydraulic structure in the contract documents shall comply with the following: 1. Hydraulic structures shall be cured by a wet-cure procedure only (e.g., use of ponding, sprinkling, or a moisture-retaining fabric). 2. Moist wood forms in contact with concrete shall not be considered as curing for hydraulic structures. 3. Curing shall occur for a minimum of 14 days. 4. Wall forms shall be loosened and water continually sprinkled between the wall and forms. 4.3.9 Surface Finishing and Tolerances 4.3.9.1 Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, the surface finish and correlating tolerance requirements shall be in accordance with ACI 301. 4.3.9.2 Equipment bases shall be finished with a floated finish. Stairs, steps, ramps, and walks shall be finished with a broom finish. 4.3.9.3 Interior floor slabs shall be finished with a trowel finish in accordance with the conventional flat tolerance requirements of ACI 11 . 4.3.9.4 Roads, area paving, and exterior slabs shall be finished with a broom or belt finish in accordance with the conventional straightedged tolerance requirements of ACI 11 . 4.3.10 Repair of Surface Defects 4.3.10.1 Unless otherwise specified or permitted by the engineer of record, tie holes, honeycombs, and other concrete surface defects shall be repaired promptly after form removal at a time and in a manner that shall not delay, interfere with, or impair the proper curing of the fresh concrete. 4.3.10.2 The engineer of record shall be notified before proceeding with repair if the defect is either of the following sizes: a. Depth is greater than 3 inches (75 mm) at the maximum point and surface area is greater than 150 square inches (100,000 square mm).

Process Industry Practices

Page 13 of 15

PIP STS03001 Plain and Reinforced Concrete Specification

COMPLETE REVISION
May 2007

b. Depth is greater than 1/4 the thickness of the member and greater than 6 inches (150 mm) in any other direction. 4.3.10.3 Prepackaged grouts and patching compounds or a patching mortar similar to the concrete mix without coarse aggregate may be used with approval from the engineer of record. The color shall match the surrounding area. 4.3.10.4 Out-of-tolerance slabs shall be repaired by grinding down high points and/or raising low points by using a specified underlayment compound or repair topping if the areas are exposed. 4.3.10.5 Critical slab areas, identified in the contract documents shall be replaced if out-of-tolerance. A demolition and replacement plan for the slab areas shall be submitted to the engineer of record for review and approval before proceeding. 4.3.11 Hot and Cold Weather Concreting 4.3.11.1 If the combination of temperature, humidity, and wind velocity as shown in ACI 305 , Figure 2.1.5, is expected to cause a rate of evaporation equal to or greater than 0.2 pounds per square foot per hour (9.6 newtons per square meter per hour), the recommendations of ACI 305 shall be followed for concrete supply and construction. 4.3.11.2 If the minimum temperature criteria of ACI 301-05, Section 4.2.2.8, applies, the requirements of ACI 30 1 shall be followed for concrete supply and construction. 4.3.12 Architectural and Prestressed Concrete Architectural and prestressed concrete requirements that are in addition to ACI 301 and this Practice shall be in accordance with the contract documents. 4.4 Loading of Self-Supporting Members Unless otherwise approved by the engineer of record, no superimposed load shall be applied to self-supporting members before the 28-day verification of the specified strength, unless the specified 28-day strength has been verified by fieldcured cylinders.

Page 14 of 15

Process Industry Practices

COMPLETE REVISION
May 2007

PIP STS03001 Plain and Reinforced Concrete Specification

Table 3 Supplier Data Requirements


Type of Submittal For Approval Supplier's QA Program Batch Plant and Truck Mixer Certification Mix Designs Trial Batch Qualification Test Results Cement Certifications Mineral Additive Certifications Fine and Coarse Aggregate Certifications Admixture Certifications Material Suppliers, Sources, and Certifications Manufacturer Spec's, Certifications and Installation Instructions Proposed Curing Methods Reinforcing Bending Schedule and Placing Drawings Certified Mill Test Reports for each bar size and heat number Epoxy Coating Inspection Reports Delivery Ticket Compression Test Reports Compression Breaks 500 psi (3500 KPa) or more below required Water Testing Reports X X 7 days X X X X X X X X X For Record Weekly When Required After Before With RFQ Notice to Fabrication Submittal Proceed X X X X X X X X X If applicable Remarks

7 days

If requested

X X X X

If applicable With delivery

X Same day submittal 10 days If applicable

Process Industry Practices

Page 15 of 15

TECHNICAL CORRECTION
June 2004

Process Industry Practices Structural

PIP STF05521 Details for Angle Railings for Walking and Working Surfaces

PURPOSE AND USE OF PROCESS INDUSTRY PRACTICES In an effort to minimize the cost of process industry facilities, this Practice has been prepared from the technical requirements in the existing standards of major industrial users, contractors, or standards organizations. By harmonizing these technical requirements into a single set of Practices, administrative, application, and engineering costs to both the purchaser and the manufacturer should be reduced. While this Practice is expected to incorporate the majority of requirements of most users, individual applications may involve requirements that will be appended to and take precedence over this Practice. Determinations concerning fitness for purpose and particular matters or application of the Practice to particular project or engineering situations should not be made solely on information contained in these materials. The use of trade names from time to time should not be viewed as an expression of preference but rather recognized as normal usage in the trade. Other brands having the same specifications are equally correct and may be substituted for those named. All Practices or guidelines are intended to be consistent with applicable laws and regulations including OSHA requirements. To the extent these Practices or guidelines should conflict with OSHA or other applicable laws or regulations, such laws or regulations must be followed. Consult an appropriate professional before applying or acting on any material contained in or suggested by the Practice. This Practice is subject to revision at any time by the responsible Function Team and will be reviewed every 5 years. This Practice will be revised, reaffirmed, or withdrawn. Information on whether this Practice has been revised may be found at www.pip.org.

Process Industry Practices (PIP), Construction Industry Institute, The University of Texas at Austin, 3925 West Braker Lane (R4500), Austin, Texas 78759. PIP member companies and subscribers may copy this Practice for their internal use. Changes, overlays, addenda, or modifications of any kind are not permitted within any PIP Practice without the express written authorization of PIP.

PIP will not consider requests for interpretations (inquiries) for this Practice.
PRINTING HISTORY April 1999 Issued May 2001 Technical Correction Not printed with State funds October 2003 June 2004 Complete Revision Technical Correction

TECHNICAL CORRECTION
May 2004

Process Industry Practices Structural

PIP STF05521 Details for Angle Railings for Walking and Working Surfaces
Table of Contents 1. Introduction................................. 2
1.1 Purpose ............................................. 2 1.2 Scope................................................. 2 Detail 1....................................................... 7 Post Connections to Structural Steel......... 8 Section G-G .............................................. 8 Detail 2....................................................... 8 Section H-H ............................................... 8 Section J-J ................................................. 8 Railing Termination at Columns ................ 9 Section G-G (Alternate) ............................. 9 Section H-H (Alternate) ............................. 9 Elevation - Removable Railing Type I ..... 10 Elevation Removable Railing Type II....... 11 Detail 3..................................................... 11 Detail 4..................................................... 11 Post Connections to Concrete................. 12 Detail 5..................................................... 12 Detail 6..................................................... 12 Pipe Handrail Attachment to Wall Details 13 Wall-Mounted Handrail ............................ 13 Step Through Ladder Details................... 14

2. References .................................. 2
2.1 Process Industry Practices................ 2 2.2 Industry Codes and Standards.......... 2

3. Definitions ................................... 3 4. Requirements.............................. 3 List of Details


Plan - Typical Post Location ...................... 4 Elevation - Typical Railing ......................... 4 Elevation A-A ............................................. 5 Section B-B................................................ 5 Section C-C ............................................... 6 Section D-D ............................................... 6 Elevation E-E ............................................. 6 Elevation F-F ............................................. 6 Top Rail Splice Detail ................................ 7 Intermediate Rail Splice Detail .................. 7 Toe Plate Splice Detail .............................. 7

Process Industry Practices

Page 1 of 14

PIP STF05521 Details for Angle Railings for Walking and Working Surfaces

TECHNICAL CORRECTION
June 2004

1.

Introduction
1.1 Purpose This Practice provides requirements for designers, fabricators, and installers of angle railing. 1.2 Scope This Practice provides fabrication and installation details for standard angle railing for walking and working surfaces and for stair railing or handrail for egress stairs. Although the details in this Practice are intended to meet U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) requirements for process facilities, they may not meet the requirements of local or national building codes.

2.

References
Applicable requirements in the following PIP Practices, codes and standards, and government regulations shall be considered an integral part of this Practice. The edition in effect on the date of contract award shall be used, except as otherwise noted. Short titles will be used herein when appropriate. 2.1 Process Industry Practices (PIP) PIP STF05501 - Fixed Ladders and Cages Details PIP STS05120 - Fabrication of Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Specification PIP STS05130 - Erection of Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Specification 2.2 Industry Codes and Standards American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) Specification for Structural Steel Buildings Metric Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) Specification for Structural Steel Buildings Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, Allowable Stress Design (ASD) and Plastic Design American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) ASTM A36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel ASTM A53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60000 PSI Tensile Strength ASTM A500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes

Page 2 of 14

Process Industry Practices

TECHNICAL CORRECTION
June 2004

PIP STF05521 Details for Angle Railings for Walking and Working Surfaces

3.

Definitions
The following definitions from OSHA 1910, Subpart D, shall apply to this Practice: handrail: A single bar or pipe supported on brackets from a wall or partition to provide a continuous handhold for persons using a stair. Refer to page 14 of this Practice. stair railing: A vertical barrier erected along exposed sides of a stairway to prevent falls of persons standard railing: A vertical barrier erected along exposed edges of a floor opening, wall opening, ramp, platform, or runway to prevent falls of persons

4.

Requirements
4.1 Refer to project design documents for the location, orientation, and arrangement of railing for regular operational use, special fabrication details, and any changes to the requirements of this Practice. Railing that meets the requirements of this Practice is designed to withstand a concentrated load of 200 pounds (890 N) applied in any direction at any point along the top rail, in accordance with OSHA requirements. Wall-mounted handrail shall be carbon steel, round structural tubing, or pipe conforming to ASTM A500 Grade B or ASTM A53 Grade B, standard weight, 1.9-inches (48-mm) O.D. (1.5 inches [38 mm] nominal diameter). All structural steel shall be ASTM A36 unless otherwise noted. All bolts for railing connections shall be 5/8-inch (16-mm) diameter and in accordance with ASTM A307 unless otherwise noted. Railing shall be welded construction except as shown in design drawings and/or in the attached details. All joints and welds in the top rail shall be finished smooth. Railing systems shall be surfaced in a manner to prevent injury from punctures or lacerations and clothing snags. Railing assemblies shall be coated after fabrication in accordance with the design drawings and specifications governing the project. Galvanizing shall be done after fabrication and in accordance with PIP STS05120. Field damage to coating shall be repaired with materials equivalent to original coating according to PIP STS05130. The minimum clearance between handrail or the top rail of stair railing/standard railing and any obstruction shall be 3 inches (75 mm). If the size of fillet weld is not shown on the drawings, provide the minimum fillet as shown in Table J2.4 of the AISC LRFD, Metric LRFD, or ASD Specification for Structural Steel Buildings.

4.2

4.3

4.4 4.5 4.6

4.7

4.8 4.9

Process Industry Practices

Page 3 of 14





















2013-03-08

UOP Technical Requisition Painting

Page 1 of 1 970086 R905F-1

1.

Painting selection
Painting selection and related goods and services shall be provided in accordance with the following documents: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. NRF-053-PEMEX-2006, Surface Facilities Coating Base Anti Corrosive Protection System NRF-009-PEMEX-2004, Product Identification Transported Though Pipe or Contained in Storage Tanks NOM-026-STPS-2008, Mexican Official Standard, HSE Colors and Signs of Pipe Transporting Fluids Risk Identification P.3.0403.01:2007 CN, PEMEX, Colours and Labels for Facilities and Transport Vehicles Identification Modified PIP CTSE1000, Application of External Coatings, June 2007 Modified PIP STS05120, Fabrication of Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Specification, June 2002 970086 S905F-0, UOP Specification Paint Application 970086 T905E-02-0, Technical Data Sheet - Paint System 02 970086 T905E-02A-0, Technical Data Sheet - Paint System 02A

10. 970086 T905E-15-0, Technical Data Sheet - Paint System 15 11. 970086 T905E-16-0, Technical Data Sheet - Paint System 16 12. 970086 T905E-17-0, Technical Data Sheet - Paint System 17 13. 970086 T905FS-0, Technical Data Sheet Structural Steel Painting and Galvanizing 14. 970086 V905F-0, Documentation Data SheetPainting Application

2.

Other
Painting selection and related goods and services shall comply with the most recent version, except as otherwise noted, of the following documents: 1. 2. 3. 970086 S140A-0, UOP SpecificationLanguage, Units, and Documents 970086 S140C-0, UOP SpecificationDocuments for Custom-Designed Goods and Services 970086 S140V-0, UOP SpecificationElectronic Documentation Submittal

3.

Conflicts
In case of conflicts among the documents above, PEMEX documents shall take precedence over PIP document.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

EDITORIAL REVISION
June 2007

Process Industry Practices Coatings

PIP CTSE1000 Application of External Coatings

PURPOSE AND USE OF PROCESS INDUSTRY PRACTICES In an effort to minimize the cost of process industry facilities, this Practice has been prepared from the technical requirements in the existing standards of major industrial users, contractors, or standards organizations. By harmonizing these technical requirements into a single set of Practices, administrative, application, and engineering costs to both the purchaser and the manufacturer should be reduced. While this Practice is expected to incorporate the majority of requirements of most users, individual applications may involve requirements that will be appended to and take precedence over this Practice. Determinations concerning fitness for purpose and particular matters or application of the Practice to particular project or engineering situations should not be made solely on information contained in these materials. The use of trade names from time to time should not be viewed as an expression of preference but rather recognized as normal usage in the trade. Other brands having the same specifications are equally correct and may be substituted for those named. All Practices or guidelines are intended to be consistent with applicable laws and regulations including OSHA requirements. To the extent these Practices or guidelines should conflict with OSHA or other applicable laws or regulations, such laws or regulations must be followed. Consult an appropriate professional before applying or acting on any material contained in or suggested by the Practice.

This Practice is subject to revision at any time by the responsible Function Team and will be reviewed every 5 years. This Practice will be revised, reaffirmed, or withdrawn. Information on whether this Practice has been revised may be found at www.pip.org.

Process Industry Practices (PIP), Construction Industry Institute, The University of Texas at Austin, 3925 West Braker Lane (R4500), Austin, Texas 78759. PIP member companies and subscribers may copy this Practice for their internal use. Changes, overlays, addenda, or modifications of any kind are not permitted within any PIP Practice without the express written authorization of PIP.

PIP will not consider requests for interpretations (inquiries) for this Practice.
PRINTING HISTORY April 1999 Issued February 2005 Complete Revision Not printed with State funds July 2005 Technical Correction February 2006 Editorial Revision June 2007 Editorial Revision

EDITORIAL REVISION
June 2007

Process Industry Practices Coatings

PIP CTSE1000 Application of External Coatings


Table of Contents 1. Introduction............................. 3
1.1 Purpose ........................................ 3 1.2 Scope............................................ 3 2.1 Industry Codes and Standards ..... 3 2.2 Other References ......................... 4 CTSE1000-D102 - External Coating Systems, Coating System No. 2, Inorganic Zinc/Epoxy Polyamide IZ/EC CTSE1000-D103 - External Coating Systems, Coating System No. 3, Epoxy Polyamide (3 Coats) EC/EC/EC CTSE1000-D104 External Coating Systems, Coating System No. 4, Epoxy Phenolic EP CTSE1000-D105 External Coating Systems, Coating System No. 5, Epoxy Phenolic (3 Coats) EP/EP/EP CTSE1000-D106 External Coating Systems, Coating System No. 6, Epoxy Polyamide/Urethane EC/UR CTSE1000-D107 External Coating Systems, Coating System No. 7, Coal Tar Epoxy (2 Coats) TE/TE CTSE1000-D108 External Coating Systems, Coating System No. 8, Inorganic Zinc/Water-Borne Acrylic IZ/WA CTSE1000-D109 External Coating Systems, Coating System No. 9, Alkyd (3 Coats) OA/OA/OA CTSE1000-D110 External Coating Systems, Coating System No. 10, Inorganic Zinc/Silicone Acrylic (2 Coats) IZ/SA/SA

2. References .............................. 3

3. Definitions ............................... 4 4. Requirements.......................... 5


4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 General ......................................... 5 Procedures ................................... 6 Surface Preparation...................... 7 Application .................................... 9 Inspection ................................... 12 Shipping, Handling, and Storage 16

Data Forms
CTSE1000-D1 Documentation Requirements Sheet The following data forms shall be part of this Practice only if indicated on the purchasers completed Documentation Requirements Sheet. CTSE1000-D2 Color Selection Sheet CTSE1000-D101 - External Coating Systems, Coating System No. 1, Inorganic Zinc IZ

Process Industry Practices

Page 1 of 16

EDITORIAL REVISION
June 2007

CTSE1000-D111 External Coating Systems, Coating System No. 11, Silicone for Stainless Steel (2 Coats) SS/SS CTSE1000-D112 External Coating Systems, Coating System No. 12, HeatCured Silicone (2 Coats) HS/HS CTSE1000-D113 External Coating Systems, Coating System No. 13, Epoxy Mastic for Manufacturers Standard EM CTSE1000-D114 External Coating Systems, Coating System No. 14, Inorganic Zinc/Heat-Cured Silicone (2 Coats) IZ/HS/HS CTSE1000-D115 External Coating Systems, Coating System No. 15, Inorganic Zinc/Epoxy Mastic/Urethane IZ/EM/UR CTSE1000-D116 External Coating Systems, Coating System No. 16, Low Temperature Curing Epoxy (2 Coats) EL/EL CTSE1000-D117 External Coating Systems, Coating System No. 17, Polysiloxane (2 Coats) PX/PX CTSE1000-D118 External Coating Systems, Coating System No. 18, Epoxy Mastic (2 Coats)/Urethane EM/EM/UR

CTSE1000-D119 External Coating Systems, Coating System No. 19, Epoxy Novalac (2 Coats) EN/EN CTSE1000-D120 External Coating Systems, Coating System No. 20, Epoxy Phenolic (2 Coats) EP/EP CTSE1000-D121 External Coating Systems, Coating System No. 21, Organic Zinc/Urethane OZ/UR CTSE1000-D122 External Coating Systems, Coating System No. 22, Epoxy Mastic/Water-Borne Acrylic EM/WA CTSE1000-D123 External Coating Systems, Coating System No. 23, Epoxy Mastic/Epoxy Polyamide EM/EC CTSE1000-D124 External Coating Systems, Coating System No. 24, Epoxy Mastic/Urethane (2 Coats) EM/UR/UR CTSE1000-D125 External Coating Systems, Coating System No. 25, High Build Epoxy (2 Coats)/Urethane EH/EH/UR CTSE1000-D126 External Coating Systems, Coating System No. 26, Coal Tar Epoxy (1 Coat) TE CTSE1000-D127 External Coating Systems, Coating System No. 27, Thermal Spray Aluminum TSA CTSE1000-D128 User-Defined Coating Systems CTSE1000-F Daily Inspection Report

Page 2 of 16

Process Industry Practices

EDITORIAL REVISION
June 2007

PIP CTSE1000 Application of External Coatings

1.

Introduction
1.1 Purpose This Practice provides requirements for the application of industrial external coatings. 1.2 Scope This Practice describes the general requirements for surface preparation, application, and inspection of protective coatings.

2.

References
Applicable parts of the following Practice, industry codes and standards, and references shall be considered an integral part of this Practice. The edition in effect on the date of contract award shall be used, except as otherwise noted. Short titles will be used herein where appropriate. 2.1 Industry Codes and Standards American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) ASTM D3359 Standard Test Methods for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test ASTM D4285 Standard Test Methods for Indicating Oil or Water in Compressed Air ASTM D4417 Standard Test Methods for Field Measurement of Surface Profile of Blast Cleaned Steel ASTM D4541 Standard Test Methods for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion Testers ASTM E337 Standard Test Method for Measuring Humidity with a Psychrometer (the Measurement of Wet- and Dry-Bulb Temperatures) Society of Protective Coatings (SSPC) SSPC-AB 1 Mineral and Slag Abrasives SSPC-PA 1 Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting SSPC-PA 2 Measurement of Dry Paint Thickness with Magnetic Gages SSPC-PA Guide 3 Guide to Safety in Paint Application SSPC-SP 1 Solvent Cleaning SSPC-SP 2 Hand Tool Cleaning SSPC-SP 3 Power Tool Cleaning SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4 Brush-Off Blast Cleaning SSPC-SP 11 Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal SSPC-VIS 1-89 Visual Standard for Abrasive Blast Cleaned Steel (Standard Reference Photographs)

Process Industry Practices

Page 3 of 16

PIP CTSE1000 Application of External Coatings

EDITORIAL REVISION
June 2007

INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION FOR STANDARDIZATION (ISO) ISO 2178: Non-magnetic coatings on magnetic substrates - Measurement of coating thickness - Magnetic method ISO 2360: Non-conductive coatings on non-magnetic electrically conductive basis materials - Measurement of coating thickness - Amplitude-sensitive eddy current method ISO 2409: Paints and varnishes - Cross-cut test ISO 4624: Paints and varnishes Pull-off test for adhesion ISO 4677-2: Atmospheres for conditioning and testing - Determination of relative humidity - Part 2: Whirling psychrometer method ISO 8501-1: Preparation of Steel Substrates Before Application of Paints and Related Products - Visual Assessment of Surface Cleanliness - Part 1: Rust Grades and Preparation Grades of Uncoated Steel Substrates and of Steel Substrates After Overall Removal of Previous Coatings ISO 8503-5: Preparation of Steel Substrates Before Application of Paints and Related Products - Surface Roughness Characteristics of Blast-Cleaned Steel Substrates - Part 5: Replica tape method for the determination of the surface profile ISO 8504-2: Preparation of steel substrates before application of paints and related products - Surface preparation methods - Part 2: Abrasive blastcleaning ISO 8504-3: Preparation of steel substrates before application of paints and related products - Surface preparation methods - Part 3: Hand- and powertool cleaning ISO 8573: Compressed air ISO 11126: Preparation of Steel Substrates Before Application of Paints and Related Products - Surface Preparation Methods (10 Parts) ISO 12944-4: Paints and Varnishes - Corrosion Protection of Steel Structures by Protective Paint Systems - Part 4: Types of Surface and Surface Preparation ISO 12944-7: Paints and Varnishes - Corrosion Protection of Steel Structures by Protective Paint Systems - Part 7: Execution and Supervision of Paintwork 2.2 Other References National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH)
NIOSH Publication No. 92-102 NIOSH Alert: Request for Assistance in

Preventing Silicosis and Deaths from Sandblasting

3.

Definitions
CS: Carbon and low-alloy steel DFT: Dry film thickness SS: Austenitic stainless steel

Page 4 of 16

Process Industry Practices

EDITORIAL REVISION
June 2007

PIP CTSE1000 Application of External Coatings

nonferrous: Copper, aluminum owner: Party who owns the facility wherein the coating system will be used purchaser: Party who awards the contract to the supplier. The purchaser may be the owner or the owners authorized agent. supplier: Party responsible for furnishing and/or installing the coating system

4.

Requirements
4.1 General 4.1.1 Project Scope 4.1.1.1 Documents required to define the scope of work are listed on purchasers data sheet CTSE1000-D1. 4.1.1.2 If selected on purchasers documentation requirements sheet PIP CTSE1000-D1, data sheets PIP CTSE1000-D101 through CTSE1000-D127 shall be used to define specific requirements for each coating system. 4.1.1.3 Surface preparation, application, and materials shall be in accordance with the purchasers external coating system data sheets. 4.1.1.4 Coating materials used in the same system shall be supplied by the same manufacturer, unless otherwise approved by the purchaser. 4.1.1.5 Finish color requirements shall be in accordance with purchasers data sheet CTSE1000-D2. 4.1.2 Conflicts, Exceptions, Deviations, and Substitutions 4.1.2.1 All conflicts between the referenced documents and this Practice shall be submitted in writing to purchaser for clarification and resolution before proceeding with the coating application. 4.1.2.2 All exceptions, deviations, and substitutions to the requirements specified herein and in referenced documents shall be approved by the purchaser. 4.1.3 Regulations and Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) 4.1.3.1 Protective coating applications shall comply with all applicable federal, state, and local codes and regulations on surface preparation, coating application, storage, handling, safety, and environmental requirements, including the recommendations of SSPC-PA Guide 3. 4.1.3.2 The latest issue of the coating manufacturers product data sheets, application instructions, and MSDS shall be available at the painting site and complied with during painting operations.

Process Industry Practices

Page 5 of 16

PIP CTSE1000 Application of External Coatings

EDITORIAL REVISION
June 2007

4.2

Procedures 4.2.1 Surfaces not to be Coated 4.2.1.1 Unless specified otherwise, the following surfaces shall not be coated: a. Interior surfaces of piping and equipment b. Nonferrous metals c. Galvanized or metallized surfaces d. Insulation jacketing e. Nonmetallic materials such as wood, tile, brick, concrete, and thermoplastics f. Cast iron products such as manhole covers and grating 4.2.1.2 The following surfaces shall not be coated and shall be protected from surface preparation and painting activity in the area: a. Valve stems, flange faces, and other machined contact surfaces b. Internal surfaces of valves c. Electrical contact points d. Nameplates and identification tags e. Glass surfaces of gage glasses and sight glasses f. Resilient seal materials g. Gasket contact surfaces h. Equipment identification i. Inspection point identification markers 4.2.2 Precautions for Stainless Steel and Nonferrous Metals 4.2.2.1 All SS and nonferrous metals shall be protected from blasting, overspray, and coatings intended for CS, especially coatings containing zinc. 4.2.2.2 Abrasives for use on SS shall be in accordance with SSPC-AB 1 (ISO 11126, natural abrasives (except silica sand) as well as coal furnace slag and fused aluminum oxide) and shall be free of metals. 4.2.2.3 If hand or power tool cleaning is required on SS and nonferrous metals, only SS wire brushes that have not been previously used on CS surfaces shall be used. 4.2.2.4 Coatings and solvents for use on SS and nonferrous metals shall be free of substances such as chlorides, sulfur, halogens, or metallic pigments that can harmfully affect SS or nonferrous metals. 4.2.2.5 For items having dual materials of construction, coatings containing zinc shall not overlap onto SS or nonferrous metals, including the SS to CS weld. Examples of such applications include:

Page 6 of 16

Process Industry Practices

EDITORIAL REVISION
June 2007

PIP CTSE1000 Application of External Coatings

a. CS saddles and skirts on SS equipment b. SS piping within CS skirts c. SS nozzles, flanges, and piping on clad equipment d. Miscellaneous CS clips and brackets on SS equipment e. SS components in CS piping systems f. CS trunnions on SS piping and equipment g. CS flange rings on SS lap joint flanges 4.2.2.6 CS lap joint flanges shall be coated before assembly. 4.2.2.7 Color-coding and fabrication markings applied directly onto SS and nonferrous metals shall be applied with low-chloride markers. 4.3 Surface Preparation 4.3.1 Preparation for Blasting 4.3.1.1 All welds shall be relatively smooth, without sharp edges, and free of weld slag and weld spatter before blasting. Purchaser shall be notified of such defects for corrective action before proceeding with work. 4.3.1.2 Unless approved in writing by purchaser, neither welding nor grinding, including cosmetic grinding, shall be permitted on the pressure-resisting components and welds of pressure vessels and piping after hydrostatic testing. 4.3.1.3 Before blasting, all visible deposits of oil and grease shall be removed using the methods defined in SSPC-SP 1 (ISO 12944-4). 4.3.1.4 High-pressure water jetting or steam cleaning may be used to remove oil, grease, and other surface contaminants. Cleaning with solvents shall only be permitted if cleaning by other methods defined in SSPC-SP 1 (ISO 12944-4) is not practical. 4.3.1.5 Presence of oil shall be checked either by rubbing a clean white cloth on the steel surface or by sprinkling water on the steel surface. Comment: If oil or grease is present, the water will not spread out but will form beads. 4.3.2 Abrasive Blasting 4.3.2.1 Abrasive blast cleaning shall be performed with a clean, sharp grade of abrasive. 4.3.2.2 Grain size shall be suitable for producing the specified anchor profile. 4.3.2.3 All abrasives shall be free of dust, dirt, and other foreign matter and shall be kept dry at all times.

Process Industry Practices

Page 7 of 16

PIP CTSE1000 Application of External Coatings

EDITORIAL REVISION
June 2007

4.3.2.4 Silica or other abrasive substances containing more than 1 percent crystalline silica shall not be used as an abrasive blasting material. Refer to NIOSH Publication No. 92-102. 4.3.2.5 Only designed ventilation and containment shall be used to protect personnel. 4.3.2.6 If automatic blasting equipment is used, the abrasive mix shall be maintained so that a consistently sharp profile is produced. 4.3.2.7 Air supply compressors shall be equipped with adequately sized and properly maintained oil and water separators. 4.3.2.8 Air compressors shall be capable of maintaining 690 kPa (100 psig) minimum at the nozzle. 4.3.2.9 Air compressors shall be equipped with either dryers or aftercoolers to remove entrained moisture from the compressed air. 4.3.2.10 Abrasive blast cleaning shall not be performed if the ambient or substrate temperature is less than 3C (5F) above the dew point temperature. 4.3.2.11 Dew point temperature shall be determined by sling psychrometer in accordance with ASTM E337 or ISO 4677-2, at the location where work is being performed. 4.3.2.12 Substrate temperature shall be determined with a surface thermometer. 4.3.2.13 Blast-cleaned surfaces that show evidence of rust bloom or that have been left uncoated overnight shall be recleaned to the specified degree of cleanliness before coating. 4.3.2.14 All visible burrs, laminations, slivers, and scabs shall be removed or repaired after blasting. 4.3.2.15 After blasting and immediately before spraying, dust and loose residues shall be removed by brushing, blowing off with clean dry air, or vacuum cleaning. 4.3.2.16 Inhibitive washes intended to prevent rusting after blasting shall not be permitted. 4.3.2.17 Alternative forms of surface preparation shall not be used without written approval from the purchaser. 4.3.3 Degree of Cleanliness and Anchor Profile 4.3.3.1 4.3.3.2 Degree of cleanliness and anchor profile shall be as required for the specified coating system. All blast-cleaned surfaces shall be inspected for proper cleaning before painting. SSPC-VIS 1 (ISO 8501-1) shall be used as a visual standard for confirming the degree of surface cleanliness.

Page 8 of 16

Process Industry Practices

EDITORIAL REVISION
June 2007

PIP CTSE1000 Application of External Coatings

4.3.3.3

Anchor profile shall be verified in accordance with ASTM D4417, Method C. Anchor profile may also be verified in accordance with ISO 8503, when approved by purchaser.

4.3.4

Hand or Power Tool Cleaning If specified, hand tool or power tool cleaning shall be in accordance with SSPC-SP 2 (ISO St 2), SSPC-SP 3 (ISO St 3), and SSPC-SP 11.

4.4

Application 4.4.1 General 4.4.1.1 Application shall be in accordance with SSPC-PA 1(ISO 12944-7), the coating manufacturers published application instructions, MSDS, and the requirements specified herein. 4.4.1.2 All application equipment shall be provided as recommended by the coating manufacturer, shall be clean and in good condition, and shall be suitable for applying the coating as specified. 4.4.2 Temperature, Humidity, and Weather Conditions 4.4.2.1 Paint shall not be applied while any of the following conditions are present or expected before the paint dries: a. Temperature: Ambient, substrate, or coating material temperatures are above 49C (120F), below 10C (50F), or outside the range recommended by the coating manufacturer. b. Humidity: The ambient or substrate temperature is less than 3C (5F) above the dew point or outside the range recommended by the coating manufacturer. Dew point temperature shall be determined by sling psychrometer in accordance with ASTM E337, ISO 4677-2, or equivalent electronic device at the location where work is being performed. c. Wind: During strong or gusty wind conditions, particularly for spray application. d. Weather: During rain, snow, or fog or on damp surfaces or surfaces that may have frost. 4.4.3 Materials 4.4.3.1 Coating materials shall be in accordance with purchasers external coating system data sheets. 4.4.3.2 All solvents used for thinning shall be in accordance with the coating manufacturers recommendations. 4.4.3.3 Coating materials shall be furnished in the coating manufacturers unopened containers, clearly marked, and kept covered, clean, and protected. 4.4.3.4 All materials shall be handled and stored in accordance with the coating manufacturers latest published instructions and SSPC-PA 1 (ISO 12944-7).

Process Industry Practices

Page 9 of 16

PIP CTSE1000 Application of External Coatings

EDITORIAL REVISION
June 2007

4.4.3.5 Equipment fabricators shall indicate on their drawings the coating manufacturer and coating product numbers used. 4.4.4 Mixing and Thinning 4.4.4.1 Materials shall be mixed and thinned in accordance with the coating manufacturers written instructions. 4.4.4.2 All mixing shall be done in clean containers that are free from grease, paints, and other contaminants. Containers shall be kept covered to prevent contamination by dust, dirt, or rain. 4.4.4.3 Mixing of partial kits shall not be permitted. 4.4.4.4 Inorganic zinc primers and all pigmented coatings shall be strained before application in accordance with the coating manufacturers written instructions. 4.4.4.5 Thinning shall not exceed the maximum allowable volatile organic compound (VOC) level for the coating involved. 4.4.5 Shelf and Pot Life 4.4.5.1 Materials that have exceeded the coating manufacturers recommended shelf life shall not be used. 4.4.5.2 Coating manufacturers recommended pot life shall not be exceeded. If this limit is reached, the spray pot shall be emptied and cleaned, and new material shall be mixed. 4.4.6 Priming 4.4.6.1 Primers shall be applied before flash rusting or other contamination occurs. 4.4.6.2 Previously coated surfaces shall be protected from contamination and overspray. 4.4.6.3 Primer shall have a uniform thickness over welds, edges, and corners and shall be free of mud cracking. 4.4.6.4 Primer shall not be applied within 100 mm (4 inches) of unblasted surfaces or 50 mm (2 inches) from the edges to be field welded. 4.4.6.5 Inorganic zinc primer shall be applied using an agitated pot. 4.4.7 Topcoating 4.4.7.1 Each coat of paint shall be of a contrasting color to indicate the extent of coverage. 4.4.7.2 Each coat of multiple-coat systems shall be allowed to cure sufficiently in accordance with the coating manufacturers directions before topcoating. 4.4.7.3 Minimum drying time between coats shall be in compliance with the coating manufacturers instructions.

Page 10 of 16

Process Industry Practices

EDITORIAL REVISION
June 2007

PIP CTSE1000 Application of External Coatings

4.4.7.4 If the maximum recoat time has been exceeded, previously applied coatings shall be roughened before topcoating or treated in accordance with the coating manufacturers directions. 4.4.7.5 Before topcoating over an inorganic zinc primer, the cure of the primer shall be verified. 4.4.7.6 Inorganic zinc primers shall have all overspray removed with a stiff bristle brush or wire screen and shall be clean and thoroughly cured before topcoating. 4.4.7.7 If spray applying over inorganic zinc primers, a mist coat shall be used to avoid bubbling. The mist coat may be a thinned coat or applied by a quick pass of the spray gun before applying the full coat, but sufficient time shall be allowed for solvent evaporation. 4.4.8 Film Thickness 4.4.8.1 Wet film thickness shall be checked during the application of each coat to assure the specified dry film thickness (DFT) is met. Comment: Wet film thickness measurements are not suitable for some materials such as inorganic zinc primers, flake filled epoxies, etc. 4.4.8.2 The DFT of each coat on CS shall be checked in accordance with the procedures defined by SSPC-PA 2 using a magnetic gage that has been properly calibrated. 4.4.8.3 Coating thickness on nonmagnetic substrates shall be checked using a Type 2 gage suitable for use on nonferrous substrates. 4.4.8.4 Coating thickness may also be measured using ISO 2178 for nonmagnetic coatings on magnetic substrates or ISO 2360 for coatings on non-magnetic substrates. However, sampling procedures shall follow SSPC-PA 2. 4.4.8.4 Measurements shall be taken after removal of dry spray and overspray. 4.4.8.5 All gages shall be adjusted to compensate for the substrate effect before application of any coating. 4.4.9 Defects 4.4.9.1 Each coat of paint shall be of a uniform film, free of defects (e.g., pinholes, voids, bubbles, skips, runs, sags, blisters, wrinkles, and mud cracking), and of a uniform thickness and appearance. 4.4.9.2 Care shall be exercised to prevent overspray, spillage, or application of coatings to surfaces for which they are not intended. Dry spray and overspray shall be removed. 4.4.9.3 DFT of each coat shall not be outside the specified range.

Process Industry Practices

Page 11 of 16

PIP CTSE1000 Application of External Coatings

EDITORIAL REVISION
June 2007

4.4.10 Touch-Up 4.4.10.1 Before application of any coat, all defects and damage to the previous coat(s) shall be repaired. Damage to finished work shall be thoroughly cleaned and recoated. 4.4.10.2 Damaged areas shall be spot-blast cleaned, power tool cleaned, or hand tool cleaned as necessary to restore any exposed steel to an original degree of cleanliness. All loose, cracked, and damaged coating shall be removed and the adjacent sound coating feathered back approximately 50 mm (2 inches) to form a uniform and smooth surface. Feathering shall be done by hand or power sanding with a grit wheel or sandpaper. The prepared surface shall be free of loose, burnt, or blistered coating. 4.4.10.3 Unless specified otherwise, the coating used for repair shall be the same as the original and shall have the same DFT. 4.4.11 Job Stencil 4.4.11.1 After the coating system has been applied in the shop or field, if specified by the purchaser, a job stencil shall be applied in a prominent location to identify the coating system used. 4.4.11.2 Stencil shall be of 25 mm (1 inch) high letters of a color contrasting with the finished paint. 4.4.11.3 Stencil shall provide the following information: a. Top line shall be used for the PIP External Coatings Systems Document Number. b. Second line shall be used for SSPC surface preparation. c. Next line(s) shall be used for each coat of paint, followed by the date of application (month and year). d. Last line shall be the name of the shop or field coating contractor. 4.4.11.4 If there are a large number of structural shapes, a job stencil shall be applied to about 10 percent of the pieces. 4.4.11.5 Small pieces such as lap flanges, hangers, etc. shall not be stenciled. 4.5 Inspection 4.5.1 General 4.5.1.1 All inspections and tests shall be performed that are necessary to ensure that surface preparation and coating application comply with the requirements of this Practice. 4.5.1.2 Purchasers inspector(s) shall be given adequate notice before the start of surface preparation and coating application to witness the work. 4.5.1.3 Purchasers inspector(s) shall have the option to witness or repeat any of these functions as necessary.

Page 12 of 16

Process Industry Practices

EDITORIAL REVISION
June 2007

PIP CTSE1000 Application of External Coatings

4.5.1.4 All materials, equipment, and work shall be available to purchasers inspector(s) at all times. 4.5.1.5 Purchasers inspector(s) shall have access to the work site during the progress of the work and the right to conduct any inspection or testing deemed necessary to ensure that the coatings are properly applied. 4.5.1.6 All instruments used in inspection activities (e.g., thermometer, pyrometers, hygrometers, thickness gauges, profile gauges, and holiday detectors) shall be furnished in proper working order and calibrated before use. 4.5.1.7 Dew point, relative humidity, and surface temperature shall be determined before surface preparation. Readings are required at 4-hour intervals or at other time intervals approved by the purchaser. 4.5.1.8 Alternatively, continuous monitoring of dew point and relative humidity may be performed using systems established or accepted by the purchaser. 4.5.1.9 Substrate temperature shall be 3C (5F) minimum above the dew point. 4.5.1.10 Work shall not proceed if the ambient temperature or relative humidity is not in accordance with Section 4.4.2. 4.5.1.11 Air supply for blast cleaning, pneumatic tools, and spray equipment shall be tested for oil and water contamination in accordance with ASTM D4285 or applicable parts of ISO 8573, and as follows: a. All lines shall be tested separately. b. Testing shall be performed at the beginning and end of each work shift and at not less than 4-hour intervals. 4.5.1.12 If contamination is discovered: a. All necessary corrective actions shall be made and the air supply retested. b. Surfaces determined to have been blasted with contaminated air shall be cleaned with solvent and reblasted with clean air and abrasive. c. Coatings determined to have been applied using contaminated air shall be removed and reapplied using clean air. 4.5.1.13 Recirculated shot and grit used for abrasive cleaning shall be tested for the presence of oil by immersing in water and checking for oil flotation. Tests shall be made at the start of blasting, at 4-hour intervals thereafter, and at the end of blasting. 4.5.1.14 If oil contamination in the abrasive is evident: a. Contaminated abrasive shall be replaced with clean abrasive and retested before proceeding.

Process Industry Practices

Page 13 of 16

PIP CTSE1000 Application of External Coatings

EDITORIAL REVISION
June 2007

b. All steel blasted since the last satisfactory test shall be reblasted. 4.5.1.15 Abrasive-cleaned surfaces shall be inspected for proper surface cleanliness and anchor profile using SSPC (ISO 8501-1) visual comparators. 4.5.1.16 Surface preparation anchor profile shall be verified using either coarse or extra-coarse replica tape (as required by profile depth) and a spring-loaded micrometer in accordance with ASTM D4417, Method C. Anchor profile may also be verified in accordance with ISO 8503-5, when approved by purchaser. 4.5.1.17 SSPC-VIS 1 (ISO 8501-1) visual standards shall be used for confirming the degree of surface cleanliness if adequacy of cleaning is in question. 4.5.1.18 If coating adhesion or intercoat adhesion are of suspect quality, the adhesion shall be checked periodically. 4.5.1.19 Adhesion may be assessed by means of portable pull-off adhesion tester in accordance with ASTM D4541 (ISO 4624) or one of the appropriate tape tests in accordance with ASTM D3359 (ISO 2409). 4.5.1.20 Adhesion test method shall be approved by the purchaser. 4.5.1.21 Acceptable adhesion classifications or pull-off strengths shall be in accordance with coating material manufacturers recommendations and approved by the purchaser. 4.5.1.22 Completed paint job shall pass inspection by the purchasers inspector(s). 4.5.1.23 Any work found not to be in accordance with the requirements specified herein shall be corrected. 4.5.2 Inspection Checklist
4.5.2.1 Prepainting Inspection

1. Verify that coating, thinning, and blasting materials are as specified. 2. Verify that storage conditions for all materials are adequate and properly maintained. 3. Verify that surfaces not to be coated are masked off or otherwise protected before surface preparation and coating application of adjacent surfaces.
4.5.2.2 Presurface Preparation

1. Verify that oil and grease are removed before surface preparation. 2. Verify that welds and sharp edges have been suitably prepared.
4.5.2.3 Surface Preparation

1. Verify that the air supply is clean and free of oil and moisture.

Page 14 of 16

Process Industry Practices

EDITORIAL REVISION
June 2007

PIP CTSE1000 Application of External Coatings

2. Verify the cleanliness and dryness of abrasives. 3. Verify the adequacy of cleaning and blasting equipment, hoses, etc. 4. Verify that ambient, substrate, and dew point temperatures are appropriate for proper surface preparation. 5. Verify that visible burrs, slivers, scabs, and weld spatter have been removed after blasting. 6. Verify the degree of surface cleanliness and that contaminants have been removed. 7. Verify, using appropriate instruments, that the anchor profile is as specified.
4.5.2.4 Coating Application

1. Verify that materials are as specified, that materials are properly labeled, and that the shelf life has not been exceeded. 2. Verify that mixing, thinning, and induction times are in accordance with the coating manufacturers instructions. 3. Verify that the proper application equipment is being utilized. 4. Verify that the air supply is clean and free of oil and moisture. 5. Verify that the ambient, substrate, and dewpoint temperatures are appropriate. 6. Verify that the applicator is checking wet film thickness during application. 7. Verify that coating manufacturers requirements regarding recoat time are observed. 8. Verify that the previous coat is sufficiently cured before application of topcoats. 9. Visually inspect each coat for defects and uniform appearance. 10. Verify, by following the procedures of SSPC-PA 2, that the DFT is within the specified range after each coat.
4.5.2.5 Final Acceptance

1. Visually inspect the coated surface for defects and uniform appearance. 2. Verify, by following the procedures of SSPC-PA 2, that the total DFT is within the specified range. 3. Verify that all identified repairs have been properly made. 4. Verify that the coating system is cured.

Process Industry Practices

Page 15 of 16

PIP CTSE1000 Application of External Coatings

EDITORIAL REVISION
June 2007

4.5.3

Records 4.5.3.1 A Daily Inspection Report, PIP CTSE1000-F, for documenting that specified requirements have been met shall be completed for each work shift. 4.5.3.2 Suppliers forms may be used with prior approval by purchaser. 4.5.3.3 A log shall be maintained of all reports, inspections, and tests (including date, time, and results of instrument calibrations).

4.6

Shipping, Handling, and Storage 4.6.1 Coated items shall not be handled or moved until all coatings have been properly dried or cured in accordance with the coating manufacturers instructions. Coated items shall be handled with equipment such as wide belt slings, web belts, and wide padded skids selected to prevent damage to the coating. Handling equipment likely to cause damage to the coating shall not be used. Items such as chains, cables, hooks, tongs, metal bars, and narrow skids shall not be permitted to come in contact with the coating. Dragging or skidding coated pipe shall not be permitted. Coated items shall be loaded, padded, and secured for transport in a manner such that the coating will not be damaged in transit. Coated items shall be separated so that the items do not bear against each other. Coated items shall be stacked off the ground using suitable means (e.g., parallel height ridges of rock-free sand, wooden timbers placed under the uncoated pipe ends, etc.) to avoid damage to the coating.

4.6.2 4.6.3

4.6.4 4.6.5 4.6.6 4.6.7

Page 16 of 16

Process Industry Practices

ASSOC. PIP: CTSE1000

DAILY INSPECTION REPORT

CTSE1000-F
PAGE 1 OF 1
JUNE 2007

APPLICATION OF EXTERNAL COATINGS

Facility Name/Location: Item Name: Purchaser/Location: Item Tag Job No: No.: Service: Purchaser Order No.: Unit: Supplier/Location: P&ID No.: Supplier Order/Serial Nos.: Instructions: This form shall be completed for each work shift to verify compliance with PIP CTSE1000. Record unsatisfactory work, conditions causing unsatisfactory work, and corrective action. Attach copies of all replica tape readings taken. Attach additional sheets, notes of meetings, or reports as necessary for backup. Submit a copy of all forms and back-up documents to the purchasers inspector(s). Report Date: / / Start of Blasting C C C F F F Start of painting Midpoint of painting

Condition Time Ambient Temperature Relative Humidity (%) Dew Temperature Substrate Temperature Weather Conditions

End of painting

Surface Preparation: Condition of Surface Before Blasting: Method of Removing Contamination Before Blasting: Method of Blasting: Abrasive Type: Grade: Degree of Cleanliness Obtained: m mils Method of Measuring Anchor Profile: Anchor Profile: Application Information: Method of Spraying: DFT Gage Type and Model: Date Calibrated: Thinner No./Type Used DFT Specified m mils DFT Obtained m mils

Linings Coat 1 Coat 2 Coat 3 Comments:

Lining Applied

Batch No.

Lining Color

Actual Overcoat Interval (hrs)

Suppliers Signature: Inspectors Signature:

TECHNICAL CORRECTION
January 2002

Process Industry Practices Structural

PIP STS05120 Fabrication of Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Specification

PURPOSE AND USE OF PROCESS INDUSTRY PRACTICES In an effort to minimize the cost of process industry facilities, this Practice has been prepared from the technical requirements in the existing standards of major industrial users, contractors, or standards organizations. By harmonizing these technical requirements into a single set of Practices, administrative, application, and engineering costs to both the purchaser and the manufacturer should be reduced. While this Practice is expected to incorporate the majority of requirements of most users, individual applications may involve requirements that will be appended to and take precedence over this Practice. Determinations concerning fitness for purpose and particular matters or application of the Practice to particular project or engineering situations should not be made solely on information contained in these materials. The use of trade names from time to time should not be viewed as an expression of preference but rather recognized as normal usage in the trade. Other brands having the same specifications are equally correct and may be substituted for those named. All Practices or guidelines are intended to be consistent with applicable laws and regulations including OSHA requirements. To the extent these Practices or guidelines should conflict with OSHA or other applicable laws or regulations, such laws or regulations must be followed. Consult an appropriate professional before applying or acting on any material contained in or suggested by the Practice.

This Practice is subject to revision at any time by the responsible Function Team and will be reviewed every 5 years. This Practice will be revised, reaffirmed, or withdrawn. Information on whether this Practice has been revised may be found at www.pip.org.

Process Industry Practices (PIP), Construction Industry Institute, The University of Texas at Austin, 3925 West Braker Lane (R4500), Austin, Texas 78759. PIP member companies and subscribers may copy this Practice for their internal use. Changes, overlays, addenda, or modifications of any kind are not permitted within any PIP Practice without the express written authorization of PIP.

PRINTING HISTORY November 1994 January 1999 Issued Revision January 2000 January 2002 Technical Correction Technical Correction

Not printed with State funds

TECHNICAL CORRECTION
January 2002

PIP STS05120 Fabrication of Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Specification

6.3.13 Checkered plate shall have 1/2-inch (12-mm) diameter drain holes provided for each 20 square feet (2 square meters) of area, with a minimum of one hole per panel. 6.4 Galvanizing 6.4.1 6.4.2 All materials, except ASTM A490 bolts, ASTM A490M bolts, and crane rails, shall be galvanized, unless otherwise noted in the contract documents. Galvanizing of steel shapes, plates, and hardware shall be in accordance with the following ASTM specifications: a. Steel shapes and plates - ASTM A123 b. ASTM A325/A325M bolts and corresponding nuts and washers ASTM B695 (or ASTM A153/A153M, when approved by the buyer) c. ASTM A36/A36M threaded bar or ASTM A307 bolts and corresponding nuts and washers - ASTM A153/A153M or ASTM B695 6.4.3 General Fabrication 6.4.3.1 It shall be the fabricators responsibility to safeguard against embrittlement and warpage per ASTM A143 and ASTM A384. Fabrication details shall meet the requirements of ASTM A385 to allow for the creation of high-quality zinc coatings. 6.4.3.2 Whenever practical, cutting, drilling, and welding shall be performed before galvanizing. The fabricator shall remove weld slag before galvanizing. 6.4.3.3 The edges of tightly contacting surfaces shall be completely seal welded. 6.4.3.4 Vent holes shall be provided for piping or tubular assemblies as required by ASTM A385. 6.4.3.5 Potential problems that require a modification in design shall be brought to the attention of the buyer by the fabricator before proceeding. 6.4.4 Galvanizing of Steel Hardware 6.4.4.1 Nuts shall be tapped oversize in accordance with ASTM A563/A563M. 6.4.4.2 Nut threads shall be retapped after hot-dip galvanizing to provide a proper fit. 6.4.4.3 Direct tension indicators, if used, shall be mechanically galvanized by the manufacturer according to the requirements of Class 50 of ASTM B695. 6.4.5 Inspection of Galvanized Steel The buyer reserves the right to inspect and reject all galvanized steel in accordance with ASTM A123 and ASTM E376.

Process Industry Practices

Page 15 of 17

PIP STS05120 Fabrication of Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Specification

TECHNICAL CORRECTION
January 2002

6.4.6

Repair of Galvanized Steel 6.4.6.1 Any damage to galvanizing shall be repaired in accordance with ASTM A780. 6.4.6.2 Before repair of damaged galvanized coating, the exposed substrate metal shall be cleaned to bright metal and free of all visual rust, oil, or grease. Any nonadhering galvanizing shall be removed to the extent that the surrounding galvanizing is integral and adherent. 6.4.6.3 When surface defects exceed 2% of a members area, the defects shall be repaired by redipping the member in the zinc bath. 6.4.6.4 Cold repair using an organic zinc-rich coating is allowed if the total damaged area is less than 1% of the total coated area of the member being repaired and no single repair is greater than 2 square inches (1,300 mm2) or 12inches (300mm) long. The dry film thickness shall be 2 mils to 3 mils (0.05 mm to 0.08 mm) and contain a minimum of 65% zinc dust by weight. 6.4.6.5 Hot repairs shall be made in the shop if any of the following conditions exist: a. Total damaged area is greater than 1%, but less than 2%, of the total coated area of the member being repaired b. Any single repair is at least 2 square inches (1,300 mm2) in area c. Any single repair is 12inches (300mm) long or more 6.4.6.6 Hot repairs shall be made using zinc alloy rod or powder manufactured for the repair of galvanized steel. 6.4.6.7 Flux, heavy ash, or heavy dross inclusions shall be removed by brushing, grinding, or filing as required. 6.4.6.8 Galvanized steel that has been rejected shall be stripped, regalvanized, and submitted again for inspection. 6.4.6.9 Correction of excessive warpage (that exceeds ASTM A6/A6M criteria) shall be by press straightening when possible. The application of localized heating to straighten must be approved by the engineer of record. 6.4.6.10 If galvanized tension control bolts are used, all bare steel surfaces (i.e., bolt ends) shall be repair galvanized per this section.

6.5

Handling, Shipping, and Delivery 6.5.1 Handling and Shipping 6.5.1.1 Delivery of steel shall be made in the order needed for erection. The delivery sequence for the fabricated steel, unless otherwise noted in the contract documents or arranged by the buyer, shall be as follows: loose base plates, steel embedded in concrete, erection bolts, first-tier columns and framing for all its levels (including stairs and handrail), second-tier columns and its framing, etc.

Page 16 of 17

Process Industry Practices

TECHNICAL CORRECTION
January 2002

PIP STS05120 Fabrication of Structural and Miscellaneous Steel Specification

6.5.1.2 All bolts, washers, and nuts shall be packaged and delivered in rigid (not cardboard), weatherproof containers. 6.5.1.3 Railcars and/or trucks shall be loaded and cribbed so that others can readily unload them. Load in such a manner that continuous drainage will occur. 6.5.1.4 The fabricator shall ensure that all steel and its coatings are protected from any damage caused by handling, storage, or shipping before receipt by the buyer. 6.5.1.5 The fabricator shall ensure that adequate protection is provided for threads on sag rods and any other threaded components to prevent damage during shipping and handling. 6.5.2 Delivery 6.5.2.1 The fabricator is responsible for delivering all materials and documentation to the job site in good condition. All materials and documentation will be inspected immediately upon receipt by the buyer to determine that all items included in the Bill of Materials have been supplied, to assure that all documentation has been received, and to check for any damage. 6.5.2.2 The buyer reserves the right to reject all damaged or below-quality material or documentation.

Process Industry Practices

Page 17 of 17

2012-11-02

UOP Specification Paint Application

Page 1 of 4 970086 S905F-0

1.

Scope
This document defines additional technical requirements for surface preparation prior to painting, the application of paint, and the testing and recording of the test results.

2.

General
The process of paint application should follow the manufacturers recommended specifications unless noted in this document. It is the responsibility of the Supplier to assure requirements of this specification are available at the location of surface preparation and painting for reference. These requirements must be available in both English and the native language of the country where work is conducted.

3.

Surface preparation
1. Prior to paint application, the following shall be true: a. b. Surface shall comply with paint manufacturers product data sheet referenced for each coating system. Surface shall be free of sharp edges, such as those normally occurring on rolled structural members or plates, as well as those resulting from flame cutting, welding, grinding, and shearing.

2.

If noted in manufacturers data sheet or T905 document, surface shall be tested for salt contamination. a. b. c. d. Each item shall be tested. Salt test shall be performed after surface cleaning is completed. Salt contamination level shall be less than or equal to 5 g/cm2. Testing shall comply with SSPC Guide 15, Field Methods for Retrieval and Analysis of Soluble Salts on Steel and Other Non-Porous Substrates.

3.

Once steel is power cleaned and dust and loose residues have been removed, visual examination shall be performed in accordance with SSPC-Vis 3. Surfaces not meant to be painted shall be masked off before surface preparation and coating application of adjacent surface. Surfaces that need protection from damage during surface preparation, such as machined surfaces, name plates and flange faces, must be guarded sufficiently to withstand inadvertent direct abrasive blasting. Condition of all guards shall be checked after abrasive blasting to assure integrity. Any flange surfaces damaged for any reason shall be machine to proper condition. Austenitic stainless steel within 100 ft (30 m) of application point of zinc-bearing paint shall be isolated from application point with a waterproof barrier. Abrasives for use on stainless steel shall be free from of metals contaminants If hand tools are used to clean stainless steel only dedicated (not used for carbon steel) stainless steel brushes shall be used Surface preparation or painting shall cease if environmental conditions are not per manufacturers recommendation. Compressed air for abrasive blasting and painting must not contain moisture and oil.

4.

5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose without its written permission.

2012-11-02

UOP Specification Paint Application

Page 2 of 4 970086 S905F-0

4.

Coating applications
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Coating application shall be as per applicable T905E document. Surface shall be primed the same day that blast cleaning is performed. If more than one coat is specified, a contrasting color shall be used to distinguish between coats. The paint shall meet the minimum thickness specified by the T905E documents. More coats will be applied until this minimum is reached. All coats should be a uniform film thickness. Masking and lubricant shall be removed after coating application, except for flange surfaces which can remain covered until installation.

5.

Daily Inspection Report and Final inspection report for paint


1. Daily Inspection Report shall include the following examination results and kept current and ready for review. The accumulation of these reports will eventually become the Final inspection report for paint. PIP Daily Inspection Report CTSE 1000F is an example of the minimum requirements of the report. Specific content must include the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Salt contamination level and location of measurement if required in T905 or Manufacturers data sheet Surface profile measurement Visual inspection results of surface preparation cleaning quality Dry film thickness (DFT) Surface defects Coating Adhesion Environmental conditions 1. 2. h. i. Dew point measurement Temperature

Paint Batch number Cure time between coats

6.

Test method and technique


1. Salt contamination level and Location of salt contamination test a. 2. SSPC Guide 15

Surface profile a. ASTM D 4417 (Method C) 1. Replica Tape

3.

Surface preparation cleaning quality a. SSPC-VIS-1 1. Before application of prime coat

4.

Dry film thickness (DFT)

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose without its written permission.

2012-11-02

UOP Specification Paint Application a. SSPC-PA 2 and MP EW-020-206, Section 4.6 1. 5.

Page 3 of 4 970086 S905F-0

Spot measurements arithmetic mean of 3 gage readings, taken with 12 mm of each other. Tolerance +/- 20% of specified thickness

Surface defects a. b. Correct all pin holes, blisters, runs, sags, Check for uniformity and proper curing.

6.

Coating Adhesion a. ASTM D 3359 Method A 1. Locations selected by contractor

7.

Container
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Paint shall be from original container bearing manufacturers name, product designation, batch number, and manufacture date. Container of paint shall not be opened prior to use except for spot inspection. Container of paint shall be resealed after inspection. Paint shall be thoroughly mixed before and during use to keep the paint in suspension. Skin that has formed on top of the paint should be cut loose from the container and discarded before mixing. If the skin is too thick and compromises the paint, the paint should not be used.

8.

Miscellaneous
1. 2. Areas damaged by weather must be repaired. The following shall be free of coating material: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. 3. 4. 5. Instrument display Gasket Gasket seating surfaces Threaded connection, except bolt threads Stainless-steel component Nickel-based alloy component Copper tubing

Purchasers inspectors shall be given adequate notice before start of surface preparation and coating application to witness work. Purchasers inspector shall have the option to witness or repeat any of these functions as necessary An Examination and Test Plan will be developed by the supplier to cover all aspects of surface preparation, coating application, shipping-storage-and handling, testing and record keeping as described in this specification. It shall include all details as defined in the S150 and U905F documents. An Examination and Test Record shall be completed as described in the S150 document.

6.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose without its written permission.

2012-11-02

UOP Specification Paint Application 7.

Page 4 of 4 970086 S905F-0

Proprietary items such as motors, pumps, instrumentation and electrical components may use Manufacturers standard paint system for a High humidity / Moderate corrosive environment.

9.

Shipping Handling and Storage


1. 2. Coated items shall not be handled or moved until all items have been properly cured per manufacturers data sheet guideline. Handling and lifting equipment must not cause damage to the finish. Wide belt sling web belts and padded skids are recommended. Chains, cables, hooks and other mechanisms that will cause surface damage are prohibited. Dragging or skidding finished coated pipe is prohibited. Coated items shall be loaded using padding between pieces and secured for transport in a way to avoid damage to the coating. Coated items shall be stacked off the ground using suitable means to avoid damaging the coating.

3. 4. 5.

10.

References
The most recent edition, except as otherwise specified, of the following documents are cited in this document. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) applicable ASTM D 4417 Method C, Test Method for Field Measurement of Surface Profile of Blast Cleaned Steel. National Association of Corrosion Engineers (NACE) NACE Standard RP0287, Field Measurement of Surface Profile of Abrasive Blast Cleaned Steel Surfaces using Replica Tape. Process Industry Practices (PIP) PIP CTSE1000, Application of External Coatings Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) Guide 15, Field Methods for Retrieval and Analysis of Soluble Salts on Steel and Other Non-Porous Substrates SSPC PA-2, Measurements of Dry Paint Thickness with Magnetic Gauges. SSPC Vis 1-89, Visual Standard for Abrasive Blast Cleaned Steel SSPC Vis 3, Visual Standard for Power and Hand Tool Cleaned Steel MP EW-020-206, NZRC-Protective Coatings of Steel Structures, Equipment and Piping

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose without its written permission.

2013-03-08

UOP Technical Data Sheet Paint System 02

Page 1 of 2 970086 T905E-02-0

1.

Paint System for Petrochemical Environments For Insulated Piping Systems, Ferritic Steel Equipment and Machinery (Temp 120 C)
Surface Preparation Coat No. ISO 8501-1, Sa 3 (SSPC SP-5) All dirt, oil, grease, salts, moisture, chemicals, and other contamination shall be removed prior to abrasive blasting. Generic Material Type Application Method Minimum Dry Film Thickness (DFT) micron Spray 100 mil micron Spray 100 mil 150 mil 150 mil micron Surface Profile 38-63 micron mil

2.

3.

Maximum Dry Film Thickness (DFT) micron

4.

2 Component Polyamide Epoxy Primer (70% solids)

5.

2 Component Polyamide Epoxy Primer (70% solids)

6. 7. 8.

Top Coat Color


The topcoat color is per NRF-009-PEMEX-2004 (Section 8.13: Identification of Pipes) and P.3.0403.01:2007 CN (Section 8.6: Identification of Facilities). Final pipeline top coat colors shall be based upon line list.

Mixing and Thinning


Materials shall be mixed in accordance with manufacturers instructions. Only manufacturers recommended thinners shall be used. Amount of thinner used shall be measured, not estimated, to ensure consistency during coating application.

9.

10. 11. 12. 13. 14. Surface Preparation Coat No.

Application
Coating shall be applied in accordance with manufacturers instructions, NRF-053-PEMEX-2006, PIP CTSE1000, and 970086 S905F documents.

Touch-up Paint System


SSPC-SP1 and SSPC-SP3 (St 3) Application Method Minimum Dry Film Thickness (DFT) micron Spray 100 mil micron Spray 100 mil 150 mil 150 mil micron Surface Profile 38-63 micron mil

Generic Material Type

Maximum Dry Film Thickness (DFT) micron

15.

2 Component Polyamide Epoxy Primer (70% solids)

16. 17. 18. 19.

2 Component Polyamide Epoxy Primer (70% solids)

Paint Materials
Coat No. Material Manufacturer Product Designation Remarks

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-03-08

UOP Technical Data Sheet Paint System 02

Page 2 of 2 970086 T905E-02-0

20.

Polyamide Epoxy Primer Polyamide Epoxy Primer

International Paint

Intergard 345

21. 22. 23.

International Paint

Intergard 345

Notes
Any deviation to this paint system including, but not limited to, manufacturer and product designations shall require written approval from UOP before proceeding.

24.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-03-08

UOP Technical Data Sheet Paint System 02A

Page 1 of 2 970086 T905E-02A-0

1.

Paint System for Petrochemical Environments For Non-Insulated Piping Systems, Ferritic Steel Equipment, Structural Steel and Machinery (Temp 120 C)
Surface Preparation Coat No. ISO 8501-1, Sa 3 (SSPC SP-5) All dirt, oil, grease, salts, moisture, chemicals, and other contamination shall be removed prior to abrasive blasting. Generic Material Type Application Method Minimum Dry Film Thickness (DFT) micron Spray 100 mil micron Spray 100 mil micron Spray 75 mil 100 mil 150 mil micron 150 mil micron Surface Profile 38-63 micron mil

2.

3.

Maximum Dry Film Thickness (DFT) micron

4.

2 Component Polyamide Epoxy Primer (70% solids)

5.

2 Component Polyamide Epoxy Primer (70% solids) 2 Component Aliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane (65% solids)

6.

7. 8. 9.

Top Coat Color


The topcoat color is per NRF-009-PEMEX-2004 (Section 8.13: Identification of Pipes) and P.3.0403.01:2007 CN (Section 8.6: Identification of Facilities). Final pipeline top coat colors shall be based upon line list.

Mixing and Thinning

Materials shall be mixed in accordance with manufacturers instructions. Only manufacturers recommended thinners shall be used. Amount of thinner used shall be measured, not estimated, to ensure consistency during 10. coating application. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. Surface Preparation Coat No.

Application
Coating shall be applied in accordance with manufacturers instructions, NRF-053-PEMEX-2006, PIP CTSE1000, and 970086 S905F documents.

Touch-up Paint System


SSPC-SP1 and SSPC-SP3 (St 3) Application Method Minimum Dry Film Thickness (DFT) micron Spray 100 mil micron Spray 100 mil Spray 75 micron 100 150 mil micron 150 mil micron Surface Profile 38-63 micron mil

Generic Material Type

Maximum Dry Film Thickness (DFT) micron

16.

2 Component Polyamide Epoxy Primer (70% solids)

17.

2 Component Polyamide Epoxy Primer (70% solids)

18.

2 Component Aliphatic

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

2013-03-08

UOP Technical Data Sheet Paint System 02A


Acrylic Polyurethane (65% solids) mil

Page 2 of 2 970086 T905E-02A-0


mil

19. 20. 21. Coat No. 1 Material Polyamide Epoxy Primer Polyamide Epoxy Primer Aliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane Manufacturer

Paint Materials
Product Designation Intergard 345 Remarks

International Paint

22.

International Paint

Intergard 345

23.

International Paint

Interthane 990HS

Must meet local VOC requirements

24. 25. 26.

Notes
Any deviation to this paint system including, but not limited to, manufacturer and product designations shall require written approval from UOP before proceeding.

Note: The information in this document is confidential and the property of UOP and must not be disclosed to others or reproduced in any manner or used for any purpose whatsoever without its written permission.

Intergard 345
Epoxy
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION INTENDED USES
A two component, low VOC, high solids, fast curing epoxy primer/finish containing zinc phosphate anti-corrosive pigmentation. Suitable for use as a one or two coat primer/finish coating or as an intermediate over recommended anti-corrosive primers. Intergard 345 provides a combination of anti-corrosive barrier protection, chemical fume and spillage resistance, along with good abrasion resistance. Ideal for use in moderately corrosive environments and where fast drying/rapid recoating is desired.

PRACTICAL INFORMATION FOR INTERGARD 345

Color Gloss Level Volume Solids Typical Thickness Theoretical Coverage Practical Coverage Method of Application Drying Time

Wide range via the Chromascan system Semi Gloss 70% 4-6 mils (100-150 microns) dry equivalent to 5.7-8.6 mils (143-214 microns) wet 225 sq.ft/US gallon at 5 mils d.f.t and stated volume solids 5.60 m/liter at 125 microns d.f.t and stated volume solids Allow appropriate loss factors Airless Spray, Air Spray, Brush, Roller

Overcoating Interval with recommended topcoats Temperature 50F (10C) 59F (15C) 77F (25C) 104F (40C) Touch Dry 90 minutes 75 minutes 60 minutes 30 minutes Hard Dry 7 hours 5 hours 2.5 hours 1 hour Minimum 7 hours 5 hours 2.5 hours 1 hour Maximum Extended Extended Extended Extended

See Product Characteristics section for further details See International Protective Coatings Definitions & Abbreviations

REGULATORY DATA Flash Point Product Weight VOC

Part A 91F (33C); Part B 109F (43C); Mixed 93F (34C) 12.1 Ib/gal (1.45 kg/l) 2.67 lb/gal (320 g/lt) 235 g/kg

EPA Method 24 EU Solvent Emissions Directive (Council Directive 1999/13/EC) See Product Characteristics section for further details

Protective Coatings
Page 1 of 4 Issue Date:12/1/2011 Ref:2129

Worldwide Product

Intergard 345
Epoxy
SURFACE PREPARATION
All surfaces to be coated should be clean, dry and free from contamination. Prior to paint application, all surfaces should be assessed and treated in accordance with ISO 8504:2000. Oil or grease should be removed in accordance with SSPC-SP1 solvent cleaning. Abrasive Blast Cleaning Abrasive blast clean to SSPC SP6 or Sa2 (ISO 8501-1:2007). If oxidation has occurred between blasting and application of Intergard 345 the surface should be reblasted to the specified visual standard. Surface defects revealed by the blast cleaning process should be ground, filled, or treated in the appropriate manner. Intergard 345 is suitable for application to blast cleaned surfaces which were initially to the above standard but have been allowed to deteriorate under good shop conditions for up to 7-10 days. The surface may deteriorate to Sa2 standard but must be free from loose powdery deposits. Primed Surfaces Weld seams and damaged areas should be blast cleaned to SSPC SP6 or Sa2 (ISO 8501-1:2007). If the shop primer shows extensive or widely scattered breakdown overall sweep blasting maybe necessary. Concrete, Pre-cast Blockwork, etc Intergard 345 is suitable for application to concrete. For the first coat it is recommended that Intergard 345 is thinned 10-15% by International Thinners in order to provide good penetration with the concrete substrate and act as a primer/sealer coat. Concrete should be cured for a minimum of 28 days prior to coating. The moisture content of the concrete should be below 6%. All surfaces should be clean, dry and free from curing compounds, release agents, trowelling compounds, surface hardeners, efflorescence, grease, oil, dirt, old coatings and loose or disintegrating concrete. All poured and precast concrete must also be sweep blasted (preferred) or acid etched to remove laitence.

APPLICATION

Mixing

Material is supplied in two containers as a unit. Always mix a complete unit in the proportions supplied. Once the unit has been mixed, it must be used within the working pot life specified. (1) Agitate Base (Part A) with a power agitator. (2) Combine entire contents of Curing Agent (Part B) with Base (Part A) and mix thoroughly with power agitator. 4 part(s) : 1 part(s) by volume 50F (10C) 3 hours Recommended 59F (15C) 2 hours 77F (25C) 60 minutes 104F (40C) 45 minutes

Mix Ratio Working Pot Life

Airless Spray

Tip Range 17-21 thou (0.43-0.53 mm) Total output fluid pressure at spray tip not less than 2503 psi (176 kg/cm) Gun Air Cap Fluid Tip DeVilbiss MBC or JGA 704 or 765 E

Air Spray (Pressure Pot) Brush Roller Thinner Cleaner Work Stoppages

Recommended

Suitable - Small areas only Typically 3.0-4.0 mils (75-100 microns) can be achieved Suitable - Small areas only Typically 3.0-4.0 mils (75-100 microns) can be achieved International GTA220 (International GTA415) Do not thin more than allowed by local environmental legislation

International GTA220 or International GTA415 Do not allow material to remain in hoses, gun or spray equipment. Thoroughly flush all equipment with International GTA415. Once units of paint have been mixed they should not be resealed and it is advised that after prolonged stoppages work recommences with freshly mixed units. Clean all equipment immediately after use with International GTA415. It is good working practice to periodically flush out spray equipment during the course of the working day. Frequency of cleaning will depend upon amount sprayed, temperature and elapsed time, including any delays. All surplus materials and empty containers should be disposed of in accordance with appropriate regional regulations/legislation.

Clean Up

Page 2 of 4

Intergard 345
Epoxy
PRODUCT CHARACTERISTICS
Maximum film build in one coat is best attained by airless spray. When applying by methods other than airless spray, the required film build is unlikely to be achieved. Application by air spray may require a multiple cross spray pattern to attain maximum film build. Lower or high temperatures may require specific application